Guvenal(2) by Finist Ltd

FOR

PUNCH SCRAPERS MTR / MTM / MTP RETAINERS

POLYURETHANE PUNCH SCRAPER

It can be used with multi hole retainers. Due to processing sensitively to provide perpendicularity life is increased. It is exchangeable and compatible with NAAMS Standards. Patented Cost Saving, Retaing Feature At Once, Innovative Integral Design. * IT IS USED WITH MRH RETAINERS.

MTR

R4.50 R8

11.5

PUNCH SCRAPER RETAINERS E

MTM

M4 Bolt

MTR 10

MTR 13

15.5

MTP

MTR 16

32.9

MTR 20

20.5

34.8

MTR 25

39.8

MTR 32

41.3

MTR 40

MTM 10

22.5

MTM 13

15.5

MTM 16

27.5

MTM 20

20.5

MTM 25

35.5

MTM 32

37.5

MTM 40

42.3

MTP 10 10

21 26.5 7

MTP 13 13 15.5 23.9 29.4 7

MTP 16 16

MTP 20 20 20.5 29

R2 10

18 24.5 30 36

9 11.8

MTP 32 32

31 40.6 49.3 9

MTP 40 40

Ø Ø 12.75 23

Ø Ø 15.75 28

Ø Ø 19.75 33

Ø Ø 24.75 40

Ø Ø 31.70 50

7 12.8

24 33.5 40.5 9 12.9

43 52 63 72

71 80 90 100

Ø 9.75

D2 R2

MTP 25 25

80 90 100 110

Punch D Casing

Order

RecomHeavy Load Light Load mended Ball Lock Ball Lock Scraper Punch Length Punch Length Length " L"

While ordering, pls. specify punch scraper length, product code. Example: 43 x MTS.L

* IT IS USED WITH MRM RETAINERS.

Order

D d1 B

* IT IS USED WITH MRM RETAINERS.

PUNCH SCRAPER RETAINERS F

Order

PUNCH SCRAPER RETAINERS

MTS

Ø 18

40 39.70 60 Section Press Mould

L 44 54 64 74 44 54 64 74 44 54 64 74 44 54 64 74 44 54 64 74 44 54 64 74 44 64

Ø 21

1.6

Ø 26

Ø 31

Ø 36

Ø 43

Ø 55

B 6

Page

169

MBE

MBD BALL LOCK FLAT MATRIX

L+50 P2 Dg5

Starting Hole for wire erosion has been opened.

Important: If bush/ Die Buttons are ordered with punch during offering, precision and efficiency are high.

Capless Bushes, Wire Erosion, Front Hole Order

ØD

MBE.13.L

1.2

MBE.16.L

1.6

MBE.20.L

2.0

2.4

MBE.32.L

2.4

MBE.38.L

2.4

R L+.50 B +1.5 P1 Dg5 B

*Lengths are produced as per order.

Flat Hole Punch Bushes Flat Internal Dia. Along Punch Bush Material : HSS ( 1.3343 ) HRC 60 - 63

CAPLESS BUSH FLAT HOLE MATRIX ØD

MBE L

MBE.25.L

Order

MBD

0.1 From P to d2

Shape P,W,G

0.2 From P to d2

± 0.1

MB...13

MBD.20.L 20 5.0 11.9 2.0 MBD.25.L 25 6.0

MBD.32.L 32 6.0

MBD.38.L 38 8.0

Page

Sayfa 170 170

Section Press Mould

MBY

R Max.

Round P

6.0

1.6 - 5.0

L Other Shape Len. Shapes G / P mm W Min. Max. 1.6

5.0

MB...16

8.0

3.2 - 7.2

2.0

7.2

MB...20

4.0 - 11

2.5

MB...25

8.0 - 15

4.0

MB...32

11 - 19

5.0

MB...38

16.5 - 26

6.5

±.25

Defined MBD Bottom SurfaceF 3Discrete User Form - 1 F 4

±.25

Specify

User Defined Form - 2

±.25 Specify

Shape: Round

Order No.

P Shape : Oval Order No.

W G

MBD R

Shape : Square

Order No.

P G

Shape: Rectangle

Order No.

32 mm

G Shape : Hexagon

*Lengths are produced as per order.

Casing " F " Dia. +0.2 Technical Information! 4.0 10 5.5 13 7.0 16 Locking 8.5 Punch Bushes: 20 F1 - F2 - F3 9.5 22 using for 11 25 " F" Dimension 14 32 are given at 17 38 next table. 18 F x Dimension 40 are defined 45 20.5 by user. 23 50 While 26 56 ordering, 29.5 63 cut surface 71 33.5 dimension "F" and "U" 76 35.5 should be 40 85 specified. 90 42.5 100 47.5

One Sided Discrete Upper Surface Discrete

Order No.

MBA

POSITIONING Ball Lock Punch Bushes

*Lenghts are 4.4 produced as per 5.6 order.

3.6

Ø R Shape

MBD.13.L 13 4.0 5.8 1.2 MBD.16.L 16 5.0 8.0 1.6

Standard position of 0 ball lock is 90 . It can be preferred as 00- 1800- 2700

Ball Lock Punch Matrixes According To Their Shapes Order No

MBY

MBK

Dg5

MBY - MBO - MBK - MBD - MBA - MBM - MBX - MBP Shape

External Diameter and Bottom Surface Grinded Die Button.

Standard Tolerances

Round P +0.1, -.00

Casing

Automative Standard Capless BushesMBE

Formed / Bush MATRIX Shapes

MB0 L+.50 B+1.5

R=P or G+.8 mm /+3.2 max.

BALL LOCK Shapes : FORMED MATRIX MBY- MBO- MBK Automotive Standard MBD- MBA- MBM Capless Bushes MB. MBX- MBP R

MBM

Order No.

P Order : Wedged

MBX

Order No.

P Shape : Oval Square

MBP R

Order No.

P G Standard Position

Shape : Parabolic

900

1350 1800

2250 2700

450 00 3150

As per request, (suitable angle

( 00 ) 900 ~ 1800 ~ 2700

MKY

Order No.

EXTRA LIFE BUSH CONICAL - FLAT Conical Inner Flat Bush

P Conical Standard:

Per edge at round is 10. At 0shaped is 1 -1/2

Shape: Round

Shape: Oval

MKK R

Order No.

Order Ø d2

P G

MKA

Shape: Rectangle

Order No.

G Shape: Hexagon

MKM

Order No.

P Shape: Wedged

MKX

Order No.

P Shape: Oval Square

MKP R

Order No.

P G Standard Position

Shape: Parabolic

900

1350

450

1800

00 0

225

MTK

2700

315

As Per Request (Suitable Angle) ( 00 ) 900 ~ 1800 ~ 2700

MK..10 MK..13 MK..16 MK..20 MK..22 MK..25 MK..32 MK..38 MK..40 MK..45 MK..50 MK..56 MK..63 MK..71

Casing

MKD

D 10 13 16 20 22 25 32 38 40 45 50 56 63 71

Overhanging Len." B " Stan Alternative Length dard A B C 4 8 3 5 8 3 5 8 3 5 12 20 3 6 12 20 3 6 12 20 3 6 12 20 3 8 12 20 3 8 12 20 3 8 12 20 3 8 12 20 3 8 12 20 3 8 12 20 3 8 12 20 3

Extra Life, Conical, Flat Bushes MKY - MKO - MKK - MKD MKA - MKM - MKX - MKP

Order Ø d2 MK..10 MK..13 MK..16 MK..20 MK..22 MK..25 MK..32 MK..38 MK..40 MK..45 MK..50 MK..56 MK..63 MK..71

Full Length

22 25 28 30 mm

25 28 30 32 35 38

Round Type P 1.6 - 5.0 3.0 - 7.2 5.0 - 8.8 5.0 - 11 7.5 - 14 9.5 - 16.5 13 - 20 16 - 26 16.6 - 26 22 - 31 24 - 34 26 - 38 30 - 43 34 - 48

Order No.

W Square

Order No.

0.1 From P to d2

Round P +0.1, -.00 Shape P,W,G ± 0.1

0.2 From P to d2

For positioning system, refer Page 170. Overhanging Len." B "

Order Ø d2 MT..10

MT..13

MT..16

MT..20

MT..22

MT..25

Shape: Hexagon

MT..32

MTM

MT..38

MT..40

MT..45

P Shape: Rectangle

MTA

Order No.

P Shape: Wedged

MTX

Order No.

Shaped W GP Min. Max. 1.6 5.0 1.8 7.2 2.5 8.8 3.2 11 4.0 14 4.8 16.5 5.5 20 6.4 26 6.4 26 7.5 31 8.0 34 8.5 38 9.0 43 9.5 48

D+3-.25 StandartdTolerances

Standard position of ball slot is 900. Shape: It can be preferred as 00- 1800- 2700

MTD

Dm5

Order No.

Shape: Oval

Important: If bush/ Die Buttons are ordered with punch during offering, precision and W efficiency are high. Standard position of ball slot is 900. It can Shape: be preferred as 00- 1800- 2700 . Square For positioning system, refer Page 170 .

1 . At shaped is 1 -1/20

Order No.

Conical Inner Guide Bush

Conical Standard:

MT0

L+.50

Shapes : MTY- MTO- MTK MTD- MTA- MTM MTX- MTP

P Per edge at round is 0 Shape: Round

(10-25) D j6n5(32-100)

Order No.

MTY

Order No.

EXTRA LIFE GUIDE BUSH-CONICAL

B+1.5 5+.25 L+.50

Formed / Bush MATRIX Shapes

B+1.5

MK0

Shapes : MKY- MKO- MKK MKD- MKA- MKM MKX- MKP

Casing

Formed / Bush MATRIX Shapes

P Shape: Oval Square

MTP R

Order No.

G Standard Position

Shape: Parabolic

900

1350

450

1800

00 0

225

2700

315

As Per Request (Suitable Angle) ( 00 ) 900 ~ 1800 ~ 2700

Stan Alternative Length dard A B C

Extra Life Conical, Guide Bush MTY - MTO - MTK - MTD MTA - MTM - MTX - MTP

Order Ø d2

Full Length

Round Type P

Shaped W GP Min. Max.

MT..10

1.6 - 5.0

1.6

MT..13

1.8 - 7.2

1.8

7.2

MT..16

5.0 - 8.8

2.5

8.8

5.5 - 11

3.2

7.5 - 14

4.0

9.5 - 16.5

4.8

16.5

13 - 20

5.5

MT..20

MT..22 MT..25 MT..32 MT..38

22 25 28 30 32 35 mm

5.0

16 - 26

6.4

MT..40

16.5 - 26

6.5

MT..45

22 - 31

7.5

Section Press Mould

Page

171

PUNCH BUSHES / DIE BUTTONS

ISO 8977 Shape A Flat Bush

ISO 8977 Shape B Guide Bush

Bushes for Punch Kits

d1n5

MDZ

d1n6

d+0.01

62±2 HRC

5+0.25

MDZ

2.0 - 3.5

4.0

20 / 25

2.0 - 3.5

d1 d3

MSZ

d2 L1

8 11 4.0 4

20/25

1.0 - 2.4

1.0

8.0

1.6 - 3.0

1.0

12.5

2.0 - 3.5

1.5

12.5

3.0 - 5.0

2.0

16.0

4.0 - 7.2

2.0

16.0

6.0 - 8.8

2.0

20.0

7.5 - 11.3

2.5

20.0

11 - 16.6

2.5

25.0

10 5.8

4 20/25/32

4.0 - 7.0

13 8.0

5 20/25/32

6.0 - 9.0

16 9.5

5 20/25/32

8.0 - 11.0

20 12.0

8 20/25/32

10.7 - 16.0 25 17.3

8 20/25/32

8.0 - 11.0 20 23 12.0 8 20/25/32

15.0 - 20.0 32 20.7

8 20/25/32

10.7 - 16.0 25 28 17.3 8 20/25/32

19.0 - 27.0 40 27.7

25/32

26.0 - 36.0 50 37.0

d1 x d x L

Material : HSS 1.3343 External Diameter and Hardness: 62 HRC bottom surfaces are grinded

Page

Sayfa 172 172

Section Press Mould

Production

MZD

Bushes For Punch Kits

2.5 - 5.0

MDZ

Important: If bush/ die buttons are ordered with punch during offering, precision and efficient are high.

d2 d3-0.25

Shape B Guide Bush / Die Buttons d

dH7 r1

(700+80) HV10

L+0.5

L+0.5 d2 Shape A Flat Bush / Die Buttons

Order:

MZD

d1m5

d+0.01

62±2 HRC

MSZ

2.5 - 5.0

10 13 5.8 4 20/25/32

4.0 - 7.0

13 16 8.0 5 20/25/32

6.0 - 9.0

16 19 9.5 5 20/25/32

15.0 - 20.0 32 35 20.7 8 20/25/32 19.0 - 27.0 40 43 27.7 8

25/32

15 - 20

4.0

25.0

26.0 - 36.0 50 53 37.0 8

18 - 27

4.0

32.0

Order:

MSZ d1 x d x L

Material : HSS 1.3343 External Diameter and Hardness : 62 HRC bottom surfaces are grinded

Order:

MZD d x d1 x L

Material : HSS 1.3343 External Diameter and Hardness : 62 HRC bottom surfaces are grinded

Order

VCF 600

HAND TYPE MOBILE CHAMFERING MACHINE Hand Type, Light, Useable, Japanese Equipped Motor Mould Plates and at Machine Production and Chamfering Processes Adjustable Radius Selection Order

Slide Bearing Length 100 mm

PIN CUTTING AND GRINDING MACHINE PKM.1 Ø 1 - 24 mm Cylindrical Parts, In Length Setting Arm lateral Vise Opening Closing Work Piece Positioning

Mobile / Diamond Plaque ... Optional Spare End : SPMW 0308 Machine Motor Cycle Corner Chamfer Weight Dimensions Voltage R.P.M Radius Capacity

Order VCF 600

380 x 130 220 V 12000 mm 0.7 KW

0-3 mm

450

3.7 Kg

Arm Upwards Cutting Process Arm Downwards Grinding Process

Safety and Positioning of Work Piece Precision Length Cutting and Grinding

Order

VCF 700

HAND TYPE, TRAVELER / MOBILE, UNIVERSAL CHAMFERING It is for universal / heavier / wider work pieces. It is used at mould plates and machine production. Slide Bearing Length 200 mm

VCF 700

Machine Motor Cycle Corner Chamfer Weight Dimensions Voltage R.P.M Radius Capacity 360 x 200 220 V 3500 150-450 mm 0.7 KW

0-7 mm

Cutting Stone

Cutting Stone Mounting Kits

Mobile / Diamond Plaque ... Optional Spare End: SPUN 1203 Order

Diameter Capacity........................................... Up to Ø 1 mm- 24 mm Length Capacity ......................In coarse dimension, 320 - 800 mm ± 0.10 Precision Cutting in Standard Setting Unit .............. 60 - 320 mm ± 0.01 Short Cutting ( Optional, With Bus Bar) .................... 40 - 320 mm ± 0.01 Grinding / Cutting, Stone Cycle / Speed ... 2800 m / min. Motor Cycle / Speed .............................. 3600 RPM Our Ejector Pins/ Motor .......................... 220 / 280 F. 50 Hz. 0.75 Kv. Punches are Cutting Stone (Order PKM 2 ) ... 125 / 1 / 1.5 mm precision cut and face grinded in Grinding Wheel (Order PKM 3 ) ......... Ekr - D100 Stone Correction Diamond (Order PKM 4 )..0.50 Carat desired length. Machine Dimension .. 430 x 360 x 500 mm Easy Weight ..................... 109 Kg. Fast It provides fast cutting repeatedly with length Work Piece Cover Support Grinding Dresser Diamond Safety Thrust Work Piece Setting Scale Switch Positioning Seating Area

13 Kg

Length Setting Unit

It provides System Lubricant recycling of Grease Nipple rejected material.

Motion Scale for precision grinding of dish stone.

Grinding Wheel After Cutting

Page

173

Motor Type PIN FORM PROCESSING EQUIPMENT

Weight : 3.1 Kg.

Universal Type PIN FORM PROCESSING EQUIPMENT

Order

VPGA

Small Type: Punch & Pin FORM PROCESSING EQUIPMENT Pin Dia. 5

VPG

Order

VPGM

8 d1

Step Distance :

5 10 5

10 mm

L Working System: Bench Grinding Manual System Equipment * It is used in cylindrical or stepped form grinding operations of ejector pins - punch and EDM Work Pieces surface on grinding machine. Pin Capacity: ........ 1.5 mm x 25 mm * Pin: When precision wheels are fixed, center of work has been specified automatically. * Thanks to rigid connecting system, grinding distance from 5 mm up to 35 mm can be obtained. Economic

Product

Order

VSP-S

SINE - ANGULAR TABLE For Pin Forming Equipments

116

L Pin Processing Information : Pin Full Length (L) ........................... 20 - 120 mm Minimum Pin Connecting Length (L2) .. min.22 mm Pin Grinding Length (L1)........................ 5 - 35 mm Pin Connecting Diameter (d3) ........... Ø 2 ~ 25 mm Ø13 Pin Grinding Diameter (d1) ............ Ø 0.5 ~ 25 mm Grinding Sensitivity ................................. 0.01 mm 2 2 Motor Cycle ........................................... 130 RPM 6.5 4.5 Motor ( Monophase ) ............ 120 V / 50 Hz / 25 W 2 Pin Bearing Roller Speed ............................. 60 Hz It is suitable to be Step Ovality Sensitivity............................ 25.4 mm used at processing Equipment Surface Connecting Dimensions: and grinding of small 175 x 218 x 90 mm diameters and short 175 pins serially.

128

90 Some Sample Whetting Studies

172

Inclined Mouth Whetting

Ø36 Ø51

Cylindrical Channel Whetting

Page

174

Conical Form Whetting

167

Installation

Sensitivity 0.01

78 100

125

166

Multi Stepped Whetting Weight : 3.6 Kg.

110

From 0.5 ' to 6 mm

128

Ø22.4 Processing Equipment in surface grinding bench of small punches between Ø 0.5 - 10 mm

Weight : 7.1 Kg.

Capacity :

90 142

Weight : 6.6 Kg.

Order

Lift depressor arm. Insert pin into its slot. Tight depressor arm screw.

When pin is placed between precision wheels, center is found automatically.

After connection equipment grinding machine, start whetting by turning arm.

Before starting grinding, ensure that all support and Guide Screws are tightened.

Functional Equipment In Surface Grinding

Mould Pins EDM Processing Kits

Motion 25 mm

STONE FORMING EQUIPMENT

Angle Setting Stopper

Motion Latch

3600

VTDB

Forms

PIN FORMING EQUIPMENT

Dia.

0.01

Shape P,W,G

0.02 Form Return Setting Axial / Eccentric 52 125 30

200

Some Form Shapes of Grinding Wheel

Forming Process of Surface Grinding Machine Stone R: Radius of Grinding Wheel R.100 h: Diamond Dresser Kit ( Height can be adjusted. ) H: Height between base and center 80 mm Convex Angle: h = H - R Convex R = 48 Concave Angle: h = H + R Concave R = 100

Type 0.30 Carat 0.50 Carat 0.75 Carat 1.0 Carat 1.5 Carat 2.0 Carat 3.0 Carat

Standard Tolerances

VSP

Sine Angle Table

Surface Grinding Machine Stone Forming Equipment

Order TDE.030 TDE.050 TDE.075 TDE.100 TDE.150 TDE.200 TDE.300

Round P

65 19

It is for whetting stones in grinding machines.

Technical Data: It is similar for both product. d1 : Pin Connecting Dia. ................ Ø 4 - Ø 30 mm Model V-PB 01 ( Connecting Bearing is close ) L : Pin Connecting Length ...... 22 mm Order No Model V-PS 02 ( Connecting Bearing is open ) V-PB "V" V-PS L : Long Pin Connecting Len. As Per Request Race Motion of "V" Bearing to Up / Down........... 25 mm Motion of "V" Bearing to Single Direction...... 12.5 mm Total Motion of "V" Bearing.......... 25 mm 0 0 Number of Mirror Dividing Head Angle 24 Psc. 15 ± 5 Max. Stone Grinding Machine Stone Dia....... Ø 200 mm Equipment Surface and Angle / Scale Hardness 63 HRC 100 Total Weight of Equipment 10 - VPS 02 9 Kg.

Ø 90

TDE

Some of Pin / Punch Forms

12.5 12.5

DIAMOND DRESSER

Specifications : It creates the end stage of press drilling punches or injection mould " V " Bearing Length: 30 mm ejector pins or it enables to create the desired Axial Height of Center of formed shapes as equipment manually in Rotation: 15 mm shaped forming processing grinding machine Rotation Setting Inner of equipment manually. To create form for grinding machine Axial and Up / overall open stone, in addition precision and quick round/ Down radius and multi edge complex processes are created with stone whetting bus bar practically Ø 30 to ejector pins of mould punches and EDM sinking Process Kits. Motion is provided in two ways with equipment, it is provided 360º Angular Return Motion and Eccentric (Up/ 83 95 108 Down) Motions processing practicality. 203

* Precision Centers height is obtained with positive cutting angle, diamond dressers. *Thanks to precision grinded dove tail slides, absolute distance shifts are prevented in the desired distance. * By providing control from one point, convex and concave whetting forms are provided precisely and quickly. * All working surfaces and measuring scale is 60 HRC'.

V-PB

Equipment inner " V " is open in bearing parallel.

133 80-81

90 Convex Whetting Radius.......... 0.8 R - 40 R Concave Whetting Radius......... 0 - 40 R Max. Grinding Machine Stone Dia. ...... Ø 250 mm Turning Angle............................. 4 x 900 = 3600 Precision Dividing Head Angle............. 6"

Connecting Bearing Closed Pin Bearing Length 22 mm

Working System: Grinding Bench Manual System Equipment

PIN FORMING EQUIPMENT

Connecting Bearing Open V-PS Step Creation at Long Ejector Pins

Ø 90

158

146

Stone Whetting

110

Order 330

138

Page

175

BALANCE STAND

LBS 100 LBS 350

Horizontal Flatness of Desktop Footed Round Work Pieces is Balance Control Purpose / Fast Use / High Precision. Balance and flatness of part can be monitored by sliding suitable size round work pieces that are between slides on unit slides. LBS 100 Maximum Diameter 200 mm. B LBS 350 Maximum Diameter 350 mm. A

Order

RYS ROLLER, SHEET BAND LUBRICANTS

Fixing Lugs

Sheet width capacity from 50 mm to 1600 mm L

LBS 100 - LBS 350

Order LBS -100 Ø 200 LBS - 350 Ø 350

Kg.

137

152

225

110

175

8.8

160

180

260

125

235

15.1

Drop Lubrication Nozzles On Rollers

Standard Features : * Thanks to local valves, partial lubrication on mobile sheet band. * Industrial felt plates are available in lubricating roller. * 3 lt. Capacity, Plastic Oil Chamber

PRECISION BALANCE MEASURING STAND Optional (As per request ) Features : Order

WBS 300

It helps to measure and develop grinding sensitivity correctly. All surfaces of high precision measuring stand are 55 HRC Steel Cast Casing. Precision measuring stand / disc - rotary model are placed on round work pieces. By turning work pieces, its balance and flatness are monitored. 195

* Time Cycled Lubricating Relay * Hydraulic Pump Tank * Desired Oil Capacity Order RYS 50

SHEET BAND CAN BE MOUNTED TO DRIVE SYSTEM EASILY

Max. Band Min. Band Max. Band Width Thickness Thickness

Type

0.50 mm

RYS 100 0.100 mm

1.0

2.0

3.0

6.0

RYS 150 0.150 mm

Drop Roller Lubrication

BALANCE STAND

RYS 300 0.300 mm

230

280

250

RYS 500 0.500 mm

280

Page

176

300

Easier and faster production is obtained by lubricating band with drops while work piece / sheet product is switched between rollers in roller lubricating system press cutting and form mould processing operation. This system provides quality product without waste by increasing life time of mould. Band thickness can be adjusted from 0.1 mm to 6 mm sheet thickness.

THE MOST SUITABLE AND HIGH PRECISION IMPORT DRIVER TYPES Rectifier Drivers Especially For Narrow Bands

High Precision PNEUMATIC DRIVERS

Import Herrblitz ITALY Rapid Type Drivers (Guaranteed Product )

For Wires Telescopic Drivers

Pneumatic Valved Normal Type

B Serial

A Serial

SeOrder rial

C Serial

For Strip Bands and Wires Rectified Drivers

Herrblitz Pneumatic Drivers It is at your disposal with 120 Pieces Standard and Special Model as per request. They have been made in modular system, it is quite easy to obtain different dimensions, normal drivers are convenient especially for small bands, they can be mounted directly on the mould. Vertical motion of upper mould gives command to the driver, hence their mounting is so easy. Heavy Duty Type Drivers are very strong, they have three pulling cylinders. Major Structural Features : Quality of Used Material; all surfaces exposed to impacts or friction are hardened and solid chrome plated, For Thin Bands not to affect airborne water, valves and pistons are stainless steel, cylinder jacket are made and Wires from solid bronze. Pneumatic Driving Sensitivity : Powerful front and rear Cutters Airbag ensure to work in 0.02mm sensitivity. At very powerful drivers there are 5 airbags at rear and 4 airbags at the front, hardness of airbags can be adjusted. Wide Field Sliding - Bearing Plates : For feeding of special profiles, making bearing privately is possible. For magnetic bands or very precision bands, polyamide or especially hardened plates are applied. Input Roller : By inserting roller driver input, friction on band can be decreased. For Very Slide Bearings: Hardened and Grinded Thin Bands bearings are used at our drivers. Pitch setting is so easy, you can use slots at slide Guide Channel edges in different stages. Accessories also Drivers superimposable to Herrblitz Drivers; Guiding bars for very thin and precision materials enable to feed even 0.05 mm thick band by pushing. Six roller motorless rectifier : Thanks to this application, you can obtain very practical and economic solution in rectifying bands and wires. Pneumatic Length Cutting Machine For Bands and Wires : (Coupled to the driver). It provides to cut many different materials such as plastic, steel, paper etc. in the desired lengths. Speed Setting and Control are electronic and its application is very easy. Special Pliers : For driving circular and special section profiles.

A 50 A 100 A 150 A 200 A 250 B 50 B 100 B 150 B 200 B 250 C 50 C 100 C 150 C 200 C 250

Max. Band Width

0 50 mm

Pitch Step mm

Max. Band Thickness

0 ~ 50

0 ~ 1.90

0 ~ 100 0 ~ 1.80 0 ~ 150 0 ~ 1.50 0 ~ 200 0 ~ 1.30 0 ~ 250 0 ~ 1.10 0 ~ 50

0 75 mm

0 ~ 1.80

0 ~ 100 0 ~ 1.70 0 ~ 150 0 ~ 1.60 0 ~ 200 0 ~ 1.20 0 ~ 250 0 ~ 1.10 0 ~ 50

0 75 mm

0 ~ 1.70

0 ~ 100 0 ~ 1.50 0 ~ 150 0 ~ 1.40 0 ~ 200 0 ~ 1.30 0 ~ 250 0 ~ 1.20

Pneumatic Valved Heavy Duty Order

Max. Band Width

Pitch Step

Max. Band Thickness

P1 P2 P3 S1 S2 S3 Z1 Z2 Z3

0 ~155 0 ~155 0 ~155 0 ~205 0 ~205 0 ~205 0 ~305 0 ~305 0 ~305

1.00 2.00 3.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 1.00 2.00 3.00

0 ~ 3.8 0 ~ 3.5 0 ~3.0 0 ~3.0 0 ~3.0 0 ~3.0 0 ~3.0 0 ~3.0 0 ~2.5

Standard Accessories ; O-Ring Kit Optional Accessories ; * Remote Control With Electro Valve ( Instead of standard mechanic valve ) * Springy Plier ( When pilot pins are used) * Transparent Top Housing (To avoid accidents) * Programmed counter to repeat pitch. * Conditioner Unit and Hose Systems to filter pressured air and to lubricate. Section Press Mould

Page

177

TRUE Application Compression Bolt

Sheet Band

As close as possible

Clamping

WRONG Applications

Sheet Band

Intermediate Distance Very Far

PNEUMATIC SHEET DRIVERS

HEAVY TYPE PNEUMATIC SHEET DRIVERS

Rapid Type ( Domestic Production ) Drivers

Heavy Type ( Domestic Production ) ECONOMIC Drivers

Economic Model Sheet Band Width Capacity from 50 mm up to 150 mm. Sheet sliding capacity at thickness from 0 up to 20 mm. In Standard Features * Manual Pitch and Speed Settings Standard Accessories * Mechanic Valve on Casing * O - Ring Kit of Driver In Optional * 1/4 Conditioner ( Air and Oil ) Percolator * Electronic Controlled Valve * Slide Air Valve 1/4 - Coupling * 1.5 Meter 8's Air Hose * Stroke Repeater Unit

Kg.

Liter / Kg. Minute

Fixed Lug

Movable Lugs

Pulling Force

AY 050

120

158

From 0 From 0 From 0 Stroke DY 150 150 150 1.20 130

Unit Weight

Air Consumption

Power

Clamping Power

mm mm Minute From 0 From 0 From 0 Stroke 50 50 1.90 280 From 0 From 0 From 0 Stroke AY 100 50 100 1.80 200 From 0 From 0 From 0 Stroke AY 150 50 150 1.50 160 CY From 0 From 0 From 0 Stroke 050 100 50 1.70 210 From 0 From 0 From 0 Stroke CY 100 100 100 1.50 160 From 0 From 0 From 0 Stroke CY 150 100 150 1.40 120 From 0 From 0 From 0 Stroke DY 050 150 50 1.60 230 From 0 From 0 From 0 Stroke DY 100 150 100 1.40 160

Clamping Power

Number of Stroke

Sheet/Band Thickness

Type mm

Pitch Step

Max. Sheet Width

Order No

Pneumatic Sheet Drivers ( Domestic Production ) Economic Type

Kg.

3.9

4.8

5.7

5.6

6.6

7.8

9.6

11.2

100

12.7

Domestic Type Pneumatic Drivers : The flatness of band to be driven in mechanic valve that can be mounted to press easily and controlled drive from direct press dect, should absolutely by watched, if required, rectifier should be used. Air inlet to the pneumatic driver should be dry and oily, conditioner system should absolutely be used. Lubricating for 30 minutes at conditioner is required. Spare part / repair / maintenance service are available at domestic drivers.

Page

Sayfa 178 178

For precision and Section wasteless production Press roller sheet lubricant Mould can be used.

Sheet Band Width Capacity from 100 mm up to 150 mm. Sheet sliding capacity at thickness from 0.2'up to 1.0 /2.0 /3.0 mm, Pitch /Stepped Driver Casing from 100 mm up to 300 mm, Bearing Column from Special Aluminium Alloy Material, Movable Parts from solid chrome plated (1080) material, Bedding with bronze material, pitch set screw are produced from 4140 material.

Heavy Type Drivers ( Domestic Production ) Economic Type Order

Max. Band Thickness Max. Band Width Pitch / Step

Order

Max. Band Thickness Max. Band Width Pitch / Step

A1 A2 A3

1 x 100 x 100 (mm) 1 x 100 x 200 (mm) 1 x 100 x 300 (mm)

E1 E2 E3

2 x 150 x 100 (mm) 2 x 150 x 200 (mm) 2 x 150 x 300 (mm)

A 11 1 x 150 x 100 (mm) A 12 1 x 150 x 200 (mm) A 13 1 x 150 x 300 (mm)

E 11 2 x 200 x 100 (mm) E 12 2 x 200 x 200 (mm) E 13 2 x 200 x 300 (mm)

A 21 1 x 200 x 100 (mm) A 22 1 x 200 x 200 (mm) A 23 1 x 200 x 300 (mm)

E 21 2 x 300 x 100 (mm) E 22 2 x 300 x 200 (mm) E 23 2 x 300 x 300 (mm)

A 31 1 x 300 x 100 (mm) A 32 1 x 300 x 200 (mm) A 33 1 x 300 x 300 (mm)

E 31 2 x 400 x 100 (mm) E 32 2 x 400 x 200 (mm) E 33 2 x 400 x 300 (mm)

A 41 1 x 400 x 100 (mm) A 42 1 x 400 x 200 (mm) A 43 1 x 400 x 300 (mm)

E 41 2 x 500 x 100 (mm) E 42 2 x 500 x 200 (mm) E 43 2 x 500 x 300 (mm)

F1 F2 F3

3 x 150 x 100 (mm) 3 x 150 x 200 (mm) 3 x 150 x 300 (mm)

F 11 3 x 200 x 100 (mm) F 12 3 x 200 x 200 (mm) F 13 3 x 200 x 300 (mm) F 21 3 x 300 x 100 (mm) F 22 3 x 300 x 200 (mm) F 23 3 x 300 x 300 (mm) DOMESTIC PRODUCTION + SPARE PARTS + SERVICE + PERIODIC MAINTENANCE GUARANTY

400 Standard Model / TM-EEM-400

200 Standard Model / TM-EEM-200

100 Standard Model / TM-EEM-100

Production up to 1000 mm Servo Drivers providing ideal solutions up to 1.5 mm sheet thickness Economic Model as per request They are servo drivers that can be mounted almost to every press, Space-saving, easily mounted, provide working opportunities at high stroke press and increase high efficiency thanks to price / performance. Unit Standard Features; View Pneumatic Adjustable Piston Joint * Steel and 7075 Aluminium Casing Design Valve Pilot Piston * 64 HRC Cylinder produced from 2379 Sverker Material and inertia taken ( Relieved ) * Roller Structure bedding with high speed PC Controlled bearings Lubrication * Antiskid dual drive roller * Band setting rollers on the inlet and outlet * Unique measurement scale D s A * Piston leaving band to pilot during piloting Cylinder Stainles rs e Bearing ll o R * PLC controlled lubricating system for 7075 Lubrication custom made Trigel threadeds Technical Detail Material * Mould protection system from 4 or 6 points Inlet Roller AC Servo Motor * Easy Connecting Plates to Press (Without C drilling extra hole to press) * Precision setting system taken press cran E Inox with encoder Front G * Mechanic roller lifting system Panel F B * 7.0 inch LCD Touch Colour Screen Servo Drivers Economic Type Touch * English menu programme * Automatic Manual Button / Emergency Button Colour

Cooling Fan Control Panel

Main Switch

Standard Measurement Scale

Tip TM EEM100 TM EEM200 TM EEM400

Model

104 204

Ă&#x2DC;

m/min.

42 1.5

404 A

Max.Band Speed

Automatic - Manual Button

Roller Dia.

Start Button

Emergency Stop

Sheet/Band Thickness

Screen 7.0" English Menu

Max.Band Width

Optional ( As per request ) Features * Roll unloader / Rectifier and Driver Press Synchron Movement External Encoder * Foldable front rollers are preferred after 300 Cycles. * Guides between driver and mould As per request External Encoder

Order No

Lubrication

SERVO ( Easily Programmable ) DRIVERS MEDIUM TYPE ( Domestic Production )

140

63 C

TM EEM100 210 555 320 135 130 158 58 TM EEM200 300 555 320 180 130 158 58 TM EEM400 515 780 480 410 230 158 58

Mould Automation Systems directing and fasting sheet Protection Valve Section PC Press Inlet Mould

Page

179

MECHANIC DRILL CHUCK ROLL OPENERS Economic Product Carrying capacity from 250 Kg. up to 3000 Kg.

. aft ed Sh rain w d cre nd b S ed a u H mp cla is

Standard Features; * 4 Footed Mechanic Drill Chuck System * Independent Adjustable Side Thrus Legs * Sensor LOOP Control System * Bidirectional Operation

ROLL SHEET SLIDING SYSTEMS

Mechanic System Sheet Roll Openers

Model : Motor Type

AGM500M Model : Brake Type

AGM750M 1500 Kg Capacity

Optional Features; * Pneumatic top and bottom Stamping System * Brake Work System * Speed Control System * Conical Extrusion hub can be added as per request.

AGM1500M 2500 Kg Capacity

AGM2500M

Roll External Dia. (mm)

Roll Weight Kg.

AGM500M

1300

500

AGM500LM

1600

500

1300

500

1300

750

AGM750LM

1600

750

AGM750F

1300

750

1300

1500

1600

1500

As Per

1300

1500

Request

1300

2500

1600

2500

Order No.

AGM500F AGM750M

Material Width (mm)

Width capacity from 300 mm up to 1500 mm

20 - 300

Roll Internal Diameter(mm) Minimum

300

550

AGM1500M AGM1500LM

Maximum

20 - 400

350

AGM1500F AGM2500M AGM2500LM

30 - 500

400

AGM2500F

1300

2500

AGM3000M

1300

3000

1600

3000

1300

3000

AGM3000LM AGM3000F

Page

Sayfa 180 180

30 - 600

450

600

Motor Brake Upper Type Type Depressor Selection Selection Arm

Optional,

Mechanic Opener Group, Hub Screw Shaft make clamping and unloading. System works Section properly between 500 Kg. and 4000 Kg. Motor Pneumatic Overpring brake models are available. Press Mould Mechanic openers take small space and they are the lowest cost machines for enterprise.

"Material Fasteners" RIGHT SOLUTION ! Fixtures...

Fast - Quality Assurance ( Certificated ) Flexible - Pratic Fasteners DOMESTIC MANUFACTURE

STANDART Perpendicular Type Galvanic Plated

Order Model 800.. ( 0-1-2-3 4-5-6 )

LOCKING Perpendicular Type Galvanic Plated

BASED TYPE PERPENDICULAR FASTENERS Size : Size : Size : 0-1 2-5 4 Horizantal Footed Drilling - Welding - Bending - Grinding for fixing mounting plates etc. in serial parts production, connecting and disconnecting - In measurement control mounting - wood and plastic engraving processes. Order 800 800/B

(3-4)

0 0.5 0.7 90 50 M4 x25 50 1 0.8 1.1 105 60 M5 x30 114 2 1.0 1.2 140 76 M6 x35 178 3 1.8 2.5 200 105 M8 x45 400 4 2.0 3.0 230 140 M8 x65 630 5 3.0 5.0 265 190 M12 x80 1.500 6 3.5 5.5 300 230 M12 x110 2.160 Technical details are similar in both models (800/800-B)

BASED TYPE PERPENDICULAR FASTENERS Model: 800 /S-4 800 /P-1

Base Types Model: 800 /P-2

Model: 800 /S-3 800 /P-3

Model 800/P

Order 800 /P

1 2 3

( kN ) Force F1

0.8 1.0 1.8

1.1 1.2 2.5

B A

105 140 200

60 76 105

Order Model 800/L.. ( 2-3-4-5 )

M5x30 M6x35 M8x45

114 178 400

1.8

2.5

200

105

M8x45

400

2.0

3.0

230

140

m8x65

630

BASED TYPE PERPENDICULAR FASTENER

Taban Tipleri Model: 800 /L-4

Model: 800 /L-3 812 /4-6

Model: 800 /L-2 800 /L-5

Model 800/L

METAL SHEET Type Perpendicular Coupling Order 800 /L

2 3 4 5

STANDARD Perpendicular Type Black Plated

Order Model 800/B.. ( 0-1-2-3 4-5-6 )

INOX Complete Stainless Perpendicular Type

Order Model 800/P.. ( 1-2-3 )

Model 800/S

LOCKING TYPE Perpendicular Coupling

METAL SHEET Perpendicular Type Galvanic Plated

Dual Transverse Arm As per request

( kN ) Force

INOX / STAINLESS Perpendicular Coupling Order Model 800/S..

Size : 3-6

HEAVY DUTY Cast Steel Perpendicular Type Coupling

Order Model 812.. ( 4-6 )

( kN ) Force F1

1.0 1.8 2.0 3.0

1.2 2.5 3.0 5.0

140 200 230 265

76 105 140 190

M6X35 M8X45 M8X65 M12X80

CAST STEEL Heavy Duty Perpendicular Coupling

178 400 630 1500

Model 812

5.0

215

148

M12X80

1250

6.0

265

182 M12X110

2130

Section Press Mould

Page

181

VERTICAL FOOT Perpendicular Type Galvanic Plated

VERTICAL FOOT PERPENDICULAR FASTENERS

Model: 802-1

Model: 802-2 802-5

Model: 802-3

Model: 802-4 802 /S-3.4

Order Model 802..

( kN ) Force

Order 802

1 2 3 4 5

( 1-2-3-4-5 )

0.8 0.8 1.8 2.0 3.0

1.1 1.2 2.5 3.0 5.0

117 153 210 255 323

60 76 105 140 190

M5x30 M6x35 M8x45 M8x65 M12x80

1.8

2.5

210

105

M8x45

400

2.0

3.0

255

140

M8x65

630

VERTICAL FOOT PERPENDICULAR FASTENERS Model: 802 /L-3

Model: 802 /L-4 813- 4.6

Model 802/L

SHEET Vertical Foot Perpendicular Coupling Order 802/L

( 2-3-4-5 )

2 3 4 5

( 3-4 )

HEAVY DUTY Cast Steel Vertical Footed Perpendicular Type

Base Types Model: 802 /L-2 802 /L-5

Order Model 802/S..

114 178 400 630 1.500

Model 802/S

LOCKED Vertical Foot Perpendicular Coupling

Order Model 802/L..

LOCKING Vertical Foot Perpendicular Type

Model 802

VERTICAL FOOT Perpendicular Coupling

METAL SHEET Vertical Foot Perpendicular Type Galvanic Plated

Transverse Arm As Per Request

Base Types

( kN ) Force B

0.8 1.8 2.0 3.0

1.2 2.5 3.0 5.0

153 210 255 323

76 105 140 190

M6x35 M8x45 M8x65 M12x80

LOCKED Vertical Foot Perpendicular Coupling

178 400 630 1500

10.0

234

150

12.0

288

182 M12x110 2.120

M12x80

1.320

MODÜLER BAĞLAMA HAREKETLİ / DİK AYAKLI 810 TK (Long Arm)

810 TK (Handle)

Modular Coupling Accessories

Weldable Base 810 T

Order Model 811.. ( 4-6 )

Page

Sayfa 182 182

Section Press Mould

Pressure Bolt Slot 810BY

Clamp Lever Extension 810KU

MODULAR Coupling Movable Footed Force

Order 810

F1 (kN)

7.0

112

11.0

145

105

B A

2000 400 700

MODULAR Coupling Vertical Footed 4

7.0

142

11.0

182

106

Model 810

Connecting Angle ᶐ-ß-ƴ

855 1.600

Model 811

ᶐ:1900

( 4-6 )

Model 813

Modular Welded Movable Perpendicular Foot

Order Model 813..

970 1.750

Order Model 810.. ( 4-6 )

Modular Welded Vertical Foot

SIDE MOUNTED PERPENDICULAR FASTENERS Spare Parts (Optional): Hinged Pressure Bolts

Order Model 803..

"V" Bearing Code: 891V

Code : 891

Elastic Pressure Bolt

Knurled Pressure Bolt Code: 891T

For Open Arm

Groove Channel Code: 891Y

Side Mounted Perpendicular Type Galvanic Plated

Order Model 803/S..

Model 803

SIDE MOUNTED Perpendicular Coupling ( kN ) Force

Order 803

( 1-2-3-4-5 )

LOCKING Side Mounted Vertical Foot Perpendicular Type

1 2 3 4

0.8 1.0 1.8 2.0

1.1 1.2 2.5 3.0

B A

132 135 235 270

60 76 105 141

( 3-4 )

M5x30 M6x35 M8x45 M8x65

LOCKED - VERTICAL Footed Perpendicular Coupling

125 220 470 650

Model 803/S

1.8

2.5

235

105

M8x45

470

2.0

3.0

270

141

M8x65

650

SIDE MOUNTED PERPENDICULAR FASTENER Metal Sheet Type Side Push - Press Mounted Perpendicular Perpendicular Coupling Arm Model Galvanic Transverse Base Model As Per Request Plated METAL SHEET Type Side Mounted

Order Model 803/L..

Order 803/L

2 3 4

( 2-3-4 )

2 3

Order Model 860.. ( 2-3 )

Model 803/L

( kN ) Force F1

1.0 1.8 2.0

1.2 2.5 3.0

B A

135 235 270

76 105 141

M6x35 M8x45 M8x65

Push - Press Based Model Order 860

Specifications: It is replaced with two equipment in profile drilling and sealing processes.

( kN ) Force F1

2.0 3.0

220 470 650

Model 860

Control Movement

Arm Stop Ver. Hor. min. max. min. max. max. min.

30 40

40 50

10 20

20 30

94 110

87 106

1.5 2.3

LIGHT CHUCKS ( Catch hook can be adjusted. )

Model : 846-2 It provides to close mini mould - cabinet - tank covers and similar parts.

Ø6 Ø6

14 28.5

35/43

25.5

12.5 55 38

Model : 846-4

Section Press Mould

17.5

2.5 18

100-125

PVC Hook Coupling

2.5 17 30 17

Hook Coupling

Model : 846-3

9.5

Page

183

HORIZANTAL FASTENERS Vertical Arm 900

Base Types

Based Type / Horizantal Coupling, Galvanic Plated Order Model 830.. ( 0-1-2-3-4-5 )

In connected Status, Arm in horizantal position Operating Handle works in opposite direction as per clamping arm.

830-830/B Size : 0

830-830/B Size : 1 830-830/B Size : 3

HORIZANTAL Fasteners

Based Type / Horizantal Coupling, Black Plated Order Model 830/B.. ( 0-1-2-3 )

LOCKING Type - Based Model Horizantal Coupling - Galvanise Plated

LOCKING Horizantal Fasteners

Order 830

830/S

( kN ) Force F1

2.0

3.0

293

M8x65

700

Order 830/P

0 1 2 3

0.25 0.80 1.00 1.80

0.40 1.10 1.20 2.50

Order Model 833/S.. ( 4 )

Order Model 832/S .. ( 4 )

1.00 1.80 2.00

1.20 2.50 3.00

Sayfa 184 184

94 96 97 Section Press Mould

155 M6x35 250 221 M8x45 400 261 M8x65 750 Technical details in Model 832-833 are same.

23 30 44 48

Order Model 832..

LOCKING Type - Side Based Angular Foot, Vertical Coupling ( kN ) Force

Order 832 832/S

0 1 2 3 4 5

830/P

( kN ) Force

( 0-1-2-3-4-5 )

Page

In chemistry / food sector and hygenic places, at outdoors, machines under heavy climatic conditions, anti magnetic resistant to corrosion and acide ( None Magnetic Susceptibility )

Order Model 833.. ( 2-3-4 )

2 3 4

0 0.25 0.40 23 85 M4x25 37 1 0.80 1.10 30 128 M5x30 112 2 1.00 1.20 44 158 M6X35 182 3 1.80 2.50 48 221 M8X45 340 4 2.00 3.00 74 293 M8X65 700 5 3.00 5.00 81 330 M12X80 1170 Technical details are similar at both Model (830/830-B)

Side Based Angular Foot Horizantal Coupling

Order 833 833/S

Model 830-830/B

( kN ) Force

Order Model 830/P.. ( 0-1-2-3 )

Safety Locked, horizantal fasteners for open and close positions are absolutely rigid thanks to safety locking in both open and closed position. Especially, against vibration and for bottom to up mounting.

830-830/B Size : 5

INOX / Complete Stainless - Based Model Horizantal Fastener

Order Model 830/S.. ( 4 )

Order 830/S

830-830/B Size : 2/4

85 128 158 221

M4x25 M5x30 M6x35 M8x45

37 112 182 340

PERPEN. FOOTED Horizantal Coupling

LOCKING Type Perpendicular Footed Horizantal Coupling

( kN ) Force F1

0.25 0.80 1.00 1.80 2.00 3.00

0.40 1.10 1.20 2.50 3.00 5.00

32 42 59 63 96 103

85 128 158 221 293 330

M4X25 M5X30 M6X35 M8X45 M8X65 M12X80

37 112 182 340 700 1170

FASTENERS IN PUSH - PULL RUNNING POSITION Anchorage pillar as per request

It is with sintered bushing counter connecting bearing that is repositional, maintenance free.

BUSHING TYPE Push- Pull Fasteners Order 840

4 5

Direct Fixing to Sheet Walls, Threaded face

Order Model 841/A

SHORT TYPE Pull - Push Fasteners

Order Model 844.. ( 2-3-5 )

Order Model 840.. ( 4-5 ) Order 844

( kN ) Force F1

15.0 15.0

166 172

Removable, Angular Footed Sheet, Direct mounting to walls

190 269

M10x40

2.0 2.50

2 3 5

( kN ) Force F1

1.0 2.5 4.0

85 135 155

Robust Construction, crank shaft and lever arm are worked in same direction.

LONG Model, BUSHING TYPE Pull-Push Fasteners

Order 841

0 1 2 3 5

Fast connecting / disconnecting in serial production, threaded piston shaft.

( kN ) Force F2

0.80 1.00 2.00 2.50 4.50

40 58 80 102 123

110 120 175 190 230

M4X20 M4X20 M6X25 M8X35 M12X50

80 120 270 450 880

HEAVY TYPE Pull - Push Fasteners

Order 842

3 5 7

( kN ) Force F1

4.00 10.0 25.0

115 133 170

191 245 333

630 1620 3610

Repositional, as per request, the equipment such as drilling machine with lever arm. For high connecting forces.

Crank shaft bound slide very robust construction. Order Model Main casing from tempered casting. 842/SC ( 5 ) As fast connecting /fast disconnecting and press - push coupling to serial production, it is excel- Crank Shaft and lent and very durable in drilling - reaming -grinding - lever arm work in same direction. bending - welding - mounting etc.

M8x35 M12x50 M12x50

CRANK SHAFT PULL - PUSH Fastener

Horizantal Vertical Usage

Order 842/SC

130 320 1200

Order Model 842.. ( 3-5-7 )

Elbowed lever arm transfer rate prevents opening which makes automatic locking.

M6X35 M8X35 M12X50

STRONG MODE Cast Casing BUSHING TYPE Pull - Push Fastener

Order Model 841.. ( 0-1-2-3-5 ) Handle can be turned to connecting surface in every angle position.

70 110 175

( kN ) Force F1

3.0

166

190

M10X40

950

For high bonding force, main casing is tempered cast and is comprised tempered heavy duty type long shaft. Order 842/PK

( kN ) Force F1

12.0

Pls. request catalogue for technical details.

Order Model 842/PK ( 5 )

185 Section Press Mould

M10X50

1.800

Page

185

Order Model 826/CE ( 4-6-8 )

HEAVY DUTY PNEUMATIC PER. TYPE INTEGRATED COUPLING

This perpendicular pneumatic coupling set is in bench quality, it can be intergrated to transfer lines or special machines and is together with dual motion pneumatic cylinder.

Order kN

Force

826/CE F1 - F2

4 6 8

6-9 12 - 18 20 - 30

HEAVY DUTY PNEUMATIC Order Model PERP. TYPE MECHANIC 816/C BLOCK

Cylinder Air Inlet Strok Piston Kg F5 0.75 172 x340 74 mm Ø 40 5.1 G 1.00 195 x286 87 mm Ø 50 7.3 1/4" 1.80 272 x470 120 Ø 63 16.8 AxB

DOUBLE ACTION PNEUMATIC PER. TYPE HORIZANTAL/ VERTICAL COUPLING

Order Model 600.. ( 2-3-4 ) In double action pneumatic system, cylinder is mounted as ready to connect main plate, thanks to its angular structure it provides space saving in horizantal and vertical connection. It has double action pneumatic cylinder and equipped, with adjustable speed. Motion of cylinder piston is limited with magnetic sensors. Double action has mounted in exchangeable structure. Force F1 - F2 F5 1 - 1.2 0.3 1.4 -2.5 0.5 2-3 0.75

Order kN 600 2 3 4

Cylinder Air gr. Inlet Strok Piston 170 x130 M 5 42 mm Ø 25 800 205 x160 G1/8 52 mm Ø 32 1100 260 x220 G1/8 62 mm Ø 40 1600

AxB

Order Model 825/CE ( 4-6-8 )

Mechanic Block HEAVY DUTY PNEUMATIC PER. TYPE Adjustable movement length cylinder. HORIZANTAL Piston can be limited with movable CYLINDER magnetic or pneumatic sensors. MOVABLE Order Model Hardened Steel, Grinded and shaft CONNECTED 815/C ( 4-6-8 ) bolts fixed with safety rings. Force Order kN 825/CE F1 - F2 F5 4 6-9 0.75 6 12 - 18 1.00 8 20 - 30 1.80

Cylinder A Strok Piston 122 x416 80 mm Ø 40 147 x480 100 mm Ø 50 196 x580 125 mm Ø 63 B

Kg 5.5 7.8 17.80

PUSH TYPE PNEUMATIC FASTENER

Order Model 650

Order Model 650/K Force Order kN 650 F1 - F2 F3 3 4 - 2.5 0.75 5 10 - 5 1.00 7 25 1.00

Page

Sayfa 186 186

Order Model 620/K ( 1-2-3-4 )

DOUBLE ACTION

Horizantal pneumatic fasteners is in bench quality, it PNEUMATIC can be intergrated to transfer lines or special machines. HORIZANTAL TYPE Its opening and closing can be controlled electronically. MOTION Double action, pneumatic cyclinder can be mounted CONTROLLED replaceably. B Force Order kN 620/K F1 - F2 F5 A 1 0.8 - 1.1 0.10 52 x175 M5X30 2 1.0 - 1.2 0.30 64 x200 M6X35 3 1.4 - 2.5 0.50 85 x250 M8 4 2.0 - 3.0 0.75 100 x290 45-65

Cylinder Strok Piston 34mm Ø 16 41mm Ø 25 52mm Ø 32 62mm Ø 40

gr 610 870 1160 1900

Order Model 620/Y ( 1-2-3-4 )

Double action pneumatic cylinder IN DOUBLE Push type pneumatic fastener is is mounted replaceably, thanks to ACTION magnetic piston, motion control is anodised and in ready position PNEUMATIC to mounting with long life heavy provided. It is together with pressure bolt. Fasteners can duty pneumatic cylinders. be worked on control panel individually or together. In HORIZANTAL case of pressure loss, fastener remains the same. More B CYLINDER Cylinder than one coupling can be used simultaneously. STRUCTURE A Stroke Piston Kg B Force Cylinder Order kN 85 x320 100 mm Ø 40 2.0 620/Y F1 - F2 Stroke Piston gr F5 A 115 x340 100 mm Ø 50 3.5 1 0.8 - 1.1 0.19 55 x195 M5X30 34mm Ø 20 630 150 x533 125 mm Ø 63 7.7 2 1.0 - 1.2 0.30 65 x220 M6X35 41mm Ø 25 800 Thanks to magnetic piston, motion Section control is ensured. Varnished heat 3 1.4 - 2.5 0.50 90 x250 M8 52mm Ø 32 1200 Press threaded cast metal casing is galvanised 4 2.0 - 3.0 0.75 105 x320 45-65 62mm Ø 40 2000 Mould and passivated. Steel arm and rod.

90 87

50 65 Ø16

Clamping Port

15 25

30 Stroke

Clamp Lever Closed

158

Threaded Casing M55x1.5

Clamp Lever opened

Order Model 628 M/20

G 1/8"

Right Turn

M55X1.5

10.5 Retriaval Port

629/40 R/L LEFT/RIGHT

Clamping Center

PNEUMATIC DOUBLE ACTION PERPENDICULAR FASTENERS

Left Turn

Order Model

105 o F3

Ø6.5

CYCLINDER CASING THREADED, PNEUMATIC DOUBLE ACTION ROTARY FASTENER

37.5 70

gr 550

CYCLINDER / HINGED PNEMUMATIC DOUBLE ACTION PERPENDICULAR FASTENER 60

Order Model 942 K / 25

15.5

Clamp Lever "R" Type

Clamp Lever "C" Type Clamp Lever "R" Type

47.3

Ø5

27 22.5

629/V

gr 800

46 400

2-Ø 5 M4

78.5

23.5 72

46. 9

Order 942/K

Full Clamping Locking Max. Max. Cyclinder Cap. Dia. Stroke F1 F3 Pressure Heat Ø Clamp Back

Ø 36

DOUBLE ACTION - AESTHETIC DRAWN

0-70 18.5 3 Degree cm

50 39 31.5 27 25

14.5 19. o 6

5.5

Piston Stroke Ø mm

3.5

Blind Plug Clamping Port

26.

Ø5

1.0 Bar

73 19 M8 80 25.5 M10

Ø5

Ø 46 Order 629/V

F Ø

152 164

CYLINDER / HINGED HYDRAULIC PERPENDICULAR FASTENER

19.5

Hinged Pneumatic Connection Double Action: Solid aluminium, red colour anodix oxidation plated, piston shaft resistant to corrosion, solid chrome plated clamping lug resistant to abrasion with solid steel complete clamping bolts.

Left

0.45

Retriaval Port

G 1/8" Port

Right

E mm

Bottom Flanged

H1 mm

74.3

Max.17

40 40

Top Flanged H mm

Order Model 629/V

F3 Return 629 R/L Direction (kN)

Ø 20

G 1.8"

Order

15.5

146 x158

Air Inlet

40 31.4 8 8 14

Piston Dia.

25 11

Clamping Holding

Threaded Type Connection At Casing

Top Bolt Connected A

Order Force ( Nm ) 628 F1 F3 M20

Connection Types

Mini designed casing structure, solid aluminium and red colour anodix oxidation plated casing, double position magnetic piston motion, retainer claw is solid steel and is heat threated.

Full Clamping Locking Max. Max. Stroke F1 F3 Pressure Heat

18.5

2.5

Black Colour, anodix oxidation plated casing resistant to corrosion, solid chrome plated piston shaft with clamping bolt.

7.0 Bar

0-70

Degree

Section Press Mould

Used Fluid Hydraulic Oil

942/K Dia Ø gr 36 600

Page

187

LOCK - HOOK NARROW FOOTED MODEL FASTENER

HOOK FASTENER

Order Model 847/K ( 3 )

Order Model 850.. ( 3-4 )

Galvanised and Passivated Casing, Stainless Steel Riveted Hardened Hook and Thrust Bush for hardened and oiled bushes, conventionaloil resistant, plastic handle, hook arm can be shortened as partial motion.

Robust hook fastener for higher holding forces. Hook length is adjustable. It is with thrust sleeve. Order 850..

( kN ) Force Setting F1 Range

B A

3.2

170

230

255

800

Order 847/K

( kN ) Force Setting F1 Range

2.0

LOCK HOOK FASTENER SUITABLE TO HORIZANTAL/ VERTICAL USAGE Cylindrical barrel type, is compatible to use as binding in sheet junctions, mounting of covers, mould processes or as lock binding at equipment. Order 847

1 3 5

( kN ) Force Setting F1 Range

2.0 3.0 5.0

Order Model 847 ( 1-3-5 ) B

5 12 12

33 36 70

130 230 310

100 300 850

Hooked Fastener : Elbowed arm is with transfer ration, fast binding catch hook can be adjusted axially, it can be made automatic locking with low force usage, and it preventes opening. It is used for locking of covered chamber or as mould binder etc. Galvanised and pasified casing and hardened and oiled contra holder bushes are equipped with stainless steel rivets. Order 847/S

( kN ) Force Setting F1 Range

3.0

Order 848/P

1 2 3 4

Page

1.0 1.4 2.5 4.5

Sayfa 188 188

26 32 42 55

28 43 64 84

60 70 102 140

90 110 300 710

It can be used in chemistry / food sector Section and hygenic places, outdoors and at machines Press under heavy climatic conditions, it is anti Mould magnetic resistant to corrosion and acide.

230

300

LONG TYPE HOOK FASTENER

FASTENER

( kN ) Force Setting F1 Range

295

LOCK HOOKED PULL FASTENER

Order Model 847/S ( 3 )

STAINLESS Order LONG TYPE Model HOOK 848/P ( 1-2-3-4 )

Similar to Model 848, is produced completely from stainless material.

242

Order Model 848

It is vertical and horizantal used contra holder with fixed counter hook slot, galvanised and pasivated casing is for hardened, oiled bushes and chambers, covers. ( kN ) Force Setting Range

Order 848

1 2 3 4

1.0 1.4 2.5 4.5

26 32 42 55

( 1-2-3-4 )

28 43 64 84

60 70 102 140

90 110 300 710

Modular Accessory Ergonomic Structure

Order Model 835..

150

192

34 84

25 25

/1 20

L 895

L/3

EXTENSION ADAPTER

Ø6 H7

Order No 895 L/4 L4

2x45 C E

Length A 2 3

Length A

B C E L 12 6.5 9 12 48 15 9.5 12 15 78

2 3

2x45

12 15

B 6.5 8.5

C 9 12

Lenght : 5

2.50

5.00

E 12 15

L1 L2 L3 L4 127 110 35 48 75 167 150 45 73 105

2 3

8 6

L 52 82

20 92

L1 35 65

Ø6 M5

2 3

870..

8 13

M6 6

Lenght

15 15

1.560

CONNECTING LEVER

Order No 895 L/2

M8 x 65

DOGWRENCH TYPE Order Model FASTENER

Order No 895 L/3 8

Length L

ADAPTER STUD 8

M12 L1

L 6

( kN ) Force

Order 835

Multi Hole

B 5.5 10

10 20 10 40

EXTENSION ADAPTER

Order No 895 L/1

15 M5

170

8.5

10 5

Modular System Order Formation MODEL 800 MODEL 895L / 1 MODEL 895L / 2 MODEL 895L / 3

38 58

MO Sele DEL 89 ction 5L as p / 4 er re MOD ques t EL 8 95L /2

MODE

10 8.5

220

95L

EL 8

7.5 Ø 6.5

MOD

8.5

Order Model 895..

LONG ARMED HORIZANTAL FASTENER

8.5

In modular system, for holder casing Model : 800 ( Based perpendicular Fastener ) Product selection numbered 2 or3 can be done. By selecting products from accessories, system will be created.

Ø8

MANUAL FASTENER

Order 870

( kN ) Force

Lenght : 4

4.00

Complete presentation with pressure bolt, protective rubber, double color handle and dogwrench unit.

M12 x 80 Section Press Mould

600

Page

189

Sliding Combine Slide Lug SPARE EQUIPMENT

min-max

Upper Lug / Casing Clamp Block

SLIDING COMBINE LUG

For "T" Channel Machine Plates

As well as, can be used in single system ( 1130 T / 1150 T / 1160 T ), also it can be used for overlapped high parts with additional sliding slide kits. Order No 1130-014 DT 1130-016 DT 1130-018 DT 1130-020 DT 1130-022 DT

14 16 18 20 22

M 12

1150-118 1150-120 1150-122 1150-124 1150-128

DT DT DT DT DT

18 20 22 24 28

M 16

1160-222 1160-224 1160-228 1160-232 1160-236

DT DT DT DT DT

22 24 28 32 36

"T" CHANNEL

Height

Clamping Forces: Product 1130 ( Bottom Supported ) 2000 Kgf Clamping force Product 1150 ( Bottom Supported ) 2500 Kgf for 1 Unit Product 1160 ( Bottom Supported ) 5500 Kgf

Min. 0 158 83 Max. Max. mm mm 105 60

M 18

Order No

Lug Height Motion h

1130-060 14-22 1150-062 18-28 Usage information / advantages are similar with Page 191 1160-2080 22-36 e2

It is compatible with all systems in sliding combined connecting system.

Clamping Block:Forged Steel 42 CrMo Hardened : 38 - 42 HRC

Min. 45

Min. 48

Min. 0 173 90 Max. Max. mm mm 110 62

M 20 Min. 79

Min. 20 235 114 M 24 Max. Max. mm mm 139 80 M30

Wrench SW

10 mm

130 mm

48 mm

45 mm

4.0 kg

Sliding slide kit for clamping block / casing B A

M 20

M 24

140 mm

55 mm

48 mm

178 12 24 mm mm mm

74 mm

59 12.8 mm kg

12 mm

0 ~ 60 0 ~ 62 20 ~ 80

5.4 kg

Order No

L L

T Channel

1130 M12 14-22 130 48 39 047 M16 M16 1150 M18 18-28 140 55 42 053 M20 M20 1160 M22 22-36 178 74 55 074 M24 M30

Bottom Support Team ( In lifting ), according to work piece dimension

SLIDE COMBINED LUG

B A Order No

Order No : 1130 T - 1150 T - 1160 T

"T" Channel Sliding Slide Combined Clamping Lug / Single Use Group According to height status of work piece ( mould ), single connecting group can be selected. Its technical details is similar with Slide Combine Lug in Page 191. For technical dimension, pls. refer to Page 191. In our page, dual ( bottom supported ) connecting group data are available.

T Channel

1130 M12 14-22 130 48 45 045 M16 M16 1150 M18 18-28 140 55 48 048 M20 M20 1160 M22 22-36 178 74 59 059 M24

"T" Channel Sliding Combined Clamping Lug can make high dimensional connection according to work piece status by increasing slides at more higher work pieces in single unit ( 0 - 60 /62/80 ). Connecting system is completed

Page

190

Slide is fixed, than upper casing Accoring to work piece dimension, distance Bottom slide is fixed to T Channel is placed on slide and fixed. is completed by increasing support slides. by making suitable to work piece.

Slide Combine Sliding Lug SPARE EQUIPMENT

min-max

Lug lifting Kit Casing Lug Kit

Front View

It is compatible with all slide combined lug models.

Order

Thread Length

1130 - 818 1150 - 920 1160 - 1024

M 18 M 20 M 24

Order

ThreadxLenth

1130 -412

M12 x30

1130 -416

M16 x34

1150 -516

M16 x34

1150 -518

M18 x38

1150 -520 1160 -724 1160-730

M20 x38 M24 x55 M30 x66

Pre Press Lug DP Flat Part Clamping 1130 - 1150 - 1160 BSP Longitudinal Cylinder Clamping Lug 1130 - 1150 - 1160 ESP Transverse Cylinder Clamping Lug 1130 - 1150 - 1160 Slide Fixing Bolt for " T " Channel Plates Code : 1130 "T" Lug 14 - 16 -18 20 - 22 Code : 1150 "T" Lug 18 - 20 - 22 24 - 28 Code: 1160 "T" Lug 22 - 24 - 28 - 32 -36

Bottom slide is made suitable to work piece and fixed.

L Usage Area Especially at injection machines or threaded all kinds of flat plates and in addition measuring device standards. min-max

83 96 134

Slide, Fixing Bolt It is suitable for all of slide combined lug models.

Side View

k M s1

SLIDING COMBINE LUG For threaded machine plates

Material: CK 45 DIN Slide Group: 35-38 HRC f b Hardened Lug Forged Steel For threaded hole plates, slide system, combined clamping lug Code: 1130 - 1150 - 1160 Order No

Height h

1130-012 M M12 Up to 1130-016 M M16 60mm 1150-116 M M16 1150-118 M M18 1150-120 M M20

Up to 62mm

1160-220 M M20 From 1160-222 M M22 20 1160-224 M M24 Up to 1160-230 M M30 80mm

Lug s

Wrench SW

From 15 30 up to 83 mm mm

113 M mm 18 10

Between From 18 35 and mm 96 mm

125 M 12 mm 20

Between From 22 41.5 175 and mm mm 95 mm

130 38 48 16 28 22 mm mm mm mm mm 26 140 42 55 18 32

mm mm mm mm mm

26 30

Clamping kg Force

2000 kgf

2.6 kg

2500 kgf

3.8 kg

5500 kgf

8.9 kg

34 M 24

12 24

178 55 74 24 45 38 mm mm mm mm mm 44 55

SLIDING SLIDE THREADED SCREW CLAMPING LUG : The difference of this system from other kits, is that is prepared to mount to connecting system threaded screw machine table, other connecting forces and working system are similar. Its mounting and connecting system is as follows. Model 1130 M; M12 - M16 Thread hole mounting is completed with Cylinder Head Cap Screw. Part Height Clamping Range: 0 - 60 mm. 1 Set Lug Clamping Force: 2000 kgf. Model 1150 M; M16 - M18 Thread hole mounting is completed with Cylinder Head Cap Screw. Part Height Clamping Range: 0 - 62 mm'. 1 Set Lug Clamping Force: 2500 kgf. Model 1160 M; M20 - M22 - M24 Thread hole mounting is completed with Cylinder Head Cap Screw. Part Height Clamping Range: 20 - 28 mm. 1 Set Lug Clamping Force: 5500 kgf. According to work piece dimension and thread similarity in machine table, it is presented as optional model. Especially, it is preferred at mounting of injection moulds and press sheet moulds to machine. In addition it is quite useful and compact product in processing parts of machine tools. Advantages : 2000 kgf - 5500 kgf Clamping force - Use in perforated plates - fixing in different position by sliding on slide - Clamping unsupported high and low distance by Cylinder Head Cap Screw - due to its practical structure, (Compact tool that has not protrusion part ), it presents fast and easy connection . Connection system having vertical effect bonding force- Stepless and Resistless Connection - Quick pull back of fastener - ensures fast and best access facility in work piece changement - By bridging hole or "T" Channel Distance, extension of connecting area ( Strengthening) is provided. 2

Upper casing is slided to slide, it is brought to position on work pieces.

Connecting system is completed

Fix upper bolt of lug to work piece.

Page

191

TAKILON Acrylic

100 ml. Luminescent Paint

POLINAT

Component Order : Polinat 21

LIQUID / Water POWDER / Granulated

TAKILON - COLD ACRYLIC

Mould Repair, In Feeding / Filling Mould : It is self hardening repair acrylic that is used in scraper and bedding plates, plastering gaps, cancelling of undesired holes as well as used for punch bearing in simple cutting and drilling moulds providing suitability at drilling and levelling processes done on filled surfaces. Technical Data : Mixing Ratio : 5 Unit Dosage - 3.5 Unit Liquid Dosage : Dosing without measuring tank ( As per requests ) Mixing : 30 - 35 Second ( yoghurt consistency ) Working Time : At the end of 2 - 2.5 minutes Hardening Time : In 15 minutes Application : It should be castable consistency. Specified data are in 230C room temperature and from the beginning of Order : TAKILON Acrylic Repair Filler Large Model : 500 gr. Powder & 250 ml. Water Small Model : 100 gr. Powder & 50 ml. Water Punch Bedding Scraper

Casting Plaster Takilon Acrylic

Any oil on the scraper plate should be removed. Use solvent (Release agentsilicon) to avoid sticking. Place the Scraper and the matrix correctly and connect to each other. the correct alignment is important for the operation. Using Magnetic 'V' Block for this operation guarantees vertikality. Or Setting Shims can be used to ensure the alignment for Punch Bush/Matrix. Later the surface finish works are done. The mixture solidifies and spoils if it is kept for too long.

Page

192

Electrical Insulation Casting and Model Filler

POLINAT - CASTING RESIN

AZUL - MOULD EXERCISE PAINT

It can be processed easily with turning leveling at mould and casting works.

Blue Colour Limiting Paint as remarkable density , fast drying.

Definition : Polinat 8021 is two component not-solvent, poliurethane base, electrical insulation and casting resine. Specifications : Electrical imperviousness and dielectric constant number is high in different terms and various temperatures. It is resistant to abrasion, acid alkaline and other chemical or corrosive materials. It is hardened in low temperatures without changing any significiant volume. Thanks to catalyzers, drying time can be shortened. Usage Areas : It is used in electric cable industry, casting of head and additional joints, insulating of end fasteners, plunger pump, insulator, transformers and various electrical component productions. In addition, it is used in all kinds of high voltage devices, transformers, television broadcast lines, telephone cord fasteners and rollers, to prevent flowing and leading in all kinds of condesators as well as to prevent noice that can be occurred Through resonance and vibration in devices such as ballast , regulator. It is suitable to complete filling in casting works at mould and machine sectors. It can be processed with turning levelling easily. Usage: 2. component in upper section of box is emptied into main material in large box. Then, it is mixed until obtaning homogenous mixture. The surface to be applied is decontaminated from oil, dirt, rust and burrs, prepared mixture should be used in 30 40 minutes. If all of material is not used, sufficient mixture should be done. Attention !!! : If breathed, R20 is harmful. R36 / 37 / 38 is irritant for eyes, respiratory system and skin. While working, use suitable protective clothing, gloves.

Blue oily mix liquid leaves a clear sign on any kind of metal, AZUL is indicated blue, bright sign on all metal parts that can be seen easily, This is coupled to show transfers and defects from another surface, it is ideal for marking surface. Due to its high cohesion feature, it can be easily transferred from one surface to another one. It can be used by mixing water. It can be cleaned from surfaces easily, before using, should be shake well and protected from cold. Note: There is no need for extra precaution for respiration. For sporadic and typical use, vinyl gloves is sufficient. In long period use, rubber gloves should be used. It should be stored under room temperature. Order : AZUL Exercise Paint

MOULD MARKING PAINT MOULD EXERCISE PAINT

Mould marking and exercise paint is presented in 95 cc. and 115 cc. packing. It is quick dried in applied surfaces - after dried, it is not effected from oil, Drawing or exercise processes are continued on applied surfaces. Also, it has feature that is protected metal against rust ( It drifts applied surface away). Attention !!! : Burnable with fire Order : 95 cc Marking Paint ( Red ) 95 cc Exercise Paint ( Blue ) In addition, 115 cc packing is available. ALCON (Thick / Thin) Exercise Paste Double component ( Thick - Thin ) Exercise Paste DRY PIGMENT PAINT It is 400 gr, thinned with oil and is provided coloured view in exercise processes.

Dry Pigment Marking Exercise

G.125

G.1

G.19

Page

Injection Mould Ready Standard Mould Base

Page

Injection Mould ID Card Writing Pen

Page

Injection Mould Ground Plate Liner Band/ Shimmer

Page

G.17

Injection Mould Ejector Plate Ball Bush Kit

G.1

Page Ejector Plate / Cores Guide Pillar 28 Without Oil Groove TM

G.11

Page

1A G.1

Ejector Plate Guide Pillar With Oil Groove

G.18

G.21

1A G.1

Injection Mould Page Ejector Plate - Guide Pillar Page Support Plate, Shaft Without Oil Groove 30 30 Intermediate Link Block Ball Bush Kit

G.120

Page

1A G.1

G.14

Thrust Tablet Mould Plates Dowel Pin

Page

Injection Mould Core Pillar Angular Pillar

G.61

G.16

1A G.1

G.13

1A G.1

G.12

G.31

1A G.1

Angular Core Pin Bearing Retainer Plate

Page

31 G.28

G.117 Page Injection Mould Strike Back Page Pillar Ejector 32 Threaded Pillar 33

G.32

1A .1

G.13.D Stepped Guide Pillar Page With Collar With / Without Oil Groove 36

G.30

G.12.D Stepped Guide Pillar With / Without Oil Groove

G.48

Page

Steel Guide Bush With Collar

G.26

1A G.1

Page

Retainer Bush Length Centering Steel Bush

G.27

Page

Ejector Plate Centre Collar Steel Bush

G.25

Bush with Collar, Self Lubricating

G.29

Page

Standard Guide Bush, Self Lubricating

G.74

Ejector Plate Ball / Steel Bush Kits

Page

Standard Guide Bush, Steel

G.122

G.123

Page Sliding Plate, Special Cut, Self Lubricating

Page

G.75

Linear Ball Bearing Guide Bush

Page

Ejector Plate, Bush with Center Collar, Self Lubricating

G.121

Two Way Sliding, Special Cut, Self Lubricating

G.70

Page Ejector Plate, Linear Ball Page Bearing Bush, 45 43 With Collar

SECTION: Injection Mould, Standard Components

Sliding Guide Bush, Self lubricating

Page

'T' Shaped Plate, Special Cut Self Lubricating

G.83

Ball Cage, Bronz Bush Kit With Retaining Ring

INDEX

Page

Index

Sliding Guide Plate, Hollow, Self Lubricating

Page

193

G.130

G.131 /1-2-3-4-5

G.127

G.128

G.60

Page

G.59 Locking Cone, Precision Locating, Support Washer

G.130G Injection Mould Slide Locating, Oil Groove / 74 Self Lubricating

Page

G.132

G.129

Page

Injection Mould Locating Cone Block

Page

Plunger Erosion Chucks EDM Sets

Page

Injection Mould Locating Blocks

G.124

Page

Injection Mould Non Resettable Production Counter

Plunger Erosion Chucks EDM Vise

Page

Permanent Magnetic Conveyor Block

Heavy Tonnage Angular Conveyor Swivel Eyebolt

Page

Conveyor Stray / Hook Work Safety

Page

Injection Mould Square Block Locating

Page

Percussion Sets Letter- Thumbwheel Switch Sets

Page

Heavy Tonnage Conveyor Swivel Eyebolt

Page Injection Mould Tube, Non Resettable 78 Production Counter

Page

Injection Mould Safety Lock Split Pin

G.140

G.141

Page

Injection Mould Square Lock Group Block

G.142

Injection Mould Long Locating Block

Page

Screwed Load Eyebolt, fixing Type Import/ Domestic

Page

Angular, Swivel Screwed Eyebolt

Page

Deformed Thread Repair Kit

Page

Modular Mould Coupling Sets

Page

Fasteners, Countersunk Bolt, Cylinder Head Cap Screw, Nut, Washer

HIGH QUALITY 12.9

Page

Fasteners, Cylinder Head Cap Screw, Countersunk Burr

Page Mould Assembly Set, Allen Key and Sets

Mould Clamping ' T ' Footing Stud

G.145

Page

Mould Clamping, Plain Stud, Nut - Washer

Page Mould Clamping Key Edged Stud, Toothed

Sayfa 194 194Index

Page

129

Disc / Plate Dish Springs DIN 2093

Page

132

Ball, Spring, Shoulder Screw, Core Pins

Page

135

SECTION: Injection Mould, Standart Compenents

Spring Compressing Precision Adjust Toothed Plug

INDEX

G.39

Page Guide Screws, Shoulder Element

136

Page

137

Round Wire Steel, Special Winding Spring

Rectangular Extra Light Load Light Green Spring

Page

139

Tolerans h7 m6

Page

142

Page

173

Rectangular Heavy Load Red Spring

146

147

Pin Cutting, Face Grinding Machine

Page Pin Forming / Stepped Processing Device 174 Universal Type

Page

Page Dowel Pin 7979, Puller Complete Set

174

140

Rectangular Light Load Green Spring

Page

141

Rectangular Medium Load Blue Spring

Tolerans h7 m6

Dowel Pin 7979, With Air Groove

Page

Pin Forming / Stepped Processing Device Motor Type

Dowel Pins, 6325

Page

Precision, Balance Gauge Stand, Table Type

148

176

Hand Type/Traveller Chamfering Machine

Page

173

Chucks, Accurate Solution Fixtures

Page

181

MG MC

Page

190

Slide Combined Shoe In " T " Grooves

Page Slide Combined Shoe in Toothed Plate

191

Mould and Manufacturing Chemicals

Page

192

Page

Pls.Mould / Identificiation 200 Standard Elements

Page

202

Mini, Core Combination

Page

203

Page

208

Slide / Undercut Units

Core Retainer and Mould Lock

Page

204

Page

209

Ready Core and Wedge

Core Retainer and Accessories

Page

205

Page

210

Standard, Core Combination

Flexible Inner Core & Length Extension Kit

SECTION: Injection Mould, Standart Compo nents

Page

206

Page

211

Angle Core Pin and Bush Combination

Flexible Inner Core & Length Cutting Device

INDEX

Page

207

Page

212

Index

Compact Cores, Side Hollow

Inner Core Housing and Angular Bush

Page

195

Page

212

Page

217

Page

221

Page

224

Page

227

Page

229

Page

Parallel Inner Core and Plated Inner Core

Core Coupling and Per. Core End

Injection Mould Mould Counter

Page

213

Page

218

Page

222

Page

Modular Plate Retainer

224

Headless Ejector Atm. Retainer

227

Fast,Pneumatic Valve Ejector Unit

Page

230

Sayfa 196 196Index

2/4 Flexible Inner Core

Ready Perpendicular Core Complete Unit

Ejector Plate Accelerator

Page

214

Page

219

Page

222

Page

Adjusted Plate Grooving Stroke Limiter

225

Ejector, Accelarator Gear Unit

228

Inj. Cold Runner Deflection

Page

230

Calibrated / Fixed Core Retainer, Pin

Ready Perpendicular Core and Blocks

Dual Ejector Plate Opening System

Stepped / Locked Plate Grooving

High Temperature, Date Stamp Inner

Two-Way Pneumatic Valve Unit

Page

215

Page

220

Page

223

Page

225

Page

228

Page

231

Angular / Core Slide Housing

Special Flex Core Order Example

Dual Ejector Plate Fast Opening Sys.

Stepped Plate Opening Unit

Page

216

Page

Perdendicular Core and Replacement Block

Magnetic Disc

220 and Shock Absorber

Page

223

Page

226

Page

Multi Stamp Combined Block

229

Press Mould Stamping

231

Page

SECTION: Injection Mould, Standart Components

Dual Plate Ejector System

Core Limiter and Intermediate Reducer

Pneumatic, Ejector Valve Unit

Injection Mould Cable Retainer

INDEX

Page

232

Page

237

Page

242

Page

247

Injection Mould Recycling Tablets

Core Block Retainer, Round Type

Mould Plate Spacer Combination

Plastic Injection Countersunk Ejector Pin

Page

233

Page

238

Page

243

Page

248

Injection Mould Calendar-Date Stamps

Rectangular Core Block Retainers

Ejector Plate Automatic Stroke Accelerator Unit

Plastic Injection Stepped Ejector Pin

Page

234

Page

239

Page

244

Page

249

Injection Mould Air Valve Gas Reliefs

Injection Mould, Core Retainer Latch

Injection Mould Hydraulic Cylinder Cores

Plastic Injection Cylindrical head Ejector Pin

Page

235

Page

240

Page

245

Page

250

Injection Mould Pneumatic Ejector Valve

Core Block, Wear Plates

Ejector Plate Inclined Ejector Pin Unit

Plastic -Metal Inj. Cylindrical head Ejector Pin

Page

236

Page

241

Page

246

Page

251

Plate Puller Frictional Thrust Puller

Ready Core Blocks and Stops

Ejector Pin Cutting Face Grinding Machine

Plastic -Metal Inj. Plate Ejector Pin

INOX Page

252

Page

257

Metal Injection Plate Ejector, Oxidation

Metal Injection Ejector Sleeves

Page

253

Page

258

Metal Injection Cylinder Head Ejector, Oxidation

Metal Injection Nozzle Runner Inclined Flange

Page

254

Page

259

Metal Injection Stepped Ejector and Threaded Pin

Plastic Injection Nozzle Runner, Runner Flange

SECTION: Injection Mould, Standart Components

Page

255

Page

260

Ejector Pins, Copper Alloy, Stainless

Tunnel Runner Special Types

INDEX

Page Plastic Injection, Ejector Sleeves

256

Page

261

Index

Tunnel Runner, Standard Types

Page

197

Page

262

Page

267

Page

272

Page

278

Page

284

Page

290

Page

Heat Insulation Plates Mould Heat Meter

Scraping, Deburring Sets

Hot Runner Clamp & Cartdridge Resistances

Hot Runner Heat Control Units

Hot Runner Systems Assembly Process

Hot Runner Gate Valve Assembly Kits

Page

263

Page

268

Page

273

Page

280

Page

285

Page

291

Sayfa 198 198Index

Pls. Raw Material Seperators Colour Change

Countersinking, Deburring Sets

Hot Runner Spiral Nozzle, Runner Resistance

Hot Runner and Pls. Raw Material Technical Information

Hot Runner Main & Input Nozzles

Linear Slide Linear Optical Scales

Page

264

Page

269

Page

274

Page

281

Page

286

Page

293

Mould Assembly Pliers, Deburring

Scraping, Countersinking Sets

Manifold System Resistances, Termokupls

Hot Runner Standard Nozzle Series

Hot Runner Assembly Kits

Linear Slide Linear Optical Scales

Page

265

Page

270

Page

275

Page

282

Page

287

Page

295

Runner Cutting with Heat Controllled

Mould Lubrication Protective Cleaning Spray

Hot Runner Plugs and Sockets

Hot Runner Multi Nozzle Series

Hot Runner Gate Valve Runners

Linear Rotary Encoder-Optical Scales

Page

266

Page

271

Page

276

Page

283

Page

288

Page

296

SECTION: Injection Mould, Standart Components

Scraping, Deburring Sets

Hot Runner Nozzle, Assembly Cleaning Gaskets

Hot Runner Manifold Systems

Hot Runner Spinning Type Economic Nozzle

Hot Runner, Gate Valve, Manifold Systems

Injection Mould Cooling Systems

INDEX

Page

297

Automatic System End Couplings

Page Automatic Hose Entry Fittings Group

302

Page

307

Page

312

Page

319

Page

329

Stone Sharpening Hole Inner Grindings

Mounted Felt Bobs Shaft: 3-6 mm in Polishing Process

Diamond Riffler and Burrs

Pneumatic Tools and Machines

Page

298

Page

303

Page

308

Page

313

Page

320

Page

330

Metal Injection Cooling, Fast Systems

Water Runners Drilling Punch Distribution Header

Steel Grinding EKR Stones & Motors

Diamond Compounds in Lapping and Polishing Process

Fitter Rifflers and Running-in Sets

Drill Sharpening Burr Sharpening Machines

Page

299

Page

304

Page

309

Page

314

Page

323

Page

331

USA System Fast Automatic Couplings

Cooling System Control & Test Equipments

Polishing and Ceramic Stones in Leveling Process

Electrical Spiral Leveling / Polishing Machines

Emery Cloth Industrial Fiber Mops

Band Sanding Machines

SECTION: Injection Mould, Standart Components

Page

300

Page

305

Page

310

Page

315

Page

325

Page

Cooling System Hose Entry Couplings

Deep Insertion Cooling Separators

Mounted Points Shaft: 3 - 6 mm in Leveling Process

Pneumatic Machines Precision Filing Rotary Leveling

Polishing and Workshop Sets

Magnetic Chucks

333

INDEX

Page

301

Page

306

Page

311

Page

316

Page

327

Page

334 Index

Water Runners, Plugs, Couplings

Chisel Sharpening Machine Diamond Stones

Mounted Brushes, Rubbers, Emeries

Diamond Burr, Deburring, Leveling

Disc Stones Flap Sandpapers and Machines

Mould Handling, Stacking Machines

Page

199

PLASTIC INJECTION MOULD STANDARD SYSTEMS 1 2

Slide Core Unit

Page 203

Combined Mould Calendar

Code:

CORE SYSTEMS

Flexible Inner Core Page 211

Automatic Flexible Inner PE Core

3 4

Code:

6 7 8 9 19 20 21 22

Mould Hub

Automatic Cooling Water Coupling

Code:

Core Plate Changeable

Code:

Page 219

Perpendicular Core External Contact

DHO Code:

Compact Orifice Core

Code: Cooling Disc

SB With Gearbox Code:

Safety Lock Extender

Page 208

Code: Mould Safety

Lock

Page 208

LazerWriting Mould ID Label

Mould Calendar Max. 1500

Code:

Page 228

Recycling

Code: Pneumatic Ejector Valve

27 28

Page

200

15 16

Page 229

Block Calendar

Page 228

Core Thrust Plate

Code:

Page 204

Code:

Side Hole Core

Page 207

Movable Core Head

Code:

Page 214

Section Injection Mould

Cooling Tube

TB With Gearbox EP

Page 222

Magnetic Pin Stops

Code:

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

Perdendicular Core Limiter

Page 220

Code:

Page 226

Ejector Plate Accerelator

Code:

Ejector Plate Code: Shock Absorber

Code: Copper 2 Way

07 08

Mould Coupling Intermediate Extender Length Extension

Double Plate Code: Ejector System

Page 207

Code: Symbol Seals

Page 219

Calendar 13 FP Changeable

4 5

Code:

01 90 01

6 0 50

21 11

Coloured Mould ID Manual Writing

Page 222

Page 220

Mini Core Holder

Code:

Page 205

For products not avaible in our catalogue, please request Technical Information or (Cumsa) Catalogue from Our Company...

19 21

Core Housing

Code:

Page 205

Code: Pipe Ejector

Ejector TE Plain Without Cap Code:

Quartet Inner Core Page 213

Code:

PS PF

VI Code:

28 20

Page 212

Shaft Core Pin Page 215

36 15

38 39

Flat Ejector Retainer

Page 227

Page 212

31 32 33 34

Bush

Page 212

Code: Inner Core SD Slide Bearing Code:

Page 216

Inner Core Flat Type

Bush Per. Core

Code: Angular Guide

Ejector Plate Accerelator Page 227

18 40

18 CodeAngular Slide

Housing

Page 215

Code

Fixed Core BD Slide Page 214

PLASTIC INJECTION MOULD STANDARD SYSTEMS

18 42 43

Ejector Plate Shock Absorber

Ejector Plate Lock

Code:

Page 220

Page 225

Stroke Limiter

Code:

Page 224

Code:

Plate Retainer

Code:

46 47

Page 224

Slide Core Engraving

54 55 56

Page 203

Vacuum Jet Hose (VK)

Code:

High Pressure Air Valve

Code:

Page 229

Spiral Ended (NP) VP Ejector Pin Vacuum Jet Valve Pipe for (VK)

Code:

Automatic Vacuum Jet System

Ejector (Spiral) Position Fixing (Irrotational Type)

Code:Without Cap

New Mould Systems Digital Code: Mould Counter

VV 60

Vacuum /Jet Air Suction Valve

Code:

Cable Protection SC Cap

Page 204

Code:

62 63

Angle Core Pin Retainer

Page 206

Rectangular Angle Core BG Pin Retainer Code:

Code:

Page 209

55 56

60 61

63 67

64 66

Page 208

64 67

Compact Double Plate Code: Ejector SY System

Double Ejector Plate Ejector Plate Code:

Page 222

15 70

Page 206

Rotary Pin)

Automatic Code: Core Retainer Stops

Code:

RCM Holder (With

Automatic Per. Core Slide ( LD )

Code:

50 51 52

Page 223

Page 206

Angular Core Pin

Flat Ejector

Page 231

Adjustable Code: Core CR Thrust

CC Page 221

Page 227

Spiral Ended(NP) Pipe VS Ejector(VP)

Code:

Flat Pin Hole Retainer

Code:

50 48

Double Plate Ejector DY System

Accessories

Code:

SpecialAngle Mechanic DHPerpendicular Code:

Vacuum Jet Pneumatic Cyclinder

Code:

Vacuum Jet Connection Socket

Code:

Automatic Per. Core Shaft

Magnetic Code: Stopper Pin

Page 220

18 For products not available in our catalogue, Section Bölüm please request Technical Information or Injection Enjeksiyon (Cumsa) Catalogue from Our Mould Kalıp Company...

Page Sayfa

201 201

STANDARD CORE COMBINATION

MINI GUIDE

STANDARD CORE COMBINATION

MG MINI SLIDE

Mini Guide: It is consisted of Angle Pin and Locking Thrust Shoe. While Mould is Closed, it can easily adjust with Alien Key.

STANDARD CORE COMBINATION

MC MINI HOUSING

Mini Slide: Ready for processing, the only thing to be done is processing cavity surfaces. Material : 1.2344 Patented System Hardened 42/45 HRC Attention !!! Processing Reference is 13.2.

Material : 1.2510 Hardened 52/56 HRC Patented System

Mini Casing: It is a hardened and ground ready unit. There are different assembly possibilities, also replacement is easy. It is with magnetic retainer. Material : 1.2510 Patented System Hardened 52/56 HRC

Attention !!! Standard Stroke (Motion) is 4 mm.

48 36 23 16

6.5

23.8

1x1

B 17

5.3

13.2

Ø6

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

Ø5

56 A

37.15 A

MINI GUIDE Order

Reference

A mm

CR (N)

MG.12 1648

50.000

MG.20 1648

90.000

ASSEMBLY ( CONNECT) and OPERATING 1- Determine the position of Mini Housing (MB) and mount it. 2- Please insert Magnetic Retainer into hole. 3- Insert Mini Slide (MC) 4- While mould is closed, please a d jut Mini Slide (MC) to maximum 0.6 mm

Page

202

MINI SLIDE Order

Reference MC.12 1252 MC.12 1652 MC.20 1252 MC.20 1652

A mm

B mm

12.5 12.5 20.5 20.5

12 16 12 16

Mould Opened

Order

Reference

A mm

B mm

MB.12 2056

12.5

MB.20 2056

20.5

Mould Closed M 5x25

Cylinder Head Cap Screws

6.5 3.5

Section Injection Mould

MINI CASING

Ø 5x12

Retainer Pin

M 5x16

Cylinder Head Cap Screws

Max. 0.6

ATTENTION !

SLIDE CORE UNIT

Bottom Hole Forming, (Engraving) Processing Core Group

SU SLIDE HIDDEN CORE UNIT

Demountable External Core Unit Max. 5mm Stroke Distance 3 Pieces Compact System. All surfaces are precisely grinded 90º perpendicularly. Ideal Structure for Injection Mould Internal/External Details, Mould Consisted Movable and 2 Different Slider Inserts, Flexibility Provided related with its property.

Material : 1.2344 Hardened 54/56 HRC Patented System

In contrast to Normal Core, provides reverse motion, 5 mm Stroke Mini Product is ideal for production of internal nails. Forming of slide from 2 parts, provides easily process possibility the desired nail form, All processes are made 90º perpendicularly to mould parting surface. Material : 1.2344 Hardened 54/56 HRC Patented System

X (Max.)

210

Bottom Hidden (Core) Forming (Cavity) Processing Core Group

210 E

H Y (Max.)

Y (Max.) Material : 1.4034

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

M A

M C

L g6

A 8.2 12.2 16.2

K 12.5 17 22

M 8 11 14

Order

L 8.25 10.5 13

B 12 16 20

C 20 26 32

R 3.75 4.5 5

S 3 4 5

D 10 12 16

K E 18 24 30

T M4 M5 M6

F 60 73 86 X 7 9 10

H 32 36 40

A 8.2 12.2 16.2

Order

UU.08 1220 UU.12 1626 UU.16 2032

Y 8 7 11

Assembly and Operation Example R

F SU.08 1220 SU.12 1626 SU.16 2032

Material : 1.4034 www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

H 32 36 50

J 16 20 25

B 12 16 20

K L 12.5 8.25 17 10.5 22 13

M 8 11 14

C 20 26 32 S 3 4 5

D 10 12 16

E 18 24 30

F 53 64 86

G 12 16 20

R 3.75 4.5 5

T M4 M5 M6

X 7 9 10

Y 8 7 11

A S

S +3

ATTENTION !

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Page Sayfa

203 203

When the mould is closed, it lets you set the core slide

It is unit of core system starting motion

It is delivered in position that angle and mounting holes are drilled and also presets are made. It requires very small mounting area on mould. All surfaces are precisely grinded and 90ยบ perpendicular surfaces are precisely processed.

Two retaining pins on the outer are fixed thrust block. The intermediate screw determines the position.

Material : 1.2312 Improved 1.080 N/ mm2 Patented System

D ร U

B R

It is delivered in position that connection holes are drilled and also presets are made. It requires very small mounting area on mould. All surfaces are precise grinded and 90ยบ perpendicular surfaces are processed with precision. Two retaining pins on the outer are fixed Material : 1.2312 thrust block. The intermediate screw Improved 1.080 N/ mm2 determines the position. Patented System

E D

Order

150

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

K 29 29 39 44

M 43.7 43.7 58 65

A 60 60 75 86 R 17 22 22 28

170

C 35 35 49 57

D 25 25 30 35

T M6x25 M6x25 M8x30 M8x35

U 10 10 12 16

RP 081015 101015 101020 121025

1 3

204

5x5 Order

B 30 40 40 48

Section Injection Mould

E 23 23 32 36

RP 2x Screw

The setting is done while mould is closed.

Page

Cylinder Head Cap Screw

Angular Pin

5x5 CG.60 3035 CG.60 4035 CG.75 4049 CG.86 4857

8 H

TF RP 2x Screw

Cylinder Head Cap Screw

CG READY CORE THRUST BLOCK

READY CORE GUIDE UNIT

G 6 6 7 8

H 23 23 27 32

CR (N) 180.000 320.000 320.000 480.000

T 2 x Imbus

CR.40 3840 CR.45 4849 CR.52 6052 CR. 52 6852 CR.52 7556 E 30 35 40 40 40

G 22 28 35 45 50

A 40 45 52 52 52 H 12 16 16 16 16

170 B 38 48 60 68 75

T M8x30 M10x35 M10x35 M10x35 M10x35

Assembly and Operation Example

C 40 49 52 52 56 RP 101020 121025 141030 141030 141030

D 25 28 32 32 32 CR (N) 320.000 480.000 750.000 750.000 750.000

The setting is done while mould is closed.

(Thrust Block )

Max. 1 ATTENTION

Setting Process: 1- Unbolt TF ( Bolt) 2- Tight RP ( Screw) 3- Lock TF.

1 3

(Thrust Block )

Setting Process: 1- Unbolt TF ( Bolt) 2- Tight RP ( Screw) 3- Lock TF.

Max. 1 ATTENTION

STANDARD CORE COMBINATION

Core Guide - Set: This unit is procured along with angle pin( Gl - 010 0090 ). There is Standard 12 mm Stroke. The setting can be done with a key from outside of mould. Material : 1.2312 Improved 1.080 N/ mm2 Patented System Attention!!! Standard Stroke (Motion) is 12 mm.

Core Slide: Ready for processing, the only thing to be done is processing cavity surfaces. The core element to be used should be mounted on this casing. Angle Hole should be drilled on core slide. Material : 1.2344 Patented System Hardened 42/45 HRC Attention !!! Processing reference is 24.5

Core Housing: It is a hardened and grinded ready unit. There are different assembly possibilities, also the replacement is easy. It also has a Magnetic Retainer. Slide Grooves and Connection Holes are in ready position inside of Core Casing and is along with its Magnetic Stops. It has been manufactured in different material and in different hardness from CA - BC to continue its operation as smooth, frictionless and

CA CORE HOUSING

without impairment. Material : 1.2510 Hardened 54/56 HRC

CG CORE SLIDE

PIN CORE GUIDE

Patented System

Imbus

170

Ref.

Ø6

73.5

Ø 10

(Imbus)

24.5

Ref.

80 150

150

18.6

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

170

1x1

43.7

5x5

CORE GUIDE

CG A 17 22

Order

CG.60 3075 CG.60 4075 CR (N) 180.000 320.000

RP 081015 101015

B 30 40

CORE SLIDE CA.32 2080 CA.32 2480 CA.42 2080

A 32 32 42

B 20 24 20

CA.42 2480

Order

Angular Pin GI.010075 GI.010075

Mould Closed

Mould Opened

M 6x25

4 3

BC.32 2885

A 32

B 56

C 21.5

BC.42 2885

26.5

Order

ASSEMBLY

Cylinder Head Cap Screw

CORE HOUSING

1- Pls. determine the position of Core Housing (BC) and mount it. 2- Place Magnetic Retainer into hole. 3- Determine the position of Core Slide (CA). 4- While mould is closed, pls. set core slide to max. 1 mm.

4 Ø 6x14

Retainer Pin

M 5x20

Cylinder Head Cap Screw

Max. 1

ATTENTION

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Page Sayfa

205 205

STANDARD CORE COMBINATION

Angular Pin: This pin, works compatibly with each core set in Cumsa Serie.

Angular Pin Retainer: It is same with round angularpin retainer (GR). However, it is 15o or 20o. Due to using this unit in more wider angle, it is greater than GR and it requests that a rectangular slot should be opened on mould. 2 Material : 1.2312 Improved 1.080 N/ mm

Angular Pin Retainer: This unit eliminates the Need for Angle Drilling on mould. Only, a hole is drilled from front face of mould to place unit and 0 0 select 10 or 15 .

Material : 1.7242

GI ANGULAR PIN RETAINER BG ANGULAR PIN RETAINER GR

Hardness : 60 HRC

A k6 ØM

Bedding Area

A ØU

6x6

ANGULAR PIN Order

GI.010.. L

GI.012.. L

GI.016.. L

GI.020.. L

GI.024.. L

GI.028.. L

Bedding Area

~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

25 30 35 40 45 50

L (Length)

075

090

105

095

110

130

115

135

160

140

165

190

170

195

220

200

225

250

Orderte : Pls. Inform " L " length size

CORE Sytems

206

ØU 7 H

Section Injection Mould

Reliable Label

On order: Pls Select L Length For Gl.

A 42 50 55 65 42 50 55 65

B 30 40 40 50 30 40 40 50

T M6x35 M8x40 M8x45 M10x50 M6x35 M8x40 M8x45 M10x50

Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø

BG.423016-15 BG.504020-15 BG.554024-15 BG.655028-15 BG.423016-20 BG.504020-20 BG.554024-20 BG.655028-20 G 15 22 22 26 15 22 22 26

K 28 34 38 45 28 34 38 45

C 30 36 40 45 30 36 40 45

On order: Pls. select L length for Gl (Angle Pin) Material : 1.7242 Hardened : 55 / 60 HRC

U 16 20 24 28 16 20 24 28

F 7.5 9 9 12 7.5 9 9 12 X 150

T Countersunk Head Screw

F Order

S A

GR.182622-10 18 GR.222826-10 22 GR.283432-10 28 GR.344038-10 34 GR.424546-10 42 GR.465050-10 46 GR.182622-15 18 GR.222826-15 22 GR.283432-15 28 GR.344038-15 34 GR.424546-15 42 GR.465050-15 46

F 7.5 11 13 17 19.5 21 7.5 11 13 17 19.5 21

G 6

H 3.8 4 5 5.5 6 7 3.8 4 5 5.5 6 7

Angular Pin

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

ANGULAR PIN RETAINER BG Order

ØD

On order : Inform Length Size.

Page

T Countersunk Head Screw ØC

A g6

Angular Pin

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

A g6

ANGULAR PIN

B 26 28 34 40 45 50 26 28 34 40 45 50

C 22 26 32 38 46 50 22 26 32 38 46 50

D 12 16 16 20 20 20 12 16 16 20 20 20

S T U M5x5 M5x16 10 12 M6x6 M6x16 16 20 M8x6 M8x20 24 28 M5x5 M5x16 10 12 M6x6 M6x16 16 20 M8x6 M8x20 24 28

E 10.8 11 13 17 19.5 21 10.8 11 13 17 19.5 21 X0

Injection Plastic Mould is to Create Side Hole.

Spring / Pin Loaded Compact Core / Hole Unit.

It is working mechanism used to form side holes. Core Pin is held with Automatic Locking System. The required area for mounting is very small. All surfaces are precisely grinded 900 perpendicularly. It is delivered with drilled mounting holes and also presets are made. It requires very small mounting area on mould.

4.2

7.8

Material : 1.2379 58 HRC Green Spring

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

ISO 10243

It reduces slot processing and assembly costs. The unit used in forming side holes on plastic parts is operated with opening and closing of mould. Mounting and demounting to mould is so easy. In comparison with the classic core system, it requires a lot fewer space on mould All surfaces are grinded 900 and super finished. It is a standard solution for moulders. Material : 1.2344 Hardened : 52-54 HRC

Green Spring

UC COMPACT CORE UNIT

READY CORE, SIDE HOLLOW

8 20

ISO 10243

30 Standard Stroke is 4.2 mm

Ø 23.8

4.0

Standard Stroke is 4.2 mm

32 g6

Back Tensile Force

< 40 Kg.

24 36

R4.4

M5x30

Cylinder Head Cap Screw

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

0.5

-0.1

11 12

4.8

4 32 g6

Ø 5 Pim

1.0

-0.1

6.4

Order:

18 Material : 1.2344 Hardened : 52-54 HRC

UC.32 5445

If desired, slotting is processed.

Order:

UA.36 3616

Ø 10 x 6

20.5

M5x25

Cylinder Head Cap Screw

Ø 10.5

Key inlet processing is as per order.

1 Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Page Sayfa

207 207

AUTOMATIC CORE RETAINER

It is for large Hydraulic Cores Operating With Angle Pin 38

Order

It is ready standard solution for moulders. It is worked easily and smoothly without requiring large loads. This Core retainer has 2000 Kg. load capacity. Material : 1.2510 Hardened : 56 HRC

12.5

MOULD PACKAGE, SAFETY LOCK BS

While Mould is non manufactured, it is holds mould closed, opens automatically. In the event that mould is not connected to the Injection Machine, it keeps the mould closed and protects it. When the mould is connected to injection, mould lock is opened automatically. BS.050075 BS.075100 BS.100125 BS.125150

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

L 50 75 100 125

M 75 100 125 150

N 8.7 7 6 4.8

X 150 120 100 80

Material : 1.0503 Hardened : 56 HRC

M6x35 Cylinder Head

Cap Screw

20 Ø 12

250 +5

850 N/mm2

M6x30

Mould Package Ø12 Lock is opened automatically 12 13 during operation. 10x32 Retainer Pin

Cylinder Head Cap Screw

R14

630 HV 0.1

MOULD SAFETY LOCK INTERMEDIATE EXTENDER

Ø 18

Pin Size: It should be 0.5 shorter than core height.

RA.16 3812 16

Ø 12

Page

208

Ø 12 Section Injection Mould

Order:

AB.302613

Ø 6.1 12 8

M6x16

14 10

Ø6

Ø3

Ø6 Pin

Ø 12 14 25 M6

0.5

18 Min.15

Ø 18

Extender Unit: It is used in spaces that mould plate is thicker than 120 mm. Material : 1.0503

Order:

It is used for thick plate moulds.

Material: 1.7242 60 HRC

10 11.8

L 14.5 According to system

Injection Plastic Mould CORE Systems

STOPPER CORE RETAINRER RCM RETAINER ACCESSORIES

Heat Resistance is 1500.

0.3 G H J

S ØC

Material : 1.8159 Hardness : 45 ± 3 HRC

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

G min.

STOPPER CORE HOLDER

Countersunk Head Screw

B 38 48 57

H J K N 4 10 10 Kg. 7 5 11 14 Kg. 8 6 12 18 Kg. 9 K : Forcing to release safety

Mould Opened

RCM

C E 2F G 8 25 7.7 7.6 10 32 8.7 8.6 12 37.5 9.7 9.6

R S 8 M5 10 M6 12 M8

T M6 M8 M10

H+0.1

Ø C+0.1

G min.

Dismantling Core

PO.120320 PO.150425 PO.200530 PO.250635 1 PO.340850

L 12 15 20 25 34

M M3x20 M4x25 M5x30 M6x35 M8x502

L+0.5

F H Demounting Core

2 F

+0.1

Air Ducted Pin

" K " is the approximate load value required to disengage from retainers.

CORE RETAINER Order

RC.123006 RC.164008 1 RC.205010 RC.246012 RC.328012 RC.328016 4

5 6 7 9 9 Reliable Label

Ø P H7

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

Ø C H7

P 6 8 10 12 16

* Technical Values are in RC Section

min.

N 7.5 10 13 16 23

Mounting with Modular Retainers

F+0.3

Mould Opened

Chuck Hardening : 60 HRC

RETAINER ACCESSORIES PO Order

Material : 1.8159 Hardness : 45 ± 3 HRC

In accessory mounting

Core System Complete Assembly Example

Retainer Pin

Recommended Core Mechanic Position Status

A RCM.16 3808 16 RCM.20 4810 20 RCM.24 5712 24 Order

0.5

A E

ØP

CORE RETAINER

PO / With Accessory

Head Screw

60 HRC

As Core Retainer or Different use of Retainer : It is a secure system preventing the Optional Pin: To fastening core retainer, the bolt bush falls of casings such as core etc. in vertical is fastened with set by drilling bush hole. It is optional direction and centering mould. It is presented with / as per order method facilitating dismantling, this Modular Retainer, Mounting Bolt and Retaining Pin requires very little mounting area in mould. T Countesunk product should be ordered separately. Head Screw Material : 1.3505 Heat Resistance is 1500'dir. M Hardness : 60 ± 2 HRC Countersunk

The bearing in mechanical stops prevents the abrasion arising from friction force, in contrast with its equivalents, it occupies less place on mould and its mounting requires less processing.

Bearing Stops

Optional belonging to RC Retainer (As per order)Bush-Countersunk Bold Set

H 16 15 17 23 27 25

A 12 16 20 24 32 32

B C 30 6x20 40 8x20 50 210x24 60 12x32 80 16x40 80 16x40

K 5 Kg. 7 Kg. 14 Kg. 21 Kg. 28 Kg. 38 Kg.

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

R 6 8 10 12 16 16

RC E F 21 5 28 6 34 8 42 10 56 12 56 16

T M5x16 M6x25 M8x30 M10x40 M12x50 M12x50

Page Sayfa

209 209

After setting core, pls. process 0.1 mm from end section to make pushing effortlessly.

LENGTH EXTENSION SET

It is used to extend length ( up to 315 mm) of flexible inner cores ( Such as PW ). It is a standard extension element, it is hardened and dimensionally grinded. There is a slotting available.

155

ØA

15 ØC

T V S ØU

0.5

Max. N

Max. M

Min. 1

2 Million Stamp Life

The required area for mounting is very small, it requires area as much as ejector pin. Excluding the desired form of operation, there is no need for any processing, grinding or hardening processes. Due to that parting surface is 900, mounting procedure is easy, it eliminates the needs of complex mechanic systems, opening process is radial motion. At the end of the stroke, according to the opening K values 0 are 3.5 mm , 4.5 mm and 5.5 mm. Working Temperature is 150 Material : 1.8159 Hardness : 45 ± 3 HRC ( We don't recommended welding / covering processes ).

As other ejectors, it is worked with ejector plates. Especially, it is ideal to remove small claws L

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

0.5

900

Bush

Screw

Ø A g6

FLEXIBLE CORE L. EXTENSION SET

ØA

ØU

0.1

0.5

L 125 175 125 175

M 16 20 16 20

N R 18 26 18 26

Important

V W

14 6

18 8

Flexible cores have key surfaces to their sides, they should be Ø A+0.5 connected.

D Opening (6mm) : < Up to 3 mm B Width : Min. 20 Can be slopped. 60 Surface / Bedding : Min. 5 mm Core Could can be adjusted with its cavity. Slot : ( 60 )

R ≥ 0.1

12 5

140 18 21

30 4.5 175 20 26 25 140 18 21 12.2 30 175 20 26 14.2 10 16.2 30 13.6 5.5 16 5.5 175 20 26 18.2

Max. C

G.110

10.2

Min. 20

Min. C

ØA

8.2

K 3.5 4.5 3.5 4.5

M6 x 16

Flexible Core

8.2

D E G 9 10 12 3.5 9 10 12 11.5 11.2 4.5 12 11.5 11.2 12

M5 x 16

6.2 6

C 22 30 22 30

M4 x 16

Mounting Procedure

2.5

V 5 6 8

Order

PW.060622 PW.060630 PW.060822 PW.060830 PW.080825 PW.081025 PW.081030 PW.081225 PW.081230 PW.101430 PW.101630 PW.101830

M6 x 36

U 14 16 20

58±2 HRC Tolerance: H7 / g6

The flexible core can be done as per request . 15xØG

2.0

R 1.25 2.0 2.5

B W

M5 x 36

C 6 8 10

Material : Bronze

1.25

T M4 M5 M6

D 60

M4 x 36

S 9.5 x 2 11.5 x 2 14.5 x 2.5

A 8 10 12

0.5

T Order

150

AP. 08 06 15 AP. 10 08 15 AP. 12 10 15

FLEXIBLE INNER CORE ( Radial Motion, Bedding, Threaded )

Assembly Procedure

Assembly Flange Page : 16

Page

210

Section Injection Mould

Reliable Label

Mould opened

ØA

Injection Plastic Mould EJECTOR systems

ØU

0.5 The core length should be 0.02/ Mould Closed 005 mm greater than its slot.

G.110

Assembly Flange Page : 16

Mould closed

After setting core, pls. process 0.1 mm from end section to make pushing effortlessly. Max. 26

Max. 20

Min. 1

Patented

Max. Working Surface

By facilitating stopper setting, longevity and guaranty are provided. Technical Data ( PW - Flexible Inner Core ) is in similar status, Patented System it is guaranteed to work of inner core facilitating stopper setting precisely and longevity. H7 is set to correspond to the tolerances and has been precisely Stoper Patented System processed according to the slot details. Patented System Patented System PXappropriate Cutting Jig Doing cutting processes by CX Device is All sharp corners, are simplified by Radius. Útilsystem de Corte parain PX recommended. Basic fixing are available three lengths. Working Temperature is 150º PX Anpassungslehre Material: 1.8159 Hardness: 45 +3 HRC ( We don't recommended welding / covering processes. 0

" PX " LENGTH CUTTING DEVICE

Min.3

Patented System

EXTRA - FLEXIBLE INNER CORE

It is a device which is facilitated measuring and PX Shaft Cutting Processes ensuring fine tuning towards to its height in length setting of PX Flexible Inner Cores. A great quantity of PX Cores is prepared Fast / Precision Measurement and Cutting easily. How to use CX Cutting Device. Utensile per Lavorazione PX Acessório para Corte 1 For 6 or 8 mm flexible core, place in slot of L +2da PX Mat.:corresponding INOX 1.4034to the related product. the device PX Cutting Jig Pls. be sure that is in correct position. Byretaing Útil de Corte para PX core supportively, bring to cutting position. PX Anpassungslehre 2 Pls. tight flat/flap or round core with AlienUtensile per Lavorazione PX Acessório para Corte da PX Key INOX in related slot. Mat.: 1.4034 900 According to the desired length size, your 3 core is ready position for cutting. 0.5 0.5 130

1±0.02

±0.02

4.5±0.2

Bush

~ ~ 80

16.2

R 0.15

PX-06

Ejector

Material Bronze B

58 PX-08 ATTENTION

Tolerance: H7 / g6

As other ejectors, it is operated with ejector plates. Especially, it is ideal to remove small claws.

58 ± 2 HRC

15 x Ø 12

ØQ

Material: INOX / Stainless 1.4034

PX-06

PX-08

Order

PX. 06 06 30-... PX. 06 08 30-... PX. 08 10 30-... PX. 08 12 30-...

6 6 8 8

6.2 8.2 10.2 12.2

10 10 11.2 11.2

3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5

12.5 12.5 13.5 13.5

During the order, pls. determine the desired "L" length.

L=175 L=250 L=325 N Bush Bush Bush + + 2.5 + + 2.5 + + 3.5 + + 3.5

Q 12 12 14 14

The flexible inner core can be done as per request.

Required Size

Hardened

R≥0.1

8 R6 N ØQ

G.110

Assembly Flange

Order:

CX.013058

Page : 16

Mould Opened

Mould Closed

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

ØA

Sayfa Page

211 211

Min. P

INNER CORE HOUSING SD

It is used in internal motion that requires pushing in different angles. Self lubricating bush facilitates operating. SD.322010 - 320 kg SD382412 - 420 kg SD.452816 - 680 kg.

A B C D L M SD. 3220GR 32 37 20 27 80 180 SD. 3824GR 38 40 24 28 80 210 SD. 4528GR 45 44 28 30 100 250 Important: Unit and rod are delivered separately Order

Max. Working Surface

PF PF.WB

62 ± 2 HRC

FLEXIBLE, PLATED INNER CORE PARALLEL SURFACE FLEXIBLE INNER CORE

Ø P g6

Flexible Plated Inner Core: The core surfaces are parallel and is used on cylinder ( 4mm ) surfaces. Plate / Balinit C provides a smooth operation and reduces friction Especially, First pushes the part, later removes from claws. Maximum Opening Length With a radial motion Opening at the end of stroke is 2.5 mm

P 10 12 16

D B C

2.5

1.6

1.8

2.3

Opening length

Flexible Inner Core 8x4 Parallel Surface: Due to its parallel surfaces, it provides the removal of claws in compact areas ( Thickness 4 mm), it has basic system for setting. Especially, first gives power impulses, later removes from claws. Maximum Opening Length With a radial motion, opening at the end of stroke is 2.5 mm.

Mould Opened

Mould Closed

Max. 26

ØP

e rfac u S l alle PF.WB Par

Maximum weight that inner core housing can be lifted.

After setting core, pls. process from end section to P to make pushing effortlessly

er PF ylind C , d Plate

Max. M

Max. 200

PF Plated, Cylinder

R ≤ 0.15 ØB 2.5

Assembly Procedure

PF.WB Parallel Surface

Hardness : 52 ± 2 HRC

Ø Ag6

Material: 1.2101 Hardness: 58 ± 2 HRC

Countersunk Head Screw

G ØD

ANGLE GUIDE BUSH

It is used as guide bush of angle core blocks. Only a plain hole for mounting is required. Due to it is Self Lubricating Bedding, there is no need lubrication. Material: 1.7242 Hardness: 60 HRC Order

CI.3034-5 CI.3438-5 CI.4040-5 CI.3034-10 CI.3438-10 CI.4040-10 CI.3034-15 CI.3438-15 CI.4040-15 CI.3034-20 CI.3438-20 CI.4040-20

Page

212

A 30 34 40 30 34 40 30 34 40 30 34 40

B 34 38 40 34 38 40 34 38 40 34 38 40

C 34 38 44 34 38 44 34 38 44 34 38 44

D 16 20 20 16 20 20 16 20 20 16 20 20

Section Injection Mould

E 20 24 27 20 24 27 20 24 27 20 24 27

G 6 8 8 6 8 8 6 8 8 6 8 8

Order

H 0 0 0 7 8.5 8.5 7 8.5 8.5 7 8.5 8.5

H ØU

C E S T U M6x6 M6x16 10 12 M8x6 M8x20 16 M6x6 M6x16 10 12 M8x6 M8x20 16 M6x6 M6x16 10 12 M8x6 M8x20 16 M6x6 M6x16 10 12 M8x6 M8x20 16

PF. 044150 PF. 054150 PF. 064200 PF. 084200 PF. 104200 PF. 124200 PF. 0642 WB PF. 0842 WB PF. 01042 WB PF1 01242 WB

A 4 5 6 8 10 12 6 8 10 12

12 14 30 16 18 12 14 30 16 18

R ≤ 0.15

H L 5 6 150 6 7 9 8 200 11 13 7 9 8 200 11 13

18 20 1.0 36

>0.1

Min. R

ØH

15 20

12 14 0.8 30

>50

Assembly Procedure G.110

Assembly Flange

EJECTOR Systems

Page : 16

Mould Closed

Mould Opened

DUAL FLEXIBLE INNER CORE UNIT It is very useful for the removal of small claws

It is very useful for the removal of small claws

VMin.

D g6

C 6

ED.068200

ED.088200

ED.108200

ED.128200

0.75 Ø D

V 10

0.5 15

EE.060175

EE.082175

EE.103175

EE.124175

EE.168175

2.5 2.2 1.8 1.5

>50 Ø

G.110

Mould Opened

V 10

0.5 15 1.0

G.110

Assembly Flange Page : 16

Page : 16

Important R>0.1

Core Opening Length .1 >0

It is Balinit C plated

Order

Assembly Flange

Mould closed

Material : 1.2101 45 ± 3 HRC 0 Max. Heat Resistance : 150

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

58 ± 2 HRC

Adjustment

ØD H7

52 ± 2 HRC

Min. 30

Core Opening Length >50

Max.18

>0.1

Min. 30

Important R>0.1

0 5 10 15 20 25 30

2.9 2.8 2.6

E Max.

It is Balinit C plated Quartet Flexible Inner Core Unit G

3 6

ØAxM

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 3

Material : 1.2101 45 ± 3 HRC 0 Max. Heat Resistance : 150

85 Dual Flexible Inner Core Unit Order

EN 3

52 ± 2 HRC

G Setting

250 - 325 mm sizes are available as per request

M0.75

2.8

16 8

1 3

A 3

275 - 300 mm sizes are available as per request

R<0.15

1 +

58 ± 2 HRC

VMin.

+ 3

3200

+ EN +

175

The running in of quartet flexible inner core has been made and the length setting can be done easily. Its mounting and processing are very easy, it processes 90º to part surface. Balinit C Plating: It is best plating used in flexible inner cores, provides high hardness and low friction coefficient, protects part and facilitates operation. Dual Flexible inner core holders are Balinit C Plated. Each ejector has been adjusted according to its bush. Their tolerances are g6 / H7. Hence, while exchanging the parts, compliance to each other should be considered during interchange of cores, the opening of flexible inner core is radial motion. The opening at the end of stroke is 2.8 mm.

Max. 20

Max. 18

The running in of double flexible inner core has been made and length setting can be done easily. Its mounting and processing are very easy, it processes 90º to part surface . Balinit C Plating It is best plating used in flexible inner cores, provides high hardness and low friction coefficient, protects part and facilitates operation. Dual Flexible inner Min. 1 core holders are Balinit C Plated. Each ejector has been adjusted according to its bush. Their tolerances are g6 / H7. Hence, while exchanging the parts, compliance to each other should be considered during interchange of cores, the opening of flexible inner core is radial motion. The opening at the end of stroke is 3 mm. Max. 2 Working 1 Surface + 2

QUARTET FLEXIBLE INNER CORE UNIT

Mould closed Ø

D Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Mould Opened

Sayfa Page

213 213

Ejector Plate Angular Pin Systems Ejector Plate Angular Pin Systems Ejector Plate Angular Pin Systems

FIXED CORE SLIDE

It Is Wedged Holder Of Core Pin Occupies a very small place on ejector plate, making height setting of core pin with this unit very easy.

F Ø

Slide Housing

E Min.

ADJUSTABLE CORE SLIDE

It Is Stepped Holder Of Core Pin Occupies a very small place on ejector plate. VI (Core) is used as core pin. It provides angle motion of core pin. Material : INOX 1.4034 Hardness: 51 ± 3 HRC

Slide Housing

B Ø

DF. 061220 DF. 081220 DF. 101624 DF. 121624 DF. 162032 DF. 202538 DF. 253148 E 12 12 14 14 18 21 26

F 05 05 05 1.0 1.5 1.5 2.0

A 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 H 10 10 12 12 16 19 24

B 12 12 16 16 20 25 31

C 20 20 24 24 32 38 48

20 D

Ch.3x150

FIXED CORE SLIDE

Order

L 2

H D

E Min.

D 11.5 11.5 13.5 13.5 19 21 28

T M4 x 12 M5 x 12 M6 x 16 M8 x 16 M8 x 22 M10 x 25 M12 x 35

MOVABLE CORE HEAD

Screw To Fasten Core Cage To Pin The core head is hardened and grinded. To fasten ready unit to pin, there is no extra need apparatus such as screw,retainer pin. VI Ejector core, acts as accessory to pin. It is presented standard solutions to the moulders. Patented System

Ch.3x2

PROCESSABLE FIXED CORE HEAD

ADJUSTABLE CORE SLIDE

Order

IF. 064050

6.2

11.5

IF. 084050

8.2

13.5

IF. 104450

10.2

13.5

IF. 124450

12.2

Order

DA. 061020

11.5

DA. 081220

DA. 101624

DA. 121824

0.5

9.0

M4 x40

3.5

0.5

8.5

M5 x40

6.7

0.5

10.2

M6 x40

10.2

1.0

9.6

M8 x40

13.5

Material : INOX 1.4034 Hardness: 51 ± 3 HRC

Material : 1.2344 Hardness : 45 ± 2 HRC Y Max.

Ejector Pin

Import ant It permits height /length setting of Ejector.

Ejector Pin

R Max.

Max.

Core Head 0

Max.X

Fixed Core

Magnetic Ejectors

Slide Casing

Page

214

Adjustable

Mould Closed Reliable Label

Section Injection Mould

Slide Casing

Mould Closed

Fixed Core

Mould Opened

Ejector Plate Angular Pin Systems Ejector Plate Angular Pin Systems Ejector Plate Angular Pin Systems EJECTOR PIN, BUSH ANGLE SLIDE HOUSING HORIZANTAL SLIDE HOUSING

This core pin is along with bronze bush. For connection to the core head, there is no need for screw cutting or retainer pin. It is presented to standard solution to the moulders. Material : 1.3505 Patented System ~ 60 58 HRC ~

B +0.2 Angular Slide

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

R ØP In Angular Inner Cores

E R Max.200

VMin.

ØP Order

CORE PIN, BUSH SET Order

VI. 064200

15 0.5 12

VI. 085200

20 0.5 12

VI.106200

20 0.5 14

VI. 127200

20 1.0 14

V 3

Important

Key Space

In Horizontal Inner Cores E R

BD. 122836 BD. 143866 BD. 163240 BD. 204060 BD. 254672 BD. 315890 G 11.5 11.5 13.5 19 1 21 28

L 10 10 12 15 18 18

P 5 5 6 6 8 10

Ejector Pin3

C 36 66 40 60 72 90

Q 5 5 5 5 5 8

D 28 42 30 44 56 74 R 4 4 5 5 6 8

E F 4 4.8 4 6.3 5 6.3 5 8.3 7 10.3 8 13.3

T M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M10

BD. 122036 BD. 142266 BD. 162440 BD. 203260 BD. 253872 BD. 314890 G 11.5 11.5 13.5 19 21 28

L 10 10 12 15 18 18

P 5 5 6 6 8 10

Q 5 5 5 5 5 8

D 28 42 30 44 56 74 R 4 4 5 5 6 8

E F 4 4.8 4 6.3 5 6.3 5 8.3 7 10.3 8 13.3

T M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M10

Z 20 22 24 32 38 48

DA / DF

Fixed Core

DA / DF

T C 36 66 40 60 72 90

Ejector Pin

Fixed Core

Magnetic Ejector

Z 28 38 32 40 46 58

A 12 14 16 20 25 31

Order

Core Head

ØP

Ejector Pin

Slide Housing

Core Head

Q A 12 14 16 20 25 31

ØP

B +0.2 Horizontal Slide

SLOT PROCESSING A+02 DETAIL

IMPORTANT ! Milling of Slotting

It can be worked/processed with horizontal inner cores. Can be used as angle core slide for inner cores. The Can be used as horizantal core slide for inner cores. casing and slide are from different The casing and slide are from different materials, materials, provides processability with smooth provides processability with smooth motion. motion. Horizontal and adjustable slide housing. Horizontal and adjustable slide housing.

SLOT PROCESSING A+02 DETAIL

250

It can be worked/processed with horizontal inner cores.

Slide Housing

Mould Closed

Mould Opened

Mould Closed

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Sayfa Page

215 215

Max. 25

Perpendicular Ejector Core Systems

REPLACEMENT BLOCK

They are used with Mechanical Perpendicular Cores (PS) and they are for adjustments and corrections. Replacement and Lifting Block is compatible to use with PS (Perpendicular Core ) Unit. The length of replacement block is set as per request.

Perpendicular Ejector Core Systems Maximum Operation Length MECHANICAL PERPENDICULAR CORES / STANDARD MECHANICAL CORE

Standard Mechanical Perpendicular Core: This product is more developed in comparison with the other core systems used for small claw parts. The mounting of chuking / bush cores are rapid and easy. They work more rigid. Due to that this product which its running in has been done by moving perpendicularly to ejector plate, required area for mounting on your mould is smaller. The form of claw on the product can be processed on inner core, it makes same function as flexible inner core. G Material : INOX 1.4034 Hardness : 48 ± 2 HRC Patented System www.cumsa.com A CAD Starting Point

250+2

Ø B-0.5 ØC Ø Bg6

ØD

Material : 1.2344 Hardness : 52 ± 2 HRC Patented System

REPLACEMENT BLOCK Order

For Per. Core PS

RP. 064000

PS. 062250

RP. 084000

PS. 082250

RP. 104000

PS. 102250

RP. 124000

PS. 122250

12 8-0.05

Max. Stroke

MECHANICAL PERPENDICULAR CORES / STANDARD MECHANICAL CORE R

PS. 06 22 50

6.2

3.4

1.25 M4x16

PS. 08 22 50

8.2

1.25 M4x16

PS. 10 22 50

10.2

4.2

M5x16

PS. 12 22 50

12.2

4.2

M5x16

ØU R ØD

216

Section Injection Mould

0.5

Magnetic Ejector

G.110

Assembly Flange Page : 16

Order

Page

Material : 1.2344 52 ± 2 HRC

≤ 2.7

Adjustment and Correction

" PV " Profile Block should be ordered separately.

Mou

During order, pls. determine the desired "L" length...

They are used along with Mechanic Perpendicular Cores (PV), in Profile Block Vertical Lifting.

Usage: Removal Process of Profile Block (According to Technical Drawing Detail) 1- Pull TM ( Magnetic Stopper ) Safety Disc 2- Push Ejector Plate forward. 3- Pls. remove core casing.

, Vi

Perpendicular Ejector Type Core Sytems

Perpendicular Ejector Type Core Systems SLIDE PERPENDICULAR CORE END

nted

MECHANIC PERPENDICULAR HOUSING (Core Connection Shaft)

Perpendicular Lifting Block: The required area for mounting is small, mounting process is easy, the need for complex mechanic systems is eliminated. This product is ideal for small claw parts. Material: 1.2344 Hardness: 50 ± 2 HRC

The main feature of this product is to make setting very easily and to work 90º perpendicular to ejector plate.

150

" PV " Profile Block should be ordered separately.

PERPENDICULAR LIFTING SPECIAL CORE M6x10

1 M6x25

Cylinder Head Cap Screw

L +2

Magnetic Ejector

52 -0.05

Material: 1.2842 Hardness: : 56 ± 2 HRC

Setting

Order

EV. 006. (L)

6.5

150

225

EV. 008. (L)

8.5

150

225

EV. 010. (L)

10.5

150

225

EV. 012. (L)

12.5

150

225

During order, pls. determine the desired "L" length...

85 ØG

≤7

Ø F x M 0.75

Max. 26

PV www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

D R ≤ 0.15

H +05

A g6

Magnetic Ejector

B g6

PROFILE 2 LIFTING BLOCK

A B C PV. 34 12 52 34 12 28

D 15.5

PV. 36 16 52 36 16 30

16.5

PV. 38 20 52 38 20 32

17.5

PV. 40 24 52 40 24 34

18.5

Order

E 27

Mould Closed

EJECTOR Systems

Mould Opened Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Sayfa Page

217 217

Max. 26

MECHANIC READY PERPENDICULAR CORE UNIT

DHI

±0.02

ØN

ØM

F Hx7 Ag6

Ø N +0.1 Ø M+0.2

Ejector Plates

Material : 1.2842 Hardness: 56 ± 2 HRC

+0.05

Max.38

MECHANIC READY PERPENDICULAR CORE Internal Core Formed DHI A

Order

DHI. 12 28 52 DHI. 12 38 52 DHI. 16 28 52 DHI. 16 38 52 DHI. 20 28 52 DHI. 20 44 52 DHI. 24 28 52 DHI. 24 44 52

11 14

6 8 8 10 8 10

Page

218

12.2 16.2 20.2 24.2

B 28 38 28 38 28 44 28 44

12 14 14 16 14 16

16 18 18 20 18 20

10 10 12 12 14 12 14

Section Injection Mould

D 11 18 11 18 10.5 20 10.5 20

R 12 19 12 19 12 22.5 12 22.5

E 7.5 12 7.5 12 7 14 7 14

0.1

Order

EA.122844 EA.123844 EA.162844 EA.163844 EA.202844 EA.204444 EA.242844 EA.244444

A 12.2 12.2 16.2 16.2 20.2 20.2 24.2 24.2

Used Together DHI/DHO 122852 DHI/DHO 123852 DHI/DHO 162852 DHI/DHO 163852 DHI/DHO 202852 DHI/DHO 204452 DHI/DHO 242852 DHI/DHO 244452

X 17.5 27 17.5 27 17.5 31 17.5 31

EJECTOR Core Systems

Optional Core Block

B 28 38 28 38 28 44 28 44

D 11 18 11 18 10.5 20 10.5 20

F 7 7 11 11 14 14

12 -0.02

X0±0.5

44 +2

Material : 1.2344 Hardness: 50 ± 2 HRC Patented System

ØG+0.5 B g6

EA Block: It is used with DHI / DHO Special Core Units

Cavity

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

H M3 M5 M3 M5 M4 M5 M4 M5

A -0.5

52+0.5

F 7 7 -

Ø G H8

Ø C H8

AxB 52 -0.1

Easy Mounted, Optional Core Lifting Block F Slot Detail

B H7 D

It is a ready mechanical solution for moulders, a small area is sufficient for mounting. 90º Perpendicular slot is opened to mould parting surface, excluding special form workmanship, milling, turning and hardening are not required ( Ready - Compact Product) 238 +3 85 B ØC Ø G x M0.75

CORE BLOCK EA

Pouch / Slot Detail

INTERNAL Core Formed Perpendicular Core Unit (Ready Compact Product)

C 36 46 36 46 36 52 36 52 G 10 10 10 12 12 14 12 14

DHI / DHO Special Cores

Page 226

Note: It is used distinctively. Complete Presentation with Perpendicular Lifting Special Pin Set and Perpendicular Profile Lifting Block

POUCH B H7 SLOT D DETAIL ±0.02

Max. 26

Ø C H8

Cavity

CORE BLOCK ID In forming of Inner Core Holes ID Block : It is used along with "DHO" Perpendicular Core Unit for hidden bottom holes.

L +0.3

Ejector Plates

EXTERNAL Core Formed Perpendicular Core Unit (Ready Compact Unit)

It is ready mechanic solution for moulders, a small area is sufficient for mounting. 90º Perpendicular slot is opened to mould parting surface, excluding 8 special form workmanship, milling, turning and hardening are not required +0.05 ( Ready - Compact Product)

Ø M+0.2

Material : 1.2344 Hardness: 50 ± 2 HRC Patented System ID

S 14

G x M0.75

B +0.1

Ø C -0.1

+0.3

S Tx5 Optional (As per request) Core Block

ID.161730 ID.162630 ID.201730 ID.203030

16.2 20.2

17 30

52+0.5

F A g6 Hx7

X0±0.5

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

8-0.05

10 M6

24.2 10 M6 ID.243030 30 It can be ordered along with "DHO" Perpendicular Core Unit and Similar Coding System. Hardened, Grinded 0.1

238 +3

D±0.02

ØM

ØN

ID.241730

17 26

Max. 26

R ID.121730 17 12.2 ID.122630 26 Order

DHO

MECHANIC READY EXTERNAL PERPENDICULAR CORE Ø N +0.1

R +0.5 4

30 +0.3

CORE BLOCK EA

52 -0.1

Max. 26

Working Plane

Material : 1.2842 Hardness: 56 ± 2 HRC

2±0.05

Max. 38

MECHANIC READY EXTERNAL PERPENDICULAR CORE UNIT

Order

DHO. 12 85 52 DHO. 12 38 52 DHO. 16 28 52 DHO. 16 38 52 DHO. 20 28 52 DHO. 20 44 52 DHO. 24 28 52 DHO. 24 44 52

Bottom Hole Core Block

F 7 7 11 EA

Conveyor Core Block

G 6 6 8 8 10 8 10

B 28 38 28 38 28 44 28 44

12.2 16.2 20.2 24.2 H M3 M5 M3 M5 M4 M5 M4 M5

Note: It can be worked distinctively. Complete Presentation with Perpendicular Lifting Special Pin Set and Perpendicular Profile Lifting Block

C 10 10 12 12 14 12 14

12 14 14 16 14 16

16 18 18 20 18 20

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

D 11 18 11 18 10.5 20 10.5 20 R 12 19 12 19 12 22.5 12 22.5

DHO E 7.5 12 7.5 12 7 14 7 14

X 17.5 27 17.5 27 17.5 31 17.5 31

Sayfa Page

219 219

In-Mould Mounting Elements SAFETY DISC TM EJECTOR PLATE TA

SPECIAL FLEXIBLE INNER COREA (SPECIAL ORDERS) Flexible inner core can be produced in each desired model and size

Pls. send us by filling special sizes in technical drawing details. Important : Material: 1.8159 Hardness: 45 ± 3 HRC 1- The delivery is 6-8 weeks after order date. 2- The shaft of cores are rectangular. 3- After your inquiry, CUMSA will be sent an proposal including Design, Unit and Delivery Information.

Magnetic Ejector

Shock Absorber(With O-Ring)

Its Ejector Plate is prevented to apply pressure to upper part of holder , when necessary to change ejector plate, it can be removed easily. The magnet is in NeFeBo power.

It prevents vibrations and impacts during return of ejector plates, the most important advantage is to prolong bench life of all parts.

Ø 22 ≤ 60 N 40

M6 x 25 Countersunk Head Screw

Max. 2.5

-0

R+0

-0

TM. 10 22 14 TM. 12 22 14

A 10 12.5

TM. 15 22 14

TM. 20 22 14

Order

Ø 28 O-Ring 8+0.1

A g6

E 0.1

X0 (Min. 30)

D+0.1

Material: 1.7242 Hardness: 58 ± 3 HRC

SAFETY DISC

-2

F (Min. 0.5)

A-0.1 Magnetic Retainer ( NdFeB )

L+2 C 0.5

≤ 20 N

Order:

TA. 28 08 06

BA - BE - BT B g6

B g6

A , R and X0 Sizes will be determined by CUMSA depending on dimensions given by customers.

SPECIAL FLEXIBLE INNER COREA (SPECIAL ORDERS) Order

Page

220

Section Injection Mould

G.110

G.120

Piece

Note: In special orders, pls. inform sizes in table by writing.

THRUST TABLET

Pls. refer to page 30 for detailed information / technical drawing.

G.1

G.110 ASSEMBLY FLANGE Pls. refer to page 16 for detailed information / technical drawing.

2 3

INJECTION MOULD, MOULD COUNTER

5 2

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

INJECTION MOULD COUNTER Button 1 Safety Security Switch

Number 4 Product Unique Part Number

Assembly 2 Magnetic Magnetic Fixing

IC Side - Position Indicator 5 IC Position Indicator

( Deleting / Setting up ) 3 Resetting Reset Order Reference

Deleting Setting Up

Cycle / Min. Up to

Non

100

Available

100

Available

500

CC. 50 30 28 Orange Colour CC. RE 53 28 Bulue Colour CC. HS 53 28 Yellow Colour

1 1

+0.2 +0.5

Ø 10 H7 Ø 10

+0.2 +0.5

Bronze

14±0.1

28 +0.5

Min .1 Max .2

Mould Closed

6 -0.5

Production counter has 7/ 24 hours and 3 year life time (battery life), it starts to work when battery is installed. When the counter is removed from its mould, " E " (Error) Letter is appeared and cannot be deleted, this security mechanism is stepped in after sequence 25 counting, If you want to count parts printed in Mould Test / Trial, pls. remove back before 25 counting with band by inserting counter, if5you remove counter from mould after 25 counting, " E " (Error) Letter appears on unit screen and this cannot be deleted. After this step, the counter is counted, however the sign showing that is falsified stays on the screen constantly. Maximum 9.999.999 counting can be made with counter. There is a 7 digit Digital screen. The 4 Product is presented in three different types; 1- Product No: CC 503028 (Orange Colour) : It has two versions, it counts opening of mould electronically, beside total counting, Model CC. RE 5328 also makes another counting. This counter, gives exact and constant numbers to the moulder and by looking at the number in maintenance operations, it enables to make maintenance plan, in case the device is removed from its slot, is reflected as warning to the screen. 2- Product No: CC HS5328 ( Blue Colour): It has two versions, it counts opening of mould electronically, beside total counting, Model CC. RE 5328 also makes another counting. This counter, gives exact and constant numbers to the moulder and by looking at the number in maintenance operations, it enables to make maintenance plan, in case the device is removed from its slot, is reflected as warning to the screen. 3- Product No: CC RE5328 (Yellow Colour) It has two versions, it counts opening of mould electronically, beside total counting, Model CC. RE 5328 also makes another counting. This counter, gives exact and constant numbers to the moulder and by looking at the number in maintenance operations, it enables to make maintenance plan, in case the device is removed from its slot, is reflected as warning to the screen. This unit is included an electronic circuit counting prints. Assembly Procedure: 1- Process slot in a way that as determined in technical drawing. 2- Hammer counter pin (IC) of counter to slot with bronze hammer. 3- Insert counter/ Numerator unit (CC) its slot.

Production Counter, under maximum working temperature 60ºC

Ø 10

Important!

Mould Accessories

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Sayfa Page

221 221

EJECTOR PLATE ACCERELATOR

DUAL EJECTOR PLATE OPENING SYSTEM

In addition to ejector stroke, it gives an extra movement to the 2. Plate It is also operated as ejector plate centering pin.

L Max.

E P

G D

Hardness: 58 ± 2 HRC

Material : 1.503

EJECTOR PLATE ACCERELATOR UNIT Order

EP.200813 EP.251016 EP.371522 EP.502030

A B C D E 20 8 13.2 25.8 9.4 25 10 16 32.3 11.8 37.5 15 22 48.5 17.7 50 20 30 64.6 23.6

F 11.4 14.3 21.5 28.6

Max. N

C ± 0.2

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

4 Piece. Cam Slot

Material : 1.7264 Hardness: ± 2 HRC

Retainer Pin

6 -0.05

Ø A g6

Ø N g6

L ±2

DUAL PLATE EJECTOR SYSTEM A 14 16

Order

G 6 7 10.5 14

H Max. L Max. M N ØP T Max. Power 13.6 5.5 5 15 2.5 x10 M3 x12 125 Kg. 17 6.8 6 18.5 3 x12 M4 x16 250 Kg. 25.5 10.2 8 25 4 x16 M6 x25 350 Kg. 34 13.6 10 34 5 x20 M8 x30 800 Kg.

Ø G g6

H Max.

ØB

In dual ejector plate (2 + 2) mould system, rear plate group stops and the front group continues its motion to complete its full stroke. Thanks to this system, assembly area is too reduced, this system also works as ejector centering pin in mould and meets the extra system requirement. C E 6 -0.05 Max. Isı : 1500

Ø B g6 ØD

ıt can be used in injection moulds and moulds that are dual ejector plate group by easily mounting. This mechanical system that is simple and precise puts the dual ejector system into use. In addition to normal ejector stroke, this product, saves an extra motion to second ejector plate. In small and medium moulds with ejector, 1 piece is sufficient and in more dimensional moulds and systematic moulds according to their configurations, dual plate accelerator can be used. In terms of symmetry, generally it is consisted from 4 pieces.

DX. 142622 DX. 163027 J 125 152

K 7.2 8

B 26 30

L 243 314

C 22 27

D 30 34

M M6 M8

E 34 44 N 21 24

F 20 23

G 16 18

L1 6 - 42 6 - 54

DX H 4 6

L2 48 80

Max. L2 Max. L1 Pl.4 Pl.3 d2 Pl.2 Pl.1 d1

Standard Ejector Plate Combination Size mm

Page

222

Section Injection Mould

Ejector Plate Systems

DX . 142622

DX . 163027 Coded Product

Size mm

d1 5 5 5 5 Pl.1 17 17 17 17 Pl.2 9 12 12 12 d2 13 10 5 5 Pl.3 12 12 17 17 Pl.4 9 9 19 12

d1 Pl.1 Pl.2 d2 Pl.3 Pl.4

5 22 12 5 27 17

5 22 12 5 27 22

5 22 17 5 22 12

5 22 17 5 22 17

0 27 17 5 22 12

0 27 17 5 22 17

0 27 17 10 17 12

0 27 22 0 22 12

0 27 22 0 22 17

It is designed for Mould with Compact System Larger Ejector. Stepped Ejector Plate Tensile System:

R 8.5

52-0.1

Max. Stroke

Ø6 Dowel Pin

Material : 1.2510 Hardness: 58 ± 2 HRC

Ø 64

DE. 243648

Ø 70 H8

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

60 +0.2 R8

Max. 56

IMPORTANT!: To determine, mounting dimensions, in selecting the first stroke, pls. use the ruler on 0-30 mm unit.

M 12 Free 2. Stroke

Pouch / Slot Detail

50 +0.2

Material: 1.7242 Hardness: 56 ± 2 HRC Patented System

55 4 Piece Cam Slot

Order:

Material: 1.7243 Hardness: 58 ± 2 HRC

86-0.1

M6 x 16 Ø 74 4 x Cylinder Head Cap Screw

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

Ø 70 g6

Material : 1.1213 Hardness: 62 ± 2 HRC

Ø 32 h6

Ø 50 g6

M12 x 40 4 x Cylinder Head Cap Screw

M10 x 40

4 Piece Cam Slot

500+5

Ø 61

Order:

SY. 327054

160+1 M6 x 16 4 x Cylinder Head Cap Screw

Ø 50

Dual Plate Ejector System: This unit is performed predetermined two stepped motion. It is very useful to obtain stepped pushing in flexible inner core moulds, Max .dual ejector stroke is 30 mm. IMPORTANT!: To determine ,mounting dimensions, in selecting the first stroke, pls. use the ruler on 0-30 mm unit.

Ø 24 g6 Cylinder Head Cap Screw

When bearing is reached to plate, Ultimate Tensile is stopped 1. Group step and until reached to upper plate, rear ejector plate group continues. The mounting of compact unit is not put in the middle of mould position, in a way that is formed at the corner edge of ejector plate group, substantially place is reserved to other ejector elements. The system developed for medium size moulds, is for pushing - pulling distance of dual plate ejector group 56 mm. All units are included.

DUAL EJECTOR PLATE PUSH SYSTEM It provides a stepped push in flexible inner core system.

If 20 mm stroke is selected on the ruler

COMPACT DUAL EJECTOR PLATE TENSILE

20 Free

1. Stroke will be 20 mm Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

2. The stroke is free

Sayfa Page

223 223

MODULAR RETAINER

It provides the gradual opening of the mould.

By propagating the number of Modular Retainer Unit providing gradual opening of mould, loading capacity is increased. Max. 4 pieces can be used on same surface. If the more use is needed, the system should be distributed to different areas. Max Temperature: Should not be exceed 1500C Material : 1.8159 Hardness: 45±3 HRC

STROKE STOPS

Mould Plate Opening, Stroke Stops

In moulds that PR. Coded Product is used, Dual Opening Systems with Scraper, is limited stroke of bearing plate which is opened first in 1. Group. It provides max. 60 mm opening, then 2. group's opening is engaged.

20-0.5

2.5

iec

2.5

iec

Order: 1Piece RM

RM. 651608

Mould Closed

Page

224

1. Mould Opened Section Injection Mould

2. Mould Opened

Max. Stroke 60

Ø 10 Retainer Pin

Order:

SL. 602008

Magnetic Fixing

7.8±0.1

± 0.1

IMPORTANT! : Load values shown in representative picture are approximate values and usage with group 1 -2 -3 -4 should be created groups in different areas for more loadings. Fasteners: Cylinder Head Cap Screw and retaining pins should be procured separately.

± 0.1

iec

1 ±0.2

Material: 1.8159 Hardness : 42 ± 3 HRC Patented System

Ø8 Retainer Pin

2.5

M8 Cylinder Head Cap Screw

M8x25 Cylinder Head Cap

± 0.5

Ø8 Retainer Pin

Stepped Mould Plate Retainer with Stripper In Spring and O Ring loaded Compact System and Dual Opening Moulds with Stripper, it holds 2. Group closed until 1. Group opening is completed (Max. 50 Kg ), also protects mould affecting from vibrations and impacts by reducing speed tension and absorbing pinking during opening. The most important advantage of it is to extent life time of mould parts. M4x15 Cylinder Head Cap Screw

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

PLATE RETAINER

M8x25 Cylinder Head Cap

Ø 26 g6

Order:

PR. 263230 Material : 1.1203 Hardness : 58 ± 2 HRC

ATTENTION!

After selected desired stroke, fix the rules from unscaled part.

MX It is designed for two stepped moulds, safe and locked unit

STEPPED / LOCKED PLATE OPENING -

4.2+0.1

M 6 x 20 4x Cylinder Head Cap Screw

Hardened

Stop

6+0.05

24 12

All connection units are included

14+0.1

24+0.2

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

Mould Closed

Retainer Pin

GS L

22 66 16 38 75 30 25 32 105 36 86 19 46 102 43 32 42.7 153 42 106 24 56 124 51 40 50.2 190

S (x2) T V Scale M6x30 M6x35 10 40 M8x35 M8x40 11.5 60 M10x40 10x45 14 80

Adjustable 1. Opening ATTENTION! Free 2. Opening

Mould Opened 2. Opening

Mould Opened 1. Opening

If 30 mm selected

Mould Closed

2. Opening

1. Opening

Order

M N P (x2) R (x4) 10 15 6x20 6x30 12 20 8x24 8x36 15 24.5 10x30 10x40

D B

STEPPED OPENING UNIT + GS.226616 GS.368619 GS.421024

12 M6

32+0.2 Ø 36 H8

Countersunk Head Cap Screw

Ø 14 H8

Bearing Capacity of Stepped Opening Unit: Max. Pressure Recommended Per Part GS.226616 : 200 Kg. / Mould Plate GS.368619 : 400 Kg. / Mould Plate GS.421024 : 800 Kg. / Mould Plate

Order:

Pouch/Slot Detail

MX. 143662 18

Countersunk Retainer Pin Head Cap Screw

1. Opening Strok

4 Piece Cam Slot

Pouch/Slot Detail

N H

Ø 36 g6

Material : 1.1213 Hardness: 62 ± 2 HRC

Ø 14 h6

Material : 1.7242 Hardened: 56 ± 2 Patented System

It is designed for two stepped moulds

Ø 18

230 +5 36-0.05 26-0.05 15.8

STEPPED OPENING GS

Stepped Opening Unit: The desired measurement values on the ruler in unit are determined for two stepped moulds (In moulds with stripper) . Opening Priority of Plates is depended the mounting direction of unit. Stepped Opening Unit GS. 226616 can be used in three stepped moulds up to (500 x 500mm) and GS 368619 can be used up to (800 x 800 mm). According to mould size, it is recommended to use 4 units for balanced use. Patented System Material : 1.0503 Hardened: 55 ± 3 ( Friction Area )

stepped opening unit: It is controlled to open safe/ accurate first plate for two stepped moulds (in moulds in stripper), the unit is required less space on the mould and is designed for small/ medium sized moulds. It is an internal latch lock plate opening unit controlling safety of opening system for 2 stepped opening. M 6 x 16 12-0.1 Cylinder Head Cap Screw

Important

2. Opening 30 mm Opening is obtained. (Min. V)

Dual Opening Systems

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Free

Sayfa Page

225 225

LIMITER UNIT FOR FLEXIBLE AND PER. CORE SYSTEMS Stroke Distance Limiter Unit (For Flex / Per. and All Special Core Connections) It is mounted and fixed to injection mould rear connection plate (H5 A). Movable bush part of the unit is embedded into the ejector plates. By limiting motion stroke in full stroke of ejector plates, it ends the motion of inner core stroke without affecting stroke motion of injection machine. Material : 1.7243 Hardened: 58 ± 2

Ø 10 -0.05

218 +2

Ø6

3.5

4.5

PW / PS

Flexible / Perpendicular Cores

2 Piece Cam Slots

Threaded Unit, Flexible Inner Core and Perpendicular Core Limiter Unit

Material : 1.5060 It is a dual different threaded link adapter providing positioning of LR. Limiter Unit by making connection to its upper surface for other core connections. In addition: Fine Toothed Part PW also can be used as link adapter for flexible inner core and PS mechanical perpendicular cores.

INTERCONNECT REDUCER AL

ED / EE / DHI / DHO

3.5

Flex Inner Core / Perpendicular Core All Special Cores

26 12

10 6

0 Max. Heat Resistance: 150 Patented System

L1 ≤ 40

AL.0800M5

AL.0800M6

AL.0800M8

8 ± 0.05

Order

LR. 061620 LR. 081620

A AL 6 8 +

LR. 101620 10

LR. 081620 For Unit

PW / PS

Flexible / Perpendicular Cores

DHI / DHO

L1+L2

Perpendicular Core Units

LR 8+0.2

Page

226

Section Injection Mould

16 -0.2

8 -0.05 22

Ø 16 g6 A x M0.75

www.cumsa.com CAD Ref.Starting Point

Ø 24

B M4

L2 ≤ 40

Ø 20 g6

Ø 19.8

Order

AL.0800M4

Ø 8 x M0.75

R7 8 M5x16

INTERCONNECT REDUCER

EJECTOR ACCELERATOR AE CYLINDRICAL / THREADED UNIT It provides the increase of motion stroke of the selected ejectors.

BA BE /BT /BA

EJECTOR RETAINER

Ejector Accelerator: Its mounting can be made easily to injection mould ejector plates and middle of bottom support place, it is applicable on all moulds. (With Dimensional Options ) It creates a second motion on standard moulds that are single ejector plate group. Maximum Stroke 15mm x 2 = 30 mm. Material : 1.7225 Hardened : 54 ± 2 0 Patented System Max Heat Resistance : 150

Automatic System Holding Headless Ejector Pins

ØE ØB

ØA

Ø Cg6

Automatic

Mal. : Bronze

Bronze Material

Ø2 ØA 30

ØD

BE Order

ØC

BE.031115 BE.041216 BE.051317

Order

BA.061418 BT.061418 BA.081620 BT.081620 BA.101822 BT.101822 BA.122024 BT.122024 Assembly Example

A 6 8 10 12

A B C 3 11 15 4 12 16 5 13 17 B 14 16 18 20

C 18 20 22 24

D 3.5 5.5 7 9

16 16 24 24 24 30 30

20 20 30 30 30 36 36

12.5 12.5 16 16 17 21.5 21.5

22 22 34 34 34 40 40

13 13 16 16 17 21 21

14 14 20 20 20 28 28

J 8 8 15 15 15 20 20

L 22 22 36 36 36 46 46

K 32 32 44 44 44 62 62

M 17 17 27 27 27 34 34

N 37 37 57 57 57 78 78

P 2 2 2 2 2

It is enabled to 8 mm / 15 mm / 20 mm to ejector pin motions.

Q 4 4 4 4 4 6 6

R 3 3 3 3 3 4 4

Ø D+3

Push Ejector Plate to forward 5

Insert New Pin

Pull Ejector Plate Back

3 4 5 6 8 10 12

Remove Ejector On ejector accelerator unit,5 pliers systems providing plain ejector pin connection are available Pin on other units except (AE.031620 / AE.041620 ) products. 3

Remove Magnetic Retainer

AE. 031620 AE. 041620 AE. 052430 AE. 062430 AE. 082430 AE. 103036 AE. 123036

Order

Plain Ejector Ø B g6 BT

ØD

BA 3.5

ØP

Plain pins can be removed automatically by pressing on the upper part of holder from the front of the mould. There is no need to open mould and to stop production during maintenance and repair.

BA-BE-BT Ejector Retainer

Magnetic Ejector

ImportantT! M +0.1 Mould Closed

ØF

G.110

Mounting Flange

Mould Opened

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Sayfa Page

227 227

HIGH TEMPERATURE DATE STAMP

In Heat Resistance Moulds Containing High Tem. It is used in injection moulds in high temperature such as Zamak, Zinc, Polyester, Bakelite and Rubber. Special Processes can be applied on unit. Due to replacing and settings can be done on front part of mould, there is no need to remove and dismantle mould from machine.

-0.05

±0.050 A

Material : 1.2344 Nitrite Max. Heat Resistance: 4500 Date stamp unit hub can be changed.

Ø B -0.1

Ø A g6

~ ~ 950HV 0.3 Material : 1.2344 Nitrite + INCONEL : 2.4669 0 Max. Heat Resistance: 450 Date stamp, can be changed unit hub.

12 Month + Year

Year

D N

±0.050 A H. TEMPERATURE DATE STAMP

Order OK

Order YEAR

IT.A4719SF

IT. 4719 ..

4.7

IT. 6719SF

IT. 6719 ..

6.7

1*Important: To remove year, turn left, to insert

FT. 0847SF

12 4.7 11

FT. 1267SF 12

16 6.7 12

Order 12 M + YEAR

FT. 084712

12 4.7 11

FT. 126712 12

16 6.7 12

Order YEAR

FT. 084705

12 4.7 11

FT. 126708 12

16 6.7 12

Inside of Date Stamp, M. Processing Depth Moulding

FT 08 ( YEAR ) : 0.15 - 0.25 mm FT 08 ( OK ) : 0.40 - 0.50 mm FT 12 ( YEAR ) : 0.15 - 0.25 mm FT 12 ( OK ) : 0.50 - 0.60 mm

Page

228

Section Injection Mould

PM : Quartet

new one, turn clockwise until you hear a "click" sound. 2

* Pls. inform year as per request in order.

Ø A g6

ØC

±0.5

CH .2x100

Order 12 Month

Ø A m6

±0.050 A

-0.05

950HV 0.3 Year OK

12 Month

±0.050 A

ØC

Multiple Stamping: It is a triple or quartet stamping unit. Standard Date Stamps, Recycling or Logos can be aligned on unit. Material : INOX. 1.4034 Hardened Hardness : 48±2 HRC

-0.05

MULTIPLE STAMPING BLOCK Stamping Unit, Date/ Stamping

Ø C -0.02

8 Ø2

DATE STAMP INNER (Hub)

Replacement from Front of Mould and Adjustable Inner Date Stamp : Due to replacing and settings can be done on front part of mould, there is no need to remove and dismantle mould from machine.

PM : Triple

MULTIPLE STAMPING BLOCK

Order

#PM

BM. 160603 BM. 180604 BM. 220903 BM. 250904 BM. 281103 BM. 321104

16 18 22 25 28 32

6.5 6.5 8.7 8.7 11.5 11.5

8 8 10 10 12 12

3 4 3 4 3 4

INJECTION MOULD ACCESSORIES

Max. Conical Ejector Motion

1mm

AIR VALVE / EJECTOR PLATE VA RAPID AIR VALVE / EJECTOR ( It is for fast production) It is an effective method in air ejecting

It is compatible to use on high injection pressure and fast production stamps.

7 +0.1

15 +0.1

Air Ejector Valve: It is produced from stainless steel Powerful Air Ejector Valve: Internal Stopper is available, can be mounted easily. W. Pressure: 2-10 Bar. 2 and provides air discharge in high range. Also, the 1 BAR ~ It can be used on inclined and angle surfaces. ~ 1 Kg. / cm conical ejector rises and helps the product exit from Material : INOX 1.4021 Hardness: 46 - 48 HRC mould . The working temperature under 150ºC is recommended. In higher temperature, steel starts to Ø A m6 Rapid Air Valve / Ejector expand and melt plastic raw white slips into valve and ØB prevents operation. Order A B C D E H D Max. M Working 12 Pressure: VH. 065215 6 5.3 1.9 4 5.8 0.25 1.5 - 6 Bar Material: INOX 1.4034

Mechanical Stops

Hardness: 51 ± 2 HRC

2 1 BAR ~ ~ 1 Kg. / cm

Ø A m6 ØB

Maximum Injection Pressure: 2 1200 Kgs/cm

VH. 086515

6.7 2.1

7.8 0.75

3 ØF Ø A g6

VH. 121015

12 9.8 2.9

5 11.8 1.0

Triple Air Inlet to Provide Balanced Opening / Ejector

Bronze Material 33 Mounting Washer is included.

D 12

H+1

C -0.05

CH. 2x100

A B

VA. 050412 5

C D E H M 12 1.5 4

7 2.5 7 0.95

VA. 086512 8 6.5 12 1.5 4

7 0.95

VA. 100812 10

7 0.95

ØE

VA. 065212 6 5.2 12 1.5 4

Ø A -0.01

It can be used on inclined or angular surfaces.

Ø A g6

AIR VALVE / EJECTOR Order

Forming Permitted Maximum Processing

Max. H

VA. 121012 12 10 12 2.5 10 7 0.95 VA. 161320 16 13 20

3 12 12 1.55

VA. 201720 20 17 20 3.5 16 12 1.55 * The mechanical stop is not available on product VA 040512

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Sayfa Page

229 229

RUNNER ADJUSTOR Open

DIVERTER VALVE FOR INJECTION COLD RUNNERS

It is compatible in high injection pressure or rapid production stamping.

Max. F

Ø A g6 Ø D SW

Order

A C D E F H J SW

Order

Material : 1.7225

A B C D E F H

ØB

0.03

J SW

SA. 120314 12 3 14 4 6 3 5 M6 3

SA. 160016 16 16 5 8 5 7 M8

SA. 160416 16 4 16 5 8 5 7 M8 4

SA. 200018 20 18 6 10 6 9 M10 5

SA. 200518 20 5 18 6 10 6 9 M10 5

RUNNER ADJUSTOR Open

Two Edged Trapezoid Figure

Two Way / Double Valve It is an effective method for semi air pushes. It is used in case of gas temprament or vacuum formation at ends ( In thin walled vessel). It allows the pass of each two way air, is uses external air for pushing process intro cavity. It deflates internal air to reverse direction to throw compressed gas containing in mould. C -0.05 H +1

Ø B H7

SA. 120014 12 14 4 6 3 5 M6

RUNNER POSITION CONFIGURATIONS

Ø A g6

E Hole Injector

Material : 1.7225

It allows the pass of each two way air

Ø A m6

www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

Ø A g6 Ø D SW

C +0.05

Material : INOX 1.4034 Hardness: 48 ± 3 HRC Max. Temperature : 1000C

Max. F

Runner diverter unit: By closing runner duct, the connection to mould parting surface is disconnected. According to the requirement of ejector pin, there are two different models. It can be mounted to male or female sides and can be processed as Trapezoid or wholly round runners.

TWO WAY AIR VALVE

CH. 2x100 www.cumsa.com CAD Starting Point

Material : INOX 1.1034 Hardness: 51 ± 3 HRC Max. Temperature: 1500C

TWO WAY AIR VALVE Order

VD. 080512

VD. 100612

VD. 120812

VD. 161020

Full Round

Bronze

C +0.1

Wholly Opened

To Left Cavity

To Right Cavity

Wholly Closed ØE

Ø A -0.01 Assembly Example

At Left Cavity

Page

230

At Right Cavity Section Injection Mould

Vertically Opened

Closed

INJECTION MOULD ACCESSORIES

3 VA - HV

Air Ejector

QUARTET STAMP UNIT

CABLE RETAINER CAP SC RR Magnetic Product does not require

UM STAMP WHEEL 0 - 9

In press / sheet mould parts stamping

It is ensured the traceability of sheet mould parts. There are 4 or 6 wheel options. The positions of wheels can be changed easily. There is no need to separate stamp form mould. Its mounting and usage are easy.

It is a changeable stamp wheel of extra hole UM Unit. Patented Cable Retainer 40 x 12: Specially in hot runner

Material: 1.2379 Hardness: 56 - 59 HRC System moulds, it keeps the diffused cables clean and smooth in duct. The product is magnetic material, it is self adhesive, there is no need to drill an extra hole. We recommend to keep max. mould temperature under 80º C. Because, plastic even magnets can be effected and broke down from high temperature. 13.8 A -0.2 0.5 12 -0.2

2.0

3.8 0.5

Ø 24

3.8

34.1

4.5+0.5

The numbers are between 0-9 and it has 11 positions one of which is empty.

Ø8

Material : F-524 Material : 1.2510 Hardness: 56 -58 HRC A (N0 Discs )

Corner 4x4 2.975 ±0.1

5+0.5

Mould Pouch / Slot Detail

Order:

RR. 180311

12+0.5

7 M6 CYLINDER HEAD CAP SCREWS

C B A +0.2

Max. 33.8

PERCUSSIVE REVERSE LETTER/ NUMBER Reverse Side Letter /Figure Sets: It is for marking numbering on and in mould and hammering in text creation. The characters stamped on mould are seen as reverse. The production is stamped as straight on product. (As mirror image) Refer to Page 79 Especially, in injection moulds

Order

UM. 043642

Order

15706 15747

UM. 064242

Product/ Letter- Figure Reverse Figure 9 Set ) Reverse Letter ( 27 Set )

Order

SC. 401245 40 28 SC. 401245H 40 28 SC. 601245 60 48 SC. 601245H 60 48

Material

ABS + 80ºC NfFeB PA + 30% 150ºC Glass Fiber ABS + 80ºC NfFeB PA + 30% 150ºC Glass Fiber

Page

231

6.10 M5 9.08 M6 12.30 M6

3 26 71 1

BRONZE Material

+0.1

5 4

FOOD ( Food )

GDM.14

Page

232

ØE

ØA -0.01 Section Injection Mould

Figure Calendar

VKT.07

12.5

M2.5

VKT.10

VKT.11

Order:

VKT.TİPNO D x L

VKT.08 Letter Calendar From N to Z

Letter Calendar From A to M

As per request Calendar Production As Per Request

6 71 1

ASSEMBLY EXAMPLE

ØD

Marked / Arrowed Calendar DISMANTLE

261

713

VKT.09

(0)

GDM.13

INSTALL

5 4

GDM.12 5 OTHERS

MOUNTING 5 EXAMPLE

1 0 9

3 2

3 26 71 1

5 4

( OTHER )

3 26 71 1

ØA

5 4

VKT.06

3 26 71 1

3 2

5 4

9 082 7 1

3 62 71 1

5 4

OTHERS

5 M

1 Work /5Shift Calendar

519 1 0

18 GDM.11

5 4

VKT.05

5 TABLET COMPATIBLE WITH 18 ALIMENTARY P. LAW

GDM.09 GDM 14 10 10 12 10 GDM 14 16 16 14 16 0.3 PP GDM 14 20 20 16 20 GDM.10 5

Material : 1.2842 Stainless Steel Hardness: 60 HRC

Daily Calendar

1 0 9 6

VKT.04

1 0519

Order

PE-BD 0

VKT.03

5GDM.08

Year Calendar

Weekly Calendar

9 028 7 1

PE-LD

5 4

GDM.07

1 501 9

LDPE

9 028 7 1

GDM.06

GDM... 20

2 791 08

GDM... 16

PVC

5 4

10 6 - 4.0 M4 10 6 - 4.0 M4 019 5 12 8 1.6 1 5.6 M5 0.3 12 10 2.0 6.8 M6 18 M6 14 12 2.6 9.0 16 0519 16 3.2 11.5 M6 1

GDM... 12

6 8 10 12 16 20

GDM... 10

GDM... 06

GDM.05

GDM.04

GDM... 08

791

Order

Ø Dg6

18 VKT.02

028

HDPE

PE-HD

GDM

RECYCLING TABLETS

GDM.03

0 519

Month1and Year Calendar

Material : 1.2083 Hardness: 50 - 52 HRC

1/2 B

PET

As per request

9 028 7 1

GDM.02

VKT.01

EMPTY

Standard Model Year Calendar

GDM.01

DIVERSIFICATION

Logo /OK

VKT

We are offer wide options with our economic prices. Mould Calendars that are preferred mostly for medium and small moulds, easy for mounting, also can be mounted on devices such as pins. Rotary Inner Hub of Mould Calendar can be adjusted limitlessly ( Worm Gear). Mounting is completed by pressing thoroughly from the inner hub and pulling from the bottom with bolt.

DIVERSIFICATION

Long Type Mould Date Stamp With threaded Rear Side

Text and Definition Characters: It is for precise sign and definition of plastic raw material that is inlaid in 0,2 Depth (Conical Gradient) processing on moulds in production according to diameters. In addition: It is facilitated to recognize raw material that is about to break. See: It is compatible with DIN 6120 Single Symbol and ISO 1043-1 Normal Sign and International Codes.

SCREWED DATE STAMP / MOULD CALENDAR

GDM

RECYLING, MOULD TABLETS

Plastic Raw Material Data, Definition, Transformation Seals

For metal injection moulds containing high temperature, date stamp involved in page 228 FT (Cumsa) Product should be selected.

0.2

3.5

2.5

0.2

3.5

0.2

4.0

4.5

0.2

6.0

4.8

0.2

8.0

6.0

0.25

7.8

0.35

9.7

0.35

12.7 0.35

Ø D +g6 3

DKT.12

DKT.16

10.5

5.3

DKT.20

ØE

5 4

Important : To change the month, the hub arrow on the unit is turned counter clockwise and the inner two parts are rotated. To change they year, pls. turn clockwise Material : 1.2842 Stainless Steel Hardness : 60 HRC

Anticlockwise (Month)

ADJUSTER KIT Bronze

876 61

ØE H7

ØD

INSTALL

Bronze

Ø D H7

Setting

KT.11

5.5

As per request Calendar

Clockwise (Year)

6 PIECES WATCHMAKER SCREWDRIVER SET

KT.09 Marked/ Arrowed Calendar

DKT

Pls. specify year in Month/Year Models. ASSEMBLY EXAMPLE

Order:

KT.08

DKT.08

DKT.10

KT.TYPENO D x L

Letter Calendar From A to M

KT.10

Order

KT.07

ØD

61 71

3 26 71 1 61

Figure Calendar

Letter Calendar From N to Z

125

3 2

1 Work /5Shift Calendar

1 0 9

Ø d1 3 2

5 4

KT.05

261

ØD

MOULD CALENDAR

Daily Calendar

18 KT.06

1 0 9

5 4

713

KT.04

5 4

2 791 08

12 +1

20 -0.5

COMPLICATED (DUAL) MOULD CALENDAR

KT.03

Weekly Calendar

0.02

791

028

STANDARD Year Calendar

18 KT.02

ØL± 0.6 x L

Month and Year

1 501 9

9 028 7 1

519 1 0 STANDARD

6 71 1

Only inner part is rotated with screwdriver

KT.01

STANDARD Month Calendar

Year: This product reducing needs and area required for cost and two different date stamp, shows two different criterias on unit. Its Standard Model is as 12 Month+ 6 Year, i.e. is not required any change along 6 years. The length of all date stamps (20 mm) are same.

DIVERSIFICATION

Two Different Date Stamp, Dual Date Stamp With a Unit as 12 Month + 6

Ø D m6

Wide variety of options are available with quite economic prices. It is compatible to use in all injection mould systems. For mounting, it is enough to mould, only a hole as product diameter ( H7 Reamed). Mounting: By drilling a suitable hole in the desired part of mould, place mould calendar into it (With Bronze or Rubber Hammer), making a tight hole (not to rotate date stamp) is useful.

COMPLICATED (DUAL) MOULD CALENDAR

ØB C

DATE STAMP/ MOULD CALENDAR

Cylindrical, Standard Model - Production as per request

DKT

Order No : CRP-TK 9000

Watchmaker Screwdriver Set: 6 Pieces Rotary Turret Set 4 Pieces (1.5 - 2 - 2.5 - 3) Flat Ended Mini Screwdriver 2 Pieces PHO - PH1) Star Edged Mini Screwdriver Chrome Vanadium Steel Blackened Stainless Ends Ergonomic Handles Upper Part of Handle is with turret.

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Sayfa Page

233 233

AIR RELIEF VALVE

SINTERED GAS RELIEF FILTER

YELLOW WIRED GAS RELIEF FILTER

HEADING MOULD

Inner Mould Gas Relief Valve

Wide Channel, Gas Relief Valve

Plastic Inj. Heading Moulds

SGA

ØD ØA n

GGA

In injection moulds, it drains unwanted gas created by melted raw white fastly via wide channels, does not resist to very high pressures, can be collapsed. It can leave a mark on objects in stamp. Mostly it is suitable to use in inner parts, can be used in metal injection moulds not containing very high temperatures. It is an Economic Product. In mounting; Exactly, use copper/rubber hammer. Don't make any mechanic or levelling process on filter unit ( The pores are effected) In production; Exactly, should be manually touched to gas filters on working mould.

+0.05

With Sintered (Multi Channel) Structure, It is a featured product implementing entrapped gas relief in injection moulds and is high quality stainless product that does not leave a mark on objects in stamp and can resist to high pressures.

+0.05

STV

It is used in ventilation plug and plastic injection heading moulds for optimum ventilation to mould cavity. Due to the air channels of plug being parallel and wide, it drains the air in mould rapidly, also air chamber inside of the unit acts as a pool in drainage of the air. The burns on product should be cleaned instantly. These burrs can result to adhere to the pores. For cleaning, the compressed air or cleaning spray can be used (WINKEL 451280). Mounting; Due to the knurled outer part of product, it provides tight keep and inside the safe of hole.

SINTERED GAS RELIEF FILTER SGA

12.5

YELLOW WIRED GAS RELIEF FILTER

SGA D x L STEEL HOUSING SINTERED GAS RELIEF FILTER

Order:

GVSY

External Surface is similar with grinded sinter structure mould inner gas relief valve SGA Model.

GGA

Order

GGA.03

3.0

GGA.04

4.0

GGA.05

5.0

GGA.06

6.0

GGA.08

8.0

GGA.10

GGA.12

GGA.16

ØD e t

In assembly

ØD

In assembly

ØD H7

Material: Sintered Stainless Steel - HRC 40 Filter Thickness: 10 Micron Tension: 300 N/mm2 Durability: Weak Bases - Organic Acids Plastic Melts - Synthetic Resins Order D L Order D L GVSY 04 4 GVSY 12 12 12 GVSY 06 6

10 GVSY 16 16 14

GVSY 08 8

GVSY 20 20

GVSY 10 10 12

GVSY 28 28

Page

234

Section Production Injection Mould As Per Request

5.0

4.1

9.0

3.6

880

0.03

2.5

A n

880

2.0

D 6.5

1200

A n

0.05

250 / 400

D 1.6

Ø Knurl HEADING MOULD

STV Order 6x10 6 D

AIR RELIEF VALVE STV STV STV 8x10 10x10 12x10 8

3.5

5.0

6.0

8.0

1.0

1.1

1.3

1.5

0.3

4.0

5.0

6.5

8.0

3.5

4.0

Knurl

6.2

8.2

10.2

12.2

In Vacuum Objects

CONEHEADED PNEUMATIC EJECTOR

VHV

20 Coneheaded / Special Reamer

Mounted Coneheaded Pneumatic Ejector, Temperature Sensitive/ From Amcolay Material Mounting: It should be provided with special reamer and should be 0.9 mm out from mould parting surface. It is compatible for Metal Injection Moulds.

Max. Temp : 20 2500C

K +0.02

In High/ Deep Objects

SLEEVE PNEUMATIC EJECTOR V.

Ejector Position-Vacuum Dissolver - Short Type

It is the most suitable method for dissolving vacuum during injection. In wide and narrow walled objects, it continues to drain compressed air by vacuum in mould, all casing and processed surfaces have been produced from stainless steel. According to Pin( PHV )-Pneumatic Ejector, the shorter length is advantageous. Other technical details are similar.

Standard Pneumatic Ejector Valve

PHV

It is known as the most effective pneumatic ejector group. Especially, is ideal for deep and great mould. In mounting, definitely use the copper or rubber tipped hammer and bronze wedge.

Material : 1.4031 Hardness: 52 - 55 HRC Minimum Compressor Max. Temp. : 1500 Air Pressure 2- 9 Bar

Order

VHV.08

VHV.12

VHV.16

Compressor Air Pressure Min. 2-9 Barr

Deep Ejector Systems

Assembly Example

High

Special VHR Conical Reamer D 0

0.9

Coneheaded Pneumatic Ejector , SPECIAL REAMER

VHR

VHV : It is a pneumatic ejector mounting reamer.

d d2

+0.005 -0.005

±0.1

-0.005

±0.1

Economic Product: All diameters are available in our stocks

+0.003

Assembly Example

Minimum Compressor Air Pressure 3- 10 Bar

VHV

CONEHEADED PNEUMATIC EJECTOR

L -0.02 Assembly Example

Material : 1.4031 Hardness: 52 - 55 HRC Max. Temp.: : 1500

Ø d1

Mounting : 0.9 mm Out From Mould Surface

Ø <D

ØD

L1 L

d1 H7 Reamed

PIN /LONG TYPE EJECTOR

KHV VALVE

Domestic Production

Economic Product: All diameters are available in our stocks

Order

KHV.06

3.5

PHV.08

d1 d2 R 6

7 01

PHV.10

10 28

8 01

PHV.12

12 30

9 02

PHV.16

16 43

10 14 02

PHV.18

18 43

10 14 03

10 16 03

KHV.08

KHV.10

KHV.12

KHV.16

17.5

KHV.20

KHV.25

PHV.20

20 43

KHV.30

27.5

PHV.25

25 60 20/28 16 16 04

SPECIAL TECHNICAL INFORMATION! Important: The slots on the mould should be opened precisely according to the selected countersunk ejector pin dimension The information is advisory. Mounting and Installation Example

Coneheaded Pneumatic Ejector , VHR SPECIAL REAMER Order d d2 d3 L1 L VHR.08

VHR.12

100

VHR.16

122

In İnjection Moulds: Especially In Great Objects/Deep Boxing Moulds, For Using In System Presented In Technical Drawing By Simple And Economical Method Facilitating Product/Object Desintegration With Compressed Air Vacuum Problem, It Is Processed ( ) Marked Areas In Application On Moulds Precisely By Cutting Suitable To Special Length Mould With Selection Of Countersunk Ejector Pin (Page 247) As 6-8-10 Diameter And 315 Length Selection In Countersunk Pin Dimension Parallel. In Prepared System, It Is Provided To Drain Compressed Air / Vacuum Drainage In Mould By Connection To Ejector Plates In Such Way That Head Of Section Bölüm Countersunk Ejectors Are Up Inversely. Also, It Can Be Provided To Be Injection Enjeksiyon Used With It Is Pneumatic Ejector Valve Feature. Mould Kalıp

Sayfa Page

235 235

For using inside of the mould, (gaiter) can be put to bottom of the plates as support. By drilling a hole ( 8 mm H11 ), flexible claws on thrust are opened inside of the hole and is molded. During effect, can be easily dismantled. Thus, symmetry could be provided in mounting and repetition of plates. Assembly Ă&#x2DC; 8.2 is easy (By drilling)

Ă&#x2DC; 8 H11

Frictional Plate Puller (Braking)

This simple plate puller, provides great benefit in 3 plate moulds that average gravitation force and plate sensitivity are sufficient, similarly, this standard plate part can be used as brake with stopping purpose between plates. For example, if it is desired to wait or postpone opposite/counter parts motions or to avoid collision of hard, detrimental plates, it provides suitability for use. Maximum Temperature : 1200C Polyamide Extrusion Holes Ends, should be left radiuses. Don't use any oil on extrusion surfaces.

4 -0.01

Polyamide

Order

G.144.20

G.144.30

25 3/ Conical Cylinder Head Cap Screw

( Alien )

Conical Cylinder Head Cap Screw

SCP M8 Guide Bush G.30

H6 R 1.5

Maximum Temperature: 800C

Mould Parting, Adjusting Bolt Order

d1 d2

GPLA

M SW L1 3

GPLA.10

10 8.5 M5

GPLA.12

11 M6

3.5 20

GPLA.13

11 M6

3.5 20

GPLA.16

14 M8

Reamed Hole (16 H7)

GPLA.20

16 M10 8

16 H7

G.110

Coloured Nylon

L1 SW

Mould Inner Assembly Kit

With this simple part, you can separate desired plate group in mould. Life time is 50.000 stamps, beside being cost effective, it is provided mounting and dismantling facility. It is also used in small and medium moulds beside two stepped moulds or side cores. According to mould weights: Up to 100 Kg. 4 Pieces 12 mm diameter Up to 500 Kg. 4 Piece 16 mm diameter Up to 1000 Kg. 4 Pieces 20 mm diameter Over 1000 Kg. should be used minimum 6 pieces. Polyamide extrusion holes in moulds should be H7 Reamed and also should be left as Radiuses, don't use any oil on extrusion surfaces.

Order:

THRUST PLATE

Mould, Plate Parting, Setting Bolt Frictional Plate Puller

13 14

GPLA

FRICTIONAL PULLER

R 1.5

G. 144

THRUST PLATE

SCP M8

PLATE PULLER

Rapid Mounted Thrust Plate With A Hole

G.144

THRUST PLATE, GAITER

Assembly Example 3

H2 G.110 For order and technical information, pls. refer Page 16.

Page

236

G.21 ( Page 30 )

Section Injection Mould

Reliable Label

Polyamide ( PA )

1 Retaining Pin

Frictional Plate Puller ( Figure 1 ) is sended its force via friction between Polyamide Bush and (Figure 2 ) extrusion wall ( Figure 3 ). Friction force can be adjusted stepless. Optionally, (3 mm) can be adjusted as the suitable length of cylinder head cap screw.

Conical Cylinder Head Cap Screw Plate Parting Surface

Nylon Bearer Plate (H1)

3.0 mm Bearer Plate (H2)

Compression Surface

Maximum Temperature: 1000

MTC

CORE SLIDE: SPRING RETAINER UNIT Slide Holder in Core Systems of Injection Moulds

Round core holders are operated without retaining pin and also can lift the core without core holder. Being round facilitates mounting. Material : 1.2767

HIC (Countersunk Head Screw)

P1 P2

±0.05

Usability is designed according to the loading. With 3 mm holding rate, it presents 48 / 88 / 176 Nw force requirements according to the types. Retainer pin is locked ØE completely inside of core. J While mould makes closing process, pin is entered inside B even when holder is opened, alignment until it declutches.

900

D4 D 1g6 B2 ±0.05

M5 x 12

R t2 D2

H7 / g6

ØD ØH

Material : 1.2767 Hardness: 52 HRC

900

MTC

CORE SLIDE RETAINER SPRING UNIT Order

MTC.13

6.6

1.4

4.3

1.0

1.6

MTC.18

9.6

2.0

6.0

1.8

2.0

MTC.27

14.4

3.0

9.0

2.8

3.0

HIC

0.35

2.2

0.35

28 Nw

34 Nw

M2 -16

0.50

3.2

0.50

38 Nw

42 Nw

M3 -50

0.50

4.3

0.75

38 Nw

92 Nw

M4 -25

Assembly Example

ØM

Mould Opened

R9.5

6 12 +0.1 -0

Ø K ± 0.1 Ø L H7 A

Order

Being robust and small and round dimensionally, it provides mounting facility to mould.

M5 x 13 DEEP C

MTY.100

27.43

1.83

20.2

15.75

9.52

MTY.200

33.53

3.07

26.29

18.8

10.67

MTY.400

3.78

24.76

22.1

11.86

Kgf.

4.8

2.3

15.87

4.5

6.35

3.9

19.05

18.2

7.92

4.9

22.23

19.4

Mould Closed

± 0.1

+0.1

±0.1

Usability is designed according to the loading. Core system is operated independently by itself, Contact Linkage Line

Maximum Temp.: 1200C

17 +0.2

4.75

t1 -0.05

Small, Round, Easy To Mount, Independent, Contact Linkage

6.35

YYH (Spring)

MTY

CORE SLIDE: SPRING RETAINER/PIN UNIT

Section Bölüm BOTH Producing Selling Injection Enjeksiyon

Reliable Label With Proper Price

Mould Kalıp

Sayfa Page

237 237

MT Lİ U, PİM TUTUC

MAÇA

1.5

43 53 -0.05

38 -0.05

Sipariş

SPRING

MTS 40M 86

MTB. 40M

4.5

810

12 10

Ø8 SPRING

Order:

MTK.1

45 30

53 20.3

R1 MM5 8 M6 M5 10 M8 M6 13

86 45 30 53 20.3 36 56 56 L1 R R1 R2 M Max. Kayma

H N K D1 L1 R 15.5 D16 L16 R R18 R25 26 25 8 6 6 15.5 20.5 810 5 6 68 68.5 15.5 36 36 10 8 8.5 20.5 10 20.5 25 1013 610 810 8.5 56 56 12 10 10 25

10Kayma (Kgf.) Max. 5 M5 (Kgf.) 1020(Kgf.)

6 M6 (Kgf.) 2040(Kgf.) 10 M8

Uygulama : Maça Tutucu Açılırken Küçük 12 10 10 25 13Pim Tutcunun 10 M8İçine Girer, 40 (Kgf.)

K value: It i s a load value

32 -02

Maximum Temperature : 1000C Material : 1.2343 Hardness : 54 ± 2 HRC

M M E

A38 B19 C16 E16 F9.1 G19 H26 N25 MTS 10M 38 19 16 16 9.1 19 MTB.10M 20M 12.7 1924 2636 2536 MTB. 3854 1932 1620 1621 9.1 MTS 20M 54 32 20 21 12.7 24 MTB.20M 40M 20.3 2436 3656 3656 MTB. 5486 3245 2030 2153 12.7

M5 Ø 42

Ø 4.2

16.5 -02

Order

MTB. 10M Sipariş

SPRING

Ø D1 H8 Ø D1 H8

1.6 1.6

0.8 0.8 C Min. Min.

Ød

1.5 H 1.5 H

G Ød

-0.1

14 -0.05

P1= 62 N

P2=7

TON

-0.1

12 -0.05

R0.5

1.5

-0.03

900

some spare holes and cavities can A be required. E This unit is for limitless motions.

N B

18 -0.01

900

R0.5 1.8

1.8

-0.03

Precise - Locked and Alignment, Pinned It lifts the core without the holder in MAÇA core TUTUCU, MTB During the PİMLİ fixed mounting with body bolts, system

N B

14 -0.01

RETAINER, PINNED MTS MTK.2 MAÇA CORE TUTUCU, PİMLİ MTB

CORE RETAINER TYPE: 2

P1=114N

MTK.1

Contact Linkage Line in Core Systems

P2=126N

CORE RETAINER TYPE: 1

Çaplı Yanlış Hatalamalar ( Hızasızlıklar ) Bile Olsa İşlem Devam Eder. CoreTutucu Block Ø 8 Uygulama : Maça Açılırken Pim Tutcunun İçinecore Girer,block Küçük required to emerge

SPRING Montaj Örneği Çaplı Yanlış Hatalamalar ( Hızasızlıklar ) core Bile Olsa İşlem Devam Eder. from retainer. 10 (Kgf.) 0 : Tespit +0.25coreÖnemli While is opened, it isPiminin entered Maximum Temperature : 100 C Y=X Montaj Örneği +0.13 Merkezindeneven OlanifMesafe 20 (Kgf.) Material : 1.2343 Hardness : 54 ± 2 HRC into pin holdretainer there Önemli : Tespit Piminin Y=X+0.25 Maça Civatasının Merkezine +0.13 are minorMerkezinden errors(misalignment), Olan Mesafe 40 (Kgf.) Order: Kadar Olması Çok Önemlidir. Maça process is stillCivatasının continued.Merkezine Tespit Piminin Maçaya Tam Kadar Olması Çok Önemlidir. Assembly Procedure: Sıkı Olarak Tutucunun İçine Tespitfrom Piminin Maçaya Tam slot again,Kalıp Maça 1. To remove core holder casing Kilitlenmesi Gerekir, Olarak Tutucunun İçine Bloğu an extractor pin hole should Sıkı beKapanma opened on mould. İşleminde Serbest Maça Kilitlenmesi Gerekir, Kalıp center theVerimli coreSerbest Kalana on Kadar Bir Bloğu 2. The distance between pinKapanma İşleminde Assembly Dizayn Olarak Uygulanmıştır. retainer andZ=X bolt+0.40 center on core holder during Kalana Kadar Verimli Bir

MTK.2

MTB MTB

Example

+0.25

mounting are precise, (F) should calculated and DizaynbeOlarak Uygulanmıştır. Z=X+0.40 +0.25 adjusted in a best way. 3. Prefer a model with more force than the ultimate load requires for MTS/MTB that is suitable for your mould. (This is important for safety). In similar position with Technical Info and Retainer Cam Mounting MTB (With Pin Slide next page)

1.5 Ø D1H8

Page

238

Section Injection Mould

Core Screw Retainer Pin Spring

Core Housing 2

MTB CORE RETAINER LATCH

PIN, CLOSED SPRING TYPE CORE RETAINER

Core Housing 1

MTM

Precise - Lock and Alignment Pinned, Spring Type Core Retaining Pin Mounted, Balanced/ Precise Core Lock Unit Retainer During fixed mounting with body core bolts, some spare hole and Core Retainer Latch: L cavities can be required. This unit is for limitless motions. Core Bolt (F) added to holes A should not be in too deep. After it Material : locks itself, core casing should be E 1.4118 operated smoothly and seamlessly. Therefore, don't tight the bolt too much. When retaining pin is on core, core casing is attached on mould, also core sliding distance should be calculated exactly and then should be mounted.

Hardness: : 55 - 62 HRC

N1 N B

Ød L

1.5 1.5

C ØD

Core Block

H It can be mounted with 900 retainer pin, the pin position and opening side of core block should be the same.

If there is no different change in mould closing; this product can be used as core lock in system. Order

MTB. 38

16 31.5 24.89

MTB. 54

MTB. 86

Material : 1.2767 Hardness : 55 - 62 HRC

D B

Maximum 0 Temp. : 100 Especially, it can be preferred in alloy material moulds.

F A

Core Retainer Latch

Order

34.5

MTM 1040

21.5

9.5

5.1

34.93 36.5

14.5

MTM 1243

25.5

6.1

53.98 49.5

22.5

MTM 1650

31.5

8.1

d/L

Core

25.5

8.5

M5X11

6x30

10 Kg.

10.5

M6X14

8x40

20 Kg.

M8X18

10x60

40 Kg.

Application: While core retainer is opened, pin is entered into holder, even if there are minor errors (misalignment), the process is continued.

Order

MTM 1040

17.5 40 18

MTM 1243

7.5

MTM 1650

9.5 20.5

Assembly Example

Max.Retaining

Ret. Pin 10

Ø 6 - 30

15 25

Assembly Example

Dimension is important. X Assembly Example Important: The distance +0.25 Y=X +0.13 from the center of retainer

Y Core Block

Z Z=X+0.40 +0.25

pin should be until the center of MTB bolt. This is very important. The retainer pin should be locked inside of the holder in a way that is fully tightened to the core. In mould closing process, it has been applied as an efficient design until it is unlatched.

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Sayfa Page

239 239

t 1 ±0.1

CORE SLIDE, BOTTOM SUPPORT & INCLINED UNIT G.147 CORE SLIDE; LATERAL GUIDE PLATES

0.5x450

0.5 x 450

13 ±0.1 D2 +0.2

B1 -0.01 D1 +0.2

t 3 ±0.1

B1 -0.01 D1 +0.2

G.148

Type : A

Type :B

L 1 -0.2

L2 ±0.1

L3 ±0.01

CORE SLIDE, BOTTOM SUPPORT& INCLINED UNIT G.147 CORE SLIDE; LATERAL GUIDE PLATES B1 t1

Core Guide Block, Mounting Example

Page

240

Section Injection Mould

5.3 M6

6.4 M8

Order G.148.1550 G.1481560 G.1481570 G.1481575 G.1481580 G.1481590 G.1481880 G.14818100 G.14818120 G.14818140 G.14818160 G.14824100 G.14824120 G.14824140 G.14824160 G.14824180 G.14830120 G.14830140 G.14830160 G.14830180 G.14830200

B1 t1 L1 Type B2 50 A 60 A 70 B 15 11 9 75 B 80 B 90 B 80 A 100 B 18 22 120 B 11 140 B 160 B 100 A 120 A 24 36 140 B 15 160 B 180 B 120 A 140 A 30 50 160 B 18 180 B 200 B

t2 t3 L2 30 40 50 5.7 60 60 70 56 76 12 6.8 96 106 136 68 88 12 9.0 108 128 148 80 100 15 11 120 140 160

Assembly Examples

L3 10 20 30 40 40 50 32 52 72 92 112 36 56 76 96 116 40 60 80 100 120

G.148

D1 D3

D5 D4

L1 Type t3 L2 D1 G.147.1250 50 A 30 G.147.1260 60 A 40 G.147.1270 70 B 50 11 G.147.1275 75 B 60 G.147.1280 80 B 60 12 G.147.1290 90 B 5.7 70 10 G.147.12100 100 B 80 G.147.12120 120 B 100 G.147.12140 16 140 B 120 G.147.12160 160 B 140 G.147.12180 180 B 160 G.147.18100 100 A 76 G.147.18120 120 A 96 18 16 140 G.147.18140 B 6.8 116 11 G.147.18160 160 B 136 G.147.18180 180 B 156 G.147.24140 140 B 116 G.147.24160 160 B 136 24 21 180 G.147.24180 B 6.8 156 11 G.147.24200 200 B 176 G.147.24220 220 B 196 Inclined Core Guide Block, Assembly Example Angular Pin Guide Block Assembly Example Order

B1 -0.01

L 2 ±0.1

B1 -0.01

L 1 -0.2

Type : A B2 -0.01

Type : B

D5 +0.5

L 1 -0.2 L 2 ±0.1

Hardness: : 58 + 2 HRC our production Milled, Precision Grinded, Perpendicularity is also available Controlled Block With Prepared Connection Holes in special L 1 -0.2 L2 ±0.1 material and As per request, L3 ±0.01 special sizes. our special productions are available.

Hardness : 58 + 2 HRC Milled, Precision Grinded, Perpendicularity Controlled, Block With Prepared Connection Holes

It can be used also as Core Guide Block Bottom Support Plate Core Block Lateral Support Ready Guide Plates. or Inclined Angular Pin Unit Guide Block (Page 241) Bolt Slots and Ready Perforated Retainer Pin. t 1 ±0.1 Material : 1.2842 t 2 +0.2 t 1 ±0.1 As per request, Material : 1.2842

10 M6 4 -

11 M8 6 7

15 M10 8 9

18 M12 10 11

Wear Plates, Self Lubricating Pls. see Page 42

G.122

SW For clamping bolt, alien key is used

G.150

CORE SLIDE: STOPPING

Core Slide, Ejector Pin

It can be used as joint in inner mould designs. Ejector Pin is a pratical and easy to mount product.

Core Slide: "L" Thrust Production as per request

MxP

G.148

CO.5

ØD -0.1

-0.2

When placing order, pls. request technical support.

Core Slide: "L" Thrust Production as per request

G150. M10 G150. M12 G150. M16

M6 x 1.0 5 Alien M10 x 1.5 8 Alien M12 x 1.75 10 Alien M16 x 2.0 14 Alien

10 16 20 25

40 40 40 40

4 5 6 9

10 15 28 24

15 15 15 15

When placing order, pls. request technical support.

Core Slide Lateral Support Pls. See Page 236

P G.150

Core Ejector

G.147 CORE PILLAR See Page 31

MTY

Core Ejector

CORE STOPPERS

G.14

BSM CORE PILLAR BUSH ANGULAR RETAINER BUSH See Page 31

G.61

YBS

KBS

Ball Locking Screw For order and Technical Info, refer to Page 132 Toothed Screwed Spring Locking For order and Technical Info, refer to Page 132 Belt and Spigot Spring Stops For order and Technical Info, refer to Page 132

Core Slide: It is a ready core slide that has been milled, precision grinded and 20º C inclined angular has been given to cavity surface. All edge corner bevels of core slide are broken, Slide has been processed as " T Slotted". 0.2

B+ +0.3

200 R

+0.3

MxP

Order G150. M6

It is ready for processing, the only thing to be done is processing cavity surfaces.

H+0.2

G.150

CORE SLIDE: STOPPING

G.149

READY, CORE SLIDE

H1+0.2 +0.3

H2 Material: 1.2344

G.149

READY, CORE SLIDE Order G149.1220 G149.1225 G149.1240 G149.1263 G149.1620 G149.1625 G149.1640 G149.1663 G149.2040 G149.2063 G149.2080 G149.2540 G149.2563 G149.2580 G149.3263 G149.3280 G149.32100 G149.4063 G149.4080 G149.40100 G149.5080 G149.50100 G149.50135 G149.6380 G149.63100 G149.63125

Reliable Label

±0

Hardness: 42 - 45 HRC L

12 40

16 50

20 63

25 71

32 100

40 100

50 112

63 112

B 20 25 40 63 20 25 40 63 40 63 80 40 63 80 63 80 100 63 80 100 80 100 125 80 100 125

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

B1 26 31 46 69 26 31 46 69 46 69 86 46 69 86 71 88 108 71 88 108 90 110 135 90 110 135

Core Slide Lateral Thrust Pls. refer to Page 236

H2 H3 R

4 1.5 8 1.5

4 1.5 12 1.5

5 2 15 2

5 2 20 2

6 3 26 3

6 3 34 3

8 4 42 4

8 4 56 4

Sayfa Page

241 241

1. UNIT

H2 H4

KAU

In this double unit system, 2. Unit is consisted from fixed and 1. Unit is consisted from movable group. While mould is opened, movable spring (1. Unit) is moved on fixed part (2.Unit) on sliding, while pin of spring group is passed over elevation on fixed group, hook is remained free and 2. group of mould scrapper starts to open. Free arm starts to open freely on mould casing. Free arm should be moved freely on mould casing. Settings: Both units (spring/holder - freearm) should be left well-timedly, incorrect or improper mounting is caused to tapper off and to bend of movable plate (HG) or to break unit arm. Units: Before mould is closed, it should be adjusted, open mould and control movable plate (H6) and movements of arms... (Fine tuning is required) Pls. apply until free/movable arms are fully working with each other with springs and lock system, then Free/Extractor Arm will become centered/ linked with locked /spring unit. While processes are continued, pls. grease movable parts of units with thin grease oil. In mounting, impacts and stroke of plate should be considered. During and after assembly, bolts and other fasteners should be controlled, in part replacement, first, it should be started by dismantling spring /lock unit. Pls. determine your products in suitable dimensions.

L3 L4 L1Âą0.02 L

Cam Retainer Spring Locking Block Locking Pin

Spacer

Cam Locking

30 - 45 HRC

R L10

Ă&#x2DC; d+0.02

Support Plate

14.5

30 - 45 HRC

2. UNIT

In mounting of bolts, pls. use damping chemicals and spring washer.

360

50 40

Traveller Pin

55 43

12 12 150 12 40 100 14 28 24

KAU.67

67 53

15 14 200 16 50 150 18 36 32

N1 N2 N3 d

E E1 E3 E4 R Ra T T1 T2 T3 T4 T5

12 6

5 13 4 13 4 5 5 5 24

16 8

6 16 5 18 5 6 6 6 32.5 10 6.5 16.5 10

H1 H6 H2

Mould Closed

9 10 20 6.5

1. UNIT

19 30 H 83.5 152 194.5

2. UNIT

L2 90 170 220

L1 140 204 254

H 83.5 152 194.5

Order

BOX460.140 140 BOX460.204 204 BOX460.254 254

15 L2 90 170 220

1.OPENING

Mould Closed

A1 2.OPENING

A1 A

Unit Mould 1. Group is opened Mould 1 and 2. Group is opened Assembly Position Section Injection Mould Lateral Assembly View H6

242

15 5.5

Page

6 5.5 11.5 6

8 37.5

KAU.55

L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 N

Order

13.7

1. UNIT

23.5

T3 T2 L7 Parallel Mounting of Locking Unit: Pls. adjust or cut cam lock arm in required distance, open hole positions of bolts, tight cam locks on their positions, complete adjusting position with compatible parts. By forming dowel, secure cam locks. Pls. cut extractor arm in required distance and insert into mould perpendicularly. For being equal of drop points on each sliding, pls. be sure that " L " length pops out. (For emerging of outlets smooth/ compatible and fast, also it is to avoid inclining of scraper plate). * Pls. insert cam lock arm, extractor arms on minimum two plate on mould. Important: After mounting unit, the operation test should be applied to your mould exactly, before production, the controls of opening and closing test controls of movable system should be separately. Movable parts can be greased.

Retainer Pin

Extractor Arm

N N1

In injection moulds, it is for two stage (Stripper Plate) moulds. Opening priority of plates is related in assembly direction of the unit. During assembly, after selected stroke, the other arm is secured. N2

BOX

DOUBLE UNIT - MOULD PLATE PARTING COMBINATION

By Double Sided Lock System, Safe and Reliable, Often Heat Toothed, Easy Mounting with Control Arms on Lock

Cylinder H. Cap Screw

2. UNIT

22 13.6

DOUBLE LOCK, PLATE PARTING UNIT

B2+0.1 +0.03

ØD+0.1

Accerelated Core Protector

EJECTOR ACCERELATOR SWING It is used in case that ejector plate requires motion/stroke more than normal motion distance.

Top View

By fitting an ejector pin to the product, repulsion / extrusion can be extended during injection.

Ø D1

+0.05

≤S

IHS

23.5 KN

Mechanical swing system increasing stroke distance of system connected T2

Order

B +0.15

K+0.15

E 13 15 52

Medium Force F = 2.400 Kg. Automatic Ejector

B -0.1

M10 x 1.5 G.115 M12 x 1.75 A/B M14 x 2.0 M16 x 2.0

M16 x 1.5

A =

Order

IHS

EJECTOR ACCERELATOR SWING Order

IHS.3

8.5

IHS.6

16 16.5 8

IHS.8

16 16.5 8

T3 T4 D1 L1

H2 H3

2.5

7.6

E 17 18 68

C D

M16 x 2.0 M16 x 1.5 M18 x 2.5 M18 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 G.116 M20 x 2.5 35 25 68 M24 x 3.0 M24 x 1.5 A/B M27 x 3.0 M27 x 1.5 M30 x 3.5 M30 x 1.5

Mould Opened

65 52

F= 31.4 KN

ØD m6

High Force F = 3.200 Kg. Automatic Ejector

G.115

High Force F = 31.4 KN Automatic Ejector System

+0.05

Mould Opened

Mould Closed

48 38

+0.1

A T3 A+0.1

Ejector System in Moulding: it can be used in each positions with rapid and simple mounting ( even within existing mould ), only it is released during injection. In any injection mould, it makes contact with returns especially hydraulic ejector systems or it protects ejector pins to possible core contact in mechanical ejectors/core systems. The installation period is so simple and short. Initial settings can be done to unit on mould. In mounting, it should be controlled that back stroke is completely in back position and in contact manually. For serial and economic processes, it can be increased up to 25-30 per minute. 2 Piece Unit Medium Force F = 23.5 KN Material : Automatic Ejector System 1.7147 Hardness: F= 60 HRC 40

+0.1

ØD2

AUTOMATIC PERCUSSION EJECTOR PLATE SYSTEM Reliable Back Stroke in Ejectors - Reliable Injection Automatic

Mould Opened

Back Stroke is activated

Ejector plates are reclined back with retractors, during resting, automatic stroke system is invalidated unit (spring rollers) and end part is released.

Ejector System is activated

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

G.116

Stroke Back Colomn Please see page 32.

Mould closed

Ejector Lock is opened

Sayfa Page

243 243

CONNECTED HYDRAULIC CYLINDER

THSE - THSF - THSM

Head Flange Various Cylinder Connection Types

INJECTION MOULDS, HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS Hydraulic Cylinders for moulds such as Waste Water Pipes, PVC Pipes.

THS

Standard Type

Hydraulic Ccylinders: They are in Standard "THS" Types or as per request, are in special shapes and dimensions. In Plastic Injection Waste Water / Contaminated Water PVC pipes moulds, they are used in formation of core systems. The energy requirement of system is obtained from system by connecting plastic injection machine to hydraulic system. As per request, the motions over fixed limit can be obtained by connecting piston rod to system. Working System: It is hydraulic oil, Maximum Working Pressure: 160 Bar. Motion Type: Double action Sealing: It is provided with Polyurethane + NBR. Working Temperature: It is between - 20 / + 80º. Stroke Error: ± 0.3 mm. Cylinder: It is honed with cold drawn / rolled ST - 52. Piston: Diameter Tolerance is grinded with H8 RA ≥ 2 Micron and coated with hard chrome. As per request, auxiliary Equipment (Connections, hoses and so on) can be supplied. In such moulds, automatic ejector plate joint system is recommended.

L + Stroke / Course

Except Standard Piston, as per request, there is also special type hydraulic cylinder piston production available. For excessive heat environments, as per request, special / single effect ( spring return ) shaft dimensions can be changed. In types, also hydraulic cylinders are available. The following table, is diversification of some connection types belonging to these cylinders.

THSE HYDRAULIC CYLINDER C1 + Stroke / Course

Standard Type Linked Model

THSF HYDRAULIC CYLINDER D1 + Stroke / Course

G.115 - G.116

Automatic Ejector

Perforated Type Flange Coupling

THSM HYDRAULIC CYCLINDER

E1 + Stroke / Course

Some Basic Formulas ( It is as advisory ) In Application Dimension Formula Unit

N THS. 40 50 m m / s THS. 50 60 bar THS. 63 75 m2 THS. 80 95 m3 m3 / s THS. 100 115 THS. 125 145 kW

Cylinder Force: F (N) = p (bar)x A (cm²)x 10 A = Effective Piston Area Required Mass Flow Rate: m Q (lt / dk) = A (cm²) x v( s ) x 6 Repulsion and Return Speed: Q ( lt / dk ) x 1 v ( m) = s A ( cm² ) 6

Q = Mass Flow Rate

Required Pump Capacity: Q (lt /dk)x p (bar) 1 x P (kW)= ὴ 600

ὴ = Pump Efficiency

Page

244

Section Injection Mould

d1 d2

THS

L1 L2

1/4 M20 x 1.5 28 60 95 148 31 46 3/8 M27 x 2.0 36 70 125 161 39 55 3/8 M33 x 2.0 45 85 130 180 47 65 1/2 M42 x 2.0 56 109 160 187 60 80 1/2 M48 x 2.0 70 130 195 212 67 90

1/4 M16 x 1.5 22 50 80 122 22 35

E4 E7

F s v p A V Q ὴ P

Order

Force (Newton) Lenght Speed (Stroke) Pressure Area (Piston) Volume Mass Flow Rate Efficiency Performance

INJECTION MOULD HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS

Linked from Piston E2

Other dimensions are in the order table In Order: Product code and diameter be specified should

Linked Hydraulic Cylinders Ø C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 E1 E2 E4 E5 E6 E7

40 192 30 50 40 20 145 107 130 16 11 212 50 20 70 40 20

50 224 30 55 50 25 175 126 150 20 11 249 55 25 80 50 25

63 248 40 70 60 30 188 145 175 20 14 278 70 32 104 60 29

80 280 45 80 70 35 2213 165 200 26 18 317 82 40 119 80 29

100 307 63 113 100 45 224 200 240 30 22 259 115 50 165 100 50

125 349 70 130 120 60 251 235 280 32 22 399 120 60 180 120 50

D H7 Max. F 300

G.136 ANGULAR SPHERICAL BUSH

INCLINED INNER UNIT

Guide Bush Transmitting Angle Motion It offers easy installation for desired inclined pin design in great moulds. Angle adjustment can be done between 0º and 20º. Working temperature is 170º. The illustration in technical drawing has been prepared according to the way of work. The right one is drawing symmetry of way of work. Locking units shown with 1 and 2 is valid for d > 16'.

Mountable to the Mould (Ejector Plate) Slide part (Self Lubricating ) is mounted by processing to ejector plate of mould.

w wa

L d4

FIXED, INCLINED EJECTOR PIN UNIT

It moves the inclined/angle pin systems in the desired angle

L h

Y P

±0.02

Self Lubrication System in inclined ejector pin unit, is greased up to 30º in unit Material: 1.0503 (C.45) Bronze and On Providing Graphite Pores:

±0.02

Working mechanism should be ordered as G.136 Right - G.136L Left.

ANGULAR SPHERICAL BUSH G.136 Order

G136.08 G136.10 G136.12 G136.16 G136.20 G136.25 G136.30 G136.35 G136.40 G136.45 x 20 22 22 30 35 40 48 52 55 59

y 28 28 30 35 40 50 55 60 65 72

w 28 30 32 45 50 57 65 72 77 85

d3 6 6 7 7 7 9 9 11 11 11

t 17 20 22 29 33 38 43 49 53 57 d4 10 10 11 11 11 15 15 18 18 18

b 14 16 18 25 28 33 37 40 44 48

M M8 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10 M10

Order

G135.08 G135.10 G135.12 G135.16 G135.20 G135.25 G135.30 G135.35 G135.40 h 13 17 20 24 24 26 30 34 38

A 20 20 25 30 40 45 50 55 60

d 8 10 12 16 20 25 30 35 40

w 24 28 31 36 43 48 55 64 72

L 25 32 40 45 45 50 60 70 80

G.135 wa 12 14 17 21 28 33 38 44 50

t f m b 16 5 7.5 5 16 4 8.5 6 20 5 10 7 24 6 13 9 30 8 17 11 35 9.5 22 14 38 9 27 14 40 10 31 14 43 11.5 36 18

G.133.08 G.133.10 G.133.12 G.133.16 G.133.20 G.133.25 G.133.30 G.133.35 G.133.40 G.133.45 H 22 27 32 36 42 50 55 62 70 80

H1 12.5 15.5 18 20 23 28 30 35 40 45

k 6 7 7 7.5 7.5 7.5 8.5 Stretching 10 11 e 3 3 4 6 6 6 6 8 8

H2 5 5 7 8 11 15 15 15 15 15

L 32 45 50 65 80 90 100 120 135 150

2xN

D1 W1 W

d1 7 7 10 12 14 16 18 20 25 30

D1 4.5 5.5 7 9 11 14 14 14 18 18

A 11 15 17 22 26 32 38 45 55 60

L1 20 25 30 40 50 55 60 75 85 95

W 33 45 57 65 80 93 101 120 130 140

W1 30 40 51 58 72 85 93 110 120 130

E 2xMK

B 20 25 25 30 40 45 50 60 70 80 W2 19 25 31 38 44 52 60 70 80 90

C E F MJ 8 10 7 M4 10 12.5 9 M5 12 15 11 M6 16 15 14.5 M8 20 16 18 M10 25 17 22.5 M12 30 17 27 M12 35 18 32 M12 40 19 36 M16 45 24 40 M16 P1 24 32 39 46 56 66 74 85 95 105

7 Lateral Motion

P2 20 30 35 40 55 65 70 80 90 110

MK M3 M4 M6 M6 M8 M10 M10 M12 M12 M12

N 3 4 6 6 8 10 10 10 10 10

Strok

10 18 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55

Stretching

Product/Object

Product Angle

Mould Slide Plain Bush 7 Thrust Motion 100 mm

e 5 5 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8

d L 8 44 10 46 12 50 16 58 20 65 25 78 30 86 35 98 40 106 45 118

INCLINED INNER UNIT

D 8 10 12 16 20 25 30 35 40 45

Order

H H2

t /2

A DH7

Øe

G.133

With this unit, processing in mould and mounting costs are very low, processing and mounting costs and system installation are economic and easy and also it provides important contribution to production period, the product separating from moulds with this unit is more economical compared with similar systems. The heat resistance of unit in mould is up to 300º (With Graphite bearing system), the unit can be lubricated itself, the working angle of ejector pin can be inclined up to 10º-20º-30º, can be connected to ejector plates via retaining pins and bolts in its mounting, according to specified pin length, the position of intermediate block can be positioned, make this adjustment when intermediate centre block and pin are inserted and removed easily. For the precise bottom support/bedding of unit, the block product coded G. 147 in Page 240 can be used.

Max.200

Stroke

A m

p 32 34 36 45 52 62 70 78 84 96

G.135

Pin and Holder Angle Angular Guide Bush Angle can be 0 adjusted by 1 0 increment from 10

Unit Sliding Angle Pin Slot Motion

Angle

The ejector pin of the unit should be determined according to the angle of the product in mould.

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Sayfa Page

245 245

PIN CUTTING AND GRINDING MACHINES PKM.1 Order Ø 1 - 24 mm Cylindrical Part, work piece for length adjusting Positioning the Work Piece and Safety

Precise Length Cutting and Grinding

Stone Diameter Capacity .................................. From Ø 1 mm to 24 mm Length Capacity ........................................ Roughly, 320 - 800 mm ± 0.10 Standard Length Adjustment, Precise Cutting ..60 - 320 mm ± 0.01 Short Cutting ( With optional bus bar ) .................40 - 320 mm ± 0.01 Grinding Cutting, Wheel Cycle / Speed ............. 2800 m / Min. Engine cycle / Speed ........................................ 3600 RPM Motor ................................................................ 220 / 280 F. 50 Hz. 0.75 Kv. Cutting Wheel (Order PKM 2 ) ............................125 x 1 or 1.5 mm Grinding Wheel (Order PKM 3 ) ......................... EKR / D100 Stone Correction Diamond (Order PKM 4 ) ........0.50 Carat Machine Dimensions ........................................ 430 x 360 x 500 mm Weight ...............................................................109 Kg. It provides rapid precise cutting with length adjustment repeatedly. Besides the cutting process, it runs the face grinding process simultaneously.

Gaining of Cutting Machine to Mould Industry is provided by GÜVENAL GROUP.

In mould production plants, it is used for cutting all your parts (Many cylindrical parts such as Ejector Pin / Pipe Ejector / Runner / Punch Posts / Bolts or Small Square - Sheet Bar Parts).

CUTTING AND GRINDING PROCESS

s/ or Pin Eject elong that b s e h c y are Pun mpan o C r inded to ou ce gr a f d n cut a sely. preci By pushing the side control arm forward, the material to be cut is placed into the slot and Length Adjustment: The desired dimension is selected on the scale, the precision control is made by micrometer. Machine is activated, Transparent Plexiglass Cover on Machine has a safety switch, Machine does not work without closing the cover...

Work Piece Grinding, Stone Support Correction Diamond Work Piece Thrust Adjustment Scale Placement Seating Area Clamp Cutting Stone Diameter

Easy Rapid Practical Cover Safety Switch

Precision Whetting of Dish Stone Movable Scale

Cutting Wheel Assembly Kits When movable control arm on the side of the cutting machine is in upward position, the work piece is cut in cutting stone slowly and in a controlled manner, when it is in lower position, the face grinding of cut work piece is done and by pushing control arm forward again, work piece is taken from the slot. Precision Scaled Adjustment Mechanism belonging to all working parts on machine are available.

Page

246

Section Injection Mould

BOTH

Length Adjustment With Precision Micrometer

Producing Selling With Proper Prices

System Lubricant Grease Nipple

Grinding After Cutting Dish Stone

Easy/ Rapid Length It Provides Adjustment & Recycling of Cutting in Precision Refused Material Cutting

100 125 9.0 160 11 1.0 200 250 100 125 9.5 12 1.0 160 200 100 125 12 1.0

250 315 100 10.5

125 160

13 1.0

200 100 125 11 160 13 1.0 200 250 100 125 12

160 200

14 1.0

250 315 100 125 13 160 15 1.0 200 250 100 125 14

160 200

16 1.5

250 315 100 125 160 16 18 1.5 200 250 315

Order :

100 3.9 125 5.0 0.5 160

100 125 160 5.5 7.0 0.5 200 250 315

4.0

100 5.6 125 7.0 0.5 160

100 0 2 Max Heat Resistance : 220 Tension Resistance: 1300 N / mm 4.1 125 5.5 0.5 Decimally diameter with long lengths are our existing stocks. 160

100 5.7 125 7.0 0.5 160

100 4.2 125 5.5 0.5 160

100 5.8 125 7.0 0.5 160

100 4.3 125 5.5 0.5 160

100 5.9 125 7.0 0.5 160

100 4.4 125 5.5 0.5 160

100 2.9 125 4.0 0.5 160

100 125 160 6.0 8.0 0.5 200 250 315

100 125 160 4.5 6.0 0.5 200 250 315

100 125 6.5 160 9.0 1.0 200 250 100 125 160 7.0 9.0 1.0 200 250 315 100 125 7.5 10 1.0 160 200 100 125 160 8.0 10 1.0 200 250 315 100 125 8.5 160 11 1.0 200 250

HBI

d1 x L

100 125 160 200

5.5 0.5

250 315

HBI

COUNTERSUNK EJECTOR PIN DIN 1530 - D Plastic Injection Mould Ejector Pins

Material: 1.2516 WS Head Hardness : 45 ± 2 HRC Casing Hardness : 60 ± 2 HRC

100 4.6 125 6.0 0.5 160 100 4.7 125 6.0 0.5 160 100 4.8 125 6.0 0.5 160 100 4.9 125 6.0 0.5 160 100 125 160 5.0 6.5 0.5 200 250 315

5 ±0.5

600

200

d2 -0.2

160

100 5.4 125 6.5 0.5 160

d1 g6

L +0.2 L

100 125 3.0

160 200

4.5 0.5

250 315 100 3.1 125 4.5 0.5 160 100 3.2 125 4.5 0.5 160 100 3.3 125 4.5 0.5 160 100 3.4 125 4.5 0.5 160 100 125 160 3.5 5.0 0.5 200 250 315

100 5.1 125 6.5 0.5 160

100 3.6 125 5.0 0.5 160

100 5.2 125 6.5 0.5 160

100 3.7 125 5.0 0.5 160

100 5.3 125 6.5 0.5 160

100 3.8 125 5.0 0.5 160

100 125 160 2.0 3.0 0.5 200 250 315 100 2.1 125 3.2 0.5 160 100 2.2 125 3.2 0.5 160 100 2.3 125 3.5 0.5 160 100 2.4 125 3.5 0.5 160 100 125 160 2.5 3.5 0.5 200 250 315

100 125 1.0 1.8 0.5 160 200 100 1.1 125 1.8 0.5 160 100 1.2 125 2.0 0.5 160 100 1.3 125 2.0 0.5 160 100 1.4 125 2.2 0.5 160 100 125 1.5 2.2 0.5 160 200 100 1.6 125 2.5 0.5 160

100 2.6 125 4.0 0.5 160

100 1.7 125 2.5 0.5 160

100 2.7 125 4.0 0.5 160

100 1.8 125 2.8 0.5 160 100

100 2.8 125 4.0 0.5

Reliable Label

1.9 125 2.8 0.5 160

160 Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Sayfa Page

247 247

Universal Type PIN FORM PROCESSING DEVICE

For your orders in special dimensions, technical drawings can be used. K

As per request/ Special Order Definition

CYLINDRICAL HEAD, EJECTOR PIN, STEPPED

SBK

DIN ISO 8694 Type : AH

Material: 1.2516 WS Head Hardness: 45 ± 2 HRC Casing Hardness: 60 ± 2 HRC 0 2 Tension Resistance : 1300 N / mm Max. Heat Resistance : 220

600

d3 -0.1 L1 -1/2

L +0.2

63 80 100 0.8 125 150 160

25 35

63 80 100 1.0 125 150 160 200

25 35

63 80 100 1.1 125 150 160

25 35

63 80 100 1.2 125 150 160

25 35

63 80 100 1.3 125 150 160

25 35

248

50 2

50 75

K -0.05

L1 d3 d2 k

63 80 100 1.4 125 150 160

25 35

80 35 100 125 50 2.0 3 150 160 75 200

63 80 100 1.5 125 150 160 200

25 35

80 35 100 125 50 2.2 3 150 160 75 200

100 125 50 3 2.5 150 160 75 200

50 3

80 35 100 125 50 1.7 3 150 160 75 200 80 35 100 125 50 1.8 3 150 160 75 200

Order :

80 35 100 125 50 1.6 3 150 160 75 200

Section Injection Mould

SBK.AH d1xd3xL1xL

5 10 5

L1 d3 d2 k

L Working System: Grinding, Bench Manual System Device * It is used in cylindrical or stepped form grinding operations of ejector pin - perforator or EDM Work Piece on surface honing workbench. Pin Capacity : ........ 1.5 mm x 25 mm * Pin: When it is secured between precision wheels, the center of work is determined automatically. * Thanks to Rigid Fastening System, the grinding distance from 5 mm to 35 mm can be obtained. d1 = 35 mm, after it can be stretched.

Economic Product

100 125 50 3 2.6 150 160 75 200

100 125 50 3 2.7 150 160 75 200

172

3 Ø36 Ø51 125

Page

166

L1 d3 d2 k

VPG

100 125 50 3 6 3 2.8 150 160 75 200 For your special order, pls. fill in the technical drawing details.

78 100

R 0.3

Ø 0.05

d2 -0.2

d1 g6

Weight : 6.6 Kg.

Order

20 167

Lift depressor arm, place pin into its slot. Tight depressor arm screw, grind manually.

18 7.0

7.5

20 7.0 8.0

22 7.0

8.5

22 7.0

9.0

24 7.0

26 8.0

10.5

L 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500

12 5.0

100 125 160 200 250 315 14 5.0 400 500 630 800 1000 100 125 160 200 250 14 5.0 315 400 500 630 100 125 160 200 250 14 5.0 315 400 500 630 800 100 125 160 200 250 315 16 5.0 400 500 630 800 1000 100 125 160 200

CYLINDRICAL HEAD EJECTOR PIN DIN ISO 6751 Plastic Injection Mould Economic - Heat Ejector Pins

Material: 1.2516 Head Hardness: 45 ± 2 HRC Casing Hardness: 60 ± 2 HRC Max. Heat Resistance : 2200 Tension Resistance : 1300 N / mm2

For extra long length, our shelf stocks are available.

5.5

100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500

6.0

6.5

100 7.0

160 200 32 10

250 315

16 5.0

r + 0.2

630

100 125 160 200 250 315 12 5.0 400 500 630 800 1000 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630

3.5

250 315 400 500 630

10 3.0

4.0

4.5 12 5.0

1.0

100 125 160

2.5 1.2

1.5

100 125 160 200

3.0 1.5

2.0

100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500

4.0 2.0

2.5

100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500

5.0 2.0

3.0

100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630

6.0 3.0

3.5

100 125 160 200

7.0 3.0

100 125 160 200 250 315 8.0 3.0 400 500 630 800 1000 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500

8.0 3.0

100 125 160 200 250 5.0 12 5.0

1000

400 500

K -0.05

L +0.2

16 5.0

125

TYPE: AH SBİ

d2 -0.2

d1 g6

L 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 160 200 250 315 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000

Order :

315

10 3.0

400 500 630 800 1000

SBI-AH d1 x L

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Sayfa Page

249 249

CYLINDRICAL HEAD EJECTOR PIN DIN ISO 6751 TYPE : A Plastic / Metal Injection Economic - Heat Resistant Ejector Pins Decimally diameter with long lengths, Our available stocks.

1.0

100 125 160

1.5

100 125 160 200

3.0 1.5

1.8

100 160

3.0 1.5

2.0

100 125 160 200 250 315

4.0 2.0

2.2

100 160

4.0 2.0

2.5

100 125 160 200 250 315

5.0 2.0

100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500

6.0 3.0

3.0

3.2

100 160

3.5

100 125

Page

250

3.5

160 200 250 315 400

2.5 1.2

4.0

4.2

4.5

100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500

5.0 6.0 3.0 7.0 3.0 Section Injection Mould

100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800

5.5

100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500

7.0 3.0

100 125 160 200 250 315 8.0 3.0 400 500 630 800 1000 100 160

8.0

K -0.05

L +0.2 d2

7.5

d2 -0.2

d1 g6

r + 0.2

L 100 125 160 200 250 315

SBI

Material: 1.2344 (Hot Work Steel) Head Hardness: 45 Â± 5 HRC Casing Hardness: 44 HRC Max. Heat Resistance : 500 - 5500 Tension Resistance : 1450 N / mm2

6.0

8.0 3.0

6.5

10 3.0

100 125 160 200 250 315 12 5.0 400 500 630 800 1000 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500

8.5

9.0

100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500

12 5.0

100

10.5

125 160 10 3.0

7.0

200 250

500

200 250

d1 x L

315 400

22 7.0

100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800

22 7.0

100 125 160 200 250

24 7.0

100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630

26 8.0

100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500

32 10

16 5.0

14 5.0

125

100 125 160 200 250 315 18 7.0 400 500 630 800 1000 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800

14 5.0

160

400

SBI.A

12 5.0

100 125 160 200 250 315 16 5.0 400 500 630 800 1000 100 125 160 200

100

12 5.0

315

Order :

100 125 160 200 250 315 14 5.0 400 500 630 800 1000 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500

Ejector Pins in Special DiametersDimensions of Different Materials can be Produced as per Request.

2 x R 0.20

STANDARD / STOCK b

4 x R 0.20

a Sharp Edged Type. A

2 Corner Radius Type. B

AS PER REQUEST

4 Corner Radius Type. C

Corner Radius Diversification of Sheet Bar Belonging to Sheet Bar Ejector

As per request; CYLINDRICAL HEAD SHEET0,05 BARAEJECTOR PIN A

SPL.A

Plastic / Metal Inj. Mould HEAT RESISTANT S. BAR EJECTOR Material: 1.2344 (Hot Work Steel) Max. Heat Resistance: 500 - 5500

K -0.05 R

r L1 -0.2

0,05

L +0.2

0,05 A

10 d1 -0.1

0 -1

0,05

L1 -0.2

SPL.A

0 -1

K -0.05

0,05

a -0.015

d1 -0.1

0 -1

a -0.015

d2 -0.2

0,05 A

SPL

SPL.AH

b -0.015

0 -1

A 0,05 A Material: 1.2516 (Hardened) Max. Heat Resistance: 220º

b -0.015

Plastic Inj. Mould HARDENED SHEET BAR EJECTOR

d2 -0.2

0,05 A TYPE : A-B-C

A F) ISO 8693 ( DIN 1530

A A

L +0.2

SPL.AH

Plastic / Metal Inj. Mould HIGH TEMPERATURE S. BAR EJECTOR Our standard shelf stocks are created from Type A ( Sharp Edged). Type B ( 2 Corner Radius /Type C ( 4 Corner Radius ) are as per request.

Plastic Inj. Mould HARDENED S. BAR EJECTOR

As per request, your orders can be dimensioned by Technical Drawing Details.

1.5

4.5

5.0

1.5

5.5

6.0

1.5

7.5

8.0

1.5

9.5

2.0

5.5

6.0

2.0

7.5

8.0

2.0

9.5

2.0 11.5 12

2.5 11.5 12

100 125 160 200 100 125 160 200 125 160 200 250 160 200 250 100 125 160 200 160 200 250 200 250 315 200 250 315 200 250 315

50 60 80 100 50 60 80 100 60 80 100 125 80 100 125 50 60 80 100 80 100 125 100 125 160 100 125 160 100 125 160

Order : SPL.A

0.8

3.5

4.0

1.0

4.5

5.0

1.0

1.2

5.5

3.5

4.5

5.5

7.5

6.0

4.0

5.0

6.0

8.0

80 100 125 80 100 125 160 80 100 125 160 80 100 125 160 200 80 100 125 160 200 80 100 125 160 200 80 100 125 160 200

40 50 60 40 50 60 80 40 50 60 80 40 50 60 80 100 40 50 60 80 100 40 50 60 80 100 40 50 60 80 100

Standard Type A a x b x d1 x L (Special Type B / Type C )

Our standard shelf stocks are created from Type A ( Sharp Edged). Type B ( 2 Corner Radius /Type C ( 4 Corner Radius ) are as per request. a

1.5

4.5

5.0

1.5

5.5

6.0

1.5

7.5

8.0

1.5

9.5

2.0

5.5

6.0

2.0

7.5

8.0

2.0

9.5

2.0 11.5 12

2.5 11.5 12

Order :

100 125 160 200 100 125 160 200 125 160 200 250 160 200 250 100 125 160 200 160 200 250 200 250 315 200 250 315 200 250 315

50 60 80 100 50 60 80 100 60 80 100 125 80 100 125 50 60 80 100 80 100 125 100 125 160 100 125 160 100 125 160

SPL.AH

Standard Type A a x b x d1 x L

0.8

3.5

4.0

1.0

4.5

5.0

1.0

5.5

6.0

1.2

3.5

4.0

1.2

4.5

5.0

1.2

5.5

6.0

1.2

7.5

8.0

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

80 100 125 80 100 125 160 80 100 125 160 80 100 125 160 200 80 100 125 160 200 80 100 125 160 200 80 100 125 160 200

40 50 60 40 50 60 80 40 50 60 80 40 50 60 80 100 40 50 60 80 100 40 50 60 80 100 40 50 60 80 100

Sayfa Page

251 251

2 x R 0.20

4 x R 0.20

a Sharp Edged Type. A

2 Corner Radius Type. B

AS PER REQUEST

Corner Radius Diversification of Sheet Bar Belonging to Sheet Bar Ejector

A Per request; CYLINDRICAL HEAD (Oxidation) 0,05 ASHEET BAR EJECTOR PIN

Plastic / Metal Inj. Mould HIGH TEMPERATURE S. BAR EJECTOR

SPW

Material: 1.2343 ( Nitrite- Oxidation) Heat Resistance: 650 / 14000

0 -1

45 HRC

K -0.05 Rz 16

d2 -0.2

0,05 A

d1 -0.1

0 -1

L1 - 2

0,05

L+2

0.8

3.5

4.0

1.0

4.5

5.0

1.0

5.5

6.0

1.2

3.5

4.0

1.2

4.5

5.0

1.2

5.5

6.0

1.2

7.5

8.0

1.5

4.5

5.0

Page

252

80 40 100 50 125 60 80 40 100 50 125 60 160 80 80 40 100 50 125 60 160 80 80 40 100 50 125 60 160 80 80 40 100 50 125 60 160 80 80 40 100 50 125 60 160 80 80 40 100 50 125 60 160 80 100 50 125 60 160 80 200 100

SPW

Section Injection Mould

1.5

5.5

6.0

1.5

7.5

8.0

1.5

9.5

2.0

5.5

6.0

2.0

7.5

8.0

2.0

9.5

2.0 11.5 12

2.5 11.5 12

Order :

100 125 160 200 125 160 200 250 160 200 250 100 125 160 200 160 200 250 315 200 250 315 400 200 250 315 400 200 250 315 400

50 60 80 100 60 80 100 125 80 100 125 50 60 80 100 80 100 125 160 100 125 160 200 100 125 160 200 100 125 160 200

SPW. AV

0,05 A

AWF 1400 0,05 A

As per request, your orders can be dimensioned by Technical Drawing Details.

Ejector Pin lubricating grease is provided operation at high temperature as 1400ยบC.

Metal Inj. Mould HIGH TEMPERATURE ( Oxidation) S. BAR EJECTOR Our standard shelf stocks are created from Type A ( Sharp Edged). Type B ( 2 Corner Radius /Type C ( 4 Corner Radius ) are as per request. a

: A-B-C SPW

a -0.015

Rz 16

DIN ISO 8693TYPE

b -0.015

4 Corner Radius Type. C

Standard Type A a x b x d1 x L

METAL INJECTION MOULD INNER USE High Temperature Lubricating Grease Such as Ejector Pins / Core Systems It consists of AVF 1400 well refined mineral oils and EP additives providing lubricity as film strip between other mould parts and mould parts that are not affected from high temperature of ejector systems, core systems in working mould in high temperature such as metal injection. Thanks to solid lubricants and additives, it has comfortable operation. ( No load operation, high heat insulation and it provides resistance up to 1400ยบ, it is in film strip position of surfaces among their parts, even at very high temperature, it prevents sticking together. It is produced from vegetable oils and is not harmful to the health. Advantage of Using AWF 1400 Lubricating Grease: * It is resistant against oxidation and friction. * It is resistant to corrosion and abrasion. * It is silicium and white. ( Don't make any contamination on mould) * It is resistant against water and humidity. ( There is no corrosion on water proof mould). * It is easy to use, (in small packages with end sponge) and clean. The mould parts are not contaminated with reasons such as lubricating, abrasion, also it is presented to market as 520 gr. spray grease. * Due to dust atmosphere as casting moulds, the user's hands are not painted black. It is a very good protector. * It does not cause any reaction on surfaces.

Order AWF 10 AWF 05 AWF 01

10 Kg. ( In can) packing 5 Kg. ( In can) packing 1 Kg. ( In metal can) packing

Order AWF 04 520 gr. / ml. In Spray Grease Packing Order AWF 03 40gr. / ml. Mini Tube With End Sponge

L d2 k r 500 630 12 18 7.0 0.8 800 1000 d1

100 125 12.5 315 18 7.0 0.8 500 630 100 125 160 13 200 18 7.0 0.8 250 315 400

100 125 160 200 18 24 7.0 0.8 250 315 400 500 125 160 200 250 315 20 26 8.0 1.0 400 500 630 800 1000 160 250 315 25 32 10 1.0 400 630 800

Plasma Nitrite Covered oxidation

SBM

CYLINDRICAL HEAD EJECTOR PIN( Oxidation ) TYPE : AV03 100 Especially: In Metal Injection Moulds, High Heat Resistance, Black 125 Material: 1.2343 (Hot work steel) Head Hardness : 45 ± 5 HRC Casing Hardness : 44 HRC 160 Casing is Grinded and Covered with Plasma Nitrite and Oxidation Hardness : 70 HRC. 200 Ejector Pins; When they are used with AWF 1400 Lubricating Grease, is reached 8.5 250 14 5.0 0.5 AV03 The to 14000 Heat Resistance. Max. Heat Resistance : 6500 ( Without lubricating grease, dry ) 14000 315 Tension Resistance : 1450 N / mm2 400 Especially : It is Plasma /Nitrite - Oxidation Coated (it is highly qualified compared with 500 similar products.) 630

100 125 160 200 14 5.0 0.5 250 315 400

100 125 160 9.5 14 5.0 0.5 200 250 315 100 125 160 200 250 10 315 16 5.0 0.5 400 500 630 800 1000 100 125 160 10.5 200 16 5.0 0.5 250 315 400 100 125 160 11 200 16 5.0 0.5 250 315 400 100 125 160 12 200 18 7.0 0.8 250 315 400

45 HRC

Rz 2.5

70 HRC

K -0.05

L+2 d1

L d2 k r 100 125 160 200 250 12 5.0 0.5 315 400 500 630 800

100 125 160 6.5 200 12 5.0 0.5 250 315 400 100 125 160 200 7.0 250 12 5.0 0.5 315 400 500 630 100 125 160 200 7.5 12 5.0 0.5 250 315 400 500 100 125 8.0 14 5.0 0.5 160 200

L d2 k r 100 125 160 200 250 8 3.0 0.3 315 400 500 630

100 125 160 200 4.5 250 315 400 500 630

8 3.0 0.3

100 125 160 200 250 5.0 10 3.0 0.3 315 400 500 630 800 100 125 160 200 5.5 250 10 3.0 0.3 315 400 500

Order :

SBM.AV03 d1 x L

d2 -0.2

100 125 160 200 250 16 315 22 7.0 0.8 400 500 630 800 1000

Its Ejector pin, Lubricating Grease are provided working at high temperature up to14000C

d1 g6

100 125 160 200 250 14 315 22 7.0 0.8 400 500 630 800 1000

L d2 k r 250 315 400 8 500 14 5.0 0.5 630 800 1000

L d2 k r 100 125 1.5 3 2.0 0.2 160 200 d1

100 125 160 2.0 200 250 315 400

4 2.0 0.2

100 125 160 2.5 200 250 315 400

5 2.0 0.3

100 125 160 200 3.0 250 315 400 500 630

6 3.0 0.3

100 125 160 200 3.5 250 315 400 630

7 3.0 0.3

Page

Bölüm Enjeksiyon Kalıp

253

Sayfa Section

253

Injection Mould

For your special dimension, technical drawing can be used.

As per request/ Special Order Definition

CYLINDRICAL HEAD - STEPPED ( Oxidation ) EJECTOR PIN Type : AW SBW Material : 1.2343 (Hot Work Steel) Head Hardness : 45 ± 5 HRC Casing Hardness : 44 HRC

0 AV03 Ejector Pins ; When they are used with AWF 1400 Lubricating Grease, it is reached to 1400 Heat Resistance.

70 HRC

d3 -0.1 L1 -1/2

L +0.2 d1

0.8

0.9

1.0

1.1

100

125

160

100

125

160

100

125

160

100

125 160

1.2

1.3

Page

254

0.2

1.4

1.5

50 2

0.2

200

100

125

160

100

d3 d2

2.0

0.2

2.5

125

160

100

125

160

Section Injection Mould

Ø 0.05 d3 d2

200

100

125

50 75

200

100

125

t k -0.06

0.2

L +0.2

0.3

160

0.3

8 3

0.3

75 75

The production will be done as per request. (They are not available at our stocks) For your special orders, pls. fill technical drawing details...

200

0.2

Order :

Cylindrical Head Threaded PIN

160

r K -0.05

d1 k6

600

R 0.3

Ø 0.05

It has pin mounting feature without Material : 1.2344 it is Grinded and Hardened. Tension Resistance : 1400 N mm2 Our special production is available as per request.

d2 -0.2

Mould Inner (Ejector Plate - Cores) Usage DIN 1530 - A / ISO 6751

DIN ISO 8694 dismantling parts. d2 -0.2

d1 g6

45 HRC

Cylindrical Head THREADED PINSBD

SBW.AV

Limited Stocks d1 x d3 x L1 x L

L 63 125 63 125 80 160 80 160 80 160 100 200 100 200 100 200

SBD

M10

M12

Reliable Label

Order :

SBD d1 x L x d3 Limited Stocks

d2 -0.2

45 HRC

k L +0.2

2.0

100 160

0.2

2.5

100 160

0.3

3.0

100 160 250

0.3

3.5

100 160

0.3

4.0

100 160 250

0.3

4.5

100 160

0.3

5.0

100 160 250

0.3

6.0

Order :

100 160 250 315

7.0

100 160 250

8.0

100 160 250 315

100 160 250 315 400

160 250 400

0.5

SPP.AV07 d1 x L

SPP k 5

r 0.5

5.0

0.5 5.5

0.5

6.0 18

0.8

8.0

400 500

SPI

160 200

0.3

2.0

Order :

160 200

250

100

160 200

0.3

2.5

160 200

250

100

160 200

0.3

3.0

160 200

250

100

160 200

0.5

3.5

160 200

250

100

160 200

0.2

0.3

0.5

4.0

160 200

0.3

250

SPI.INOX

0.8

L 100

250

160 250

100 4.5

Cylindrical Head COPPER ALLOY EJECTOR PIN

60 HRC

Cylindrical Head STAINLESS EJECTOR PIN d1

60 HRC

r L +0.2

d1 g6

45 HRC

It is compatible with Medicine and Food Industry Standards DIN ISO 6751 Stainless Steel : The ejector pins has been produced to avoid corrosion problems. They are anti magnetic products resistant to corrosion and acids for production at severe climate conditions in Chemistry / Medicine and Food Industry, also in hygienic places. Material : 1.4125 NIROSTA ( Stainless Steel ) Casing Hardness : 60 ± 2 HRC Head Hardness : 35 ± 2 HRC Limited Stocks Heat Resistance : 1800 d1 g6

Copper Alloy Ejector Pin: It is for moulds that are produced with added copper/Cbn ( Nickel Bornite) into material during production and have high temperature. The cooling for the desired area of mould is provided very quickly without deviating the targeted area, due to thermal optimisation, very high quality product is obtained from moulds under optimum temperature. Also, due to thermal optimisation again, production time per part is shortened as 30%. By changing according to the material, the heat conductivity is 6 times higher than standard pin. There is no need to use pin oil for copper ejector pins, even after cooling, it does not lose its conductivity, does not become deformated, it is weldable, solderable, burnishable. However, the upper surfaces of plated products can not be processed in turning or milling machine. Material: CBN Chemical - Nickel- Bornite Alloy Limited Stocks Hardness : 45- 50 HRC ( 71 Micron Plated ) Surface Roughness Heat Resistance : 4000 ( 1 Hour ) - 3000 ( 5 Hour ) Ra <0.8 Micron

SPI

Cylindrical Head STAINLESS EJECTOR PIN

d2 -0.2

SPP

Cylindrical Head COPPER ALLOY EJECTOR PIN High Heat Conductivity, Ejector Pin DIN ISO 6751 Type : AV 07

d1 x L

Page

Bölüm Enjeksiyon Kalıp

255

Sayfa Section

255

Injection Mould

Headless / Plain Ejector Sleeve Form : C

Form : A

L L2

Cylindrical Head Ejector Sleeve

d3 d2

Cylindrical Head Ejector Sleeve, Stepped Form:B Headless Ejector Sleeve, Stepped Form:D AS PER REQUEST / SPECIAL EJECTOR SLEEVESHAPE AND DIMENSION DEFINING ORDER EXAMPLES

SMB

TYPE : A

DIN ISO 8405

CYLINDRICAL HEAD HEAT RESISTANT EJECTOR SLEEVE

45 HRC

r K -0.05

Material : 1.2344 Hot Work Head Hardness : 45 ± 2 HRC Casing Hardness : 60 ± 2 HRC Max. Heat Resistance : 500 - 5500 Tension Resistance: 1450 N / mm2

d3 g6

60 HRC

d1 H5

d4 -0.1

d2 -0.2

Heat Resistance for Injection Moulds (1.2344 Hot Work Steel ) Ejector Sleeve, especially for Metal Injection Moulds; Rear Part of Inner Hole is grinded in 30 - 45 mm Ejector Pin Working Tolerance and drilled roughly with drill to rearward ( until the cap )

min. L1

Ø 0.012/10

L +1

STANDARD TYPE

SMB

CYLINDRICAL HEAD HEAT RESISTANT EJECTOR SLEEVE (They are available in decimal dimensions. ) d3

100

125

2.0 35 2.3

0.3

150

100 125

2.5 35 3.0 10

150 160

3.0 45 3.3 10

0.3

0.5

150 160

4.2 45 5.3 14

0.5

200 250 75

100

125

3.5 45 4.0 12

0.5

150 160

175

200

250

256

175

250

Page

4.0 45 4.3 12

125

200

160

100

175

150

125

250

100

160

200

0.3

175

150

125

5.0 45 5.3 14

75 100 125 150 10 6 160 175 200 250

45 6.3 16

0.5

75 100 125 150 12 8 160 175 200 250

45 8.3 20

0.8

75 100 125 150 14 10 160 175 200 250

50 10.3 22

0.8

12 50 12.3 22

0.8

0.5

100 125

150 160 175

Reliable Label

Section Injection Mould

Order :

SMB.A

d1 x d3 x L

200 250

Headless / Plain Ejector Sleeve d4

Form : C d1

Form : A

Cylindrical Head Ejector Sleeve

d3 d2

Cylindrical Head Ejector Sleeve, Stepped Form:B Headless Stepped Ejector Sleeve Form : D AS PER REQUEST / SPECIAL EJECTOR SLEEVE HAPE AND DIMENSION DEFINITION ORDER EXAMPLES

SPB

TYPE : AH

DIN ISO 8405

CYLINDRICAL HEAD HARDENED EJECTOR SLEEVE

45 HRC

r K -0.05

Material : 1.2516 WS Head Hardness : 45 ± 2 HRC Casing Hardness : 60 ± 2 HRC Max. Heat Resistance : 2200 Tension Resistance: 1300 N / mm2

d3 g6

60 HRC

d1 H5

d4 -0.1

d2 -0.2

Hardened for Plastic Injection Moulds (1.2516 WS ), Ejector Sleeve, Especially for Plastic Moulds; Rear Part of Inner Hole is grinded in 30 45 mm Ejector Pin Working Tolerance and drilled roughly with drill to rearward ( until the bonnet part ).

min. L1

Ø 0.012/10

L +1

STANDARD TYPE

CYLINDRICAL HEAD HARDENED EJECTOR SLEEVE ( Extra long length are available at our.) d3

75 100 125 150 160 175 12 200 8 250 300 350 400 450 500 75 100 125 150 160 175 14 200 10 250 300 350 400 450 500 75 100 125 150 160 175 16 200 12 250 300 350 400 450 500

45 8.3 20

50 10.3 22

50 12.3 22

0.8

SPB.AH Order :

d1 x d3 x L

75 100 125 150 160 175 6 200 4.0 45 4.3 12 250 300 350 400 450 500 75 100 125 150 160 175 8 200 5.0 45 5.3 14 250 300 350 400 450 500 75 100 125 150 160 175 10 200 6 250 300 350 400 450 500

45 6.3 16

0.5

75 100 125 150 4 2.0 35 2.3 160 175 200 250

0.3

75 100 125 150 5 2.5 35 3.0 10 160 175 200 250

0.3

75 100 125 150 5 160 3.0 45 3.3 10 175 200 250 300

0.3

75 100 125 150 6 160 3.5 45 4.0 12 175 200 250 300

0.5

Reliable Label

Page

Bölüm Enjeksiyon Kalıp

257

Sayfa Section

257

Injection Mould

30 5

30 40 50 25 60 70 80 90

18 5.8 28 15.5 3

258

Section Injection Mould

1+0,2

30°

1 x 45°

Order :

EYF

Y (10 : 1)

Dxh

Hand Reamer (With Conical Drill Bit) For Conical Pins compatible with conical growing cutting edge ( 50 mm length 1 mm ) Helix Standard

D ( H7 )

1 x 45°

-0,2

h2 -0,3

0,2 +0,1

Ø11

Ø6,6

30°

0,2 +0,1

Y (10 : 1)

-0,2

1+0,2

1:50 Conical Pin KPR Hole Reamer DIN 9 HSS

D 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16

30 40 50 25 60 70 80 90

As per request / Standard Type Special Order Definition

h2 -0,3

h1 2°

Ø11

1 x 45°

-0,2

h2 -0,3

h1 2°

We are producing special runner.

Page

Ø100 f8 Ø60

Ø11

4.6 11.5

h (8.5)

D f8

5 Ø8 5.5

d1 x D x L

Ø100 f8 Ø60

125

+0,1

Ø100 f8 Ø60

Ø6,6

Ø 100 f8 Ø 60 h1

Ø6,6

16 5.8 28 15.5 3

Order :

Ø6,6

KYR (1:10 Conical)

5 Ø8

h2 -0.2 -0.3

Angular Flange

a ±1

Ø8

30 40 50 25 60 70 80 90

6.6

30°

14 5.8 28 15.5 3 D

30 40 50 25 60 70 80 90

1+0,

L1 35 20 45 55

0,2 +0,1

12 5.8 28 15.5 3

D f8

Ø11

Inclined positioning of furnace - angle connection guide flange for injection mould nozzle runner.

D d L L1 S 10 10 100 70 8 16 12.5 120 80 h1 2° 10 Y 24 20 160 110 16 32 25 200 140 20

d1 4 9 14 20

12 5.8 20 15.5 3 30

1 x 45°

-0,2

h2 -0,3

MEY.18.25.55 55 MEY.18.25.65 65 MEY.18.25.75 75 MEY.18.25.85 85 MEY.18.25.95 95 MEY.18.25.105 105 MEY.18.25.115 115

h1 0 2 Y

MEY.16.25.55 55 MEY.16.25.65 65 MEY.16.25.75 75 MEY.16.25.85 85 MEY.16.25.95 95 MEY.16.25.105 105 MEY.16.25.115 115

±1

In reaming of conical growing cutting edge hand reamer, conical or stepped pre processed continuous holes.

, R0

MEY.14.25.55 55 MEY.14.25.65 65 MEY.14.25.75 75 MEY.14.25.85 85 MEY.14.25.95 95 MEY.14.25.105 105 MEY.14.25.115 115

d2 d1

Y (10 : 1)

1x 450

MEY.12.25.55 55 MEY.12.25.65 65 MEY.12.25.75 75 MEY.12.25.85 85 MEY.12.25.95 95 MEY.12.25.105 105 MEY.12.25.115 115

1+0,2

Y ( 10 :1 )

L1 +0.03

L +0.2 L 55 65 75

1+0.2

0.2 +0.1

85 5

Ø8

0.8

Material: 1.2344 Hardness: 60 HRC Heat Resistance: 5000 Angle: 5.8 mm @ 30

Order MEY.12.20.55 MEY.12.20.65 MEY.12.20.75

a ±1

0.8

L2 -0.02

h1 2°

a ±1

0.4

Ø d2 k6

Ø d1

50 HRC

R 0.8

D f8 D f8

0.8

10 mm length 1 mm

,4 R0

Ø D g6

Inclined Plate Guide Flange

a ±1

(Ø 4) Can be opened by user (Centering information)

Ø100 f8 Ø60

0.8

KYR

High Heat Resistant, Standard Hot Work Steel Runners / Standard Type

1:10 Conical, Special Runner Reamer HSS

R0 30 .4 ±0,20.1 °

MEY

METAL INJECTION MOULDS, RUNNERS

EYF

INCLINED SURFACE HOLE POSITIONING FLANGE

d1 4.06 5.26 6.36 8.0 10.8 13.4 16 18 20.4

L d 4 5 6.3 8 10 12.5 14 14 18

Conical Pre Drill

Material : 1. 1730 Tension : 650 N mm2

L L1 S 80 58 3.15 93 68 4 100 73 5 135 105 6.3 180 145 8 215 175 10 255 210 11.2 255 210 11.2 280 230 14 Size Conical ReaPin ming

Conical Finished Hole

Order :

KPR

DxL

Y (10 :

DYF

10 ± 0.05

50 28 +0.05

Order DYF.60

d1 60

DYF.70

DYF.80

DYF.90

DYF.100

100

Order

DYF.125

125

DYF.150

150

DYF.175

175

DYF.200

200

Note: Flange Connecting Holes are opened as per request ( Subject to Price ). Connection Holes Special, As per Request

RUNNER POSITIONING FLANGE

KYF

Material : CK 45 Work Tool Steel 900 e t Ød ØD Order KYF.60 KYF.80 KYF.125 KYF.150

0.5 x 45

ØD 60 80 125 150

Ød 28 28 28 28

t 15 15 20 20

DIN 16752

EYM

e 7 7 10 10

Note: Flange Connecting Holes are opened as per request ( Subject to Price ). We are producing special runners.

As per request, Special Order Definition

@ 0.4

L2 -0.02

0.8

L 50 65 75 85 95 105 115 125 135 150 50 65 75 85 95 105 115 125 135 150 200 50 65 75 85 95 105 115 125 135 150 200 50 65 75 85 95 105 115 125 135 150 200

Two Different Options

Ø d2 k6

1200

d1 f8

PLASTIC MOULDS, INJECTION RUNNERS

Injection Runner Nozzle: The length selection is presented in very wide range in our stocks. 0.8 (Ø 4) Can be opened by user (Retainer Pin / Locating information) 0.8 r3 Material : 1.2826 6 50 HRC

Material: CK 45 Work Tool Steel (Grinded)

Ø D g6 Ø d1

RUNNER POSITION, FLANGE

0.8

L +0.2 L2

4.3

20 For injection cold runner diverter valve, pls. refer to page 230.

4.3

EYM

Order :

d2 x L x d1

L1 +0.03 L1 30 45 55 65 75 85 95 105 115 130

L 50 65 75 85 95 105 115 125 135 150

30 45 55 65 75 85 95 105 115 130 180

50 65 75 85 95 105 115 125 135 150 200

30 45 55 65 75 85 95 105 115 130 180

50 65 75 85 95 105 115 125 135 150 200

30 45 55 65 75 85 95 105 115 130 180

50 65 75 85 95 105 115 125 135 150 200

0.8

d1 3.3 : @ 1.50 ( Standard Angle ) d1 4.3 : @ 20 ( Wide Angle )

ECONOMICAL PRICES d2

3.3

1.50

3.3

30 45 55 65 75 85 95 105 115 130 180

30 45 55 65 75 85 20 95 105 115 Sayfa Section 130 Injection 180 Mould

1.50

3.3

1.50

33 1.5o

Page

Bölüm Enjeksiyon Kalıp

259

L1 30 45 55 65 75 85 95 105 115 130

259

Interna

l Sectio

n View

GTK

KONTURFLOW RUNNER

4.2

9 22

7.9

Maxiflow GXK 30

9.8

Upper surface can The block dimensions be processed up to are depended on 3 mm. selected tunnel runner length.

5.4

Material: 1.2379 60 HRC

Order Form : GTK 10 x 22

6.9

9.3

To reduce loss of raw white flow that is injected or to minimise sliding, an auxiliary block is added in front of tunnel runner. For various Processing methods of cove on block at EDM ( Erosion Machines), pls. refer the 'CAD' files at www.exaflow.com

1.0 x 450

Ø 1.0

Ringelflow GRF - 1

Blasting diameter can be created up to 1.7 mm.

17.3

1.0 x 450

7 M6

2.5

Ø 2.0

Ø 14 1 8.5

150

Ø 2.0

17.3

1.0 x 450

Ringelflow GRF - 1

2.3

* Being Long Life, Clean Runner Tracks * Filling of each eyes balancedly. * Very low abrasion at runner area * 60 HRC - RA : 08 - 1.3 Surface Quality * Safe Fluency, One Piece Design

10.5

TUNNEL / CURVED DIVERTER RUNNER SYSTEMS

VISCOSITY CONTINUATION BLOCK

Processable Upper Surface, Curved S. Runners. Flat Plain Progress GTK Runners Mostly for geometric structure as curved surface parts, can be used in injection mould cold runner systems. Including 50% glass fiber, all thermoplastic filling material, blasting diameter can be created up to 1.7 mm in tunnel runner systems.

M6 1.0

Maxiflow GXK - 2 5.5 11.8

11.5

Maxiflow GXK - 2

GTM

MINIFLOW RUNNER

They are compatible with small thin walled parts. GTM Runners: By creating hidden runner in injection runner systems, runner diameter is optional from 0.8 mm to 2.14 mm, it does not have a head part and it is in 10 x 5 dimension. Blasting Diameter: d2 Between 0.5 mm and 1.1 mm

Order GTM1005 GTM1007 GTM1009 GTM1011

1.0 x 450

13.1

11.5 3

Stamp Size

Ø d2

Special Size Section Used Injection Mould Diversification

0 11 5

260

Ø d2

Maxiflow GXK - 3

Page

3/2

Maxiflow GXK - 3 10

"AT" RUNNER DISTANCES Distance Between Runner and Blasting Point AT : According to the plastic raw white and tunnel runner type to be used, the distance dimension that should be given between cold runner center and blasting point is given at the following table.

d2 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.1

Due to that there is no protrusion at blasting point, it is suitable for thin walled moulds.

11.5

11.7

Maxiflow GXK - 1

Plastic Raw White Groups

Mini Runner GTM

PE -PP -PA vs.

17-20

ABS -ASA vs.

22-27

TPU -TPE -TPA vs. 15-20

PA +GF, POM vs. 25-30

GTR / GTE GTR / GTE GTR / GTE Konturflow

Ø 10 mm 20 - 25 25 - 30 15 - 25 30 - 35

Ø 12 mm 22 - 27 27 - 32 17 - 27 32 - 37

Ø 14 mm 24 - 30 30 - 35 20 - 30 35 - 40

GTK 30 - 35 33 - 38 25 - 35 40 - 45

Thin walled, in formation of flow objects.

Ø d2

Technical Information

Thin Walled Objects An additional cove is provided with block as per request.

d1 d2

0.8 1.0 It will be formed on a line with 1.2 cold runner, application in 1.4 12 0.5 - 1.2 mm thin walled parts. 1.6 Cold Nozzle Side 1.8 Loaded System 2.0

In conditions required high viscosity, tunnel Runner is screwed to mould inlet. In Thermoplastic, Elastomer Applications Distance: According to the hardness, centering can be done.

0.08

b2 /b3 sizes are depended on runner length. b2 d3

150 Ø d3 Ø d2

Technical Information

d3 d4 M

Viscosity - Gram Easy Smooth Hard 0.8 2.1 8 7 5 1.0 2.3 14 12 9 10 8 1.2 2.5 4 4 20 16 10 1.4 2.7 30 23 15 1.6 2.9 40 30 20 Thermoplastic Raw White ( Including %50 Glass Fiber ) Order Form : GTE 10. d2

b1 b2 d2

d3 d4 M

Round Type ( Standard Flow ) GTR 12 Angular Type ( Standard Flow ) GTR 12 d1 d2

An additional cove is provided with block as per request.

0.8

Round Type ( Standard Flow ) GTR 10 Angular Type ( Standard Flow ) GTR 10

Viscosity - Gram Easy Smooth Hard 0.8 2.1 8 7 5 1.0 2.3 14 12 9 20 16 10 10 1.2 2.5 4 4 1.4 2.7 30 23 15 Front reinforcement of tunnel 1.6 2.9 runner end has been closed with 40 30 20 cove / block at separating line. Thermoplastic Raw White ( Including %50 Glass Fiber ) Mini Tunnel Runner Order Form : GTR 10. d2 An additional cove is provided with block as per request.

M b1 -0.02

d4 d4

GTE

VISCOSITY BLOCK

250

d4 b2 -0.02

To reduce pressure loss, viscosity is provided by minimise sliding.

0.08

0.4

ANGULAR TYPE MODEL TUNNEL RUNNER

With application as per request

22 ±0.015

d4/2

GTR

VISCOSITY BLOCK 250 b2 /b3 sizes are 0.8 depended on runner length. b2 d3 150 Ø d3

With application as per request

An additional cove is provided with block as per request.

Ø d1 -0.02

1 x 450

System providing viscosity control to front mould cavity next to cold runner. In production formation of Flat / Plain Objects

0.4

ROUND TYPE TUNNEL RUNNER

Inner Section View

Tunnel Runner Systems Standard Installation

Viscosity - Gram Easy Smooth Hard 2.1 8 7 5 2.3 14 12 9 2.5 20 16 10 2.7 5 5 30 23 15 2.9 40 30 20 3.1 54 40 27 3.3 68 52 34 Order Form : GTR 12. d2 d3 d4 M

Viscosity - Gram Easy Smooth Hard 0.8 2.1 8 7 5 1.0 2.3 14 12 9 1.2 2.5 20 16 10 12 10 1.4 2.7 5 5 30 23 15 1.6 2.9 40 30 20 1.8 3.1 54 40 27 2.0 3.3 68 52 34 Order Form : GTR 12. d2

b1 b2 d2

d3 d4 M

Round Type ( Standard Flow ) GTR 14 Angular Type ( Standard Flow ) GTR 14 d1 d2 1.2 1.4 1.6 14 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4

Viscosity - Gram Easy Smooth Hard 2.5 20 16 10 2.7 30 23 15 2.9 40 30 20 3.1 6 6 54 40 27 3.3 68 52 34 3.5 85 65 43 3.7 100 80 50 Order Form : GTR 14. d2 d3 d4 M

Viscosity - Gram Easy Smooth Hard 1.2 2.5 20 16 10 1.4 2.7 30 23 15 1.6 2.9 40 30 20 14 12 1.8 3.1 6 6 54 40 27 2.0 3.3 68 52 34 2.2 3.5 85 65 43 2.4 3.7 100 80 50 Order Form : GTR 14. d2

b1 b2 d2

d3 d4 M

Cold runner Span Length should be reduced inwards, Elastomer Plastics. In mounting: Tunnel Runners are secured with retaining pin against loosening. However, mostly they are secured with bolts.

Page

Bölüm Enjeksiyon Kalıp

261

Sayfa Section

261

Injection Mould

Digital Screen Opening Closing Screen Lighting Tc (Internal Heat) Control Celcius

IYP

HEAT INSULATION PLATES

Precise Control Kelvin Fahrenheit

HEAT CONTROL /MEASURING K TYPE THERMOMETER

Impact and Heat Insulation Processes of Press and Injection Moulds To avoid heat dissipation in injection moulds, they are preferred in order to avoid Heat Dissipation / Loss among mould plates or between machine connection block plate and mould upper plates, especially in moulds produced with thermoplastic and thermoset raw material. Heat Insulation Plates : 2600C Heat Resistant P.T.F.E (Teflon Sheet). Plates; It does not contain asbestos, it is not affected from impacts water, friction and electricity and is resistant 1800 TONE Pressure per centimeter. Insulation plates also raise the display standards of moulds used. Compression Stresss : At... 1000C............188 N / mm2 It is for At... 2000C............126 N / mm2 hot 0 2 At... 260 C............118 N / mm runner Thermal Conductivity : 2180C................. 3.0 x 10-3 W /mK moulds. Humidity Rate : ....................................................0.06 % Combustion Resistance according to UL 94 : .......94 V -0

As a set with 2 pieces Probe in Protection Bag This device is designed to use with Portable ( Battery Operated ) 3 1/2 Digital Screen External K Type Thermocouple or Contact Probe. It has two heat sensors. ( Thin Type Thermocouple or Contact Probe ) Measurement Range: -50º C and 1300º C / 2000º F / 223 K - 2000 K Resolution: 1º C or 1º F,01º C or 01º F,1K Accuracy: It has been determined as one year, Operating Temperature over 18º C - 28º C (64º F - 82º F ) and does not contained thermocouple and probe errors. Heat Rate: For 01 Run Accuracy Specification ºC, From ºC' to 18ºC and 28º C - 50º C (32º F - 64º F and 82º F - 122º F ) Ingress Protection: At "60 V" or "24 V" rms Ac, Max. Input Voltage Reading Rate: 2.5 Run Per Second Input Connectors: 1 Piece Thermocouple (Thin Type) 1 Piece Contact Probe With Extension Cable Ambient Operating Range: 0º C - 50º C Storage Temperature: -20º C / 60º C Relative Humidity %0 - 80 ( 0º-35º ) Digital Screen Protector: 3 1/2 Crystal Display LCD Max.1999 Reading Energy Unit: Standard 9 V (Cell) Battery Dimensions: Length:162 mm Width: 76 mm Thickness: 38.5 mm Weight: 210 gr.

OPERATION INSTRUCTION

Ø 92 Centre Hole Opening, is further processes as per request T

IYP

HEAT /INSULATION and PULSE PLATES Order IYP.1515.6 IYP.1520.6 IYP.1525.6

A L 152 152 152 192 152 242

T 6 6 6

IYP.2020.6 IYP.2025.6 IYP.2030.6 IYP.2035.6

192 192 192 192

192 242 292 342

6 6 6 6

IYP.2525.6 IYP.2530.6 IYP.2535.6 IYP.2540.6 IYP.2550.6

242 242 242 242 242

242 292 342 392 492

6 6 6 6 6

IYP.3030.6 IYP.3035.6 IYP.3040.6 IYP.3045.6 IYP.3050.6 IYP.3055.6

292 292 292 292 292 292

292 342 392 442 492 542

6 6 6 6 6 6

Page

262

Order IYP.3535.6 IYP.3540.6 IYP.3545.6 IYP.3550.6 IYP.3560.6

A 342 342 342 342 342

L 342 392 442 492 592

T 6 6 6 6 6

IYP.4040.10 IYP.4045.10 IYP.4050.10 IYP.4060.10

342 342 392 392

392 442 492 592

10 10 10 10

IYP.4545.10 IYP.4550.10 IYP.4560.10 IYP.4570.10 IYP.4580.10

442 442 442 442 442

442 492 592 692 792

10 10 10 10 10

IYP.5050.10 492 492 10 IYP.5055.10 492 542 10 IYP.5060.10 492 592 10 IYP.5070.10 492 692 10 IYP.5080.10 492 792 10 Our products in the desired dimensions and in 4 and 8 mm thicknesses are available.

To Select Temperature Scale, the option is specified with 0C / 0F / K keys on unit. When thermometer is opened, it is shown the last heat values when the thermometer closed last. Pls. use keys to change it. Thermometer: It allows two types of resolutions. High Resolution 0.1 0C or 0.1 0F - Low Resolution 1 0C or 0.1 0F Battery Replacement : When the screen shows the İ sign, 9 V Battery should be changed. 1 - Remove device cover and Air Temperature Contact Probe. 2 - Remove screws of battery box behind the device, insert battery, then close the cover and mount it again. Safety Information : WARNING ! To avoid the electric shock, if the voltage exceeds 24 V AC OR 60 V DC on measurement surfaces, don't use the device. * To avoid damage and burning, making heat measurement in Micro Wave and so on ovens, due to repeated sharp tension, can be broke Thermocouples ends. * To prolong end' s life, avoid the sharpness at the ends, especially at the ends of corrector. When the measurement is finished, pls. insert rubber guard that is at the end of Contact Probe with extension cable to its place again.

Made In GERMANY

EGM PLASTIC INJECTION OVEN CLEANSER

SCREENER MAGNETIC SEPARATOR Keeps Unwanted Metal Particles in raw material. Especially in your plastic mould machines, the unwanted metal particles mixing to raw material, damages the extruder of injection machine. This is for screening process at the bottom of fluid raw material. Stainless Magnetic Rods and Cylindrical Magnetic Rods are excellently powerful in keeping metal particles, can be used also in liquids due to that they are compatible with fluidity compliance of raw material. Example: Electro Diving Erosion (EDM) also keep the metal particles in liquid chamber.

Magnetic Separator is the cheapest insurance of Plastic Injection Machines.

SCREENER MAGNETIC SEPARATOR Order

EGM

Product Dimension

Weight

EGM 20C

Width: 170 Length: 180 Height :75

2.70 Kg.

EGM 25C

Width: 220 Length: 230 Height :75

4.00 Kg.

Heat Resistance : 600C

Plastic Injection Oven Cleaner for Colour change, Economic Extruder Drainage Cleaning; It is a liquid corrosion preventative and cleanser for plastic processing machines. By sticking to raw material due to additives inside it, the liquid cleans auger metal of extruder thoroughly and protects against corrosion due to inhibitors exhausting during combustion. Thanks to its fluidity, it leaks to then whole area in oven and it protects everywhere that corrosion may occur, the material is similar to foam, it expands and the pressure increases in plastic granule and extruder occurs by expanding limited volume in T Extruder auger metal, thanks to this feature of cleanser, all previous melt plastic granule raw material at the end of oven or inside of duct are sprayed outside with a few times of pressure. Usage: A unique product for cleaning the previous black colour related and hard polymers from inside of oven. Under all circumstances, the processing is not abrasive and does not include any solvent. Especially, it is effective in raw material such as ABS, PA, PET, PS, PMMA, PC, SAM, PVC, EVA, PU, TR, PBT, PPO, PP, PE etc. and is used at the temperatures between 120ºC and 320ºC with extrusion. For sufficient cleaning of appliances, it is mixed with approximate %1 WINKEL Plastic Injection Oven Cleaner according to its inhibition and cylinder volume unit and 1 /10 Granule. By foaming at the extruder, it is sprayed outside. (It is Scaled Packing.) Ultra Powerful & Economic & Compatible Hot Runner

It is for feeding tunnel of plastic injection machines. Magnetic Separator ; Especially, it is a processing industry application area of granule or crushing materials. Magnetic Separator ; It is inserted to raw white feeding tunnel of injection machine. It is equipped with very powerful Neodymium ( Nd Fe B ) magnets and materials are from stainless steel, also can capture very thin metal particles. When magnetic separator is used, the extruder life of injection machine is prolonged considerably. The main advantage of magnetic magnet is its demagnetization opportunity. The cleaning of metal particles on stainless rods can be done rapidly and comfortably. According to Material Consumption in Raw Material and Colour Change dimension of feeding tunnel, the product selection Experience - 1: Normal Runner can be done. WINKEL Liguid Mixed a b Main Cleaning A : 3 Kg. Raw White + 1 /2 * In plastic injection machine applications Scale ( Cover ) WINKEL Final Cleaning B : 2 Kg. Raw White Spraying Traditional 40 Kg. Sprayed Material Consumption Oven Cleaning

EGM

* Application in EDM Erosion Machine

WINKEL Liquid Mixed Traditional Oven Cleaning

Experience - 1: Normal Runner a b Main Cleaning A : 4 Kg. Raw White + 2 /3 Scale ( Cover ) WINKEL Final Cleaning B : 3 Kg. Raw White Spraying With, 75 Kg. Sprayed Raw material, the experience is completed.

This experiences are data made in injection machine with 50 mm auger diameter.

Order :

1- Liter

800655

Page

Bölüm Enjeksiyon Kalıp

263

Sayfa Section

263

Injection Mould

INNER MOULD APPLICATION MECHANICAL PLIERS Machine & Mould, Heavy and Hard Work Hot Objects Holding Kits

LONG FLAT ENDED NEEDLE PLIER

UNIVERSAL TYPE UTILITY KNIVES

This Knives that are economic and high quality products with single blade and breakable blade types, have wide variety of usage area and different presentation options, should be used very carefully.

RUK 1300

In Deep Zones of Long and Thin Chuck Mould or Product Holding Operation in Hot Stamped Moulds, Also during Repair /Maintenance, In Places that can be difficult to reach.

Order RUK1300

Length

Housing

Handle

300 mm Vanadium Steel PVC - Insulated

LONG CURVE ENDED NEEDLE PLIER

W 2169

MB 5203

T 21600

T 21609

Order Product Definition W 2169 Wert: Plastic Handle, Breakable Blade -100x 18 MB 5203 Wert: Small Type, Breakable Blade, Economic Wert: Metal Casing, Nonskid Handle, Robust T 21600 T 21609.B Spare (Breakable Blade) Ends10 Pieces 100x18 T 21610.K Spare (Breakable Blade) Ends, 10 Pieces 80 x 9

RUK 1345

In Deep Zones of Long and Thin Chuck Mould or Product Holding Operation in Hot Stamped Moulds, Also during Repair /Maintenance, In Places that can be difficult to reach

Order RUK1345

Length

Housing

Handle

300 mm Vanadium Steel PVC - Insulated

PCAM 1555

LONG ROUND ENDED NEEDLE PLIER

RUK 0360

In Deep Zones of Long and Thin Chuck Mould or Product Holding Operation in Hot Stamped Moulds, Also during Repair /Maintenance, In Places that can be difficult to reach

Order RUK0360

Length

Housing

Handle

LONG COMBINATION PLIER

RUK0360

Page

264

MB 52207

W 2161-8

Order Product Definition PCAM 1555 Deburring Scalpel (Plastic Handle) 155 mm Deburring Spare Blade End Length: 36mm PCAM 36 Deburring Scalpel ( Metal Type ) 160 mm W2163 MB 52207 Utility Knife Angular cutting - With Spare Blade Utility Knife Metal Structure 100 x 18 / 88 gr. W 2161 Utility Knife Metal Structure 80 x 90/ 60 gr. W 2168

300 mm Vanadium Steel PVC - Insulated

RUK 2345

In Deep Zones of Long and Thin Jaw Mould or Product Holding Operation in Hot Stamped Moulds, Also during Repair /Maintenance, In Places that can be difficult to reach

Order

W 2163

Length

Housing

Handle

300 mm Vanadium Steel PVC - Insulated

* For other hand tools, pls. request our Güvenal 2014 ( Page 296/9 ) Volume 2. Catalogue.

FAST OPENING

COTTER TYPE

STILSON TYPE

HEAVY TYPE

Order

Product Definition

0510210

Hook: Fast Opening Pipe Wrench 10" - 14"

2201 10

İzeltaş: Cotter Pipe Wrench 325-430-585

2100 10

İzeltaş: Stilson Pipe Wrench 300-450-600

2110 10

İzeltaş: Heavy Type Pipe Wrench 300-450-600

0 Straight Cutting 90 External Cutting

1231

PLASTIC RUNNER CUTTING 90 ANGULAR CHISEL

The product is for cutting stainless material and Plastic / Lead. The ergonomic handle of product does not have any insulation against electricity.

Order

Length

Housing

Handle

Orifice Form

1231

150 mm

External

Foam PVC

900

Plain Surface, 25ºC Blade Angle Cutting - 18mm Blade Length 4 mm Cutting Capacity - 190mm Heat Controlled Runner Cutting Shear

19 Watt Spare Resistance

19 Watt

Heat Control Device HTR 30 N

HEAT CONROLLED RUNNER CUTTING SHEARS

0 Straight Cutting 35 External Cutting

1233

PLASTIC RUNNER CUTTING 35 ANGULAR CHISEL

Burning Inhibitor Aluminium Base Plate

The product is for cutting stainless material and Plastic / Lead. The ergonomic handle of product has not any insulation against electricity.

Order

Length

Housing

Handle

Orifice Form

1233

150 mm

External

Foam PVC

350

Order Segmental Cutting

HT180

It can be performed applications for cutting injection runners and other plastic materials, hard and thick plastic materials that are hard to cut with special cutting shears by without cracking - breaking - and by heating (Heat Controlled) clean cutting surface. Especially: In cutting operations of Plastic Materials of Engineering (Headlamp etc.) for precise / rapid and quality surfaces. The cutting shear is used with Heat Setting Device / Rheostat Desired Adjustable Heats in a controlled manner, cutting shear is also with spare resistance and aluminium plate burning inhibitor base plate.

HT180

Length

Housing Cutting Capacity 0 With Heat 25 / Straight 190 mm Length : 23 mm 4.0 mm Unit

2323

ELECTRICIAN CHISEL

A long and thin product has stainless material and nonskid PVC Plastic Handle with Ergonomic hold of product has not any insulation against electricity.

Order

Length

Housing

Handle

Cutting

2323

120 mm

Internal

Nonskid PVC

0.65 mm

B C

Cambered Surface, 16ºC Blade Angle Cutting - 23 mm Blade Length 7mm Cutting Capacity - 190mm Heat Controlled Runner Cutting Shear

29 Watt Spare Resistance

29 Watt Straight Cutting

ELECTRICIAN SPRING DIAGONAL CHISEL

1377

A long and thin product has stainless material and nonskid PVC Plastic Handle with Ergonomic hold and is used for cutting 0.65 mm wires such as Plastic /Cable/copper.

Order

Length A

1377

130 mm

Head

Cutting

12 Oval Type 0.65 mm A

B C

Straight Cutting

ELECTRICIAN SPRING DIAGONAL CHISEL

1406

A long and thin product has stainless material and nonskid PVC Plastic Handle with Ergonomic hold and is used for cutting 0.65 mm wires such as Plastic /Cable/copper.

Order

Length A

1406

130 mm

7.5

Head

Cutting

16 Oval Type 0.65 mm

Heat Control Device HTR 30 N

Burning Inhibitor Aluminium Base Plate

HEAT CONTROLLED RUNNER CUTTING SHEARS

HT200

It can perform applications for cutting injection runners and other plastic materials, hard and thick plastic materials that are hard to cut with special cutting shears by without cracking - breaking - and by heating (Heat Controlled) clean cutting surface. Especially: In cutting operations of Plastic Materials of Engineering (Headlamp etc.) for precise / rapid and quality surfaces. The cutting shear is used with Heat Setting Device / Rheostat Desired Adjustable Heats in a controlled manner, cutting shear is also with spare resistance and aluminium plate burning inhibitor base plate.

Order HT200

Length

Housing

Cutting

190 mm

With Heating Unit

16 / Camber

Mould Equipments Present Special Solution...

Length:23 mm

Page

Bölüm Enjeksiyon Kalıp

265

Capacity 7.0 mm

Sayfa Section

265

Injection Mould

SCRAPER Usage & Application Inclined Edge

Both Edges of Ribs and Sheets

NOGA

SCRAPING SETS

Countersunk Hole Inner Edges Both Edges of Hole

PROMOTIONAL SETS Deburring : Steel, Aluminium, Plastic S Promo Set - NG 8150 Content: Noga Grip 1 Holder 10 Piece S10 Scraping Blade N Promo Set - NG 8100 Content: Noga Grip 2 Holder 10 Piece N1 Scraping Blade

Order : NG 8150 Order : NG 8000

Left and Right Br

Some Application Areas of Scraper Sets Burrs: They are unwanted metal particles remained at the edge of work piece after machining process. For safety and quality production, these particles should be cleaned. Material Removal on bench is both long term and is hard to make balanced process. Hence, it will take more time, also surface roughness is important. All of this can not be economical. NOGA DEBURRING SETS: With two component plastic handle and cutting blades (extended telescopic) and have withdrawal spring for opening and closing handle locks. 3 Pieces Spare Cutting Blades are stored in rear covered chamber. Both Sides of key Hole In Normal and Shallow Ducts

NOGA STRIPPER SETS

t Economical Se

Corner Straight Edges

ass Casting

NOGA GRIP HOLDER ( 3 Different Model) NG-1 Ø 3.2 mm For All "S" Scraper Ends NG-2 Ø 2.6 mm For All "N" Scraper Ends NG-3 Ø 7.0 mm or All "T" Scraper Ends Rasp Holders: Plier Holder in rotary position, Replaceable Ends (With Drill Chuck) Holding Handle. It is adapted to part contour automatically. With options for the processing of very different materials, it is used for deburring of contours rationally. With the ergonomic difference from other holders, it is suitable for your hand. - For max. comfort of your hand- Hard and Soft - Light Robust Structure - Rapid Replacement of Scraper Ends and Holders. Spare stripper ends are in rear cover assembly.

TELE SETS Deburring : Steel, Aluminium, Plastic, Brass and Casting S Tele Set - NG 8350 Content: Noga Grip 3 Holder S Holder, 5 Piece S10 5 Piece S20 Scraping Blade N Tele Set - NG 8300 Content: Noga Grip 3 Holder N Holder, 5 Piece N1 5 Piece N2 Scraping Blade

Order : NG 8350

Order : NG 8300

Stripper Rasps (New Product)

58 mm

70 mm

LIZA BURR SET Multi Purpose Set

Liza Burr Set - LB 1900 T50 Triangle Stripper End: T70 Triangle Stripper End: Content: UNI Holder, 5 Piece S10 5 Piece N1 Scraper Ends HSS Blades with "NG3" HSS Blades with "NG3" 3.5

Holder.

EXTERNAL Blade End:

4.5

Holder.

EXTERNAL Blade End:

External Rotating Countersunk Driver Internal Rotating Countersunk Driver Length : 150 mm Length : 150 mm

Page

266

PLASTIC EDGE OFFSET Economical Set - E02100 Content : E0 Holder+ S10 Green Stripper End ( Aluminium) E0 Hold + S100 Blue Stripper End (Steel) E0 Holder + S150 Yellow Stripper End ( Plastic) Order : E02100

Order : LB 1900

NOGA

Straight Edges

Superficial

Angled Edges

Toothed Hole

Steps Interrelated Holes

Deep Holes

Deburring Scrapers: The stripper retainers have replaceable ends at rotary position and are adapted to work piece contour with handy, cutting edge automatically and they are excellent /quality brand hand tools in deburring different types of materials rationally. MULTI PURPOSE SCRAPING SETS " Special Sets " LIZA BURR LB 1000 N and S : Double Ended Stripper Ends for using with Stripper blades. Extension from 20 mm to 110 mm with N Scraper Blade. 20-94 mm with S Scraper. Content: Plastic Handle, Telescopic Head with Pliers Order : LB 1000 N1 and N2 Stripper.

" Special Sets " SOFT GRIP SG 1000 Ergonomic Holder, Two Holes are suitable for S and N Scraper. Content: S 100 and N10 Cobalt Alloy Scraper Blade with SG Holder.

Order : SG 1000

" Pen Type Pocket Rasp " TEDDY BURR TB 1000 N1 Stripper End, 8 mm Hexagon Aluminium Retainer. It can hold all N Type ( Diameter 2.6 mm ) Stripper Ends. Stripper Ends can be changed easily, Pocket Attachable / Clip On. Order : TB 1000

Light Duty Stripper End Short Type Order

End Type

BN 1010 400 BN 2010 800 L/R BN 2012 800 L/R N2 TİN BN 1310 Cobaltous 450 BN 3010 500 N3 BN 6010 N6 400

Application

For steel, plastic aluminium

Brass, Casting With Right-Left Hand

L/R

Stainless Steel With Right-Left Hand

N10 Deburring of internal and external burrs In many materials Straight Edges In all plastic and hard materials

STRIPPER SETS

NOGA

DEBURRING & STRIPPING DOUBLE EDGE STRIPPING NOGA NOGA At Straight Edges

" Multi Purpose " NOGA BURR NG 1003 Content: NG 1 Holder With S10 - S20 - S35 Stripper Ends NOGA BURR NG 1005 Content: NG 1 Holder With S 10 - S 20 - S 35 - S 101 and S 202 Stripper Ends NOGA BURR NG 1000 Holds all S Type Stripper Order : NG 1000 Ends (3.2 mm) Spare NG 1003 strippers are in rear cover. NG 1005 PLASTIC EDGE OFF E0 2000 Economical Set Holds all S Scrapers.( 3.2 mm ) Replaceable Stripper Model, Content: Plastic retainer and S 10 Stripper End

Order : E0 2000

Long Telescopic Stripper Set

Length :131 mm SUPER BURR NG 3003 Long With Retainer Holds all S Strippers. Replaceable Stripper Model. Content: Plastic Retainer Order : NG 3003 and S 100 Stripper End

Adjustable, Stripping/Correcting Stripper

Heavy Duty Rasp Ends Long Type BS 1010 400 S10 BS 2010 L/R 600 S20 BS 2012 L / R TIN 600 S20 BS 3010 400 S30 BS 3510 L / R 550 S35 BS 1018 Cobalt 450 S100 BK 1010 400 S101 BK 3010 450 S150 BS 7001 S70 BS 6001 400 S60

Double Angular Cutting

DOUBLE BURR DB 1000 Deburring It is for stripper plate sheets of up to 12 mm. At the meantime, Interrelated it cleans burrs of plates and it Pipe allows Hand Protector Shield Hole and DB Retainer to rotate Stripper Ends easily. With Order : DB 1000 2 x N80 Diamonds Ends.

MINI SCRAPER SET

Double Angular Cutting MINI STRIPPER NG 3700 It is an ideal set for mould and set producers. D Holder and D50 / D66 Scrapers. The stripper is connected Order : NG 3700 with 3mm fasteners.

TRIANGLE STRIPPER SET

TRIANGLE STRIPPERS NG 3600 Holds T50 / T70 Strippers with NG3 Plastic handle and "T" Retainer. Length:131 mm 5 mm Inner Screwed

Order : NG 3600

NOGA V CUT NG 3200 It is for stripping sheets between 1 - 8 mm. NG-3 Retainer, L Retainer Setting 4mm, Screwed Length 131 mm, it is used with L3 Stripper Blade.

Order : NG 3200

Deburring of Slotting

KEYWAY BURR NG 3300 Deburring process from internal and external slottings, Distance 2.4 mm NG-3 Retainer - K Retainer Order : NG 3300 and N80 K Stripper Blade

For Stripping Interrelated Holes

HEAVY DUTY STRIPPERS

With 12 mm Ratchet Ring, handle holding D50 D66 / D75/ D77 and T80 Scraper, is for scraping almost all materials. T80 Double Order : SC 8000 Side end

End Type

Superficial Scraper

Pipe Stripper Erasing

ADJUSTABLE STIPPER SC 8000

Order

Half lines

Application For Steel, Plastic Aluminium Brass , Casting With Left, Right Hand Stainless Steel With Left, Right Hand Deburring of internal and external burrs In many materials Straight Edges In all plastic and hard materials All Precise Edges ( Finish ) Small Holes up to 1.5 mm Straight Edges Interrelated holes that are hard to reach

INNER HOLE STRIPPER NG 3710 It is ideal to strip interrelated holes. It is ideal for NG 3 Retainer, D Pliers Retainer and D75/ D66/ D77 Stripper Blades.

HEAVY - DUTY STRIPPER SC 1000 More durable heavy duty scraping processes, lockable to stripper retainer, can be used with T 80 / T120 triangle strippers. Order : SC 1000

STRIPPER ENDS Order BD 5010 600 D50 BD 5501 600 D55 BD 6610 500 D66 BD 7510 600 D75 BD 7710 500 D77 BT 5000 600 T50 BT 7000 600 T70 BT 8001 600 T80 BT 3001 600

STRIPPER ENDS

End Type Carbide

T120

Dimension Dimension: 3.2 x 50 mm Dimension : 3.2 x 50 mm Dimension : 3.2 x 48 mm Dimension : 3.2 x 75 mm Dimension : 3.2 x 73 mm Dimension : 3.2 x 51 mm Dimension : 4.2 x 57 mm Dimension : 2.5 x 80 mm Double edged

Order BN 8010 550 N80 BN 7001 550 N70K BN 8110 550 N80K BN 9009 550 N90K BL 3001 500 L3 BL 4004 500 L4 BC 3201 900 RD3.2 BC 1001 900 TC

End Type

Order : NG 3710

Range

Diamond Between 0 - 12 mm End Plaque Scraping Diamond Between 1.2 - 8 mm End Plaque Countersinking Diamond Between 2.4- 11 mm End Plaque Countersinking Diamond Between 3 - 15 mm End Plaque Countersinking Between 1 - 8 mm Countersinking Between 0 - 2.5 mm Countersinking Between 0-3 mm Countersinking Max. 3 mm Countersinking

Page

267

NOGA

COUNTERSINKING SETS Pipe Holes

Outer Shafts

O -Ring Duct Cleaning, Stripping

O-RING BURR NG 1100 O-Ring Gasket, it is for inner duct cleaning and stripping and with NG1 Retainer and O-Ring Order : NG 1100 Stripper Blade. Rotary Inner Countersunk Driver, Single Edged ROTODRÄ°VE TOOLS NG 1200 The fastest way for bevelling by hand. Single Ended Countersunk provides smooth cutting. Content: NG1 Holder RD10.4 Countersunk Stripper Order : NG 1200

40 mm

Rotary - Toothed Shaft, Countersunk Driver

Order : NG 1700

Inner & Outer Edge Stripping (Single Product) INNER - OUTER REAMER SP 8000 It strips inner and outer, corners of pipes / tubes. 3 Cutter Edge, Casting Housing Aluminium, Brass, Order : SP 8000 Copper Range 4 -42 mm B0 1001 400 BC 8301 900 RD8.3 BC 1041 900 RD10.4 BC 1651 900 RD16.5 EX 2001 900 EX18 EX 3011 900 EX28

Page

268

COUNTERSINK Usage for countersinking of deep holes and all countersunk processes. Content: NG - 3 Retainer C H Retainer and C20 Countersunk (20 mm)

NOGA

Thin Sheets

Rift Lines

Straight Edge

Superficial Stripping

A- Metal (Plastic Etc.) Ceramic Stripper

Order : NG 3100

Bracket Retainer, Rotary-Rapid Countersinking CONVEX H.D CERA - CUT CR 2000 ROTODRIVE It is ideal for stripping and NG 3400 polishing surfaces of all H.D Retainer EL0802 plastic materials or soft Robust Bracket Retainer metals. Replaceable Stripper Holds C12/C20/C30 End. Content: Cera - Cut Countersunks M7 Gear Retainer and 25 ml. Convex It provides 40 mm Angular Stripper. extension for heavy duty Order : CR 2000 stripper sets. Continuous axial rotation of countersink allows fast bevelling. Content: NG -3 Retainer / Bracket Retainer and C20 Countersunk, can Replacement of Stripper End; Remove Rear Order : NG 3400 Retainer, insert cover to round hole and turn be used in C12 / C30. 90Âş, then pull the stripper end. Reversible Hole Front & Rear Precision Stripping R.15 CONCAVE CERA - CUT CR 2300 It is ideal for stripping and sides of holes. Range: 3 - 5.5 mm. R1 Scraper deburring surfaces of all plastic materials or soft Medium REVERSIBLE Order No : RC 2000 metals. Replaceable Stripper End. Range: 5 - 10 mm Steel holder and R2 Stripper End Content: Cera- Cut Retainer and 15 ml. Convex Radius Stripper. Large REVERSIBLE Order No : RC 3000

H.D Retainer EL0802 Robust Bracket Retainer Mini REVERSIBLE Order No : RC 1000 Holds C12/C20/C30 It is a precision set for stripping front and rear Countersunks M7 Gear

ROTODRIVE OUTER COUNTERSUNK NG 1700 It takes bevels on rods and outer diameters of tubes. The fastest tool for bevelling outer dimaters of almost all materials. Content: NG1 Retainer, Bracket Retainer - EX 18 / 28 Stripper Blade

Order

Standard Set for Countersinking

40 mm

Countersunk Holes

CERAMIC STRIPPER

End Type

Range

O - Ring Between 1 - 3 mm Countersinking

Between 1 - 8.3 mm Countersinking Between 1-10.4 mm Countersinking Between 1-16.5 mm Countersinking Between 4 - 18 mm Countersinking H.D Rotor Drive Between 8 - 28 mm M.7 with Holder Countersinking

Order : CR 2300

Range: 10 - 22 mm Steel holder and R3 Stripper End

Stripping of Narrow Ducts Corners

NOGA -SLOT CLEANER NG 3210

It is used for scraping of narrow ducts corners from 3.5 mm. Content: NG3 Retainer, L Retainer and L5 Stripper, L7 Stripper Order : NG 3210 is available to cut in 2 ways.

Order BC 1211 900 C12 BC 2011 900 C20 BC 3011 900 C30 BR 1001 900 R1 BR 2001 900 R2 BR 3001 900 R3

End Type

Range Between 1 - 12 mm Countersinking Between 3 - 20 mm Countersinking Between 3 - 30 mm Countersinking Between 3 - 5.5 mm Countersinking Between 5 - 10 mm Countersinking Between 10 - 22 mm Countersinking

CERA - CUT CR 1100 It is ideal for stripping and deburring surfaces of all plastic materials or soft metals. It is long lasting and is thrown after use. Ergonomic handle is mounted to holder.

Order : CR 1100

Ceramic Double Burr DB 5000 It is ideal for deburring two edges of work piece simultaneously, the stripper is replaceable. Range: 1-11 Content: V Shaped Ceramic Stripper, is designed with hand protector ergonomically.

Order : DB 5000

Spare Stripper Blades (Material: Ceramic)

Convex End Concave End 'V' Shaped Order : CR 2200 Order: CR 2500 Order: CR 5100

ECONOMICAL SETS PROMO - 1 SET Specifications: * 1 Piece T-SD Plastic Housing * 1 Piece DT-C Telescopic Retainer * 10 Pieces C20 Stripper Ends

NOGA SILVER KÄ°T NG 9300 Quite Useful Kit :

Order : RCP - 84059 Code : 13829

Order No : NG 9300 Content: * Noga Grip 3 Piece Retainer / 'S' Holder /Plastic Intermediate Countersunk Edge OFF Holder. 3.2 mm Roto Drive Countersunk / 10.4 mm Rotodrive Countersunk / 16.5 Rotodrive Countersunk / 18 mm Outer Rotor Drive Stripper Ends: S10 / S20 and S30 Packing Size : 215 x 120 x 40 mm

PROMO - 2 SET Specifications: * 1 Piece D-SD Plastic Housing * 10 Pieces C20 Stripper Ends

NOGA BRONZE KIT NG 9200

Order : RCP - 84069 Code : 13830

Most Economical Set For All Users

Content : Order No : NG 9200 * Noga Grip 3 Piece Retainer / 'N' Retainer / 'S' Retainer / 'C' Retainer +C20 / 'D' Retainer / +D50 Stripper Ends: N1 / N2 / S10 / S20 / S30 and S150 HSS Ends Packing Size: 215 x 120 x 40 mm

UNIVERSAL KIT Order : RCP - 48034 Code : 13839

Specifications:

NOGA GOLD SET NG 9400

Full Set for Professionals

* 5 Pieces D-SD, T-SD, R-SD Plastic Retainer Housing * 21 Pieces 3.2 mm Stripper Ends * 2 Pieces C-30, C-121, C-100, C-15 / 1 Piece C60 * 5 Pieces Stripper Blade with "6 mm" Handle/2 Pieces R10 (S)/3 Pieces R15 (S10) * 2 Pieces Stripper Blade SCR - 3 (75 mm) and SCR - 612 * 1 Piece V-2 and V-4 Blade with VT Telescopic Retainer * 1 Piece KW Telescopic Retainer / KW - 16 Stripper Blade * 1 Piece DTO Telescopic Retainer for 'C Type' Blades * 1 Piece CS-20 Countersunk Stripper Set

Content: Order No : NG 9400 * Noga Grip 3 Piece Retainer / Adjustable Stripper Plastic Edge OFF Retainer/ 'S' Retainer/ 'N' Retainer/ 'C' Retainer +C20/ 'D' Retainer +D50 'K' * 1 Piece C-1 Ceramic Stripper Set Retainer +N80K / Alien Key (1.5mm) / 10.4 Countersunk Bracket arm Stripper Ends: N1 / N2 / S10 / S20 / S30 / S150 / D66 Packing Size: 270 x 230 x 50 mm

Page

269

Multi Signum Spray

Ice Maker Spray (In tensions)

out 5 functions collectively, protects metal against corrosion, removes rust, lubricates, cleans product and prevents recontamination. - It has heat resistance to 30°C / 100°C. Vanilla fragrant. WD-40 Equivalent, Economic Usage It is used protecting and lubricating metals in mould industry for a short period. Also, it cleans corrosion on surfaces. It is water repellent. Used for cleaning metal parts.

Specifications: The refrigerant spray, provides easy mounting possibility by shrinking metals and chains. It is used in finding and correcting failures in electrical areas. It penetrates the surface thoroughly.

Specifications: It is a lubricant, resistant to high pressure, water, and 180°C temperature and corrosion. It has a high adhesion feature and it is dripless and non dropping. It has transparent colour and makes permanent lubrication.

Usage: It enables the dismantle by cooling parts in moulds expanded due to temperature. Also, it is a very good surface cleaner. Volatile and non-poisonous.

Usage: It is a long term protection lubricant for moulds, ejector pins, cores and columns. Also it is used for assembly such as chain, apparatus etc. Can be also applied at press .

Order No : Art. Nr. 416380

Order No : Art. Nr. 414080

Order No :

Anti - Seize Ceramic Grease Spray

Anti-Seize Copper Grease Spray

Specifications: It is mounting paste not containing metal and graphite and is a lubricant providing very good efficiency on ceramic structure and high heat resistant parts with its advanced technology. - It is resistant to 40°C/ 1400°C temperature, also 220 N/mm² pressure.

Specifications: It has very good adhesion on surfaces. It is resistant to -30ºC / 1200º temperature and 230 N /mm2 pressures and also against rust and corrosion, it is copped based mounting paste. It prevents sticking of parts due to high temperature and is used in Quick Working Systems.

Specifications This spray carries

Powerful Rust Remover Spray Specifications: It is a dust remover with superior features and advanced technology. It has a very well penetration feature and it loosens tight bolts and nuts. Also, by penetrating even the thinnest places, it removes rust. Environment-friendly. Usage: It is used for cleaning all moulds during their maintenance and mounting and removing rust from rusted bolts and surfaces. Also, it is corrosion inhibitor.

Order No :

Art. Nr. 414480

Usage: It is used as precision lubricant in all mould parts working in high temperature, metal injection and press moulds such as ejector pins - Column Bushes - Cores etc.

Order No :

Art. Nr. 413980

WW 3000 Spray (Liquid Grease)

Art. Nr. 420080

Usage: It is used as mounting spray on moulds, bolts, nozzles and oven joints of injection machines exposed to high temperature and pressure.

Order No :

Art. Nr. 415080

Mould Protector Spray

Food Approved Lubricant Spray

Specifications: It creates long term robust protection layer on surfaces, it dries quickly. It protects against corrosion, rust and creates long term non aqueous dry protection layer. It protects in the form of white powder.

Matt Black Spray Paint

Specifications: It is used for machines and equipments producing and contacting with food. Tasteless and odourless. It is approved by Food Grade LMBG. It is a white liquid grease and is used in mould related with food.

Specifications: It is quick dry and good adhesive paint. It provides intensive protection against weather conditions and corrosion.

Usage: It is a long term concealer product used as protector for metal, ceramic, glass, plastic moulds, machines and pipe ducts B.

Order No :

Art. Nr. 428880

Protective Wax Spray Specification: It protects all metals, machines and equipments against corrosion. Provides rust formation. By creating a thin wax layer on surface, it prevents air contact of product. It is resistant against water and salty water vapour. Ideal protector in pneumatic formwork. Usage: It provides protection in long distance moving of moulds, especially transporting of vessels against corrosion. Also, it is suitable for long-term Machine and Tool Storage.

Order No :

Art. Nr. 418289

Usage: It is used for lubricating various components of food and bottling machine, milk, mineral water, beer factories, meat, vegetable, fruit, fish machines.

Order No :

Art. Nr. 416480

Rubber & Plastic Care Spray Specifications: It is used to clean rubber, plastic and PVC surfaces from oil, coal dust, nicotine and other dirts. It provides cleaning and maintenance at all rubber and plastic gaskets, also bumper and car cockpits. Usage: It is used on all kinds rubber and plastics. It does not cause any reaction with product, protects shapes, does not discolor, cleans thoroughly.

Order No :

Art. Nr. 413280

WD -40 5 Function Spray

Varnish Spray (Protector)

Specifications: The worldwide proven multi function oil is odourless. It is effective in areas like Rust Remover Cleanser - Lubricant - Corrosion Protector - Contact Spray. 3 Different Types. 400 - 200 ml. - 440 ml. Spray Lubrication. 5 Function General Workshop Usage

Specifications: By creating a transparent layer on all plastic, dyed metal and dyed surfaces, it provides long term protection against dust, dirt and corrosion on surfaces. It is resistant to salty water.

Order No :

Page

270

WD40-402 200 ml. WD40-404 400 ml.

Usage: It is used for mechanical maintenance and Repair Works and also is used on wood surfaces as varnish.

Order No :

Art. Nr. 411780

Usage: Used on machines, cars and motors in order to provide sportive appearance, also it is used on window texts and exhibition stands for decorative purposes. Also, it is used as mould exterior paint.

Order No :

Art. Nr. 414880

Part Cleaning Spray Specifications: It cleanses oil, dirt and resins at all metals rapidly and without leaving a trace. Especially, for mould polishing / cleaning works, application on mould surfaces, it cleanses all dirts, oils, chemicals from surface to down / outward thoroughly with its volatility. Usage: It is used at mould polishing works intensively. It removes traces when the mould stamp is finished, it is used on mould and metal al parts of machines cleaning.

Order No : Art. Nr. 415280

Hand Cleansing Creme Specifications: It does not contain alkali or solvents and consists of components which are non prejudicial dermatologically . The processed fine grainy materials in the product, provide cleaning and protection on hand pores thoroughly. It is extremely effective on all rusty, painted and adhesive dirts.

Order No : 310804 - 500 ml. Can 318806 - 3 lt. Packing 310809 - 30 lt. Barrel

It is for Hot Runner Moulds.

SYT

HOT RUNNER CLEANING

It provides cleaning on hot runner moulds, runner/nozzle systems by heating frozen raw material.

WINPLAST MOULD PROTECTOR

Rust and Corrosion Inhibitor, Protecting Flexible Plastic Elastic Surface Coating Spray Paint provides flexible, non-porous and easy coating. It is quick dryed and thanks to its blue colour, it is detected immediately on mould and metal parts. In mould and metal industry, it is for surface corrosion protection.Order : 400 ml. Art No : 418880

Economic Mould Release

WINKEL Silicone Spray

UNIVERSAL FLUID GASKET HYLOMAR Fluid Gasket that is a permanent sealing product, is a leader in the product area providing 100% sealing to all industry Leaders companies for a long time. Especially, in hot runner moulds: The parts to be repaired with suitable operation should be cleaned and oil-free. Sanding improves holding quality. Usage: Cut the edge and squeeze Winmet. The mixture is adjusted automatically. Mix material until receiving an even colour, apply to the parts with scraper kit. After 30 minutes, mechanical work can be performed. Full curing is realized after 24 hours. Should not be worked under 5ยบC. After completion of the work: Close the cartridge with its cover again.

MACHINE & MOULD MOUNTING SPRAY In plastic injection machines, it helps to release products from mould. 2 Different Presentations: Silicone Spray: It creates oil covered slippery surfaces Siliconless Oilless Spray: It creates spotless slippery surfaces. Use on surfaces to be painted.

Order 411580 417480 K.2000 K.1000

Product Definition WINKEL Silicone Spray WINKEL Oil-free Silicone Economic Silicone Spray Economic Oil-free Silicone

While beginning application, the selected compatible ( runner nozzle ) copper end is connected to the heat gun end with mounting ring in appropriate manner. Thanks to flexible hose of heat gun, it has ergonomic usage.

Technical Detail Information! Colour ........................................................ Blue Density (25ยบC) ................................ 1,12 g / cm3 Chemical Element...............63 - 67 Polyurethane Resolvent............................................33 - 37 % Mixture Acetone / Ethylacetate Minimum Heat Resistance...................... - 500C Maximum Heat Resistance............ 250 / 3000C Maximum Crack Filling.............. 0.10 / 0.15 mm Delivery Status.................In 80 ml. tube as paste Usage: After ventilating solvent ( approximately 10 minutes), the mounting can begin. It is resistant to oils, grease fuels, water and other chemicals. Its usage is easy, non drying, thus when desired to open the sealed system, it does not cause any difficulty.

WINKEL REPAIR PASTE Winkel Mix: It is used for repairing unsuccessful drills, eyelet spaces, all cracks on metals and wood and plastic, mechanical work can be done in a short time. The parts can be grinded, milled, drilled, painted. It is a product resistant up to 300ยบC temperature. Winkel Mix - Waser: It has similar specifications to the other sealant and is a model used against water. Especially, it can be applied on pipe and metal cracks.

Mounting Drill Chuck Nozzle Ends Related to Unit (With compatible selection)

Technical Detail Information! Voltage ........................................... 220 / 230 V Power.......................... 100 W min. - 200 W max. Weight..................................................... 250 gr. Cable Distance .................................... 2.5 Meter Max. Nozzle Heat .................................. 350ยบC 12 Second heating time / Waiting 48 Second It is suitable for all plastic raw materials. Application: During the process, 12 seconds after pressing the trigger of the Heat Gun, the coppered end reaches to the required Temperature (350ยบC) to open the plugged area, while gun is working, don' t pull the trigger continuously. After pulling the trigger for 12 Seconds ( ON ), wait for 48 Seconds (OFF) by removing your hand from the trigger. This process cycle can be repeated in accordance with specified time values. It can be extended according to the hard plastic materials. Coppered Ends can be worn out in time, they should be changed at suitable intervals. Important: When the process is completed, the energy source should definitely be cut and also the product should not be left in a place with fire risk. The cleaning of the product is very easy, don't remove melt plastic from copper end, the cleaning process should be done after the plastic is cooled, otherwise there is a breaking risk for the nozzle.

Order : Order 200016 200017

Product Definition WINKEL Mix 56 gr. WINKEL Mix - Waser

Order :

HYLOMAR M

Mould Equipments

SYT Page

271

Standard 230 Volt Outlet Angle Diameter 3,5 Length

KR CARTRIDGE RESISTANCE (Plain/Thermocouple) FR

With its economical prices, excellent insulation, outlets reinforced for long use, inner sleeve rolling it is excellent. The fittings are stainless bolts. As per request, it can be produced as Thermocouple Standard 300 mm cable is used, it can be extended as per request also, as per request special production can be made. Power : 5 W/cm2 - 230 V Sleeve material: Copper, Tin Alloy - Cr-Ni in yellow. Energy Cable: Pure Nickel 300mm length, glass fiber glass fireproof cable outside, external Armour 304 Stainless Steel Mesh Tie. Connecting Bolt: Stainless Cylinder Head Cap Screw M5x30 300 mm Length Diameter

The cartridge resistors produced with advanced technology, provide a good performance in difficult use conditions in short distances and small areas due to its high watt. By insulating resistance wire wrapping on ceramic stone in equal and common pitch ranges with high resistant magnesium oxide powder, is created at a very close point to the stainless steel. The thickness of insulation between resistance wire and stainless steel pipe provides excellent heat transmission. D -0.05

HOT RUNNER, CLAMP END RESISTANCE

18 L Âą %5 250 Thermocouple Resistance Diversification ( Selection as per request)

As per request, outlet angle diversification types Type 1: Thermocouple junction point is not grounded to resistance body and is located at the bottom washer of resistance tube. 00' Degree Outlet

450' Degree Outlet

900' Degree Outlet

HOT RUNNER, CLAMP END RESISTANCE Dia. Length Watt

120

25 30 35 40

120 140 165 185

Page

215 260 300 345 430 235 280 330 375 470 565

135 165 190 220 235

25 30 35 40 45

155 190 220 250 280

25 30 35 40 50

25 30 35 40

165 200 230 265

25 30 35 40 50 60

25 30 35

175 210 250

272

280 320 350 195 235 275 315 390

25 30 35 40 45

Watt

25 30 35 40 50

Dia. Length 40 45 45 50

25 35 50

255 355 510

Dia. Length 25 30 35 70 40 50 60 75

100

Watt

270 330 385 440 550 660

30 40 50 60

355 470 590 705

25 30 35 40 50 60

310 375 440 500 630 750

25 30 35 40 50 60

Order :

390 470 550 630 785 940

KR Diameter x Length

80 6.5 100 125 -0.02 160 -0.04 200

125 160 200 250 315

Type 2: Thermocouple junction point is not grounded to resistance body and is located at the center of resistance tube.

80 100 130 160 200 250 300 400 W AT T ( 230 V )

160 200 250 315

200 250 315 400

250 315 400 500

400 500 630 800 1000

400 500 630 800 1000 1250 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600

500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000

630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000

630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500

800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500

400 400 500 630 500 500 630 800 630 630 800 1000 1000 1250

800 1000 1250 1600

1000 1250 1600 2000

1250 1600 2000 2500

125 160 200 200 250 250 8.0 125 160 160 200 250 250 315 315

-0.03 -0.05

250 315 315 400 400 200 200 250 315 400 400 500 500

125 160 10 200 250 -0.03 -0.06 315

160 200 250 315 400 500

160 200 160 200 250 200 12.5 250 315 250 315 400 -0.04 315 400 500 -0.07

-0.05 -0.08

20 -0.06 -0.10

200 200 250 250 315 315 400 400 500

200 250 315 400 500 630 200 250 315 400 500 630 250 315 400 500 630 800

250 315 400 500 630 800 315 400 500 630 800 1000 315 400 500 630 800 1000

315 400 500 630 800 1000 315 400 500 630 800 1000 400 500 630 800 1000 1250

* As per request, the desired type thermocouple can be produced in dimensions in red. * The slot that cartridge resistance will be inserted should be even and smooth. * The suitable temperature control should be done to prolong resistance life. * The resistance should be sit on slot kindly. D x L x Watt * 90Âş Rotational Types is produced with an order. Order :

Selection as per request, OUTLET TYPES

Axis Outlet

Vertical Outlet

At left rotation

Standard Type

At Right Direction

Tangent Outlet 1000 mm Cable

3 4 5

Ø 8.5 Max.

HOT RUNNER, SPIRAL RESISTANCE L ± 0.02 Winding ( Spiral ) Length

65 mm Cold Area

Section / 2.2 x 4.2 mm

Ø 6.5

A (Spiral Length)

Spiral Resistances of Nozzle Used In Hot Runner System: In Spiral Resistances, Spiral Section is from 321 Quality Stainless Steel Material and Heater Wires inside the pipe is from 8020 Chrome Nickel ( Cr-Ni 8020 ), energy cables are prepared and delivered by winding as per request with pure nickel conductive, export fireproof cable resistant to 400ºC, Teflon Coated Insulation. Our production as per request is available in standard series too.

4.2 (Cold Area)

Energy Cable Definition (1000 mm) 1 - Orange Colour ( Thick ) Phase 2 - Grey Colour ( Thick ) Neutral 3 - Red Colour ( Thin ) + Thermocouple 4 - Blue Colour ( Thin ) - Thermocouple 5 - Green Colour ( Thick ) Grounding

30 mm

(Inner 2.2 B diameter)

1 2

X 20

8 Standard Series; It is produced up to 2200 Watt ( W ) 200 225 250 290 350 400 470 620 690 850 950 1100 1200 Watt and has 1000 mm cable. Standard "J" Type Thermocouple is used in our products. Winding ( L ) 250 280 335 385 460 520 600 760 900 1100 1200 1400 1550 As per request, ( N Type and K Type ) Length (mm) Thermocouple Spiral Resistance can be STANDARD SPIRAL RESISTANCES Heated (Spiral) Area /A Length and Watt Values ( Watt / W ) produced for precision works. Special Tight Resistance; For your order, as Spiral ( A ) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 winding formula; Inner Diameter x "P" ( 3.14 ) x Thread No =.... Heated Area (Spiral) Heat Watt / W Values İç çap ( B )

STANDARD "WATT" VALUES CORRESPONDING TO OPEN / WINDING LENGTH ( L )

10 mm

200 250 350 350 350 400 470 470 620

12 mm

225 290 400 400 400 470 620 620 620

12.5 mm (1/2")

225 290 400 400 400 470 620 620 690

14 mm

250 350 400 400 470 620 620 690 690

15 mm

250 400 470 470 620 620 620 690

16 mm (5/8")

250 400 470 470 620 620 690 690

18 mm

290 400 620 620 620 690 690

19 mm (3/4")

290 470 620 620 620 690 850 950 950 1100 1200 1200

20 mm

290 470 620 620 690 690 850 950 1100 1100 1200 1200

22 mm (7/8") 200 350 620 690 690 690 850 950 1100 1100 1200 1200

200 400 620 690 690 850 950 950 1100 1200 1200 1200

225 400 620 690 690 850 950 1100 1100 1200 1200

28 mm

225 470 690 850 850 950 1100 1200 1200 1200

30 mm

250 470 690 950 950 1100 1200 1200 1200

24 mm 25 mm (1")

32 mm (1 1/4") 250 470 690 950 950 1100 1200

290 620 690 950 950 1100 1200

35 mm

38 mm (1 1/2") 290 620 850 1100 1100 1200

40 mm

290 620 850 1100 1100 1200

42 mm

350 620 950 1200 1200 1200

45 mm

350 690 950 1200 1200 1200

48 mm

400 690 1100 1200

50 mm (2")

400 690 1100 1200

Order

x A x B SR (Inner Dia) (Length)

RESISTANCE LENGTH Cold Area Including 65 mm DETECTION Min. Wrapping Diameter

For Correct Resistance Selection; Pls. complete system with Outlet- Raw Material used plastic granule raw material information and by requesting (Left) (Granule) ? information from our technical staff ( 0212 671 09 10 )..!

230 Volt

200 Watt 225 Watt 250 Watt 290 Watt 330 Watt 350 Watt 400 Watt 470 Watt 550 Watt 620 Watt 690 Watt 700 Watt 800 Watt 850 Watt 950 Watt 1000 Watt 1100 Watt 1200 Watt 1400 Watt 1600 Watt 1800 Watt 2000 Watt 2200 Watt

Page

Bölüm Enjeksiyon Kalıp

273

Ø 8 mm 2.2 x 4.2 mm Ø 3.3 x 3 x 3 mm

315 mm 345 mm 400 mm 450 mm 525 mm 585 mm 665 mm 825 mm 965 mm 1165 mm 1265 mm 1465 mm 1615 mm -

Sayfa Section

273

Injection Mould

MANIFOLD SYSTEM, THERMOCOUPLES

The Thermocouples ("J" Type) FE-constent combination makes measurement as minivolt from contact surface, sends values to the screen. Thus, it maintains heat measurement. The Cables are insulated with glass fiber coating. Thermocouples are the first element of the temperature measurement sensors from - 200ºC to +800ºC . Thermocouples are produced in various types as "K Type" - "J Type" and "PT100". "J Type" Standard Type that we produce are shown below. Except these, we produce thermocoupl according to the different special type sample.

MANIFOLD SYSTEM, THERMOCOUPLE TYPES 4 mm Pin Dip

Type: TEWS H17

4 mm Pin Dip

Circular Section Flexible Resistance Ø 5 - 6.5 - 8.5 - 10 - 12 - 16 - 21

FLEXIBLE ELASTIC ROD RESISTANCES

Type: FLEXIBLE ELASTIC ROD STANDARD RESISTANCE CR RT.1 4.5 x 4.5 mm 6 x 6 mm±0.05 8 x 8 mm±0.05

1000 M Cable

Section

100

12 4

8.5

20 Ø4.5

8.5

Ø4

4.5 3 8

3.5

6 mm With Coupling

8 mm With Coupling

Type: RT.3

Type: RT.2 1000 M Cable

1000 M Cable

Page

274

7.5

Section Injection Mould

Order :

RT . Type

5.0

mm±0.10

BASE filex

5.0

mm±0.10

BASE filex

8.5

mm±0.15

BASE filex

Radius Radius Radius Up to 12 mm Up to 15 mm Up to 20 mm 30 mm±5 40 mm±5 Cold Area 25 mm±5 Order / Length WATT ( 230 Volt 'ta ) Standard Types - Manifold Assembly- Example 250 mm 200 W 300 mm 250 W KR Clamp Resistance 350 mm 300 W 550 W 400 mm 350 W 650 W 450 mm 400 W 750 W 500 mm 450 W 800 W 550 mm 500 W 900 W 600 mm 550 W 1000 W 650 mm 600 W 1100 W 700 mm 650 W 1200 W Nozzle 750 mm 700 W 1300 W 800 mm 750 W 1350 W - RT 850 mm 800 W 1450 W Thermocouple 2100 W 900 mm 850 W 1550 W 950 mm 900 W 1650 W CR Rod Resistance 23000W 1000 mm 950 W 1750 W 1050 mm 1000 W 1850 W Bendable - Type 2.500 W 1100 mm 1950 W According to Manifold 1150 mm 2000 W Shape 2.700 W 1200 mm 2100 W 1250 mm 2200 W 2.900 W 1300 mm 2300 W 1350 mm 2400 W 3100 W 1400 mm 2500 W 1450 mm 2600 W 3300 W 1500 mm 2700 W 1550 mm 2800 W 0 3500 W 1600 mm 1x45 -Manifold Slot 3700 W 1700 mm Detail 3900 W 1800 mm 5 - 8 mm 4100 W 1900 mm . 6 4300 W 2000 mm Ø Mini. Radius

that can be curved.

It can be produced up to 4.400 mm length and in the form desired by customer. In heating of liquid and air stream, especially is used as resistance to manifold channels (by closing with resin), it can be mounted to hexagon flange. It is presented in two different types; 1 - In round structure 2- In Square type To provide insulation inside of 304 Quality Stainless Pipe (Cr-Ni 8020), inside of stainless heater wire resistance and between pipe ( Cr-Ni) and wire, magnesium powder is used, energy cables are from pure nickel and covered by fire proof glass fiber cable. For selection as per request, refer to the table. RESISTANCE DIAMETERS: Ø 5 - 6.25 - 6.4 - 7 - 8 - 8.5 10 - 10.2 - 11 - 12

Type

Square Section Flexible Resistance 4.5 x 4.5 - 6 x 6 - 8 x 8 mm

INDUSTRIAL TYPES PLUGS AND SOCKETS 16 CONTACT 16 Amper Plugs and Sockets

10 CONTACT 16 Ampere Plugs and Sockets 5 CONTACT 10 Ampere Plugs and Sockets

Core Plug : 16 Contact Order No : EBM16CF Extension Plug: 16 Contact Order No : EBM16PU Extension Plug : 16 Contact Order No : EBM16FU

Core Socket: 5 Contact

Core Socket : 10 Contact Order No : EBM10CP

Core Socket : 16 Contact Order No : EBM16CP

Order No : EBM05CP

Core Plug : 10 Contact Order No : EBM10CF

Core Plug : 5 Contact Order No : EBM05CF

Extension Plug: 10 Contact Order No : EBM10PU

Extension Plug: 5 Contact Order No : EBM05PU

Extension Plug : 10 Contact Order No : EBM10FU

Extension Plug: 5 Contact Order No : EBM05FU

Usage Area: Generally, it is used as wall plug in 6 or 8 Manifolds, hot runner systems or wall plug or heat control devices.

Wall Plug : 10 Contact Order No : Single Entry EBM10FD14 Double Entry EBM10FD24 Usage Area: Generally, it is used as wall plug in 4 Manifolds, hot runner systems or wall plug or heat control devices. Order Description : EBM10FD24 EB: Industrial Plug or Socket M: Metal Casing 10: Contact FD: Wall Plug 2: Double Entry 4 :Latch

Usage Area: It is used as machine plug or extension plug or socket in one-eyed main runner nozzles or one-eyed hot runner control devices. Order Description : EBM05PM EB: Industrial Plug or Socket M: Metal Casing 05: Contact P: Socket M: Latch

48 CONTACT 16 Ampere Plugs and Sockets

32 CONTACT 16 Ampere Plugs and Sockets

24 CONTACT 16 Ampere Plugs and Sockets

Wall Plug: 16 Contact Order No : Single Entry EBM16FD14 Double Entry EBM16FD24

Core Socket : 48 Contact (1-24) & (25-48) Order No : EBM48CP

Core Socket : 32 Contact (1-16) & (17-32) Order No : EBM32CP

Core Plug : 48 Contact (1-24) & (25-48) Order No : EBM48CF

Core Plug : 32 Contact (1-16) & (17-32) Order No : EBM32CF

Core Socket : 24 Contact Order No : EBM24CP Core Plug : 24 Contact Order No : EBM24CF Extension Plug: 24 Contact

Extension Plug: 32 Contact Order No : EBM32PU

Extension Plug: 48 Contact Order No : EBM48PU

Extension Plug: 48 Contact Order No : EBM48FU

Wall Plug : 48 Contact Order No : EBM32FD44

Ratchet Socket: 5 Contact Order No : EBM05PM

Wall Plug : 32 Contact Order No : EBM32FD44

Order No : EBM24PU Extension Plug: 24 Contact

Extension Plug: 32 Contact Order No : EBM32FU

Order No : EBM24FU Wall Plug : 24 Contact Order No : Single Entry EBM24FD14 Double Entry EBM24FD24

Page

Bölüm Enjeksiyon Kalıp

275

Sayfa Section

275

Injection Mould

HOT RUNNER MANIFOLD EQUIPMENTS 1

9 4 11 7- Thermocouple 11- Manifold 8- Hot Runner Pool Nozzle Resistance 9- Locating Pin 12- Nozzle Plate 13 -Locating 10-Top Cover Plate Flange

12 2 8 1- Hot Runner Manifold 2- Hot Runner Nozzle 3- Angus 4- Thrust Disc 5- Locking Disc 6- Angus Clamp

HOT RUNNER SYSTEM: It is the continuation and extension of Manifold SYSTEM FOR MULTI-EYED MOULDS machine injection group and independently a system in mould, its MT Manifold design and Engineering requires special Knowledge and Experience. The system equipments are relevant to each other from bonnet to heels. Hot Runner Systems are manifold, hot runner nozzle resistance and thermocouple in base. The element contacting with products directly and effecting the result is hot runner nozzle. To give desired performance by hot runner nozzle, the production of all equipment should be correct. It works as a casing in manifold system. Also, it is an important element that collects and distributes material. The system is heated via resistances placed on it. The elements that keep the resistance temperature in specified range and measure the temperature are thermocouples. The thermocouples that detect the temperature decrease, allow resistances to work by triggering electric Order Form (Definition) MT XX KA CX CY energy. ANGUS; is the first element that provides the start of distribution of Axis Range in X melt raw white into manifold. To reach melt raw material into Axis Range in Y manifold with the same pressure and temperature, Clamp Resistance Number of Used Nozzle is inserted around Angus. Dia. of Used Nozzle Manifold Model

With economical presentations...

Page

276

Section Injection Mould

M8 M8 Bolt

Ø8x30 Pin

M8x25

Ø 60

13 H 8.8

Other Equipments with Important Roles in System: Thrust Disc - Locking Disc - Bolts and Locating Pins. They are used to mount system to mould in the most correct way. Another Section that is effective in working of hot runner systems continuously and seamlessly are mould plates and manifold pools. As well as system and labour, also precision processing of the mould should be in the desired values. Hot Runner Products: BELONGS TO TURKISH PRODUCTION SECTOR. In our large mould production industry, our national capital continues to service status and we present Spare Parts Service - Demo - Maintenance Guarantee. In selection and installation of all these systems, we will help together with our technical team. In addition, we will continue its follow up. We believe that all products which we present in continuation of faith to known GÜVENAL GROUP A.Ş. services will gain continuity in your mould with appropriate manner.

X Detail

Number of

Manifold Requested Manifold Eye Inter

Model

CY CX

Nozzle Diameter

Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø

18 22 25 32 40

Number of Nozzle To be used

2 4

" H Height": It is calculated according to the material type, weight and number of nozzle used in manifold.

Axis

CX* XY

X Detail

18 - 22 - 25 - 32 - 40 04 - 08 - 16 Pieces

Ø 60

Axis Range in Y Axis Range in X Number of Used Nozzles Diameter of Used NozzlesM8 Bolt Manifold Model MY- XX- KA- CX- CY M8x25 X Detail

80 Order Nozzle Diameter N. of Eye/Nozzle

18 - 22 - 25 - 32 - 40 M8x25 08 - 16 - 32 Pieces

X Detail

CY 80

Ø 60

Order Form (Definition)

MH XX KA CX CY X

Axis Range in Y Axis Range in X Number of Used Nozzles M8 Diameter of Used Nozzles Bolt Manifold Model MYY- XX- KA- CX- CY M8x25

18 - 22 - 25 - 32 - 40 08 - 16 - 32 Pieces

X Detail

Ø8x30 Pin

13 H 8.8

MYY XX KA CX CY

Order Nozzle Diameter N. of Eye/Nozzle

Axis Range in Y Axis Range in X Number of Used Nozzles Diameter of Used Nozzles M8 Manifold Model Bolt MXX- XX- KA- CX- CY

" H Height": It is calculated according to material type, weight and number of nozzles used in manifold.

Order Form (Definition)

MXX XX KA CX CY

CX Ø 60

" H Height": It is calculated according to material type, weight and number of nozzles used in manifold.

X Detail

Ø8x30 Pin

18 - 22 - 25 - 32 - 40 03 - 06 - 12 Pieces

M8x25

H 13 8.8

Order Nozzle Diameter N. of Eye/Nozzle

Ø8x30 Pin

Order Nozzle Diameter N. of Eye/Nozzle

" H Height": It is calculated according to material type, weight and number of nozzles used in manifold.

CX 80

Ø8x30 Pin

13 H 8.8

Order Form (Definition)

MY XX KA CX CY

Axis Range in Y Axis Range in X Number of Used Nozzles Diameter of Used Nozzles M8 Bolt Manifold Model MX- XX- KA- CX- CY

" H Height": It is calculated according to material type, weight and number of nozzles used in manifold.

MX XX KA CX CY

Order Nozzle Diameter N. of Eye/Nozzle

Ø 60

Axis Range in Y Axis Range in X Number of Used Nozzles M8 Diameter of Used Nozzles Bolt Manifold Model MH- XX- KA- CX- CY M8x25

18 - 22 - 25 - 32 - 40 08 - 16 - 32 Pieces

" H Height": It is calculated according Page Bölüm to material type, weight and number Enjeksiyon of nozzles used in manifold. Kalıp

277

Ø8x30 Pin

Order Nozzle Diameter 18 - 22 - 25 - 32 - 40 N. of Eye/Nozzle 02 - 04 - 08 - 16 Pieces

Ø8x30 Pin

Axis Range in X Number of Used Nozzles M8 Diameter of Used Nozzles Bolt Manifold Model MI - XX.. - KA.. - C/CX M8x25

Order Form (Definition)

13 H 8.8

CX Ø 60

Order Form (Definition)

MI XX KA C/C X

13 H 8.8

CX Ø 60

X Detail

Sayfa Section

277

Injection Mould

HOT RUNNER UNITS: HEAT CONTROL DEVICES

HCC Model Hot Runner Control Modules, have been produced from Microprocessor-Based Devices specially designed for hot runners.

In hot runner system, without considering cable status between hot runner and device and without checking it, it controls temperature in hot runner moulds. The device and cables used here are very important in terms of mould, the colours that are used are also important . Should be inserted to the device by considering these colours.

Cable Resistance Connection of Nozzles

Yellow-Green

Grey

Orange

TC (-) Phase/Neutral

Blue

Red

TC (+)

Manifold Cable Resistance Connection

CALCULATED

PRECISION PID CONTROL AREA ON-OFF APPROACH AREA

SOFT START AREA (ADJUSTABLE RISING AREA)

- +

TC Input

OP - HR4 5A@250VV

Example: CABLE PLUG CONNECTION SERIE Single Nozzle Connection Type

Section Injection Mould

Thick White

Thin White

278

Thick White

Thin Black

Page

Thick White

TC (-) Phase/Neutral

SOIL

Feeding Switch 230 VV 50/60 HZ

1A V T Fuse

Warnings: Things to do before operation ; Before Connecting the Hot Runner Mold Control Module, make sure that your mains is grounded and your mould is connected to grounded line of mains. Electrical leakage that may occur in resistance of mould due to ungrounded line can pose a risk to human life. Also, these leakage will damage the resistance and thermocouple. The occuring leakages can be misread of temperature value or damage the device by transferring via thermocouple cable.

SOIL Neutral

TC (+)

Before operating, make connection of resistance and thermocouple in accordance with gang socket connection diagram given to you. After ensuring that socket connection is applied in accordance with the diagram, insert interconnection cables, gang sockets. Before giving energy to control module, switch rear fuses to off position, switch Pacco Switch to zero position, plug power plug into appropriate socket, open the fuses in order, make sure that the temperature in eyes opened its fuses is increased. By entering Program menu, you can adjust the desired temperature values.

Attention!! Neutral (N) and Ground (GND) is different than each other. Due to current switching from neutral line, pls. don' use this line for grounding. In order not to pose risk for human health and to operate your device normally, the ground end at power cable absolutely should be connected to actual ground line in your mains.

Female Con.

Male Con.

Female Con.

For other connection types, pls. call our company ( 8 - 12 16 - 32 )

HCC 4 Runner Connection Type R : 1 2 3 4 T/C : 1 2 3 4

CABLE SELECTION AND IT S IMPORTANCE

Heat Control Devices Operation Procedure

Heat Control Technique

HCC 6 Runner Connection Type

R : 1 2 3 4 5 6 T/C :2 3 4 5 6 1

Specifications of Heat Control Devices: * 1.0 Degree * PID Control System * Working System Increases Resistance Mode up to 8 times with Soft Start Mode * Standby Mode: (Stanby) Provides savings from electricity. * Working without Thermocouple * Compatible with "J " Type Thermocouple * 0-600 Degree Operation Scale * Structure Not Requiring Calibration (Ability to Restore Factory Calibration Settings to avoid sliding) * Automatic Parameter Settings in all circumstances with Autotune feature * Warning Alarm Output for Upper and Lower Values * 25A Solid State RELAY (SSR) per Channel * Siemens 10A Rapid Fuse per Channel * With Standard 3 Meter Patch Cord * 4 Meter Power Cable - With 5 unit feeder plug * Stranded and specially alloyed Thermocouple Cable in Cable Line (FeConst) * Easy Service / Change Opportunity with Pluggable Feature (Optional).

P.01

Very Fragile Parts

Solution Follow Up

Raw Material Type

M1/E6

M1 E3

E4 E6

E9 E6 Gap E4 E2 E6 P.03 Air Bubble K1 E6 / E7 P.04 Burning M3 / K5 K3 P.05 Distortion K4/ K5 K2 M1 / K7 Joint E1 P.06 Trace K1 / E6 E9 P.07 Deposition K5 Parts is K3 sticking P.08, jamming to E5 K9 mould. Surface M1 P.09 appearance K1 Damaged K7 Colour/ Material E6 P.10 are not nonhomgeneous E2 P.11 Burrs E6 E2 P.12 Jetting K5 Interrelated P.13 on surface K4E1K5 Faulty

P.02 Stamp

E11 E1 E3 K1 K4/K5 K7 E11 E5 E3 K5 E3 K5 E6 E10 K7 K5 E2 E4/M3 K7 E8 K5/K6 K8 M5 E11 E3 E11 E3 E4 E4 K6/E6 K8/K5 E5 E1/E3 E3/E11 E6/M1 K6/K4 K8 K7 K7 E5/E3 E11 K2/E6 K6 M6 K8 K9 E4 E11 E4 E5 K8 M6 M6/K8 E11 E6 E3 K4 K6 E4 K5 E8

E10

E12

E13 M4M6 E7 K6

E4 E5 K1 K8

( K ) Possible MOULD Problems:

K1- Increase the mould temperature. K2- Reduce mould temperature. K3- Control mould waterways and cooling balance K5- Control inlet diameter of your runner. K6- Control/ Change inlet place of your runner. K7- Control gas exhaust channel. K8- Review/Change your mould design. K9- Review your extractor design.

( E ) Injection Machine Problems

Some General Information Related Plastic Raw Material

Table A

E1- Increase injection speed/pressure. E2- Decrease injection speed/pressure. E3- Increase ironing speed/pressure. E4- Decrease ironing speed/pressure. E5- Adjust ironing time correctly. E6- Adjust area/melt temperature correctly. E7- Control that nozzle heater is connected its temperature. E8- Control compatibility of your part to the injection machine grammage. E9- Control padding/good receiving rate. E10- Control rear pressure/compression receiving rate. E11- Control transition distance and point from injection to ironing.

Symbol

(Fixed Coefficients) General Purpose Polystyrene GPPS General Purpose Polystyrene GPPS (Thinner walled than 1mm) Strength polystyrene (Antishock HIPS Strength polystyrene (Antishock) HIPS (Thinner than 1mm) Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene ABS Acrylonitrile styrene AS (SAN) Acrylonitrile styrene (Long Flow Path) AS (SAN) Low Density Polyethylene LDPE High Density Polyethylene HDPE High Density Polyethylene HDPE (Long Flow Path) Polypropylene (Homo/Copolymer) PP Polypropylene (Homo/Copolymer) PP (Long Flow Path) Soft Polyvinyl Chloride PPVC Hard Polyvinyl Chloride UPVC Nylon (Polyamide) 6 ve 66 PA6,PA66 Polymethyl Methacrylate (Acrilic) PMMA Polycarbonate PC Polyoxymethylene (polyacetal) POM (Homo / Copolymer) Polyethylene Terefaltalet (Amorphous) Polyethylene Terefaltalet (Crystalline) Polybutadiene Terefaltalet Cellulose Acetate

PET PET PBT CA

0.155-0.31

0.886 - 0.901 1.04 - 1.09

0.465-0.62

0.886 - 0.901 1.04 - 1.09

0.155-0.31

0.895 - 0.917 1.14 - 1.20

0.388-0.543

0.895 - 0.917 1.14 - 1.20

0.388-0.62 0.388-0.465 0.465-0.62 0.155-0.31 0.233-0.388

1.3 - 1.5 1.3 - 1.5 1.3 - 1.5 1.0 - 1.3 1.0 - 1.3

0.895 - 0.908 0.907 - 0.917 0.907 - 0.917 0.730 - 0.740 0.752 - 0.772

1.01 - 1.08 1.06 - 1.10 1.06 - 1.10 0.89 - 0.93 0.94 - 0.98

0.388-0.543

1.0 - 1.3 0.752 - 0.772 0.94 - 0.98

0.233-0.388

1.0 - 1.2 0.712 - 0.737 0.85 - 0.92

0.388-0.543

1.0 - 1.2 0.712 - 0.737 0.85 - 0.92

0.233-0.388 0.31-0.465 0.62-0.775 0.31-0.62 0.465-0.775

2 2 1.2 - 1.4 1.5 - 1.7 1.7 - 2.0

0.465-0.775

1.2 - 1.4 1.187 - 1.214 1.41 - 1.43

0.31-0.388 0.62-0.93 0.465-0.62 0.155-0.31

17 - 2.0 1.7 - 2.0 1.7 - 2.0 1.3 - 1.5

Mould Closing Power: In order to avoid opening of mould during injection of melt plastic raw material into mould and to create burrs at final product, it is a maximum power that clamp past can apply. Minimum closing power calculation required for machine to produce product in plastic injection machine changes according to the various parameters, as well as it can be calculated with a Few Different methods .

Most Practic Method: Required Machine Closing Power Practic Calculation x Cavity Projection Area fixed coefficient of used raw material ( Table A) Cavity Projection Area: It is the largest vertical projection area seen when looked cavity from injection side. Coefficient: You can find multiplier coefficients of raw material in Table A that are used commonly. Example: A glass having 40 mm radius will be produced. The thinnest wall thickness of glass is 0.6 mm. Pls. find closing power required for this glass production.

Field of circle being base of Glass: (Pi=3.1416) x r ² (Square of radius) = 50cm² Therefore, when projection area (50cm²) is multiplied with GPPS Coefficient (0.62) from Table.2, is seen that the minimum closing power of plastic injection machine for this glass production is 31 Tons.

( M ) Production, Raw Material/Material Problems

M1-Make sure that you dried the material correctly. M2- Check that the crushing rate is correct. M3- Check that the MB Carrier and its rate are correct.

Specific Gravity in room temperature

Viscosity Fluidity Rate

Choosing machine in right mould closing power

M4- Decrease material fluidity. M5- Increase material fluidity. M6- Check material type/selection. E12- Check goods receiving period. E13- Increase opening power.

Specific Gravity in melting temperature

Coefficient for Closing Power ton / cm²

1.050 - 1.389 1.134 - 1.219 0.958 - 0.995 0.996 - 1.012 1.018 - 1.037

1.129 - 1.172 1.129 - 1.172 1.102 - 1.113 1.074 - 1.104

1.19 - 1.35 1.38 - 1.41 1.12 - 1.16 1.16 - 1.20 1.20 - 1.22

1.29 - 1.41 1.29 - 1.41 1.30 - 1.38 1.25 - 1.35

Thermoplastic Raw Materials Melting & Drawing Rates ISO Symbol Amorphous Thermoplastics

Injection Problems

Crystalline Thermoplastics

Injection Machine and Runner Problems and Solutions

ABS PS SB SAN CA CAB CP PC PMMA PPO PVC PE PE PP PA66 PA6 PA610 POM POM PBTP PETP FEP ETFE

Melting Temperature Range ˚C

Drawing Drawing Rate %

170 - 200 130 - 160 130 - 160 140 - 170 130 - 170 130 - 170 130 - 170 220 - 260 150 - 180 240 - 270 130 - 160 ~ 110 ~ 130 ~ 165 ~ 255 ~ 220 ~ 220 ~ 175 ~ 165 ~ 225 ~ 255 ~ 270 ~ 270

0.4 - 0.7 0.3 - 0.6 0.3 - 0.6 0.4 - 0.6 0.3 - 0.7 0.3 - 0.7 0.3 - 0.7 0.5 - 0.8 0.4 - 0.8 0.5 - 0.8 0.4 - 0.8 1-3 1.5 - 4 1 - 2.5 1.2 - 2.5 0.8 - 2 0.8 - 2 1.5 - 3.5 1.5 - 3.5 1.2 - 2.8 1.2 - 2 3.5 - 5 3.5 - 5

In order to avoid surface quality problems on stamped parts, drying the raw material before injection is priority according to test form. Drought stamp is required.

Page

Bölüm Enjeksiyon Kalıp

279

Sayfa Section

279

Injection Mould

PLASTIC OUTLET SECTION DETERMINATION SCHEME GATE DIAMETER/ Melt Plastic Raw Material Outlet Section Determination part Weight gr (gram) 5000 2500 1300 650 320 160 80 40 30 20 10 5 0

Hot Runner Nozzle Equipment:

Hot runner nozzles are consisted from the following equipments, all of them have a separate task in system, sleeves are provided bedding of nozzle and avoiding of its motion. Resistances are made heating task to provide stamping of fluid material without problem. Sealing gasket, is to avoid flowing of plastic raw material out, that is passed between manifold and nozzle with high pressure. Nozzle types should be selected by determining according to the raw material and grammage and considering mould conditions. 1- SLEEVE 2- NOZZLE HEAD 3- NOZZLE OUTER SHEATH 4- NOZZLE 5- NOZZLE SPIRAL RESISTANCE 6- NOZZLE LOCATING PIN 7- SEALING GASKET

1 5 4

5 4

5 3 4

SELECTION OF HOT RUNNER NOZZLE The success of hot runner application depends on many factors. Using suitable raw material / polymer, making good part and mould design and selecting the right injection machine are critic factors, besides these, the location of runner inlet on part and selection of inlet type are essential in the same manner. During part design, while deciding runner inlet location, filling the part in balance and pressure resistance created by runner inlet should be considered. When deciding the runner inlet location, right selection among various hot runner types should be done. While deciding runner inlet type, then runner inlet length, first the compatibility of plastic material to this inlet type should be considered. Nozzle Ends are the elements having direct contact with the product and effecting the result in the hot runner systems. Thus, the selection of nozzle end; ing * Technical Drawing of the part or its data/weight lac ony P r ti * Raw Material to be used / Colour Change de rma r O * Distances between cavities (In X and Y Axises) o Inf * Is injection point on cavity? Or on runner? (Related information) * N. of Mould Eye * Location of Cooling System * Melting Temperature of Material/ Raw Material should be selected according to the afore mentioned criteria, Page Section in the event that these data are Injection provided, performance expected Mould from nozzle ends will be achieved.

280

0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0

Ø Gate

Low Density Plastics

PE PP PS TPU i20 HDPE

Medium Density Plastics

SAN ABS POM PA TPE

Medium Density Plastics

PES PC PMMA PPS PPRC

Nozzle Diameter

The following table is prepared for our customers for information purposes. Real Working Conditions: can be differed depending on part volume, average wall thickness, process injection speed, machine capacity and gate diameter.

Selection of Hot Runner Nozzle Dia. According to the Part Weight:

Ø Gate

Plastic Outlet Section

HOT RUNNER NOZZLE EQUIPMENTS 7

Plastic Outlet Section

Raw Material Flow Character

Product Wall Thickness

≤2 mm ≥2 mm

Ø 18

~25 gr. ~15 gr. ~12 gr. ~12 gr.

Ø 22

~60 gr. ~40 gr. ~25 gr. ~25 gr. ~60 gr.

Ø 25

~200 gr. ~100 gr. ~60 gr. ~60 gr. ~200gr.

Ø 32

~800 gr. ~500 gr. ~300 gr. ~ 300 gr. ~800gr.

~25gr.

Ø 40 ~2000gr. ~1200gr. ~800 gr. ~ 800 gr.~2000gr. A Group Raw Materials: PP - PE - PS - SB B Group Raw Materials: ABS - SAN - POM - PMMA - PA - PBT - PET C Group Raw Materials: PC - PPS - PES - TPE - PUR - PC - ABS Feature in Usage of Hot Runner Mould: Even cost of cold tunnel mould is more higher than cold runner mould, in the long term hot tunnel moulds provide economy in part costs as well as it idealizes part quality. Advantages of Hot Runner Systems: * Also, provides saving from created labour. Any of process (Such as runner cleaning, storage/ crushing etc. ) are not done. * Short Injection Cycle Period (Runner Tree that is not created) * Mould is worked full automatically - Mould efficiency is high. (Short Cycle Period without Runner) * Provides savings from material/ raw material (In hot runner system, there are no missing material in runner. ) * Provides saving at machine capacity. (Hot Runner Moulds can be used in all injection moulds/ There is no machine limitation. * Excellence in part quality (Due to making moulding with low pressures, internal stresses of moulded parts is very lower than hot runner mould, however heater element should be hot runner system control.

Standard Nozzle A SERIE Types

Standard Nozzle B SERIE Types

SM B 01

SM B 02

SM B 03

SM B 04

Order Example: SM x d1 x L x BOX ( Nozzle End Type )

Code

SM B 01

SM L B 02

Nozzle Diameter C

SM B 03 C

SM B 04

SM B 05 C

SM A 02

SM A 03

SM A 04

SM A 05

Order Example: SM x d1 x L x AOX ( Nozzle End Type)

Nozzle End Diversification ( BOX )

Nozzle Length

BOX

SM A 01

SM B 05

Code

SM A 01

SM A 02

Nozzle Diameter

SM A 03

SM A 04

SM A 05

Nozzle End Diversification ( AOX )

Nozzle Length B 01

B 02

Nozzle End Type Pointed End Flat End

B 03

B 04

Internal Break Jetting

B 05

AOX

Lentile

Nozzle End Type Pointed End Flat End

A 01

A 02

A 03 Internal Break

A 04

A 05

Jetting

Lentile

In the order; slot detail will be presented with technical drawing. In the order; slot detail will be presented with technical drawing. Code

SM... SM... SM...

L 46

56 66

SM...

BOX Plug In End Type

Nozzle End Types: B01

B02 B03

SM...

B04

SM...

B05

SM...

SM... SM...

Code

200 - 225 Watt

SM...

225 - 250 Watt

SM...

200 - 225 Watt

SM...

225 - 250 Watt 250 - 290 - 350 W.

SM...

Resistance Watt

290 - 350 - 400 W. 225 - 250 Watt 250 - 290 - 350 W. 290 - 350 - 400 W.

SM...

Plug In

200 - 225 Watt

6 End Type

Nozzle End Types: A01 A02

225 - 250 Watt 200 - 225 Watt 225 - 250 Watt 250 - 290 - 350 W. 290 - 350 - 400 W. 225 - 250 Watt 250 - 290 - 350 W.

A03

290 - 350 - 400 W.

A04

350 - 400 - 470 W.

SM...

250 - 290 Watt

290 - 350 Watt

400 - 470 Watt 400 - 470 - 620 W.

SM...

400- 470- 620- 690

SM...

Resistance Watt

400 - 470 Watt

AOX

SM...

350 - 400 - 470 W.

According 400 - 470 - 620 W. 250 - 290 Watt 66 to the 32 12 Selection 290 - 350 Watt 76 In Order 350 - 400 Watt 86

installation

SM...

290 - 350 Watt 350 - 400 - 470 W.

SM...

400 - 470 Watt

SM...

470 - 620 Watt

Attention !!! Technical information is absolutely essential in order.

SM... SM... SM...

A05

400 - 470 Watt 400 - 470 - 620 W.

According to the 66 Selection 32 10 In Order 76

SM...

350 - 400 Watt 400 - 470 Watt

400 - 470 - 620 W.

SM...

400- 470- 620- 690

SM...

290 - 350 Watt

SM...

350 - 400 - 470 W.

SM...

SM... SM... SM... Attention !!!

470 - 620 Watt

86 96

Resistance Watts: It is changed according to material density. Resistance Watts: It is changed Gate Diameters: It will be determined in accordance with the order. according to the material density.

400 - 470 Watt

stable

620 - 690 Watt 620 - 690 - 850 W.

Page

Bölüm Enjeksiyon Kalıp

281

Sayfa Section

281

Injection Mould

Standard MULTI NOZZLE D01 SERIE

SSM D 01 KX Serie

Multiple Groups

K1 - Single Pin

K2 - Two Pin

K4 - Four Pin

K6 - Six Pin

SSM D 01 KX

D01 - KX

Resistance Watt

SMM..

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4

225 - 250 - 290 Watt

SMM..

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4

225 - 250 - 290 Watt

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4

350 - 400 - 470 Watt

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4

400 - 470 - 620 Watt

SMM..

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4

470 - 620 - 690 Watt

SMM..

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4

470 - 620 - 690 Watt

SMM..

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4

250 -290 -350 -400 Watt

SMM..

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4

290 - 350 - 470 Watt

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4

400 - 470 - 620 Watt

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4

470 - 620 - 690 Watt

SMM..

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4

470 -620 -690 -850 Watt

SMM..

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4

620 -690 -850 -950 Watt

SMM..

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4 - K6

250 -290 -350 -400 Watt

SMM..

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4 - K6

350 - 400 - 470 Watt

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4 - K6

400 - 470 - 620 Watt

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4 - K6

470 - 620 - 690 Watt

SMM..

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4 - K6

620 -690 -850 -950 Watt

SMM..

K1 - K2 - K3 - K4 - K6

690 - 850 - 950 Watt

SMM..

K1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K6 -K8

290 - 350 - 400 Watt

SMM..

K1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K6 -K8

400 - 470 - 620 Watt

K1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K6 -K8

470 - 620 - 690 Watt

K1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K6 -K8 470 -620 -690 -850 Watt

SMM..

K1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K6 -K8 620 -690 -850 -950 Watt

SMM..

K1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K6 -K8 690-850 -950-1100 Watt

SMM.. SMM..

SMM d1

Order Example Nr of Nozzle End Cavity Nozzle Length Nozzle End Axis Dia. Standard Multi Nozzle

Multi Nozzle Series : * It is not suitable for each material and weight * While making selection, pls. request technical support... * Resistance watts are changed according to material density.

Page

282

Section Injection Mould

K8 - Eight Pin

Standard MULTI NOZZLE D01 SERIE Code

K3 - Three Pin

SMM.. SMM..

RUNNER Spinning Nozzle A SERIE

Standard Spinning Nozzle B SERIE

SSM B 01

SSM B 02

SSM B 03

SSM B 04

Order Example: SSM x d1 x L x BOX ( Nozzle End Type )

SSM Code

d1 Nozzle Diameter

SSM B 01

SSM B 02

SSM B 03 C

SSM B 04

Code L

Nozzle End Types ( BOX )

RUNNER B 01

RUNNER B 04 L

Nozzle Diameter

B 01

B 02

B 03

B 05

BOX

Lentile

Nozzle End Type

B 04

Internal Break Jetting

In order; will be presented with slot detail technical drawing. d1

BOX

Resistance Watt

Plug-in Type

225 Watt

Code

SSM...

Sleeve Spinning

290 Watt

RUNNER

290 Watt

RUNNER

350 Watt

RUNNER

350 Watt

RUNNER

400 Watt

RUNNER

250 Watt

RUNNER

290 Watt

RUNNER

350 Watt

RUNNER

400 Watt

RUNNER

400 Watt

RUNNER

470 Watt

RUNNER

470 Watt 250 Watt

SSM...

66 76

8 Economic Model Nozzle End Types:

SSM...

25 76 10

SSM...

SSM... SSM...

66 76

B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 According to Selection In Order 12

Spinning

Runner Trace of hot runner nozzle to be left on product Pointed End

In order; will be presented with slot detail technical drawing.

Pointed End

SSM...

Nozzle Length

Nozzle End Type Pointed End Flat End

Code

RUNNER

SSM B 05

RUNNER SYM

Order Example: RUNNER x C x L x AOX ( Nozzle End Type)

Nozzle Length

BOX

RUNNER SYM

SSM B 05

69 79

BOX

Resistance Watt

Plug-in Type

250 Watt

Sleeve Spinning

Multi Serie Systems Economic Model

290 Watt 350 Watt 400 Watt 400 Watt 470 Watt

Nozzle End Types:

250 Watt 290 Watt 350 Watt

B01

400 Watt

B04

470 Watt

RUNNER

470 Watt

RUNNER

350 Watt

RUNNER

According to Selection In Order

350 Watt

RUNNER

400 Watt

RUNNER

Spinning

470 Watt

69 79

290 Watt 350 Watt

SSM...

470 Watt

RUNNER

470 Watt

SSM...

470 Watt

RUNNER

620 Watt

Attention !!! Technical information is absolutely essential in order.

Attention !!!

Resistance Watts: It is changed according to material density. Resistance Watts: It is changed Gate Diameters: It will be determined in accordance with the order. according to the material density.

Page

Bölüm Enjeksiyon Kalıp

283

Sayfa Section

283

Injection Mould

Recommended Assembly Process of Hot Runner Nozzles Angus

Locking Disc

Support Plate

old

Manif

Manifold System Layout

Wedg e Fe Pla male te

OUTER SLEEVE

Form Plate Hub Disc

Serie : SB

It is a useful unit used when desired to change existing injection mould which is cold runner system to hot runner system or using in situations that the creation of water channel using extra cooling of nozzle in hot runner system should be required.

Hot Runner Nozzle

Mounting Examples of Hot Runner Nozzles

Meterial : 1.2344 Hardness : Âą 52 HRC Code: Y01 / Pointed End Nozzle Type Code: Y02 / Pointed End Nozzle Type 0.5 x 450

D d1 While inserting nozzle into its slot, don' t use iron hammer. Nozzle can be curved/winded Pay attention to avoid tension.

1 - Form Plate: Check that nozzle slot measurement are properly processed in accordance with given tolerance. 2 - Insert unsealed nozzle in its place with the help of gavel balancedly.

8 5 - Insert manifold and wedge/ bridge plate. 6- Tight manifold connection screw in order slowly and balancedly by controlling connection corners of manifold without distorting. Support Plate

d2 250

c b

X d4 d3 d

d a

OUTER SLEEVE 7- Mount support plate. For sealing, A + B +C > d can be made sealing at required area.

Order SB25Y2

SB32Y2

14 32 40 22

Page

284

Section Injection Mould

14 40 32 29

10 46 18

SB40Y1

14 48 40 37 18

39 46

SB32Y1

SB40Y2

4 - Insert copper sealing gasket on nozzles.

Serie : SB

d d1 d2 d3 d4 D

SB25Y1

3 - Measure nozzle cap height with dial gauge and reset it.

66 76 86

14 54 96

In order : Pls. place an order with order code by selecting length (L) according to the determined diameter. Data in Table is an document related to flat end sleeve structure. When requesting pointed end outer sleeve; also gate end diameter should be added to order. As per request: Our production is available for desired material and measurement is available.

In Usage of Hot Runner Nozzles: Inlet MAIN RUNNER NOZZLES of Mould Serie: ASM d1

d1 L

L Resistance is in head and inside of casing.

Nozzle End Diversification According To End Shape Series

Nozzles Types According to System Series

A Fixed

Resistance is inside of housing.

Plug in

Spinning

Multi Group

Pointed End

Flat End

Internal Break

Jetting

Lentile

Nozzles Types According to System Series Nozzle End Diversification According To End Shape Series Pointed End

Flat End

Interna Breakl

Jetting

SM - SMM

Hot Runner; Main Runner Nozzle For One Eye Mould

Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø

D 18 22 25 32 22 25 32

L 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm

For SM Series

Fixed

d1 Ø 25 Ø 29 Ø 32 Ø 39 Ø 27 Ø 30 Ø 27 d

B L

Fixed

Spinning

Main Runner Nozzles; In general Plastic injection (PP,POM, ABS,PE,HDPE,PS etc.) applications, hot runner nozzles sealing gaskets are cancelled and head thickness measurement is increased. ASM Types Main Runner Nozzles are for SM and SSM Series. Hot Runner; Main Runner Nozzle For One Eye Mould

Code ASM 18 ASM 22 ASM 25 ASM 32 ASSM 22 ASSM 25 ASSM 32

Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø d

D 18 22 25 32 22 25 32

L 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm

SM - SSM d1 Ø 25 Ø 29 Ø 32 Ø 39 Ø 27 Ø 30 Ø 27

L1 L

Plug in

B Plug in

Lentile

Main Runner Nozzles; Head Resistance is added to Heat Resistance type engineering plastics (PC, PA, PBT, PET, PVC, PBBT) hot runner nozzles. Temperature control of the hot runner nozzle is provided with 2 Pieces Thermocouples. Head resistance nozzles are for SM -SMM (Multi Nozzle). Code ASM 18 ASM 22 ASM 25 ASM 32 ASSM 22 ASSM 25 ASSM 32

Main Runner Nozzles; Head Section Flanged and Plain Type Caps for hot runner nozzles. It is for using sealed standard hot runner nozzles as main runner nozzles in mould. For materials with high melting temperature, the resistance is added in order to not having cooling in used caps, main runner caps are only in SM Series. Code SS 22 Z00 SS 22 Z01 SS 25 Z00 SS 25 Z01 SS 32 Z00 SS 32 Z01 SS 40 Z00 SS 40 Z01

Type Plain Flanged Plain Flanged Plain Flanged Plain Flanged

Ø 22 13 mm

Ø 29

Ø 39

Ø 65

Ø 25 13 mm

Ø 32

Ø 39

Ø 65

Ø 32 13 mm

Ø 39

Ø 46

Ø 72

Ø 40 20 mm

Ø 49

Ø 56

Ø 72

L1 Resistance According to End Type Series Nozzle End Pointed End Flat End 19.8 Diversification 150 Watt 19.8 Jetting Lentile 175 Watt Internal Break 19.8 225 Watt Sayfa Page Bölüm Section Enjeksiyon 26.8 Injection 290 Watt Kalıp Mould

285

Fittings Used in Hot Runner Systems ANGUS - HUB / LOCKING DISCS - APPARATUS - RESISTANCE L

NOZZLE EXTRACTOR APPARATUS SERIE: MCA

For runner nozzle D : 18-22-25-32-40

ØD

6.7

Ø 16 Ø 43 Ø 59

Piece 4 In surroundings

Order :

SA 01 00 V02

MCA 18

Order :

HUB DISC SERIE: SD02

FILTERED ANGUS SERIE: SB

Unit providing the first connection from injection group to hot runner manifold system. * Unit avoiding blockages / damages due to raw material in dusty or chamfer environment.

286

They are heater resistance, used in nozzles that are used in hot runner moulds for necessary information refer to page 273. Standard Series and Groups as per request.

Resistance 200 Watt 225 Watt 250 Watt 290 Watt 350 Watt 400 Watt 470 Watt

Section Injection Mould

620 Watt 690 Watt 850 Watt 950 Watt 1100 Watt 1200 Watt

SERIE: MT015

In Gate Valve System Hot Runner Nozzles, it is a thermocouple providing to make precision temperature from casing.

SD02 00 V 01

Ø 16 Ø 43 Ø 59

SB 01 00 V02

Resistance

GATE VALVE HOT RUNNER CONTROL THERMOCOUPLE

LOCKING DISC SERIE: SD03

Order :

Page

RUNNER NOZZLE RESISTANCES

6 34 Order :

10 6.7

230 Watt

Unit providing the first connection from injection group to hot runner manifold system. In dismantle process of hot runner nozzles from mould plate, it is used in dismantle processes not to damage runner nozzles. Useful Unit

MENTAL THERMOCOUPLE

SERIE: SA

MANIFOLD ANGUS

MENTAL THERMOCOUPLE Order

MT 015 80

L 80

Ø MT 015 100 1.5 100

5.5 28 Order :

SD03 00 V 02

MT 015 120

120

Manifold GATE VALVE Top Piston Hot Runners 5

4 Vise Plate

3 9

Manifold Pool

GATE VALVE Hot Runners

Short Cycle Times, Super Runner Trace Quality for High Quantity of Stamp

Medical Pharmaceutical Industry

Retainer Plate

2 8

Section View of Gate Valve Nozzle Group:

GATE VALVE HOT RUNNER

1- Gate Valve Hot Runner Nozzle 6- Piston - Pin Group 7- Piston Cover 2- Manifold Locating Pin 3- Pin Bedding Element 8- Hot Runner Nozzle Resistance and Thermocouple and Locking Disc 4- Locking Thrust Disc 9- Gate Valve Ejector Pin 5- Piston Jacket Nozzle End Type Options in Gate Valve Hot Runner Systems: Gate Valve is changed with end type bushings in hot runner systems. Standard Large VG Hot Runner Nozzles are compatible with all bushings.

Top Reciprocating Serie: MVG-A Gate Valve Hot Runner Nozzles: In difficult positions that normal hot runner applications are difficult, it is used in stamp applications of difficult objects, products, raw materials having thin wall thickness in cavity or Enginering Thermo plastics with injections that are hard.

ØA

In Packing with thin wall thickness

Gate Valve In locking cover systems

E-04

Standard End Type Ejector Pin cuts the goods in mould slot. The trace left on product is close to excellent cosmetically.

Bushing

VG CB - Y02

Bushing

VG B - Y03

Gate Valve Plain Bushing Plain Bushing: Ejector Pin cuts the goods on bushing surface. Processing of slot detail in mould is easier.

For companies requiring High Quality Injection Products

In Small Plastic Parts

Cosmetics (Personal Care) Products

Gate Valve Internal Break If injection in mould will be Gate Valve Air Channel Type made to hot runner slot or to It is used when extra cooling is bring product near nozzle is requested around cooled plain difficult due to cavity, this bushing nozzle. Usage in product should be used. They transparent, optic, cosmetic leave a conical runner trace parts is required. from the point that injected.

Bushing

VG B - Y02

ØD Economical Presentation. It is an absolute essential application with its

In Engineering Plastics

Top Reciprocating Gate Valve Hot Runner Systems MVG-A

GATE VALVE Hot Runners Code D L C L1 L2 A ENJ * Minimum pressure decrease * Minimum Abrasion in long working ~150 66 ~ Ø 38 166 Ø 18 60 mm Ø 55 hours mm gram * Small Short Cycle Times ~300 80 ~ Ø 50 280 Ø 25 60 mm Ø 55 * Precision Temperature Settings mm gram 74.8 MVG-A * Low Injection Pressures mm ~1000 * In Normal and Full Hard Injection Ø 60 100 ~ Ø 35 70 mm Ø 80 gram and Thin Walled Products 1000~ * Cosmetic Appearance Runner Trace Ø 70 120 ~ Ø 45 75 mm Ø 100 gram * Common Usage Area for all Plastic Raw Material and Each L1 Size: It can be changed according to the manifold thickness. Model from small to large It is recommended to give your orders according to Order Example

Ø C Order Example MVG-A D L E04

Manifold Gate Valve Top Reciprocating Nozzle Nozzle Diameter Nozzle Length Nozzle End Type

Page

Bölüm Enjeksiyon Kalıp

287

Sayfa Section

287

Injection Mould

Nozzle End Type Options: In Gate Valve Hot Runner Systems, end type is changed with bushings. Standard Large VG Hot Runner Nozzles are compatible with all kinds of bushings.

BOTTOM PISTON

Gate Valve

MANIFOLD GATE VALVE MULTI HOT RUNNER SYSTEMS MVG-M1

E-04

Standard End Type Ejector Pin cuts the goods in mould slot. The trace left on product is close to excellent cosmetically.

ØA

When axis diameter ( C ) is increased, number of cavity ( K ) can be increased.

Order Example

MVG-M1 D

ØD Bushing

VG B - Y02

Gate Valve Water Channel Type It is used when extra cooling is requested around cooled plain bushing nozzle. K(Number of Cavity) ØC Usage in transparent, optic, cosmetic parts is required. *L2 Size: It can be changed according

ØA

to the manifold thickness.

ØD L

ØC

MANIFOLD GATE VALVE BOTTOM VG CB - Y02 PISTON Bushing Gate Valve Plain Bushing HOT RUNNER Plain Bushing: Ejector Pin MVG-B cuts the goods on bushing

Order Example

MVG-B D

surface. Processing of slot detail in mould is easier.

L E 04

Manifold Gate Valve Top Piston Nozzle Nozzle Dia. Nozzle Length Nozzle End Type

Bottom Piston Gate Valve Hot Runner Systems MVG-B * L2 Size: It can be changed according to the manifold thickness.

Page

288

Nozzle End Type

ØA

67.8 50-55 72-96

MANIFOLD GATE VALVE MULTI HOT RUNNER SYSTEMS MVG-M2 When axis diameter ( C ) is increased, number of cavity ( K ) can be increased.

VG B - Y03

Gate Valve Internal Break If injection in mould will be made to hot runner channel or to bring product near nozzle is difficult due to cavity, this product should be used. They are left a conical runner trace from the point that injected.

Nozzle Length

Order Example

MVG-M2 D

L E 04

ØD ENJ Manifold ~150 Gate Valve Ø 80 L mm gram Top Piston Nozzle 64.8 Ø 85 ~300 mm gram Nozzle Dia. K(Number of Cavity) Ø C 64.8 Ø 95 ~1000 Nozzle Length mm mm gram 1000~ * L2 Size: It can be changed according Nozzle End Type 55 64.8 to the manifold thickness. Ø 80 120 ~ Ø 42 Ø 105 mm mm gram Code Ø D L ØC K L1 L2 ØA It is recommended to Section MVGgive your orders according to Injection 15-32 49-109 40-80 2-8 89.8 55-65 95-135 Order Example. M2 Mould

L C L1 66 ~ 50 Ø 56 166 Ø 18 mm mm 80 ~ 50 Ø 62 280 Ø 22 mm mm MVG-B Ø 72 100 ~ Ø 32 55 Code

Bushing

Nozzle Dia.

Code Ø D L ØC K MVG46-70 49-109 16-40 2-8 M1

ØA

L E 04

Manifold Gate Valve Top Piston Nozzle

L2 64.8

Nozzle End Type Options : In Gate Valve Hot Runner Systems, end type is changed with bushings. Standard Large VG Hot Runner Nozzles are compatible with all kinds of bushings.

Bush

E-04

Pneumatic Resistances

Gate Valve

Manifolds: Sealing not affected from temperature, excellent balance in material flowing, System Compatible with Colour Changing Material 1.2344 Hardened

ØA ER

Standard End Type Ejector Pin cuts the goods in mould slot. The trace left on product is close to excellent cosmetically.

Valve Pin

GATE VALVE BUSHING APPLICATIONS GATE VALVE BUSHING

VG B Y02

VG B - Y02

Gate Valve Water Channel Type It is used when extra cooling is requested around cooled plain bushing nozzle. Usage in transparent, optic, cosmetic parts is required.

ØD

For MVG-A Nozzles Code D L Ø 18 Ø 25 VG B 40 mm Y02 Ø 35 Ø 45

Bushing

For MVG-A,SVG Nozzles Code D L Ø 18 Ø 22 VG B 40 mm Y02 Ø 32 Ø 42

ØC Bushing

VG CB - Y02

Gate Valve Plain Bushing Plain Bushing: Ejector Pin cuts the goods on bushing surface. Processing of slot detail in mould is easier.

SINGLE GATE VALVE MAIN RUNNER HOT RUNNER SYSTEMS SVG Order Example.

SVG D

L E 04

Bushing

VG B - Y03 Single Gate Valve Internal Break Gate Valve If injection in mould will be made to hot runner channel or Nozzle Dia. to bring product near nozzle is difficult due to cavity, this Nozzle Length product should be used. They are left a conical runner trace Nozzle End Type from the point that injected.

GATE VALVE WATER C. BUSHING

VG CB Y02

ØD For MVG-A Nozzles Code D L Ø 18 VG CB Ø 25 40 mm Y02 Ø 35 Ø 45

For MVG-A,SVG Nozzles Code D L Ø 18 VG CB Ø 22 40 mm Y02 Ø 32 Ø 42

GATE VALVE INTERNAL BREAK BUSHING

Single Gate Valve - MAIN RUNNER Hot Runner Systems

ØD

VG B Y03

It is recommended to give your orders according to Order Example.

Code

SVG

60 ~ Ø 22 84 Ø 42 180 mm mm Ø 52 70 ~ Ø 32 94

Ø 62 90 ~ Ø 42 104 mm

ENJ

Ø 90

~300 gram

Ø 105

~1000 gram

For MVG-A Nozzles Code D L Ø 18 Ø 25 VG B 50 mm Y03 Ø 35 Ø 45

Ø 120

1000~ gram

In Gate Valve Hot Runner Systems, end type can be changed with bushings.

For MVG-A,SVG Nozzles Code D L Ø 18 Ø 22 VG B 50 mm Y03 Ø 32 Ø 42

Page

Bölüm Enjeksiyon Kalıp

289

Sayfa Section

289

Injection Mould

Gate Valve System MOUNTING

Bedding BUSH

1. Step Mounting of Nozzles:

GATE VALVE PIN / BUSH (Production As per Request) Gate Valve Pin: Mounting and demounting of valve pin are such as the side picture, they will be produced in desired material and sizes. Gate Valve Pin Bush / Bushings: The seconds bedding bush ( Gate Valve Pin Bush) in nozzle is to avoid expansion and bending of movable pin under load and heat, it can be changed by demounting. As per request in order, technical drawing or sample is required. The products will be produced in precision and faithfully.

Bolts

Locking Thrust Plate

Clamp Resistance Angus

In order: The dimensions specified (Example: L ) on technical drawing, transmit to our company in accordance with information .. R a : Surface Roughness Unspecified bevels are 450

Bedding BUSH

er Runn Hot anifold M

Mounting Sequence :

gle An

direction, put gaskets.

* Seat manifold into its axis with hub disc and

locating pin and tight the bolts in a balanced way.

element and locking disc into their slots.

Special bush is produced as per request.

Depth

b 3 Pieces Drain in around

Locating Pin

* At the upper side of manifold, Place pin bedding

Geometrical Production Tolerances:

An gle

0.02 Axis L2

PERPENDICULARITY

d3 d1

PARALLELISM

0.02 CONCENTRITY

0.02 Axis

Tolerance for tin pre plating can be -0.008, after plating it can be +0.01. Specify Step Bevel Dimensions .............. ! Specify channel slotted processing measurement .............. ! Specify tin plating area and its length .............. ! Specify full size dimension and tolerance .............. ! Material: Specify material and hardness as HSS or 1.2344........! Specify quantity..... ! (For high quantities, pls. request special price) Specify general tolerance values Âą .............. ! Special Notes: For precision production of Gate Valve Pin, sending the previous existing pin or bush sample offers good production.

290

Gate Valve Hot Runner Nozzle

* Insert nozzles into their slot in centering pin L6

X Detail

Section Injection Mould

Gate Valve Pin

Thrust Disc Ceramic Connector

THRUST PLATE

Page

ple

cou

o erm

ORDER EXAMPLE OF GATE VALVE PIN d2

Piston Cover Piston Group

Locking Disc

We recommend to make according to details in hot runner nozzles, nozzle mounting section.

In your orders: Pls. request an offer from our company in a way that given in example .... !

CLAMP PLATE * Insert locking thrust disc. * In manifold pool axis, place resistances around manifold without harming.

* Bring clamp plate on manifold pool and make its centering and tight the bolts.

* Place piston jacket into its slot. * Insert piston pin group that is involved in product packing as mounted inside of piston jacket.

* Close piston cover and tight the bolts. * Lay the mould in a way that nozzle ends can be

seen, insert thermocouples and resistances in to their place and secure with retaining ring that given. * Finally, you can make Hot - Letter - Group Mould Core Connection to the system that you mounted. * While making plug connection, external thermo couple cables in hot runner nozzles will be used, their own thermocouple cables of resistance will be left idle.

RESISTIVE LINEER POTENTIOMETERS

OPTIC MEASUREMENT SCALE

Lineer (Rectilinear) Rotary

Digital Reader As per request

(Sliding Arm) Position Metering Scale

Technical Specifications

Model

LPT Lineer 33 Scale

LPH Lineer 33 Scale

Usage Area: Due to Easy Mounting Opportunity and being Economic, they are products with large usage area, are given output data as Potentiometric / mm. Mainly, they are used in Plastic Injection Machines, Marble Machines and Hydraulic Presses. At sliding models.

Usage Area: Thanks to its Top Sliding Structure, it provides mounting opportunity up to long measurement length. They are given output data as Potentiometric / mm. Mainly, they are used in Plastic Injection Machines, Hydraulic Presses, due to having IP 53 protection class. At sliding models.

LPM Lineer 33 Scale Usage Area: Due to its articulated structure, also they can be used for angular motion measurement purpose, thanks to both side the articulated structure, they can measure the distance between two independent points. Mainly they are used in Pipe/ Sheet Bending Machines and Packaging Machine. At Sliding Model.

Order No : LPT x Length.mm Order No : LPH x Length.mm Order No : LPM x Length.mm

Measuring Length

From 30 mm up to 125 mm (Selection according to the measure)

From 100 mm up to 1500 mm (Selection according to the measure)

From 50 mm up to 600 mm (Selection according to the measure)

Linearity

± % 0.05

Resistance

5 - 10 KOhm

Working Temperature

- 20 / + 80 0C

Max. Speed

< 5 m/s

< 1.5 m/s

< 5 m/s

100.000.000 Cycle

Aluminium

Stainless Steel

28V DC Max.

4 Pole Connection

IP 65

IP 40 & IP 53

IP 54

Connection

Mechanic

Housing Size

33 x 33 mm

Mechanical Life Housing Material Shaft Material Supply Voltage Electrical Connection Protection Class

Position Metering Scale: They are produced compatible with international measurement standards, by selecting Special Prices for Higher Quantities.. top caliber/quality materials. Linearity controls are made punctiliously. These Scales are for reading lineer & rotary & Sayfa Page Bölüm Section sliding motions measurement controls. They are commonly used in all production machines and benches at machine Enjeksiyon Injection industry, except the selected products involved in our catalogue, different types and models are also available. Kalıp Mould

291

RESISTIVE LINEER POTENTIOMETERS OPTIC MEASUREMENT SCALE

Lineer (Rectilinear) Rotary

Digital Reader As per request

(Sliding Arm) Position Metering

SLPT Slim 18 Lineer Scale

Scales

Technical Specifications

Model

SLPC Slim 18 Lineer Scale

Usage Area: Thanks to its small casing structure, it provides mounting facility in narrow areas. They Usage Area: Thanks to its Top Sliding Structure, are preferred in many automation applications and it provides mounting opportunity up to long given output data as Potentiometric / mm. mainly, measurement length. They are given output data they are used in Plastic Injection Machines, as Potentiometric / mm. Mainly, they are used Textile Machines and Test Machines. At sliding in Marble Machines, Pipe/Sheet bending models. Machines, Textile Machines. At sliding models.

SLPS Slim 18 Lineer Scale Usage Area: Thanks to Spring Return Structure, it can be used in special applications. They are given output data as Potentiometric. Mainly, they are used in Plastic Injection Machines, Quality Control Machines and Textile Machines. At sliding machines.

Order No : SLPT x Length.mm Order No : SLPC x Length.mm Order No : SLPS x Length.mm

Measuring Length

From 10 mm up to 400 mm (Selection according to the measure)

From 10 mm up to 300 mm (Selection according to the measure)

From 10 mm up to 100 mm (Selection according to the measure)

Linearity

± % 0.05

Resistance

5 - 10 KOhm

Working Temperature

- 20 / + 80 0C

Max. Speed

< 5 m/s

50.000.000 Cycle

Aluminium

Stainless Steel

28V DC Max.

Cabled Standard 1 Metre

IP 53

Connection

Mechanic

Housing Size

18 x 18 mm

Mechanical Life Housing Material Shaft Material Supply Voltage Electrical Connection Protection Class

Special Prices for Higher Quantities.. Position Metering Scale: They are produced compatible with international measurement standards by selecting Page Section top caliber/quality materials. Linearity controls are made punctiliously. These Scales are for reading lineer & rotary & Injection sliding motions measurement controls. They are commonly used in all production machines and benches at machine Mould industry, except the selected products involved in our catalogue, different types and models are also available.

292

CONTACTLESS POSITION SENSORS / CORDED EXTENDER POTANTIOMETERS AND ENCODERS Digital Reader As per Request

Digital Reader As per Request

Lineer (Rectilinear) Rotary (Pivoting)

Digital Reader As per Request

Position Metering Scales

MST

CONTACTLESS POSITION SENSOR Usage Area: National Type Position

Usage Area: Corded Potentiometers are

given potentiometric output in 1800 mm Sensors work with Magnetostrictive Technical Specifications Principle. Due to measuring as contactless, measurement length, they are preferred

they long lived. They have high protection with its economic price and easy mounting class. They can be worked in water and opportunity in long measurement length. oil. Generally, they are used by inserting They are frequently used in Injection Rotary Type inside of piston. Sliding Type. Machines.

Model Measuring Length

Order No : MST x Length

DWE

DWP

CORDED POTENTIOMETER

Model

From 10 mm up to 2000 mm Measuring (Selection according to the measure) Length

CORDED ENCODER

Usage Area: Corded Encoders are preferred in industry in terms of their mounting facility in narrow areas. By means of steel cord wrapping around return spring roller, they are converted pals quantity producing as a result of turning of encoder connected into this mechanism into lineer distance.

Order No : DWP x Length

Model

Order No : DWP x Length

1800 mm

Resolution

From 500 mm to 3500 mm

Resolution

16 BIT

Linearity

± 0.1 mm

Outlet Type

A, B, Z, or A,A B,B Z,Z

Repeatability

< 0.05 mm

Resistance

5 -10 K

Channels

Pushpull - TTL HTL

Outlet

0... 10V , 10...0 V

Working Temp.

- 20 / + 80 0C

Max. Speed

2 m/sec

Supply Voltage

24V DC ± %10

Max. Speed

< 1.5 m/s

Supply Voltage

5V DC 8V - 24V DC 5V - 24V DC

Max. Speed

< 10 m/s

Mechanical Life

5.000.000

Working Temp.

- 20 / + 80 0C

Max. Current Consumption

50 mA

Housing Material

ABS / Aluminium and Stainless Steel

Housing Material

ABS / Aluminium and Stainless Steel

Max. Outlet Values

10.5V

Shaft Material

Protection Class

IP 50

Inverse Voltage Protection

Yes

Supply Voltage

28V DC max.

Cable

2.5 mt. Standard

Electrical Connection

4 Pinned Hydraulic Type

Protection Class

IP 54

Shaft Dia.

Protection Class

IP 66

Housing Size

81 x 81 x 86 mm

Housing Size

81 x 81 x 86 mm

Special Prices for Higher Quantities..

Position Metering Scale: They are produced compatible with international measurement standards by selecting top caliber/quality materials. Linearity controls are made punctiliously. These Scales are for reading lineer & rotary & sliding motions measurement controls. They are commonly used in all production machines and benches at machine industry, except the selected products involved in our catalogue, different types and models are also available.

Page

Bölüm Enjeksiyon Kalıp

293

Sayfa Section

293

Injection Mould

RESISTIVE LINEER POTENTIOMETERS

OPTIC MEASUREMENT SCALE

Lineer

Digital Reader As per Request

(Rectilinear) Rotary (Pivoting) Position Metering Scales

PRI 50 OPTIC 50 ENCODER

Usage Area: They are Economic sensors commonly used in industry and work with optical principle. The number of square wave given in a tour is called as PULSE. Various outlet types are available. Technical The product having 50 mm casing Specifications diameter, are produced in 6-8 mm shaft diameter a standard. As standard, is packaged with L flange and Plastic Coupling. Rotary Model.

Model

PRI 50 SH OPTIC 50 ENCODER (Semi Hole) Shaft

Usage Area: They work with circular principle. The number of square wave given in a tour is called as PULSE. They are selling according to number of PULSE. The product having 50 mm casing diameter, are produced in 6-8 mm shaft diameter a standard. They are used in Packaging Machines, Elevator Machines, Hydraulic Presses. Rotary Model.

PRI 58 OPTIC 58 ENCODER Usage Area: They are Economic sensors commonly used in industry and work with optical principle. The number of square wave given in a tour is called as PULSE. They are selling according to number of PULSE. Various outlet types are available. The product having 58 mm casing diameter, are produced in 6-8 mm shaft diameter a standard. Rotary Model.

Order No : PRI 50 x Pulse Order No :PRI 50 SH x Pulse Order No : PRI 58 x Pulse 100- 200- 300- 360- 400- 500 100- 200- 300- 360- 400- 500 100- 200- 300- 360- 400- 500 600- 720- 1000- 1024- 1800 600- 720- 1000- 1024- 1800 2000- 2048- 2500- 3600 2000- 2048- 2500- 3600 4000- 4096- 5000 4000- 4096- 5000 4000- 4096- 5000

600- 720- 1000- 1024- 1800 Resolution (Number of Pulse) 2000- 2048- 2500- 3600 Outlet Type Channels (Outlet Direction)

Pushpull - TTL - HTL A, B, Z, or A,A B,B Z,Z

4000 RPM 5V DC 8V - 24V DC 5V - 24V DC

Working Temperature

- 20 / + 80 0C

Cable

2.5 ( Standard ) 5 Cable - 8 Cable

Protection Class

IP 54

IP 50

Shaft/Hole Dia.

Ø 6 - Ø 8 mm

Ø 6 - Ø 8 - Ø 10 mm

Shaft Material

Stainless Steel

Housing Material

Aluminium

Housing Dia.

50 mm

58 mm

Max. Speed Supply Voltage

Special Prices for Higher Quantities..

Page

294

Section Injection Mould

RESISTIVE LINEER POTENTIOMETERS

OPTIC MEASUREMENT SCALE

Digital Reader As per Request

Lineer (Rectilinear) Rotary (Pivoting) Position Metering Scale

PRI 100 H OPTIC 100 ENCODER MRI 50 (Full Hole) Shaft OPTIC 50 ENCODER Usage Area : They are full hole shaft

products with 100 mm casing dimeter worked with optical principle. The product with 100 mm casing diameter, are produced in 25,28,32,38 mm hole Technical Specifications diameter as standard. With its hole shaft structure, they are ideal for use on rear of engine. They are used in Elevator Machines and many automation application. Rotary Model.

(Magnetic) Shaft

Usage Area : MRI 50 Serie Magnetic Encoders are produced in 50 mm casing diameter, 6-8 shaft diameter and 2-1024 pulse range as standard. Due to working with magnetic principle, their protection class is high. Rotary Model.

(Semi Hole) Shaft

Usage: They are semi hole shaft products having 58 mm casing diameter and work with optical principle. The products with 58 mm casing diameter are produced in 6-810 mm hole diameter as standard. With its hole shaft structure, they are ideal for use on rear of engine. They are used in elevator machines and Hydraulic Presses. Rotary Model.

Model

Order No : PRI 100 H x Pulse

Resolution (Number of Pulse)

1024 Pulse / Circuit

Outlet Type

Pushpull - TTL - HTL

Channels (Outlet Direction)

A, B, Z, or A,A B,B Z,Z 4000 RPM 5V DC 8V - 24V DC 5V - 24V DC

- 20 / + 80 0C

Max. Speed Supply Voltage Working Temperature

Order No : MRI 50 x Pulse

PRI 58 SH OPTIC 58 ENCODER

Order No : PRI 58 SH x Pulse

2-4-8-16-25-32-40-50-64-80 100-200-300-360-400-500 100-125-128-160-200-250 600-720-1000-1024-1800 254-400-500-512-1024 2000-2048-2500-3600-4000 Pushpull - TTL - HTL A, B, Z, or A,A B,B Z,Z 4000 RPM 5V DC 8V - 24V DC 5V - 24V DC

Cable

2.5 Meter ( Standard )

Protection Class

IP 50

Shaft/Hole Dia.

Ø 25 - 28 - 35 - 38 mm

Ø 4 - Ø 6- Ø 8- Ø 10 mm

Ø 6 - Ø 8 - Ø 10 mm

Shaft Material Housing Material

Stainless Steel

Aluminium

Housing Dia.

100 mm

50 mm

58 mm

Special Prices for Higher Quantities.. Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Sayfa Page

295 295

Valved

Serie: W 560

Order (Valved - Non Valved .d x L ) Connection Measure Ø Valved Non Valved W 560 - SG 06

6 mm 1/4"

W 560 - SG 10

10 mm 3/8" L

Small Size L d1 d2

4,5

Valved

L1 17

Coupling

As per request Unclamped Hose Ended Coupling

Non Valved Coupling

Valved System: Provides controlled water flow,

when coupling is removed, water flow is closed (Vaned) Non Valved System: With free water flow, when bush is removed, circuit is open (Valveless).

AUTOMATIC, FAST CLUTCH, STANDARD SIZE EURO TYPE Order (Valved - Non Valved .d x L ) Connection Measure Ø Valved Non Valved W 590 - HGV 10

W 590 - HG 10

10 mm 3/8"

W 590 - HGV 13

W 590 - HG 13

13 mm 1/2"

EURO TYPE

As per request Unclamped Hose Ended Coupling

Standard Size L d1 d2 L1

60 d2

Serie : W 590 Ø

23 Valved

d d1

8 10

Coupling

Non Valved Coupling

AUTOMATIC,FAST CLUTCH COUPLING, 450 ANGLE Order (Valved - Non Valved .d x L ) Connection Measure Ø Valved Non Valved W 590 -HGV 1045

W 590 - HG 1045

10 mm 3/8"

W 590 -HGV 1345

W 590 - HG 1345

13 mm 1/2"

Standard Size L d1 d2 L1

Serie : W 590

EURO TYPE

23 Valved

8 10

Coupling

Ø İAs per request Unclamped Hose Ended Coupling

Non Valved

d d1

Effect of Cooling Water on Mould: Injection Errors Solutions Cooling period Drawing - Distortion-Sinking Fragibility-Crackage - Shrinkage Should be increased and Visible Ejector Traces Mould Water Tension Whitening Runner System Should be controlled Automatic Sockets Automatic sockets and bushes compatible with mould cooling systema and injection machines, are commonly used in plastic moulds cooling systems and metal injection moulds. To use in water - air and oil flowings, different types are available and when desired mounting/ demounting facilities on mould, automatic coupling sockets should be used . They can be worked up to 10 bar pressures and approximate 100ºC . For accurate and efficient cooling in mould cooling system not living any problem, to choose coupling /socket system to be most suitable to the temperature of your mould system and mounting area in the correct way is important, wide options related to this system are presented at following pages.

W 560 - HGV 06 W 560 - HGV 10

features of moulded material, material shape, mould structure and heat quantity to be transferred should be known. In cooling with water, cooling water channels should not be very close to mould surface. Otherwise, temperature changes can be caused thermal shocks on mould surface. Water channels should not be so far from moulded surface. Because, in this case, heat transfer should not be provided sufficiently. Water Channels can be created far away 2 / 3 times of mould plate channel diameter. In arranging channels and creating of inlet and outlets, the balance providing circulation of water in certain pressure and speed. Water should be circulated in channels the way that transfering maximum heat. Water discharge should be provided to keep mould in certain temperature. There should not be any difference between inlet and outlet temperatures of cooling water. Cooling water, generally should be entered into mould as 20-250ºC and should be came out as 50 -55º.

Non Valved Coupling

Valved System: Provides controlled water flow, when coupling is removed, water flow is closed (Vaned) Non Valved System: With free water flow, when bush is removed, circuit is open (Valveless).

AUTOMATIC, FAST CLUTCH, SMALL SIZE EURO TYPE

Injection Mould COOLING SYSTEMS Cooling of Mould : For providing suitable cooling,

Coupling

As per request Unclamped Hose Ended Coupling

Coupling

AUTOMATIC,FAST CLUTCH COUPLING, 900 ANGLE

Order (Valved - Non Valved .d x L ) Connection Standard Size Measure Ø d Valved Non Valved L d1 d2 L1 8 W 590 - HGV 1090 W 590 - HG 1090 10 mm 3/8" 13 51 23 17 9 W 590 - HGV 1390 W 590 - HG 1390 13 mm 1/2"

Serie : W 590

Male Gear Type Bush is also procurement be altered

Valved

Coupling

L1 SW

d d1

Ø M

Non Valved Coupling

AUTOMATIC,FAST CLUTCH COUPLING, MALE GEAR EURO TYPE

Page

296

Section Injection Mould

Order (Valved - Non Valved .d x L ) Connection Standard Size Measure M d Valved Non Valved L d1 L1 SW W 590 - EGV 13 W 590 - EG 13 G 1/4" 13 52 23 11 21 W 590 - EGV 21 W 590 - EG 21 G 1/2" Except Automatic Fast Clutch Coupling Standard Hose Connected ( Clamped ) Types, also Unclamped / Fast Flex Hose Connected Automatic Fast Connected Coupling Types are available.

As per Request Dimensional

900 Coupling- Unclamped Bridge with Flex Hose

Order No (d x L) W590 - KG 125

10 13 Flex Hose

125

W590 - KG 250

W590 - KG 500

250

500

Automatic Fast Clutch BUSH / END Hose Input EURO TYPE W590HR L

Automatic Fast Clutch BUSH / End EURO TYPE Order No : (d x L) ( Thread ) D W560 ER M10 M10 x 1 W560 ER 10 G1x8 W560 ER 13 G 1/4"

9 9

41 45

24 28

13 13

Automatic Fast Clutch BUSH / END Capped Internal Thread EURO TYPE Serie : ORD

13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5

14 14 14 14 17 14 14 17

W690 ER M24 W690 ER 21 W690 ER 26

M24x1.5 G 1/2" G 3/4"

13 13 13

51 47 51

16 12 16

19 19 19

27 22 27

24 27 24 33

10 13 10 13

11 14 11 14

Automatic Fast Clutch BUSH / END 90 ORTHOGONAL EURO TYPE Order No (d x L) ( Thread ) D d W590 ER 13-90 R 1/4" W590 ER 14-90 M14 x 1.5 9 W590 ER 17-90 G 3/8"

d1 SW

15 15 17

Serie :

D SW

Automatic Fast Clutch THREADED BATCH BUSH EURO TYPE Order No (d x L) ( Thread ) D

M10 x 1 T 060 BLM14100 M14 x 1.5 T 060 BL 10300 G 1/4"

T 060 BLM10100

SW 14

100

17 14

* Our production is available as per request. Order No : (d x L) ( Thread ) D d ORE M10.060 ORE M10.080 ORE M10.100 ORE M10.120 ORE M10.150 T090 BU150 (Non Thread) ORE M12.060 ORE M12.080 ORE M12.100 ORE M12.120 ORE M12.150 T090 BU300 (Non Thread) ORE 1/8.060 ORE 1/8.080 ORE 1/8.100 ORE 1/8.120 ORE 1/8.150 T090 BU450 (Non Thread) ORE 1/4.060 ORE 1/4.080 ORE 1/4.100 ORE 1/4.120 ORE 1/4.150 T090 BU500 (Non Thread)

Standard Type

11 11 14

9 9 9 9 9 7 9 9

M10 x 1.5

FLAT Ø 14

M12 x 1.75

FLAT Ø 14

G 1/8"

FLAT Ø 14

G 1/4"

FLAT Ø 14

Standard Type

L2 SW

9 9 9

Order No : (d x L) ( Thread) D ORD M10 M10 x 1.5 ORD M12 M12 x 1.75 ORD 1/8 G 1/8" ORD 1/4 G 1/4"

d1 SW

31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31

7 7 9

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

24 24 26

Automatic Fast Clutch BUSH / End Large Sizes EURO TYPE

6 6 6

M10 x 1 M10 x 1.5 M12 x 1.75 M14 x 1.5 M16 x 1.5 G 1/8" G 1/4" G 3/8"

Standard Type

Order No : (d x L) ( Thread ) D W590 FR 10 10 - 3/8" W590 FR 13 13 - 1/2"

W590 ER M10 ORE M10 ORE M12 W590 ER M14 W590 ER M16 ORE 1/8 ORE 1/4 W590 ER 17

Small Type

Automatic Fast Clutch DOUBLE BRIDGE EURO TYPE W590KG

Standard Size

Standard Type

d d1

Unclamped / Flex Hose

Large Type

L d3

Material : Brass / Yellow Material 0

Max. Temperature: 100 C

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

L 60 80 100 120 150 150 60 80 100 120 150 300 60 80 100 120 150 450 60 80 100 120 150 500

d1 SW

11.5 13

12.5 13

Sayfa Page

297 297

* Bush, is supplied separately.

* Flat Type - Large Size

It is suitable for Large Injection Moulds.

Coupling

Non Valved

Coupling

d d1

Valved

Valved System : Provides controlled water flow, when coupling is removed, water flow is closed (Vaned). Non Valved System : With free water flow, when bush is removed, circuit is open (Valveless).

Serie : W 690

Automatic Fast Clutch, HOSE INPUT COUPLING, Large Size EURO TYPE Order ( Valved - Non Valved d x L ) Valved Non Valved W 690 - HGV 19

W 690 - HG 19

Connection Measure D 19 mm 3/4"

Standard Size L d1 d2

Note: For bush/ end interts, refer to Euro Type Automatic Fast Clutch at the next page... * Bush, is supplied separately.

* Closed Female Toothed Large Size Type It is suitable for large injection moulds.

Valved

Coupling

Non Valved

Coupling

d1 d

Automatic Fast Clutch, FEMALE COUPLING, Large Size Casing EURO TYPE Order ( Valved - Non Valved d x L ) Valved Non Valved W 690 - DGV 21 W 690 - DG 21 W 690 - DGV 24 W 690 - DG 24 W 690 - DGV 26 W 690 - DG 26

Connection Measure Ø G 1/2" M24 x 1.5 G 1/4"

In cases requiring continous and high pressure resistance, also desired mounting and demounting facility on mould, this system bushes can be used. The can be worked up to 13 Bar pressure and approximate 1500C They are free flow. Mounting : For fast detection BLUE (Cold Circuit ) and RED (Hot Circuit), female bush can be selected as per request. At mounting to mould, it is screwed to the threaded section water runner plate with alien key in deep section of bush.

900 Angle Female Coupling

21 SW

Order D L SW W600 ER10 R 1/8" 31 6 W600 ER13 R 1/4" 8 W600 ER17 R 3/8" 8 33 6 W600 M10 M10 x1.5 8 W600 M14 M14 x1.5 * In order, pls. specify colour as per request

Page

298

Section Injection Mould

Order D W600 10.100 W600 10.150 R 1/8" W600 10.200 W600 10.250 W600 13.100 W600 13.150 R 1/4" W600 13.200 W600 13.250

100 150 200 250 100 150 200 250

Alien

8 Alien

N rros ever ion e co

In free flow (non valved) system, the valve can be added at rear side as per request. Bush connections are at side section.

90 Angular Female Coupling W600 DG L

BSP 1/4"

48.5

BSP 3/8"

NPT 1/4"

Order

Flat Type Automatic Coupling

SW 30 30 30

Thread - Colour Definition Long Size Bush

21 21

17.5

In fast / practical (one-handed) usages, hot oil connections, cold, hot water inlet and outlets, plastic moulds. Especially : in metal injection zamak casting and aluminium injection cooling system, powerful and fast used.

AUTOMATIC, FAST CLUTCH COLOURED BUSH / END

Standard Size L1 d1 14 31 16 31 16 31

mak

Siz

Material: Brass / Yellow Nickel Plated

Threaded Type Standard Size

L 70 72 72

AUTOMATIC, FAST CLUTCH COLOURED BUSHED LARGE / POWERFUL TYPE COUPLINGS

Standard Size

g Lon

d 19 19 19

NPT 3/8"

Flat Type Coupling W600 HG Order

Connection Ø

W600.8 HG06 6 mm -1/4" W600.8 HG08 8 mm -5/16" W600.8 HG10 10 mm -3/8" W600.8 HG12 12 mm -15/32" W600.8 HG13 13 mm -1/2" DUAL BRIDGE SYSTEM W600 UG

L1 Inter. Hose Flexible Unclamped

Order W600 UG 125 W600 UG 250 W600 UG 500

125 250 500

101 226 425

Valved System : Provides controlled water flow, Non Valved when coupling is removed, water flow is closed (Vaned). Non Valved System : With free water flow, when bush is removed, circuit is open (Valveless).

W 506 - SG 06

6 mm 1/4"

W 506 - SG 10

10 mm 3/8" L

W 509

d 9

L1 D

4,5 6

L1 27

Valved

Coupling

Non Valved

Coupling

As per request, unclamped Hose Inlet Coupling

Serie : W 506

Small Size L d1 d2

Valved System : Provides controlled water flow, when coupling is removed, water flow is closed (Vaned). Non Valved System : With free water flow, when bush is removed, circuit is open (Valveless).

Standard Size d L d1 d2 L1

Connection Measure D

W 509 - HGV 10

W 509 - HG 10

10 mm 3/8"

W 509 - HGV 13

W 509 - HG 13

13 mm 1/2"

USA TYPE

Serie : W 509 As per request, unclamped Hose Inlet Coupling

68 d2

8 10

Valved

Coupling

Non Valved

Coupling

d d1

Connection Measure D

W 509 -HGV 1045

W 509 - HG 1045

10 mm 3/8"

W 509 -HGV 1345

W 509 - HG 1345

13 mm 1/2"

L1 d1 SW

506 ER08 G 1/4"

10 x 1

506 ER M10

Standard Size Bush

Model : USA

Order

8 10

Coupling

Valved

d d1

Non Valved

Coupling

AUTOMATIC,FAST CLUTCH COUPLING, 900ANGULAR

Standard Size Connection Measure D d L d1 d2 L1 8 W 509 - HGV 1090 W 509 - HG 1090 10 mm 3/8" 13 39 23 29 10 W 509 - HGV 1390 W 509 - HG 1390 13 mm 1/2" Order (Valved - Non Valved .d x L ) Valved Non Valved

Serie : W 509 L

Valved

Coupling

d d1

Ø D

Non Valved

Coupling

509 ER13 G 1/4"

509 ER17 G 3/8" 13 509 ER21 G 1/2" 15

W 509 - EGV 13

W 509 - EG 13

G 1/4"

W 509 - EGV 21

W 509 - EG 21

G 1/2"

19 21

59 ER M14 14 x1.5 13

D SW Long Size Bush

Order

L1 d1 SW

509 EUR09

x (Length) L

G 1/8" 6

80 100

13 13

150 60 80

509 EUR13

x (Length) L

G 1/4" 8 100 13 13 16 150 200 60

509 EUR17

Standard Size d L d1 L1 SW

L1 d1 SW

AUTOMATIC, FAST CLUTCH COUPLING, MALE THREAD USA TYPE Connection Measure D

509 ER09 G 1/8"

Model : USA

Order (Valved - Non Valved .d x L ) Valved Non Valved

Standard Size d L d1 d2 L1

Serie : W 509

Male type coupling will be supplied separately

Order (Valved - Non Valved .d x L ) Valved Non Valved

USA TYPE

Order

59 ER M10 10 x 1

AUTOMATIC,FAST CLUTCH COUPLING, 450 ANGULAR

As per request, unclamped Hose Inlet Coupling

Small Size Bush

506 ER06 G 1/8"

D L1

Automatic Fast Clutch BUSH / END Model : USA

AUTOMATIC, FAST CLUTCH COUPLING, STANDARD SIZE USA TYPE Order (Valved - Non Valved .d x L ) Valved Non Valved

W 506 - HGV 06 W 506 - HGV 10

USA (DME)

Coupling

Connection Measure D

Model :

Standard Size

AUTOMATIC, FAST CLUTCH COUPLING, SMALL SIZE USA TYPE Order (Valved - Non Valved .d x L ) Valved Non Valved

d1 d

Coupling

Valved

As per request, unclamped Hose Inlet Coupling

x (Length) L

G 3/8" 9 100 13 13 19 150 200

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Sayfa Page

299 299

DSN 02 1/8" 22

DSN 03 1/4" 26

DSN 04 3/8" 26

DSN 05 1/2" 30

DHR 01 1/8" 08

DHR 02 1/4" 09

DHR 03 1/4" 13

DHR 04 3/8" 13

DHR 05 1/2" 16

INTERMEDIATE JOINT- DOUBLE NIPPLE Double Side Threaded, Complementary Coupling

Order

ONE ONE ONE ONE ONE ONE ONE

01 02 03 04 05 06 07

ONE

D-d

1/8"-1/8"

21 23 23 23 29 23 29

1/8"-1/4" 1/4"-1/4" 1/4"-3/8" 1/4"-1/2" 3/8"-3/8" 3/8"-1/2"

REDUCTION CONVERTOR

Double Side / Internal and External Threaded Different Order D-d Type DEN 01 1/8"- M5 DEN 02 1/4"- M5 DEN 03 1/4"-1/8" DEN 04 3/8"-1/8" DEN 05 3/8"-1/4" DEN 06 1/2"-1/4" DEN 07 1/2"-3/8"

DEN L 11 11 11 13 14 18 18

HOSE ATTACHING COUPLING

Segmented Hoses, Attachment Kit HKE L Single Order D

HKE

Triple

HKT

Page

300

HKE HKE HKE HKE HKE HKE HKE

01 02 03 04 05 06 07

04 mm 06 mm 08 mm 09 mm 13 mm 16 mm 19 mm

50 50 50 50 60 60 60

D L1 Order

HRE 08 M8 x 1.25 HRE 10 M10 x 1.5 HRE 12 M12 x 1.75 HRE 14 M14 x 2 HRE 16 M16 x 2 HRE 1/8 G 1/8" HRE 1/4 G 1/4" Material: Hard Plastic

STANDARD TYPE

6 6 7 8 9 6 8

L1 d1 SW

36 9 12 36 9 12 36 9 12 40 9 12 40 9 14 36 10 12 36 10 12

13 13 13 14 16 13 14

L1 D

Order ARU ARU ARU ARU ARU ARU ARU ARU

18060 18080 18100 18150 14060 14080 14100 14150

L d

L L1 L2 d1

60 80 G 1/8" 10 10 14 14 G 1/8" 100 150 60 80 G 1/4" 13 10 15 16 G 1/4" 100 150

HARD PLASTIC

D d L L1 d1 SW HRP 10 M10 x 1.5 6 36 9 12 13 HRP 12 M12 x 1.75 7 36 9 12 13 Unclamped End, Threaded Coupling Order

D L1

LONG SIZES

Material: Brass/Yellow

Order HRU HRU HRU HRU HRU HRU HRU HRU HRU HRU HRU HRU HRU HRU HRU

M08060 M08080 M08100 M08120 M08150 M10060 M10080 M10100 M10120 M10150 M12060 M12080 M12100 M12120 M12150

M10

M12

x 1.25

x 1.5

x 1.75

HRU M1/8060 HRU M1/8080 HRU M1/8100 HRU M1/8120

G 1/8"

HRU M1/8150 HRU M1/4060 HRU M1/4080 HRU M1/4100

Section Injection Mould

Material: Brass/Yellow

d1 D

Order

FEMALE -THREADED SCREWED, COUPLING Hose Inlet Connected, Female Coupling DHR

Hose Inlet, Mould COUPLING/END Distance Extender (Long Size) COUPLING Threaded Type, For Injection MouldsHRE Similar to Dual Side, Threaded ExtenderARU

HRU M1/4120 HRU M1/4150

G 1/4"

D L1

L L1 d1 SW 60 80 100 120 150 60 80 100 120 150 60 80 100 120 150 60 80 100 120 150 60 80 100 120 150

THR

Unclamped Connection with Flexible Hose SW

It is used with special (flex) hose.

Material: Brass/ Yellow - Nickel Plated 9

12 13

Order THR THR THR THR THR

06 10 09 13 17

L L1 d1 SW

4 6 G 1/8" 43 8 14 5.5 10 6 9 G 1/4" 46 11 17 8 13 G 3/8" 9 52 12 13 19

Fast Connected End, COUPLING HR

Normal Hose, Fast Connected, Clamped Type

d d1

DSN 01 M5 12

Order

Economic Prices

DSN

d d1

INNER CONNECTOR, SLEEVE Inter Kit in Connection System

10 12 13 Material: Brass/ Yellow - Nickel Plated

Order

10 12 14

HR HR HR HR HR

08 09 13 17 16

G G G G G

1/8" 1/4" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2"

d 5.5 6 8 9 11

L L1 d1 SW 43 46 51 52 54

8 11 11 12 14

08 9 13 13 16

14 17 17 17 23

SKT

L 38

KKV 10 G 3/8"

KKV 16 G 1/4"

1:16

Manuel Controlled Valve WATER RUNNER PLUG, CONICAL TYPE * Button Type Mini Valve Yellow Brass Material/ Blind Plug: * 1/4" Male Threaded Regula- It is to plug on /to close unwanted water holes in tor Order No : 18652 injection moulds. Mounting : It is inserted according to the product diameter by threading.

WATER RUNNER PLUG, Yellow Material Order

G 1/8" 9.4

SKT 14

G 1/4" 12.8 12.5 7

SKT 38

G 3/8" 15.9 14.1 8

SKT 12

G 1/2" 20.5 17.8 10

CKT

Order Code: : GL.10321 WINKEL Teflon Reinforced

Bush Sealing Chemical

Order Code : 678511F50

404 Liquid Washer: 3000 Heat Resistance Sealing, Sealing Everywhere Order Code : SK404 (Red) Order Code : SM404 (Blue)

HOSE CLAMPS Capacity

HK 1016 10 x 16 HK 1319 13 x 19 HK 1623 16 x 23 HK 1825 18 x 25 HK 2032 20 x 32 HK 3251 32 x 51 Stainless / Inox Material Extra Quality Clamp Capacity : 12 x 20 Order No : HKI 1220

INDUSTRIAL TYPE LIQUID HOSES

In Threaded Connections Teflon Band 10 mt. x 13 mm

1:16

In/Out Ø

HS06 1/4" d:4 x d1:6 HS08 5/16" d:5 x d1:8

Stainless Steel / Conical Type

It is to plug on / to close unwanted water holes in injection moulds. Mounting: It is inserted according to the product diameter by threading.

Order

CKT 18

G 1/8" 9.4

CKT 14

G 1/4" 12.8 12.5 7

11.2 5

Code : SW

d L

WATER RUNNER PLUG, FLAT TYPE FLEXIBLE "Cooling Liquid" HOSE

Yellow Brass Material/ Blind Plug

WATER PUNNER PLUG, Yellow Material Order

G 1/8" 9.4

SDT 14

G 1/4" 12.8 12.5 7

HS16 5/8" d:10 x 16

SDT 38

G 3/8" 15.9 14.1 8

HS19 3/4" d:13 x 19

SDT 12

G 1/2" 20.5 17.8 10

Hard Plastic (Derlin) Flexible Liquid Transfer System Even at narrow tolerance high pressures, it guarantees the directional stability. Definite resistance to all chemicals. Combine System with modular passing system as per request. Compatible with bench. 1/4"Operation Pressure: 6 Bar Flow Rate 15 lt./min. 3/8" Operation Pressure: 6 Bar Flow Rate 25 lt./min.

Order

11.2 5 3/8"-320 mm

ALIEN

PSE.14 1/4"-280 mm

HS13 1/2" 10 x 12.5

Order D L Mounting Dia GCP 06 Ø6 10 6.1 mm GCP 08 Ø8 10 8.1 mm GCP 10 Ø 10 11 10.1 mm GCP 12 Ø 12 12 12.1 mm GCP 14 Ø 14 14 14.1 mm GCP 16 Ø 16 14 16.1 mm GCP 20 Ø 20 14 20.1 mm * With Economical Price At Our Shelf Stocks

SDT

SDT 18

HS10 3/8" d:8 x 10

Mounting Information : The channel diameter of water runners should be at least 01 mm greater than O-Ring plug. Any process (threading etc.) on channel mounting and any mechanical process on unit should not be done. O-Ring plug is never rusting, wall thickness of diameter on unit can be adjusted via O-Ring. The fixing on water runner can be done on holes from end to end or at any point. 0 Working Temperature Range : Between 10 and 250 C Pressure Capacity : Ø 6 - 8 mm = 16 Kg./ cm2 Ø 10-12 mm = 18 Kg./cm2 Ø 14-16mm = 25 Kg./cm2

WATER RUNNER PLUG, CONICAL TYPE WATER RUNNERS O-RING PLUG

It is to plug on /to close unwanted water holes in injection moulds. Polyamide: For Polyurethane water hoses in automatic systems Mounting : It is inserted according to the product diameter by threading.

Order

It is adjusted fixing plug in order to use canceling of unwanted holes in water runner system of injection moulds or to direct flow motions of cooling water.

11.2 5

Code :

Liquid TEFLON and BAND - LIGUID WASHER

Water Runners, Plugging and Routing

SKT 18

SEALING CHEMICALS

Order

WATER RUNNERS O-RING PLUG

ALIEN

* 368 Piece Serie * 30 Different Size NBR Rubber resistance to oil and acids. 60 - 90 Hardness. Economic and you should be kept at your hand. Content : Diameter from 3 mm up to 30 mm. Thickness 2-2.5-3-4

ALIEN

Pls. Packaged O-RING SET

GCP

Press Screw

O-Ring

Order

KKV 06 G 1/4"

Code :

Spring Ring

KKV

As per Request, Color Selection Mini Ball Valve

SMALL BALL VALVE

PSE.18 Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Dia. 1/4" 3/8"

Length 280 mm 320 mm

Sayfa Page

301 301

AUTOMATIC FAST CLUTCH

HOSE FASTENERS

Metal Nut Proportional Nipple 0606 0808 1010 1212 1414 1616

6 ~ 4 mm 8 ~ 6 mm 10 ~ 8 mm 12 ~ 9 mm 10 ~ 14 mm 12 ~ 16 mm

Order

Non Corrosive

Max. Heat : 1000

S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2

M2 M2 M2 M2 M2

Max. Heat: 1000

Metal, Nut Elbow Socket Male Threaded Non Corrosive Yellow Casting Nickel Plated Max. Heat:1000

1806 1406 1808 1408 1410

1/8" 6 ~ 4 1/4" 6 ~ 4 1/8" 8 ~ 6 1/4" 8 ~ 6 1/4" 10 ~ 8

1/8" 6 ~ 4 1/4" 6 ~ 4 1/8" 8 ~ 6 1/4" 8 ~ 6 3/8" 8 ~ 6 1/4" 10 ~ 8 3/8" 10 ~ 8 1/2" 10 ~ 8

Yellow Casting Nickel Plated

M4 M4 M4 M4 M4

1806 1406 1408 1410 1412

Order

Hose

S3 0606 6 ~ 4 S30808 8 ~ 6 S3 1010 10 ~ 8 S3 1212 12 ~ 9

Plastic Automatic Clutch Socket

M6 1/8" 1/8" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4"

Plastic Automatic NIPPLE

Order

P2 P2 P2 P2 P2

0404 0606 0808 1010 1212

Page

302

Hose

4 mm 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm

Material: Polyester Max. Heat : 600

8 mm 4 mm 6 mm 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm

0404 0606 0808 1010 1212

Material: Polyester Max. Heat : 600

Automatic Plastic Reduction Order

P8 P8 P8 P8

0604 0806 1008 1210

Hose

4~6 8~6 10 ~ 8 12 ~ 10

Hose

M5 444 4/4/4/4/4 M5 555 5/5/5/5/5 M5 666 6/6/6/6/6 M5 888 8/8/8/8/8 M5 1010 10/10/10/10 M5 1212 12/12/12/12

Material: Polyester

Automatic Plastic 3 Input "T" Order

P3 P3 P3 Max. P3 Heat : P3 600 P3

4 mm 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm

Material: Polyester

0404 0606 0808 1010 1212 1616

Hose 4 mm 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 16 mm

Automatic Plastic 3 Inlet Reducer Order

Hose 0404 4 mm 0606 6 mm 0808 8 mm 1010 10 mm 1212 12 mm 1616 16 mm

Material: Polyester

6 mm 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm

Material: Polyester

Order P5 P5 P5 P5 P5 P5

1/8" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4"

Order

4 mm 4 mm 6 mm 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 10 mm

Automatic Plastic Elbow

Material: Polyester Max. Heat : 800 Order Tooth Hose

P1 M608 P1 1804 P1 1806 P1 1406 P1 1408 P1 1410 P1 1412

M3 M3 M3 M3 M3

1806 1406 1408 1410 1412

Plastic Quintet Manifold

Yellow Casting Nickel Plated Order Hose Non Corrosive

Max. Heat: 1000

P4 P4 P4 P4 P4

Metal Automatic "T" Socket

Yellow Casting Nickel Plated Order

Order Tooth Hose

1/8" 6 mm 1/4" 6 mm 1/4" 8 mm 1/4" 10 mm 1/4" 12 mm

M6 1/8" 1/8" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4" 3/8"

1/8" 6 1/4" 6 1/4" 8 1/4" 10 3/8" 10 1/4" 12

Material: Polyester

Tooth Hose

M1 M604 M1 1804 M1 1806 M1 1406 M1 1408 M1 1410 Yellow Casting M1 1412 Nickel Plated M1 3810

1806 1406 1408 1410 3810 1412

Plastic, Threaded Rotary Elbow

Metal, Automatic Coupling

Metal Nut "T" Socket

Non Corrosive

4 mm 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm

Order Tooth Hose

Metal, Nut Socket 1806 1406 1808 1408 1308 1410 3810 1210

0404 0606 0808 1010 1212

Max. Heat: 1000

Order Tooth Hose S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1

Order Tooth Ă&#x2DC; P6 P6 P6 Max. P6 Heat : P6 600 P6

Hose

Metal Automatic Rotary Elbow

Order Tooth Hose S4 S4 S4 S4 S4

Plastic, Central Leg - Threaded "TE"

Yellow Casting /Nickel Plated

Ă&#x2DC; Hose

Max. Heat : 600

Order

FITTING GROUP

Metal Automatic Nipple Socket

Max. Heat : 600

P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1

Hose 668 6-6-8 886 8-8-6 108 8-8-10 102 10-10-8 212 10-10-12 210 12-12-10

Plastic Dual " Y " Order

P1 P1 P1 P1 P1

Hose

0404 4 / 4 ~ 4 0604 6 / 6 ~ 6 0808 8 / 8 ~ 8 1010 10 /10~10 1010 12 /12~12

Section Automatic Clutch Sockets : They are essential elements of pneumatic and hydraulic systems in machine Injection production. Nowadays in Mould Industry : This product is commonly used in connections of cooling systems in Mould injection mould outer group. They are used at Metal Products, Metal Injection, Plastic Products and Plastic Moulds.

86 Ø 5.5

17 26 70

They are produced in order to clear up disarrangement in inlet and outlet water runner systems at injection moulds cooling systems. Material: Anodic Painted Aluminium Distribution Collector 1/4" Serie : DK 14

DK 80.100

SKID PLATE

Order N. of Socket Valve Leng. L1 No Socket ThreadD ThreadV L

Order No

DK 1404 4 Pcs.

DK 1412 12 Pcs.

DK 275

Inlet

1/2"

1" Outlet

DK 1206 6 Pcs. DK 1208 8 Pcs.

DK 1212 12 Pcs.

15 3 18 6 15 3 22 8 18 4 24 10 20 5 32 12 G 1" 39 21 5 17 Order: KVFM 13 G 1/4" KVFM 21 G 1/2" Ball KVFM 26 G 3/4" Valve KVFM 33 G 1"

With distribution collector, undesired miscibility on machine and mould can be avoided.

200 235 305

375 445

1/4" 3/8" 1/2" 3/4"

DK 1210 10 Pcs.

165

L1 V

330

(3/4"-1")

210 270

390

DK 1205 5 Pcs.

Washer SW

G G G G

PPD 13 PPD 17 PPD 21 PPD 26 PPD 33

180

Order N. of Socket Valve Leng. L1 No Socket ThreadD ThreadV L

Order

150

Distribution Collector 1/2" Serie : DK 12

Ø d1

Ød

DK 1410 10 Pcs.

DK 1204 4 Pcs.

It is used as blind plug for closing unwanted holes.

Outlet

DK 1408 8 Pcs.

CAPPED PLUG

DK 1406 6 Pcs.

CONNECTING CLAMP

Inlet

1/4"

DK 1405 5 Pcs.

76 275

Water Runner Drills

Ø6.5

Distribution of Injection Mould Cooling Water, Inlet and Outlet Regulation System

(3/4"-1")

It is a long chip channel drill bit having great helix angle than normal. Especially, "10 XD" Perforation Process is provided on the deep surfaces. Due to its special helix structure, it works comfortably and does not squash into the middle strong steel and aluminium materials by carrying chip outside during drilling.

DISTRIBUTION COLLECTORS DK

100

Very Long Drill Bit GT 100 Type

Ø9

WATER RUNNER DRILLS

30 17

Mounting Example

At order: Pls. specify desired colour. As per request, Special Distribution collector production is available.

Ø61

For Mounting Elements: D 1- Pls. select thread measurement (1/4" - 1/2" ) of automatic fast connected coupling (Valved Type) and Male Threaded (W 590) to be used on distribution collectors and specify quantity. 2- Pls. specify type and diameter for main valve ( V ). (3/4" or 1") or type as per request. 3- Specify plug for tompion across valve (TK). 4- Select model for distribution connector connection. 5- As per request, hose diameter and lengths can be specified and also order can be completed with sealing products.

Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Sayfa Page

303 303

HEAT TRANSFER PIPE CIRCULATION REGULATOR

ESR MANUAL PRESSURE TEST PUMP

It is used as flow indicator of mould cooling water in injection systems. It is designed to control circulation flow and also to repeat settings regularly. Measurement scale of transparent tubes is monitored at desired level, accurate /safe flow is supplied with monitoring the deviation Position and On-Off buttons. Circulation regulators are domestic production and spare parts are available. Inlet-Outlet distribution couplings of transparent tubes can be adjusted with Anodized/ Light Aluminium Casing and controlled system has been created with buttons. 3/8"

Code : Injection Mould Cooling System 7 Bar: Water Runner Flow Testing Device SSY Testing System with Manual Pressure Pump:

Complete the mounting of tie bar piston with screw and screwdriver involved in testing device that you purchased. Fill testing hose (2) with water (Air inside of hose should be drainaged.) Close valve / button(1) on the piston, connect testing hose mould runner system (Ensure that system is closed completely). Fill the tank with water and run pump by pushing. Keep valve (1) button open, continue to pumping, when manometer pressures is reached to desired level, close valve numbered 1. No If the pressure does not fall, test is positive. If the pressures falls, there is a leak in the test tube.

Closed Circuit (Compressed Gas) Copper Pipe

Deep Male Core Cooling in Injection Mould: The cooling system is formed by rising heat to the upper points via compressed gas in pipe expeditiously, in Mounting at least 70% of conductor pipe remains inside the core, 30% of mould should remain in mould water runner. Advantages of System : It minimizes the number of defective final products during stamping resulting from shrinkage or cold deformation. Due to that, fast control of temperature is ensured, very high product precision is obtained. Thus, pore formation inside the product /object is avoided. During the injection, it ensures obtaining products in right colours. By ensuring to extend mould life more, it drags main costs down. Its application and mounting are very easy.

D L

1 X

X X

40 55 A 4 Circulation Regulators ( Flow Indicators ) : As per request they are supplied as group of 4-6-8-10-12'. Flow Rate : 0-18 Ipm A : Control Valve 1- On-Off Valve/Button of System Testing Hose Inlet - Outlet : R 3/8 B : Water Outlet 2- Resistant to Pressure Manometer / Pressure 0 B Max. Heat : 95 C C : Flow Manifold 3- Indicator A C D : Float 4- Mould Water Runner Circuit H E : Calibrated X- As per Request, Mini Ball Valve can be Added. D Transparent Type Order Working Flow G : Receiver Section No Pressure Rate H : Mould Distribution E 25 ml / s. SSY.6 6.3 Mpa I : Cut-off I G Valve M L : Supply L Manifold M : Water Inlet

Order No ESR. ESR. ESR. ESR. ESR.

04 06 08 10 12

N. of Tubes

Outlet Cycle

Size A

4' 6' 8' 10 ' 12 '

Bush/ End R:1/4"

240 360 480 600

10 mm Hose

720

It is also used at other liquids or oiling systems.

304

Section Injection Mould

Ø 3

Ø 4

L 40 60 80 100 120 150 40 60 80 100 120 150 185 200 Order :

Ø 5

Ø 6

60 80 100 120 150 200 60 80 100 120 150 185 200 250

Winkel Mix Waser: : It is a model used against water. Especially, it can be applied for pipe and metal cracks.

Nr. 800598 X 2D

Ø 10

REPAIR PASTE

0.05

CONSANTRATE DESCALER LIQUID Order No : Art.

Ø 8

L 80 100 120 150 185 200 250 100 120 150 185 200 220 250 300

Sealant Winkel Mix

GH D x L

Sealant

Specifications : In order to avoid choking due to intense lime in machines and moulds running with water at places that urban water and well water are quite limy, 1 kg. descaler is used in 10 Kg. water (according to the lime status). It does not harm the system in moulds and machines (Plastic/Copper). Usage Area : It is used

Page

Inlet

3/8"

Outlet

Order No : 200017 / 56 gr.

Mounting : * Mounting area of core slot of mould should be at least 0.01 - 0.2 mm larger than the conductor pipe to solve lime under all circumstances or as additive diameter.* Don' t forget to plug all cooling holes of conductor pipe remaining open after mounting.* When to the water in all limy surfaces, it is a area inside of conductor pipe cooling channel is extended, Concentrate Product. heat transmission is increased proportionally.

Model :

STA

FAST COOLING SYSTEM FLOW METHOD

STB

Material : Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic

Model : L

PLASTIC, SPIRAL / MODULER DEEP COOLING SEPARATOR

Spiral & Flat Type Separators Bxk

Sheet Bar NPT mm

8.5 x 16 2.4 x 11.5 2.4 x 11.5 2.4 x 18.5 Order :

1/8" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2"

101 203 127 254 152 300 203 406

Allen

Material : Yellow/ Brass

L 100 200 300 100 200 300 100 200 300 100 200 300 100 200 300 400 100 200 300 400

Economic Shelf Stock

PLS.BASED SPIRAL

D 35

O -Ring

Order : STB d x L

L 96 196 296 96 196 296 96 196 296 96 196 296 96 196 296 396 96 196 296 396

STA

Economic Shelf Stock

PLS. BASED SPIRAL ST

STC 20 8

STC 10

STC 12

STC 16

STC 20

STC 25

25 30 35 40

1.5 2 1.5 1.5 1.8 H 2.5 1.8 ØD 1.8 2.0 3 2.0 2.0 3.0 4 3.0 T 3.0 3.0 5 3.0 3.0 O -Ring 4.0 6 4.0

25 10 30 35 40 25 30 12 35 40 25 16 30 35 40 25 30 20 35 40

ST GCP

30 H 25 35 40

Economic Shelf Stock

51 8 8.5 5 102 51 10 11.5 7 102 51 10 15 8 102 102 10 18.5 10 76

BSP / BDP DxL

BDP BSP

PLS. BASED SPIRAL STB

Order : ST d x L

PLUG O -Ring

Order : STA d x L

It is a deep male/die modular system for water flow system in injection moulds rapid water cooling process. It is processed from high quality yellow material in long size precision compatible with abrasion resistance and is resistant to high liquid pressure. Conical threaded rotary base strengthens water flow hole.

STA

mbe

Deep Male / Die Cooling Spiral & Sheet Bar

x Nu

Rotation

DEEP COOLING SEPARATOR

Heli

Spiral

Flat Type

As per Request

BSP

BDP

The cooling water flows by following plastic spiral helixes (such as waterfall). Since spiral plastic material is glass fiber reinforced, it always remains cold, it never causes choking and corrosion in cooling channels, at different types according to the usage model of modular system spiral plastic (Refer to following section) 1-At technical drawing in figure 1 and 3 if cooling water flow is entering by striking at the entrance of spiral or to the close area, based or base reinforced model should be selected. 2- If cooling water flow is entered by striking at the medium or top section of spiral (or within required water runners), don't use based model, because; water flow continues its turbulent flow by exiting from the level it entered, at the systems in Figure 2 , flat model is selected.

It provides effective flow opportunity by creating balanced turbulance in water flow hole.

D ST

L1 Outlet

2017 Repair Paste

Outlet Section Bölüm Injection Enjeksiyon Mould Kalıp

Sayfa Page

305 305

Optional Accessories : (As per Request)

Economical Price in 2 Different Models

U2 - F / CBN 75 Standard

Code Content U2-C Positioning Desk Suitable to Machine U2-F Diamond CBN Stone U2 - K / CBN 100 High Quality U2-P Ext. PLIERS ( 2-3-5-7-9-16-18-20-25 ) U2-E Mill Whetting Equipment DIAMOND DISH WHEEL Conical Type U2-T Drill Whetting Equipment It is used for whetting of hard metal engraving U2-L Lathe Tool Holder Whetting Equipment pens or other hard tools. Hard Aluminium compound main casing, resin cutting section and diamond powder.

Machine Desk U2 - C

English User Guide Pantograph Pen WHETTING MACHINE

HSS or Carbide / DIAMOND Pen / Rod & Perforator is precision whetting machine with quick simple operation and negative angular radius, also complex rapid cutting edge designed for whetting in desired form.

Diamond, Conical Type / CBN 75

Technical Specifications: Product

Capacity

Max. Pliers 5 Piece (4-6-8-10-12) Grinding Dia. Max. Dia. 2 - 25 Apex Angle 00 - 1800 Channel Angle 00 - 450 Negative Angle 00 - 260 Shaft / Cycle 3600 RPM Grinding Wheel HSS EKW 100 / Diamond U2 F Motor 1 / 3 Hp 220V 50 / 60 Hz. Machine Dimen. 45 x 40 x 35 cm Package Dimen. 55 x 45 x 47 cm Weight 45 Kg.

U2 - P

Whetting Pliers

Model U2 (Full Radius Whetting) Precision * EKW D-100 HSS Whetting Wheel * Stone Connecting Flange/Mounting Assembly * Stone Correcting Flange * Lighting Lamp * Spare Drive Belt * Locking Pin and Hand Tool Kit D-100 * 5 Piece Pliers (4-6-8-10-12)

Single edged mill blades are auxiliary grinding machines of general CNC /milling machine in fabricating of complex designed work piece, retouching precision surface, writing in thin characters, whetting of end /pen to be used at engraving machines.

Page

306

U2F.7553 U2F.10053 U2F.10063 U2F.10083 U2F.12553 U2F.15053

Ø 75

Ø 100 Ø 125 Ø 150

a 5 5 6 8 5 5

20 32 32

U2 - EKW

E-100

U2 - T

mm mm mm mm mm

3 3 3 3 3 3

Stone Whetting Diamond

HSS Pen Whetting Wheels

h mm mm mm mm mm mm

PERPENDICULAR TYPE

U2 - TDE

Diamond, Perpendicular Type / CBN 75 Order

C180.10053 Ø 100 C180.12553 Ø 125

Standard Accessories:

Pantograph Pen WHETTING MACHINE

Order

U2 - F C 180 U2 - E Diamond Grind Stone DIAMOND DISH WHEEL

Standard Accessories:

Model U2 / E ( Flat Type ) Economic Model * It does not make radius whetting. * EKW D-100 HSS Whetting Wheel * Stone Connecting Flange/Mounting Assembly * Stone Correcting Flange Product * Lighting Lamp Campaign * Spare Drive Belt We give * Locking Pin and Hand Tool Kit U2 - C * 5 Piece Pliers (4-6-8-10-12) Machine Desk * Drill Whetting Equipment as present... * Mill Whetting Equipment * Lathe Tool Holder Whetting Equipment

20 20

5 5

mm mm

h 3 3

mm mm

At surface finish grinding

Drill Whetting U2 - E

Mill Whetting Equipment

DIAMOND DISH WHEEL

U2 - L

Lathe Tool Holder Whetting Equipment

Repair - Maintenance - Spare Part Service English User Manual Order : Model U2

(Radius Grinding) Precision Order : Model U2 / E (Flat Type) Economic Model

DISC TYPE a h

Diamond, Disc/Wheel Type / CBN 75 Order

C182.7563 C182.10084 C182.12584 C182.15084 C182.175104 C182.200104

75 100 125 150 175 200

20 20 32 32 32 32

6 8 8 8 10 10

3 4 4 4 4 4

STONE WHETTING DIAMOND TDE Lathe Grinding, Surface / Hole Single Point Contact Stone Whetting Diamond (as per request, multi point models are available) is for to correct and to form grind stone at whetting and cutting machines, it is used by mounting to equipment on grinding/cutting / whetting machines. Pls. pay attention to picture details for Precision Stone Whetting Process! Stone Whetting & Contact Example 100 0

Max. 1.5 mm

Incorrect Process

Backward 0 90

42 mm

Mounted points Shaft 6 mm

SW 14

Ø 16

Ø MK 1 R 0.4

Standard (Economic) Order TDE030 TDE050 TDE075 TDE100 TDE150 TDE200 TDE300

Diamond Carat 0.30 0.50 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0

High Quality Stone Correcting

Order TDA030 TDA050 TDA075 TDA100 TDA150 TDA200 TDA300

Diamond Carat 0.30 0.50 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0

Model : TDE

Guaranty of domestic products is for two years and spare parts for service are available.

Carat

60 mm

It is an excellent machine for inner hole grinding with easy to mount to the lathe workbench. During the inner hole works, it maintains many difficult processes, in addition to external grinding processes together. Also grinding process can be made on flat surfaces with 15/25% metal removing values at external grinding and operation opportunity up to 150 mm (up to 600 mm with additional equipment) and E 125 Dish Stone Connection to the stone connection on equipment. Its mounting is completed by inserting flange to the section involving Lathe Workbench Support/ Pen Holder, the flange axes of all lathe workbenches can be different, therefore flange axis intervals can be requested from our company.

28 148

Grinding Support Grinding Machine Suitable to Dia. 175 Stone Wheel Dia. Machine Order No : Ø 100 Technical Data ST - 175 Grinding Ø 200 Motor Power 0.5 HP 380 V ~ 50 Hz Ø 250 Speed m /min. 2800 m /min. Ø 300 Shaft / Wheel Size 175x20x20 (25/32) Ø 400 Suitable Machine 1 and 1.5 Mt. Lathe Ø 500 Ø 600 * Hole Grinding Equipment is with machine. Model : TDA

Support Grinding Machine Suitable to Dia. 175 Stone

Grinding Machine Order No : Wheel Dia. Technical Data ST - 201 Grinding Ø 100 Motor Power 1 HP 380 V ~ 50 Hz Ø 200 Speed m /min. 2800 m /min. Ø 250 Shaft / Wheel Size 200x20x20 (25/32) Ø 300 Suitable Machine 2 Meter Lathe Ø 400 * Hole Grinding Equipment is with machine. Ø 500 Ø 600 Support Grinding Machine Suitable to Dia. 202 Stone

Diamond Drill Line Pen

ECK

Diamond Drill Clip-0n Pen to draw and to mark on metal plates at machine and mould productions, design processes. Order No : ECK 13741

Machine Technical Data

Order No : ST - 202 Grinding

Motor Power

2 HP 380 V ~ 50 Hz

Speed m /min.

3000 m /min.

Shaft / Wheel Size

200x20x20 (25/32)

Suitable Machine

2 Meter and Over Lathe

* Hole Grinding Equipment is with machine.

INNER HOLE DIAMOND MILLS

Diamond mills produced with electrolysis spraying method of diamond power make precision measure completion and surface finishing process inside holes. It is for polishing and levelling at (Ejector Sleeve etc.) works or all hard steel hole works, glass / ceramic / mould surfaces or inside of holes.

Inner Hole Polishing Diamond Mill Order

D Ø

ID103 ID153 ID203 ID253 ID303 ID403 ID406 ID506 ID606 ID806 ID1006 ID1206

1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 8.0 10 12

d1 k Ø

5 45

L1 Sand

Grit

8 8 12

200 # 150

6 10 80 22

# 100

HOLE Grinding PNEUMATIC KIT

Lathe workbench connected air fed precision grinding set at grinding inside of holes.

Standard Set Accessories / Kits Order No : GP 8244 L (As per request, air inserts) * 1 Piece Hole Grinding Machine (30.000 RPM) * 2 Piece Hold Pliers : Ø 3 and 6 mm * 4 Piece Hole Grinding Mounted Points * Equipment mounting of machine to the bench * Wrench Set for mounting * Protective cover for machine - 1/4" Coupling

Page

307

Flat Type.1 Rotating Speed: 35 m /s

EKR

Steel WHETTING WHEELS

Steel Grinding WHEEL

EKR

In cylindrical or Surface Grinding Machine: All grinding processes, in fact, are surface grinding as well as with "surface grinding" term refers to grinding processes of flat surfaces. It is possible to collect surface grinding into three groups according to machine types. 1- Flat Wheel : They are used at vertical shaft, intermittent base surface grinding machines. 2- Flat Wheel : They are used at vertical shaft, rotary base surface grinding machines. 3- Cylinder -Dish and Ring Wheels : They are used at horizontal shaft surface grinding machines.

Flat Type.1 Rotating Speed: 35 m /s

It is used at general or special purpose machines or grinding motors for all whetting processes.

Order EKR10025 EKR12520 EKR15020 EKR15025 EKR17520 EKR17525 EKR20020 EKR20025

Dimension Sand Dia.xThicknessxHole

100 125 150 150 175 175 200 200

x x x x x x x x

For special size and quality demands, pls. call our company...

175 x 20 x 32

EKR.1752051

175 x 20 x 51

EKR.2000820

200 x 8 x 20

EKR.2004016

200 x 40 x 16

EKR.2002020

200 x 20 x 20

EKR.2002032

200 x 20 x 32

EKR.2002051

200 x 20 x 51

# 36 K6V

EKR.2002520

200 x 25 x 20

Coarse

EKR.2002532

200 x 25 x 32

EKR.2002551

200 x 25 x 51

EKR.2502576 250 x 25 x 76.2 EKR.2503076 250 x 30 x 76.2

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

# 36 Coarse # 46 Medium # 60 Fine

Rotating Speed: 35 m /s

Dimension Sand Dia.xThicknessxHole

EKR.1752032

x x x x x x x x

Flat Type.1

Flat Type Steel Grinding WHEELS Order Specify Colour

25 20 20 25 20 25 20 25

EKR.3002576 300 x 25 x 76.2 EKR.3003076 300 x 30 x 76.2

Order

450 W / 230 V - 50 Hz 2850 m /min.

Shaft/ Wheel Size

Ø 20 / 150 x 20 / 25

Machine Dimension

210 x 410 x 295 mm

Weight

12 Kg.

Order No : QSM-175 Grinder

Order No : QSM-200 Grinder

450 W/230 V-50 Hz

2850 m /min.

175 x 20 x 20

200 x 20 x 20

220 x 420 x 300

245 x 450 x 330

14 Kg.

16 Kg.

NK15020 NK15025 NK17520 NK17525 NK20020 NK20025

Dimension Sand Dia.xThicknessxHole

150 150 175 175 200 200

x x x x x x

20 25 20 25 20 25

x x x x x x

20 20 20 20 20 20

# 36 Coarse # 46 Medium

Polishing Motor Machine Technical Data

Order No : PSM - 250 Polishing

Motor Power

1.5 kW /400 V - 50Hz

# 46 K6V

Speed m /min.

2850 m /min.

Shaft/ Felt Size

Ø 25 / 250 x 25 / 32

Medium

Machine Dimension

250 x 63 x 350 mm

Weight

23 Kg.

Flat Type.1

# 60 K6V Fine

EKR.3004076 300 x 40 x 76.2 EKR.35040127 350 x 40 x 127 EKR.35050127 350 x 50 x 127 EKR.40040127 400 x 40 x 127 EKR (Pink Colour): Hard/ Medium Steel Grade EKW (White Colour): High Hard Steels SCG (Green Colour): Carbide / High Steels NK (Grey Colour): General Purpose All Kinds of Steels

308

Motor Power Speed m /min.

Steel WHETTING WHEELS

EKR.30040127 300 x 40 x 127

Page

Workshop Type General Purpose Grinding / Whetting Works Order No : Machine QSM-150 Grinder Technical Data

General Purpose Whetting Stones, Aluminium oxide abrasive are ideal on all kinds of steel.

EKR.2504076 250 x 40 x 76.2 EKR.3002076 300 x 20 x 76.2

Whetting / Grinding Motors

Rotating Speed: 35 m /s

SCG

Steel WHETTING WHEELS

Generally, they are used as fixed or with lathe. Especially, they are for hard steels or carbide materials. It is Green Silicon Carbide Abrasive Content.

Order SCG15020 SCG15025 SCG17520 SCG17525 SCG20020 SCG20025

Dimension Sand Dia.xThicknessxHole

150 150 175 175 200 200

x x x x x x

20 25 20 25 20 25

x x x x x x

20 20 20 20 20 20

# 80 J5V Fine

Whetting, Grinding Machine

Positioning Desk Screwed Fixing Foot. 3 Rack Type Pool Top Section

Order

BKM.3

Mould Polishing - Steel Surface Levelling POLISHING STONES

Surface Levelling - EDM (Electro Erosion) Polishing Stones are produced to make excellent levelling on coarse surfaces passing over hard shell on work piece surface. It takes the form of surface it works with by making fast cutting. Do not plunge in the corners, it works sensitively on figured surfaces, such polishing stones are suitable to work as manual or filing machine, sand rate/diversification, operation style and the selection of polishing stones according to the work piece surface and material position is important. Hard and complex, especially for deep areas, long size polishing stones can be selected, at flat and wide areas, short size polishing stones can be less fragile by avoiding skidding/ escaping. At handling, care to use holder. Different type holders at filing machines present extensive usage opportunity. For softer and clean polishing stone usage, you can use your polishing stones by steeping in low oil liquid (EDM Gas ) etc. To use right graduation from coarse gas stone to fine one on application surface is important. Cleaning of operation area also has importance.

Polishing Stone Selection Table TYPE / DIMENSION / SAND / Operation Sequence Type & Size Type & Size Type & Size

Type & Size

Sand Process Width x Length Width x Length Diameter x Length Width x Length # 120 Levelling # 150 Process # 180 Rectangle Triangular # 220 kare Round Square Pre # 280 4 x 4 x100 6 x 3 x150 Ø 6 x150 8 x 8 x150 # 320 Polishing 6 x 6 x150 13 x 3 x150 Ø 8 x150 10 x 10 x150 # 400 # 600 8 x 8 x150 13 x 6 x150 Ø 10 x150 Last/Final # 800 Polishing 10 x 10 x150 Ø 12 x150 # 1000 Giving orders in specified form, especially Order EG. TYPE / DIMENSION / SAND Polishing Stone Related to General Use EDM (Erosion) Surface is suitable.

CERAMIC POLISHING STONE Ceramic polishing stones prepared by pressing with resin binder spraying screened, gauged micron diamond particles on powerful fiber textured ceramic, polishing stones have the feature of resistance with flexible structure against breakage, it is an excellent running in kit as levelling kit at precision end points, corners, also narrow channels and angular/ feather spaces, especially mould surface applications. According to traditional similar kits, it is resistance to fast abrasion in shorter period. It provides advantage with fine kits at precision scale.

Selection Table :

Type / Sand CSC # 180 CSO # 250 CSD # 280 Thickness : 1 mm Dia :3 mm CSN # 360 Dimension Dia CSB # 400 1 x 4 x100 Ø CSY # 700 1 x 6 x100 3 x 100 CSR # 1200 1 x10x100 mm

Order TYPE/SANDxDIMENSION

Polishing Stone Holders: Hand / Manual and Machine Holders Hand Run Holder

Machine Run Holder Filing Machine Holder

Product

SELECTION TABLE 1 x 4 x 100

Order No : XH 041 1 x 6 x 100

Capacity

6 x 3 13 x 3 4 - 6

Order

8 - 10 13 x 3 13 x 6 AR AR AR AR 661 667 666 662 G.468 G.133

G.613

SCG

EKR

# 220 # 120

Measure / Dim. A x H x L

x x x x

25 40 50 50

Order No : XH 22K

Pneumatic Filing Spare Holders Order :

Large Surface Levelling and Chamfering /Deburring SCG: Hard Steel / EKR: General Steel Work Pieces

16 20 25 25

Order No : XH 101 Diameter : 3 x 100

# 220 # 120

Block COMBINE Polishing Stone Order BG100 BG125 BG150 BG200

Order No : XH 061 1 x 10 x 100

x x x x

100 125 150 200

Cutting Disc Separate Stone

AR 664

AR 665

AR Ø 662

It is used in cutting processes of all metals including hard steel at rotary tool machines.

Order

Dimension d x k

KS25

25 x 0.65

KS40

40 x 1.0

KS60

60 x 1.5

Drill Chuck

Ø 2.35

Ø 3.0

Page

309

Shaft 3 mm

They are combine suitable to soft and hard surfaces. Imported Product With formation of aluminium oxide textured and ceramic binder in fast metal removal feature, the levelling points provide the desired performance on all kinds of surfaces, after process, it can be ready for polishing by cleaning off stone traces on surface and form surface with mounted polishing rubbers. There should be at least 10 mm connecting length at clamping plier. Work should be soft without pressing. Speed = Speed and Max.= 50 m / sec. Calculation : n = V (m/s) x 60.000 D = (mm) x 3.14

Mounted points can be selected from table.

Type Form A/R

Shaft

6 mm Order

6 mm

Order 256A 308A 410A 510A

1608A 2008A 2016A 2510A 2520A 3220A 4025A 5030A

D x L 16 x 8 20 x 8 20 x16 25 x10 25 x20 32 x20 40 x25 50 x30

Shaft

3 mm

Shaft 6 mm

Type Form A

Type Form B

Shaft

Pink, Mounted Levelling Points

D L 6 mm

Pink, Mounted Levelling Points

816A 1016A 813R

Order 1015B 1620B2020B 2030B 2040B 2525B 2532B 3240B

D x L 2.5 x 6 3 x 8 4 x 10 5 x 10 6 x 12 8 x 16 10 x 16 8 x 13

D x L 10 x15 16 x20 20 x20 20 x30 20 x40 25 x25 25 x32 32 x40

Type Form B/R

Type Form C/F

Shaft

612A

3 mm

6 mm

Order

30B

40B

50B

60B

80B

100B

120B 1224R

Order 2508C 3208C4010C 1220D 2035D 0816F 1320F 2032F

DxL

Ø3

Ø4

Ø5

Ø6

Ø8

Ø 10

Ø 12 12x24

D x L 25 x 8 32 x 8 40 x10 12 x20 20 x35 8 x 16 13 x20 20 x32 Type Form E Shaft

6 mm

308T

310T 412T 710T 412J

616J

816J 1016J 609S

Order 0816E 1230E 1640E 2030E 2040E 2525E 2540E 3240E

3 x 8 3 x 10 4 x 12 7 x 10 4 x 12 6 x 16 8 x 16 10 x 16 6 x 9

D x L 8 x 16 12 x30 16 x40 20 x30 20 x40 25 x25 25 x40 32 x40 Type Form G/H J Shaft

6 mm

612P

815P 1018P 412K 515K

816K

132E

133E 162E

6 x 12 8 x 15 10 x18 4 x 12 5 x 15 8 x 16 13 x 2 13 x 3 16 x 2

DEDECO Spiral Stone 92560

MANNESMAN 12 Shank Stone

Page

310

Extra Quality - Dedeco Mounted Points / Sets Order

Product

DST03

DEDECO / USA Hard Metal /Maroon

DST04

General / Soft Blue / White Stone

92560

12 Pcs. Spiral Mounted Point Set

Order 2016G 2520G 10H

15H

20H

D x L 20 X1625 x20 Ø 10 Ø 15

1225J 1632J 2040J

Ø 20 12 x25 16 x32 20 x40

Perforated DISC STONES Due to being circular, mostly it is used at thread ranges, cutting set ends and mould/machine production. Product Order DP Dia. 25 x 1.6 mm 2516 #80 Sand - Soft Stone DP Dia. 25 x 3.2 mm 2532 #80 Sand - Soft Stone

VM23

Screwed Drill Chuck

2.35 or 3 mm

SET PACKAGING

Mounted Polishing RUBBERS Metal WIRE, MOUNTED BRUSH It solves injection residues, also it is very successful for cleaning deep burrs and EDM Erosion Traces (with 14 micron diamond paste) during polishing process. Pls. try it..! 15

Conical Wire, Mounted Brush Yellow/ Brass Wire Shaft: 2.35 or 3 mm

Shaft

Order : STF158 Conical Wire, Mounted Brush Yellow/ Brass Wire Shaft: 2.35 or 3 mm

Shaft

15 10

Order : SMF158

Wire Disc, Mounted Brush Yellow/ Brass Wire Shaft: 2.35 or 3 mm

2 Shaft

Order : STF222

Wire Disc, Mounted Brush Yellow/ Brass Wire Shaft: 2.35 or 3 mm

2 Shaft

Order : SMF222 Pen, Wire Mounted Brush Inox / Metal Wire Shaft: 2.35 or 3 mm

14 8 Shaft

SPIRAL BAND Holder +Emery SMALL SIZE

SET PACKING

SHAFT 3 mm

Rubbered / Soft Type - Finish Polishing Type

Form It is sold in cylindrical wound emery cloth and rubber holder package: 5 + 5 Thick / Thin Emery + RK Rubber Set. (10 Emery + Rubber) Shaft Shaft 3 mm 60

3 mm

Order RK04 RK05 RK06 RK08 RK10

SPIRAL BAND Set or As Unit

D x L 4 x 13 5 x 15 6 x 17 8 x 20 10 x20

Set Order 5 Pieces ML.04 Emery 120 Sand

Type Form RB

ML.05

Ø4

Emery

# 120

Ø5

# 320

Ø6

# 400

ML.08

Ø8

# 600

ML.10

Ø 10

5 Pieces Emery ML.06 320 Sand 1 Piece Rubber Holder

Rubber

Shaft 6 mm

Order RB15 RB20 RB25 RB30 RB35

D x L 15 x25 20 x25 25 x25 30 x30 35 x35

# 1000

* As per request: Emery & Rubber are available as unit.

Order : STF148 Pen, Wire Mounted Brush Inox / Metal Wire Shaft: 2.35 or 3 mm

14 8

Mounted Polishing RUBBERS

Order : SMF148

Shaft

Ceramic / Hard Type - Leveling Polishing

SPIRAL BAND Holder + Emery LARGE SIZE

PIECE

SHAFT 6 mm

SBL / Z

Cylindrical wound emery cloth and rubber holder, shaft 6 mm, for larger work pieces. Shaft

Adhesive Emery /Mounted Rubber Angular grinder having adjustable speed makes levelling on larger surfaces and precision operations on contours thanks to flexibility of holder.

Order Ø Dia. Emery Rubber Shaft Ø 10 DZ 10 Ø 10 DZ 18 Ø 18 DZ 30 Ø 30 DZ 45 Ø 45 DZ 70 Ø 70 DZ 80 Ø 80 DZ 100 Ø 100

# # # # #

080 120 220 320 400

Ø 18 Ø 30

3 mm

Ø 45 Ø 70

6 mm

Ø 80 Ø 100

DZ Set 5 + 5 Coarse / Fine Emery+ Holder * At order, pls. specify shaft measure and emery sand.

Order SPZ.12 SPZ.15 SPZ.20 SPZ.25 SPZ.30 SPZ.40 SPZ.50 SPZ.60

Emery Ø 12 x 25 Ø 15 x 25 Ø 20 x 30 Ø 25 x 30 Ø 30 x 30 Ø 40 x 30 Ø 50 x 30 Ø 60 x 35

Order SPL.12 SPL.15 SPL.20 SPL.25 SPL.30 SPL.40 SPL.50 SPL.60

Rubber Ø 12 Ø 15 Ø 20 Ø 25 Ø 30 Ø 40 Ø 50 Ø 60

Sand

# 80

Type Form CK

Shaft 3 mm

Order CK04 CK05 CK06 CK08 CK10

D x L 4 x 13 5 x 15 6 x 17 8 x 20 10 x20 Type Form CB

Shaft

# 120

6 mm

# 220

Order CB15 CB20 CB25 CB30 CB35

Shaft-Length Ø 6 - 60 Ø 6 - 60 Ø 6 - 60 Ø 6 - 60 Ø 6 - 60 Ø 6 - 65 Ø 6 - 65 Ø 6 - 65

* As per request: Our production on emery (Fine sand) are available.

D x L 15 x25 20 x25 25 x25 30 x30 35 x35

Pen / Disc Polishing Rubbers Pen Rubber Order Red (General) : KK06 Black (Hard) : KS06 Threaded Drill Chuck : DM03

Disc Rubber Order Red (General) : DK06 Black (Hard) : DS06 Screwed Drill Chuck : VM03

Page

311

Cylindrical, Mounted Polishing Felt Shaft 3 mm

Cylindrical, Mounted Polishing Felts Shaft 6 mm

It is used at last/ final polishing with diamond compounds. Also, it can be applied with other polishers. Even it is used at very high cycles, it does not burn. Double fired flet is imported product. In application, avoid Extreme High Pressure..! In polishing: Diamond Compound is used by thinning.

It is used as paste with diamond compounds at last / final polishing.

Shaft 3 mm

6 mm

D L 6 mm

Shaft D

Order 1520A 2020A 2025A 2530A 3040A

L 3 mm

Type Form AB

Type Form AC

Order 0408A 0509A0610A 0810A 1014A 1220A 1520A 2020A

D x L 4 x8 5 x 9 6 x 10 8 x 10 10 x 1412 x 2015 x 2020 x 20

14B

20B

D x L 15 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 25 25 x 30 30 x 40 Ø 14

Ø 20

Type Form AC

Shaft 6 mm

Type Form AB

Order 2110E 3015E 4020E 5030E 1520C 2025C 2530C

D x L 25 x 10 30 x 15 40 x 20 50 x 30 15 x 20 20 x 25 25 x 30

Shaft 3 mm

Order 0408C 0509C0610C 0810C 1013C 1214C 1220A 1218H

D x L 4 x8 5 x 9 6 x 10 8 x 10 10 x 1412 x 2015 x 2020 x 20

Type Form AC

Shaft 6 mm

Order 1018K 1220K 1525K 2025K 2530K 1530H 1030G

D x L 10 x 18 12 x 20 15 x 25 20 x 25 25 x 30 15 x 30 10 x 30

Flat-Mounted Polishing Felt Usage with machines

Shaft 3 mm

Could polishing, by moisturizing with diamond compound. 0410J 0512J 0616J 0817J 1014J 1020J 1220J 1225J 1218T

Order No

4 x 10 5 x 12 6 x 16 8 x 17 10 x 1410 x 2012 x 2012 x 25 12 x 18

G.133

Product Dimension

S06D

6 x 6 x 25 mm

S10D

10 x 10 x 35 mm

S12D

12 x 12 x 45 mm

Shaft Shank

Ø3 mm

Manual Run, Rod Felt

Usage with machines, Square Felt

At machines: It is used with plastic holder equipment (G.133). 08B

10B

18B 1014R 1225R 2505L 2207L 2210L

Order No

Ø8

Ø 10 Ø 12 Ø 18 10 x 14 12 x25 25 x 5 22 x 7 22 x10

E06K

6 x 6 x 150 mm

Adhesive, Pooled / Disc Felt / Mounted Rubber Holder

E10K

10 x 10 x 150 mm

E12K

12 x 12 x 150 mm

12B

Presentation as 10 Felt - Holder Set

Page

312

Order Y18D Y30D Y45D

Disc Felt Hole Ø 18 x 4 mm 7 mm Ø 30 x 4 mm 12 Ø 45 x 4 mm 18

Order Shank Holder Shaft DZ18 Ø 18 Rubber Ø3 DZ30 Ø 30 Rubber mm DZ45 Ø 45 Rubber

Product Dimension

Polishing Felt Plate

Cutting at set or equipment applications

As per request: It can be adhered to your set by cutting.

Order No

Product Dimension

P325

6 x 250 x 250 mm

P625

10 x 250 x 250 mm

P1025

12 x 250 x 250 mm

Polishing Kits: Wood Lappings It is suitable to polish with wood sets at narrow and radius areas of moulds, areas unsuitable to use polishing stones or ceramic stones and desired clear levelling / brightness without disturbing the surface. Also, it is suitable for levelling of erosion traces and rough lines on surfaces.

Hard, Mounted Wood Bars, Wood Felts Order

Dimension

AC 06 6 x 6 x150

Order

Dimension

ASK 06

Ø 6 x 15 Cylinder

AC 10 10x10 x150

ASK 10

Ø 10 x 20 Cylinder

AC 12 12x12x150 Square

ASK 15

Ø 15 x 25 Cylinder

AC 03 6 x 3 x 150

ASK 20

Ø 20 x 30 Cylinder

AC 13 13 x 6 x 150

Type

6 x 150

ACS 8

8 x 150

Round

Ø 10 Sphere

Wood polishing kits especially rods are especially used at manual or machine applications, mounted wood kits are used at machine applications. During application, pls. use moisturizer.

G.133 Holder "PLEXIGLASS" Polishing Kits

It bec omes a precision diamond diamond riffler at application on surfaces of and and long surface applications, work pieces, diamond narrow paths ,compound long surface, especially application with plexiglas at narrow rod, pls try it! In use by machines, G.133 Holder is used.

Order

Dimension

PC 06 PC 08 PC 13 PC 19

6 x 6 150 mm Plexsi Glas 8 x 8 x 6 mm Plexsi Glas 13 x 6 x 150 mm Plexsi Glas 19 x 8 x 850 mm Plexsi Glas

Type Square

Rectangle

SDP

Quality Diamond Powder, is in well screened precision micron scale. It is highly concentrated -vegetable oil and polisher chemical mixture. Economical price presented - At box packaged as 20 gr. injector. Hard material mould cleans chips including EDM Erosion Traces by removing at difficult areas from levelling process to surface preparation/ polishing process. During work, compound can flake/dry on surfaces, in this case, add oil and water based moisturizers ( compound thinner SDS.200 gr.) 1-2 Drops Order No

Micron Value

Diamond Composition

SDP.01

0/1μ

#60.000 20 Gr.

SDP.02

2/1μ

#14.000 20 Gr.

SDP.03

3/2μ

#8.000

20 Gr.

SDP.05

5/3μ

#4.000

20 Gr.

SDP.07

7/5μ

#3.000

20 Gr.

SDP.10

10 / 7 μ

#1.700

20 Gr.

SDP.14

14 / 7 μ

#1.500

20 Gr.

Packing

SDP.20

20 / 14 μ # 1.100 20 Gr.

SDP.28

28 / 20 μ

#800

20 Gr.

SDP.40

40 / 28 μ

#550

20 Gr.

SDP.60

60 / 40 μ

#500

20 Gr.

As per request, in 40 Gr. Packing.

ACS 6

c AC 20 20 x 8 x 150 Re

gle ASK Ø 10

Mould Polishing, DIAMOND COMPOUNDS

Usage Area Final Polishing Finish Specular Gloss Pre Polishing Precision Gloss Fast Lapping Surface Preparation

Application: It should be applied generally in applications with felt and it should be applied as straight lines with circular motions and through to end finish on large burrs at surface, during work, cleaning is very important and it absolutely should be done at every stage. Right sequence from coarse micron to fine micron should be followed. Polishing kits for each micron paste should be specified and should be used only at that micron, absolutely don't mix with other micron pastes. For cleaning and washing mould surface, (WINKEL 415218) Cleanser Spray Product is economical and provides facility. As surface protector, our new product WINPLAST is excellent as flexible surface coating.

Diamond Paste Moisturizer

In application with diamond paste: It is used as 1+2 drop thinner at turbid positions and provide penetration of paste on the surface. In application with polishing stones, use excessively. It is presented in 200 Gr. packing, (as per request) also 5 Kg. packing is available.

Order

SDS - 200

Usage: Diamond Compound / Polishing Stones

Hair, Mounted Brushes for Diamond Compound Hair brushes faciliating polishing process and not requiring extra kits form excellent surfaces with fine micron diamond pastes at final polishing.

Ø6 x 8 mm 3m aft

Order : SKF 016

aft Sh

Order : SKF 168

Ø 16 x 8 mm

3m aft

Order : SKF 022

Sha

ft 3

Ø 22 Ø 16 x 8 mm

Order : SKF 068

MARPOL - Metal Polish / Cleaning Compound

Precision metal work pieces lose their gloss in time and can be oxidized. In this case, Marpol metal polish cleans surfaces and purifies from rust and dirts without disturbing surface sensitivity, is a very good dirt remover, it does not remove burrs and only cleans and polishes, it is renewed.

MARPOL Metal Polish

Order

Page

313

ce Pie ool ut T Wh ip w ith o hed

U-Lap 106

Ra tc

ULTRASONIC FILING MACHINE

Especially, much faster for polishing of tie piece and Side Surfaces: 22.000 vibration/cycle per second, right angle should be seized during usage. It is an advanced technological product realizing all difficult works with stroke forward / backward motions and ultrasonic and precision applications with its max. 45 Watt Outlet Power. Pls try it...! Order: U-Lap 106 Unit: Control box Levelling arm - Diamond Riffler and Polishing Stone Kit - Armboard - Adjustment Kits Power Supply: AC 220 Ultrasonic Power: 45W,2 Level Stroke Power: 10 - 35 um Vibration: 15 - 25 kHZ Harmony: Automatic, Feed Back System Machine Dimensions: 152 x 100 x 72 mm

SPIRAL WHIP WITH TOOL PIECE Suitable To Use With Electrical Motors Spiral Whip front and rear rotary bearings are SKF Bearings, they work without balance and vibration. Repairing- spare parts- service is available at our company.

Order

ELECTRICAL FILING

ELECTRICAL SPIRAL MOTOR

Forward / Backward Motion:

Economic and Modular for Leveling and Polishing

Cycle adjustments of our domestic products spiral whip used electrical motors are done serially and sensitively with pedal system, powerful motors provide facilities to users at levelling and polishing. Rotary Spiral Spring in Whip is only for sets to be used with 2.35 ELECTRONIC LEVELING - POLISHING Spiral - 3 - 4 mm pliers. However, in some cases, STRONG - 204 / Rotary Tool 6 mm Pliers also can be used softly without 50.000 m/m - 50 Hz - 220 V pressing. To avoid rising heat at long uses, to With electronic cycle adjusted control unit, it wait at short intervals can be required. starts with micro motor rotary tool at desired Repairing of Spiral Motor/ Speed Pedal and speed. It can work faster and serially with foot switch, deskSpiral Whip spare parts, is in interest of our top precision works can be done with practical and powerful company. To provide continuance of work in electronic machine. uses, spare whip can be kept. Economic Presentation.Unit: Cycle Adjusted Control Box - Micro Motor Rotary Tool - 3 mm Pliers - Wrench Set - 2 Order : Strong - 204 Pieces Spare Coal.

Product

Spiral Whip Length 965 cm M19KK M19FTK Ratchet Whip without Tool Piece YP... Ă&#x2DC; Spare Pliers 2.35 - 3 - 4 - 6

DIPROFIL

It is used with 0 - 6 mm whip without tool piece. Cycle: 10.000 cycle / min. Holder Drill Chuck: 3.5 mm Weight: 600 Gr. Model: FPK - R Electrical Diprofil Branded Electrical Filing Machine is more powerful than similar models. It is provided to present 6.5 mm device connection opportunity.

Rotary Head - Tool Piece 0

90 Angular Rotary Head - Tool Piece

ELECTRICAL MOTOR ROTARY HEAD - TOOL PIECE Order

Product

25.000 d/d Power:125Watt 25.000 d/d BM23A Power:200Watt 25.000 d/d BM26A Power:275Watt 22.000 d/d BM24A BM22A

For Ratchet Type Whips without Tool Piece:

For 3 mm plier capacity / connection sets Order

Product

M20KPT

Rotary Head - Tool Piece

DK 36

Rotary - 900 Angular Tool Piece

Power:500Watt Motor Hanger Screwed Connection

MONOPHASE Adjustable Length-Rotary Arm-Modular 220 - 230 V M18A Motor Hanger SPEED PEDAL 50 Pieces Rotary Instrumented Unit Speed Pedal and Cable Connections of Spiral Easy With Easily Changed Drill Chuck System, High Speed Whipped Motors are presented in packing. To and Speed Adjusted ( 10.000 - 37.000 mm ) Powerful Motor - Light and Easy Use Spiral Lock and Spiral Hanger use motor stably, we recommended to use motor hanger. (3.2 mm) - Drill Chuck - 18 Cutting Disc - Engine Stand

DRAMER MULTI SET

Order : DRAMER 627

- Emery Stones - Cylindrical Emeries - Mounted Points Polishing Felts - Wire Brushes - Mini Milling and Drilling Ends etc. Professional Brand: DRAMER

Page

314

CAMPAIGNED HOBBY SETS Powerful 135 Watt Motor - 32.000 m/min Cycle Adjusted Leveling and Polishing Kits, 50 Piece Rotary Tool Set with Plastic Carrier Bag.

MOTOR / SPEED PEDAL In addition, spares are available.

Cable system is included. Order

Product

BM...W Foot Switch

At order: Specify current motor watt.

HOBBY LEVELLING / POLISHING SET 200 Pieces various drilling - cutting whetting- grinding - polishing kits in wood box. Products: Mannesman / Germany branded.

Plier :2.35/3.0 Pneumatic, Precision-Rotary Machine

SPARES

Stroke: 0.30 Precision Pneumatic Filing Machine Standard Accessories

Capacity

Speed m/m Machine Dimensions Weight

2.35 / 3

60.000

Ø 17 x 159 L

130 gr.

Plier : 3.0 mm Pneumatic, Precision-Rotary Machine

AG-360 Mounted Point/Felt/Brush/Diamond Burr etc. Capacity

Speed m/m Machine Dimensions Weight

3.0 mm

60.000

Ø 20 x 160 L

140 gr.

Plier : 3 / 6 Pneumatic, Precision-Rotary Machine

Standard Accessories

Capacity

Speed m/m Machine Dimensions Weight

3 - 6 mm

35.000

Ø 22 x 180 L

170 gr.

Plier : 3.0 mm Rotary Grinding Machine with Plier NAK-A 900

AR - 664 AR - 030 AR-030 Ceramic Stone / Diamond Riffler/ Flat Felt 1 mm AR - 070 AR - 665 SAR - 070 Stroke Speed m/m Machine Dimensions Weight 3 mm AR 300 0.30 mm 40.000 Ø 28 x 200 L 200 gr. Ceramic Polishing Stone AR - 991 Stroke: 0.70 Precision Pneumatic Filing Machine Holder Optional Standard Accessories

AR - 662 Dia. 3.0 mm

Ceramic Stone Holder

Order

Set

AR-070 Ceramic Stone / Diamond Riffler/ Flat Felt AR - 030 AR - 662 AR - 070 Stroke Speed m/m Machine Dimensions Weight Circular SAR - 070 0.70 mm 35.000 Ø 28 x 200 L 200 gr. Ceramic Stone Holder Stroke: 3.0 Precision Pneumatic Filing Machine 3 x 100 Optional AR - 666

AR-300: EXTRA LONG STROKE Economic Priced Plastic Boxed Set at extra high speed, high torque - polishing, levelling works.

Standard Accessories

AR - 667 6.3 x 13 mm

Polishing Stone/ Felt Holder

Order

Set

AR-300

Polishing Stone/Ceramic Stone/Diamond Riffler

Stroke Speed m/m Machine Dimensions Weight AR - 666 AR - 030 6.3 x 13 AR - 070 3.0 mm 10.000 Ø 23 x 200 L 250 gr. AR - 667 AR - 300 Stroke: 7.0 Precision Pneumatic Filing Machine 3.2 x 13 SAR - 070 Gas Stone AR - 991 Holder Optional

NAK-A 450

i mic m E ici eşi ılEıffm TitritreşiKm Kılı

Standard Accessories

At both models, 3.0 mm plier and grinding equipment AGC-01 AGS-01 AGP-01

NAK-A 450 NAK-A 900 Mounted Point /Felt /Brush etc Capacity

Speed m/m Machine Dimensions Weight

Grinding Wheel /Emery Disc

Order

Set

3 / Ø 30 35.000 NAK 45 18 x 160 190 gr. AGC -01 NAK - A 45 NAK - A 90 3 / Ø 30 35.000 NAK 900 18 x 155 185 gr. AGS -01 AG - 45 PNEUMATIC, PRECISION-ANGULAR, AND FLAT GRINDING MACHINE AGP -01 AG - 90 Ø 30 mm Optional 0

Stroke

0.70 mm

AG - 45

Speed m/m Machine Dimensions Weight

15.000

Ø 18 x 180 L

Standard Accessories

AG - 450 AG 450 - AG 900 At both models, Grinding Equipments

SAR 070: VERTICAL MOTION Economic Priced Plastic Boxed Set at extra high speed, high torque polishing, levelling works.

SAR-070 Polishing Stone/Ceramic Stone/Diamond Riffler

AG - 900

Standard Accessories

AR-070: LONG STROKE Economic Priced Plastic Boxed Set at extra high speed, high torque polishing, levelling works.

AG-460 Mounted Point/Felt/Brush/Diamond Burr etc.

1 - 3 mm Ceramic Stone Holder Order Set

c Emi şim Titre Kılıf

AG - 460: POWERFUL SPIRAL Economic Priced Plastic Boxed Set at extra high speed, high torque polishing, levelling works.

AR-030: SHORT STROKE Economic Priced Plastic Boxed Set at extra high speed, high torque polishing, levelling works.

ici EEmmici eşişmim TitTritre KKııllııff

AG - 360: ROTARY SPIRAL Economic Priced Plastic Boxed Set at extra high speed, high torque polishing, levelling works.

Standard Accessories

AR - 665

ici

AG-260 Mounted Point/Felt/Brush/Diamond Burr etc.

AR - 664

Em şim Titre Kılıf

AG - 260: ROTARY SPIRAL Economic Priced Plastic Boxed Set at extra high speed, high torque polishing, levelling works.

Standard Accessories

AG - 90

Grinding Stone /Emery Disc

Pneumatic Tool Holder Plier

Order

Set

Capacity

Speed m/m Machine Dimensions Weight

Dia. 3 mm

Ø 30 Ø 30

23.500 AG 450 Ø 17 x 153 180 gr. 23.500 AG 900 Ø 17 x 140 170 gr.

0 Dia. 6 mm NAK 90

AG - 676 Plier

NAK 450

Optional

Stroke: 0.6 Handle Type Precision Filing Machine AR 991: HANDLE MODEL Economic Priced Plastic Boxed Set at extra high speed, high torque polishing, levelling works.

AG - 672 / 673 / 676 Dia. 2.35 - 3 and 6 mm

AG - 672 AG - 260 Dia. 2.35 AG - 360 AG - 673 AG - 460

250 gr.

AR - 991 Polishing Stone/Ceramic S/ Diamond Riffler/Felt Stroke

0.60 mm

Speed m/m Machine Dimensions Weight

4500 Reliable Label

Ø 30x140x206 660 gr.

Page

315

Moulder Mill, Order Information: Technical Drawing Example

L1 L Dimensioning information at the order table As per request: Cutting Geometries

6 mm 4 mm 3 mm

Tungsten, Diamond Carbide Mill

HARD METAL ( DIAMOND ) MILLS

Complete Hard Metal, 3 and 6 mm Moulder Type Levelling and Deburring Mills Kits not polluting environment (Dusty Emery process etc. ) is used at works such as large size (6 mm) tool levelling, precision points (opening runner etc.) inside of small size (3 mm) tool mould , also deburring processes. While working : Cutting chip flow direction with protective cover is required, to avoid splashing of burr, face protector shield or protective glasses should be used. Cutting kits : The length inside of plier should be kept moderately (Shaft should be 3/1) Working Speeds : Should be according to processing experience and materials. At electrical or pneumatic rotary machines and generally deburring processes generally using hand power and rotary speed, mounting and use should be made carefully and should comply with the recommended speed. Our options compared to similar products, have longer life and more variety, creating usage advantages. In addition, kits are available for levelling of welding bent and welding place. (At circular channels and bevelling processes, smoothing of mouth of pipe, chamfering of mouth of pipes, propeller channel, EDM copper processes and so on.) At harder materials, slow speeds can reach to higher speeds for small complex processes, during usage continuous motion and light pressure can be applied. At application lower than required speed and pressing higher, abrasion can occur at the mouth of mill, very high temperatures should be prevented. (This case affects the connection solder of head. ) "U" shaped mill kits, shaves as chips during cutting, it should be handled carefully. Important Safety Instructions!!!

Wear ear protector ! Face Protector Shield should be used. Wear non skid gloves. Definitely wear protective glasses. Pls. comply with working speed instructions. Note: To prevent choking of threads while processing quite difficult materials, using cutting oil, grease, gas oil and chalk is recommended.

Page

316

It removes impact resistant high burrs, Shaft : Shaft : Shaft : creates high surface quality.

TYPE B TYPE A TYPE C TYPE D Type A : With its cross cut geometry, it is ideal for

high coarse metal removing at cast iron steel > 60 HRC, Stainless Steel, Nickel-Based Alloys and Titanium Alloys. Type B : To obtain smooth surface and high coarse metal removing, it is suitable at cast iron steel > 60 HRC, Stainless Steel, Nickel-Based Alloys and Titanium Alloys. Type C : It is suitable to use at coarse processing of light metals, plastics, non-Ferrous Metals, aluminium, intermediate grade steel and cast iron. Type D : Precision Milling Attitude creates shorter chips. Thanks to excessive impact resistance, it has high contact angle. It is suitable to use coarse processes of cast iron steel > 55 HRC, Stainless Steel, Nickel-Based Alloys and Titanium Alloys with high metal removing. Cutting Speed According to Material Groups Material

Application Cutting Speed

Steels up to 38 HRC. Without heat treatment Steels up to 38 HRC. With heat treatment Stainless, ( Inox ) Austenitic - Fernitic Non-Ferrous Metals Aluminium, Brass Cast Iron Heat Treated, Grey

Coarse Processing 450-600 m/min. Fine Processing 500-600 m/min. Coarse Processing 250-300 m/min. Fine Processing 350-450 m/min. Coarse Processing 250-350 m/min. Fine Processing 350-450 m/min. Coarse Processing 250-350 m/min. Fine Processing 350-450 m/min. Coarse Processing 450-600 m/min. Fine Processing 500-600 m/min.

Recommended Cutting Speed /Cycle (m /min.) Tool Dia.

250

2 mm 40.000 3 mm 27.000 4 mm 20.000 6 mm 13.000 8 mm 10.000 10 8.000 12 7.000 16 5.000 20 4.000

300 350 400 Cycle ( RPM ) 48.000 32.000 24.000 16.000 12.000 10.000 8.000 6.000 5.000

56.000 37.000 28.000 19.000 14.000 11.000 9.000 7.000 6.000

Application Examples:

64.000 42.000 32.000 21.000 16.000 13.000 11.000 8.000 6.000

500 80.000 53.000 40.000 27.000 20.000 16.000 13.000 10.000 8.000

It is for * Deburring * Contouring * Peripherical and face milling * Narrow angular surface milling * Milling for weld preparation * Milling of weld surface.

Advantages :

Cylindrical Mill According to Din 8033 Order SA.42(Type) SA.43(Type)

SA.14(Type) SA.1 (Type) SA.3 (Type)

SA.5 (Type)

Code : SA

2.5

Type

3.0

5.0

6.0

9.5

12.7

Also it cuts from front

It removes burrs at side and inner Shaft : Shaft : Shaft : surfaces, creates high 6 mm 6 mm 3 mm surface quality.

Tungsten, Diamond Carbide Mill

Code : SB

Head Cutter Cylindrical Mill Order

SB.42(Type) SB.43(Type)

SB.14(Type) SB.1 (Type) SB.3 (Type)

SB.5 (Type)

2.5

Type

3.0

5.0

6.0

9.5

12.7

It removes burrs at side and inner Shaft : Shaft : Shaft : surfaces, creates high 6 mm 4 mm 3 mm surface quality.

Tungsten, Diamond Carbide Mill Head Cutter Cylindrical Mill Order SC.42(Type)

SC.42ML2 Provides high concentricity * Smooth working performance. SC.14(Type) * Delete chatter marks. SC.1 (Type) * Reduces tool/machine abrasion. SC.3 (Type) * Allows user to work more safely. * Increases tool life and metal removing performances. SC.5 (Type)

Code :

Type

3.0

5.0

6.0

9.5

12.7

It creates smooth surfaces, ball shaped Shaft : Shaft : Shaft : combination for round 6 mm 4 mm 3 mm ended surfaces.

Tungsten, Diamond Carbide Mill Ball Shaped Carbide Mills Order

SD.41 (Type) SD.42 (Type)

SD.14 (Type) SD.1

(Type)

SD.2

(Type)

SD.3

(Type)

Code :

Type

2.5

2.3

3.0

2.5

5.0

Shaft : 6 mm

For improving narrow, long corners and at thin narrow/ threaded channels.

Shaft : 3 mm

Tungsten, Diamond Carbide Mill Conical Pointed End Mill Order

SG.41 (Type)

SG.43 (Type)

4.0

SG.1

(Type)

6.0

5.0

SG.2

(Type)

8.0

6.4

(Type)

9.5

8.0

SG.5 SG.6

(Type)

Code :

Type

3.0

6.0

3.0

9.5

6.0

Shaft : 6 mm

Tungsten, Diamond Carbide Mill Order

SL.41 (Type)

SL.42 (Type)

SL.1

(Type)

SL.2

(Type)

SL.4

(Type)

SL.6

(Type)

Code :

Type

3.0

9.5

3.0 12.7

6.0

Flattened Ended, Wood Type

12.7

With hole chamfers, on surfaces of radius precision figures.

Shaft : 3 mm

12.7

Reverse Conical Mill

Shaft : 6 mm

Processing inside of round & pipe type holes and etc.

Shaft : 3 mm

Tungsten, Diamond Carbide Mill Code :

Type

Flame Shaped Mill Order

SE.41 (Type) SE.41ML SE.1

(Type)

SE.3

(Type)

SE.5

(Type)

SE.6

(Type)

Shaft : 6 mm

Tungsten, Diamond Carbide Mill Oval Shaped Mill Order

3.0

5.5

3.0

5.5

6.0

9.5

SH.1

(Type)

SH.2

(Type)

SH.5

(Type)

SH.6

(Type)

9.5

12.7

Processing bottom spaces of oval shaped figures and at round surfaces.

Shaft : 3 mm

SH.41 (Type) SH.41ML

Code :

Shaft : 6 mm

Tungsten, Diamond Carbide Mill

Head Cutting, Reverse Conical Mill Code : SN

Type

Order

3.0

6.3

3.0

6.3

SN.51 (Type)

6.0

9.5

SN.1

(Type)

SN.4

(Type)

SN.6

(Type)

SN.7

(Type)

8.0

12.7

Reverse conical type to work at hard-to-reach rear sides surfaces.

Shaft : 3 mm

SN.41 (Type)

2.5

3.0

6.3

6.0

8.0

12.7 12.7

ANGLE 600 Type : B - C

Shaft : 6 mm

Processing of corners, bottom of round figures and surfaces

Shaft : 3 mm

Tungsten, Diamond Carbide Mill

Radius End, Conical Carbide Mill Code : SF Order

SF.41 (Type) SF.42 (Type) SF.1

(Type)

SF.3

(Type)

SF.4

(Type)

SF.6

(Type)

Shaft : 6 mm

ANGLE 900 Type : B - C

It is to open countersunk and to chamfer with specific end angles.

Shaft : 3 mm

Tungsten, Diamond Carbide Mill d

3.0

2.5

SJ.1

(Type)

6.0

4.0

SJ.3

(Type)

9.5

8.0

SJ.5

(Type)

12.7

(Type)

16 14.5

SJ.6

SJ.7

(Type)

6.0

3.0 12.7

6.0

9.5

Type

Shaft : 6 mm

Shaft : 3 mm

It is to open countersunk and to chamfer with specific end angles.

Tungsten, Diamond Carbide Mill

ANGLE 600 Conical Moulder Type Mill Code :SJ ANGLE 600 Conical Moulder Type Mill Code : SK

SJ.42 (Type) 3

3.0

Type

Order

17.5

Type

SK.42 (Type) 3 SK.1 (Type) SK.3 (Type) 6 SK.6 (Type)

3.0 6.0 9.5 16

1.5 3.0 4.7 8

A B C D

Order

50 52 57

Page

317

Sand: # 150-200-400

Sheet Bar /Feather Diamond File 10 Pcs. Different Sandy Series

DIAMOND / CBN MILLS WITH Electrolysis Connector Sharp, Super Hard Abrasive Mould Parts, Maximum Cutting

Order :

These abrasive particles created with well screened diamond and electrolysis connector come outside from connector by leaving wide chip spaces that prevents the rise of kits even at high metal removing ranges. It is used at mould processing, mostly polishing runners or levelling other channels / holes, areas making burrs / final polishings. D Full Length 45 mm L

Diamond, Precision Riffler In Tool Making Applications

Shaft 3 mm

Order 10A

15A

20A

25A

30A

35A

40A

50A

30V

D x L 1x8 1.5x8 2x8 2.5x8 3x10 3.5x10 4x10 5x10 3x10 D

TPF 10E

Economic Riffles using with hand at mechanics requiring general sensitivity Sheet Bar Type Diamond Riffler Shank L1

Retta Diamond Riffler Set

6 Pcs. Different Types, Standard Serie

Order :

RKE 1005

L Order

Shank d x L1 x L

ELE-140 ELE-160 ELE-200

Ø4 5x 70 x140 Ø5 8x 50 x160 5.5 8x 70 x200

Half Round Diamond Riffler 20B

30B

50B

15C

20C

25C

30C

35C

40C

50C

Ø2

Ø3

Ø 5 1.5x8 2 x 8 2.5x8 3x10 3.5x10 4x10 5x10

Order

Shank d x L1 x L

EYY-140 EYY-160 EYY-200

Ø4 5x 70 x140 Ø5 7x 50 x160 5.5 8x 70 x200

Economic Diamond File Set 10 Pcs. Different Types, Standard Serie

Order :

Round Diamond Riffler L Order 20F

30F

50F

20P

30P

15R

20R

30R

20T

30T

2x10 3x10 5x10 2x12 3x15 1.5x10 2x12 3x14 2x10 3x10

40Q

30S

40S

30D

4x7

3x6

4x8

30x0.5

Ø 18 Disc Ø 25 Disc 3-Chuck

886L

86L

8x8

Ø8

Lenght : 52

L Shaft : 6 mm

Lenght : 52

Shaft : 6 mm

Diamond Cutting Disc CBN

Shank

C 270 - 13710

d x L1 x L

EYE-140 Ø4 Ø3x 70 x140 EYE-160 Ø5 Ø4x 50 x160 EYE-200 5.5 Ø4x 70 x200 Square Diamond Riffler Order

Shank

d x L1 x L

DEE-140 Ø4 3.0x 70 x140 Economic Diamond File Set DEE-160 Ø5 3.6x 50 x160 10 Pcs. Different Types, Thick DEE-200 5.5 3.6x 70 x200 and Long Serie Triangle Diamond Riffler Order

Shank

Order :

C 270 - 13711

d x L1 x L

UEE-140 Ø4 3.7x 70 x140 UEE-160 Ø5 5.0x 50 x160 UEE-200 5.5 5.0x 70 x200 BMS 30 30 Pcs. Diamond CBN Set

T30 30 Pcs. Economic CBN Set Code: 1739 Code: 1738 Code: 1737

C280-000 T20 20 Pcs.Economic CBN Set BMS 30 20 Pcs. Diamond CBN Set

Page

318

C280-300 13739 Economic 50'Piece Ø 3mm CBN Set

Riffler Cleaning Brushes Soft, Lined Brass Wired Order

1737 1738 1739

Products

Beta File Brush 4 Row Soft Brush Metal Hard Brush

Economic Diamond Riffler Set 6 Pcs.Different Types, Files One Sided C 270 - 13726 Double Sided C 270 - 13727

THICK TYPE DIAMOND RIFFLER Sheet Bar Feathered/ Conical - Wide In Tool Making Applications with Hand a 3 Different Dimensional Model LARGE TYPE - DIAMOND FILE SET b b Sand : # 100 5 P. Different Type Sheet Bar / Feather Thick, Forging Shank-Non Skid, PVC Coated Set Content: Order

a b (Angular) Length

L1 60 mm CF-502 8.2 0.60-2.40 L CF-501 10.2 0.70-2.60 180 mm

CF-503 6.1 0.60-2.40

Sand : # 100 / # 200

Length: 180 - Filing: 70 - Width: 2.8 mm Length: 180 - Filing: 60 - Width: 2.5 mm Length: 180 - Filing: 60 - Width: 2.5 mm Length: 180 - Filing: 50 - Width: 2.0 mm Length: 180 - Filing: 50 - Width: 2.2 mm

Order :

CURVED- DIAMOND FILE SET 6 Different Model Moulder Type Oval

Sheet Bar

Square

Triangle

Dimension

End Dia. :5.2

Half Round - Wide Model Thick, Forging Shank

Order Shank

Dimension End : 9 x 4

IF 502 11 x4 Length: 80 x 215

Hand / Sheet Bar - Wide Model Thick, Forging Shank

Order Shank

5 P. Thick Type Sheet Bar, Forging Shank Set Content:

Sand : # 100

Length: 215 - Filing: 80 - Width: 5.2 mm Length: 215 - Filing: 80 - Width: 9.0 mm

Sheet Bar Type : # 200 Sand 4 x 180 mm Half Round

: # 200 Sand 4 x 180 mm

Round Type

: # 200 Sand 4 x 180 mm

Square Type

: # 200 Sand 4 x 180 mm

Triangle Type : # 200 Sand 4 x 180 mm : # 200 Sand 4 x 180 mm

Length: 215 - Filing: 80 - Width: 8.0 mm

Sheet Bar

: # 400 Sand 4 x 180 mm

Length: 180 - Filing: 50 - Width: 2.2 mm

Sheet Bar

: # 600 Sand 4 x 180 mm

Round

: # 400 Sand 4 x 180 mm

IF 50

IF 505

MACHINE; DIAMOND RIFFLER SET 5 Pieces Different Size 3 mm Shank Sheet Bar

Oval

Half Round

Square

Round

Shank: 3 mm Length: 90 mm

Order :

Four Sided Filing

SHEET BAR / ANGULAR DIAMOND FILE SET

CURVED, MACHINE DIAMOND RIFFLER SET 5 Pieces Different Size 3 mm Shank

MOULDER TYPE, DIAMOND RIFFLER SET End : 8 x 8 12' P. Large- Different Sand / Size 12 Pcs. Sheet 4 Different Model,10 Pieces -With Holder Length: 80 x 215 11 x4 Set Content : Sand : # 150 Bar Sheet Bar

Square- Wide Model, Hand Type Thick, Forging Shank

Order Shank

Dimension

End : 6 x 6 IF 504 6 x 6 Length: 80 x 215

MPF - 10

PFL 100 Shank: 3 mm

Thick, Forging Shank

Dimension

MTF - 100

Diamond Riffler, Drill Chuck Holder

Triangle - Wide Model, Hand Type

Angle Conical

# 200 # 400

Sheet Bar: 6 / 4 / 2 x 0.5 x130 mm # 200 Sand

Sheet Bar: 6 / 4 / 2 x 0.5 x130 mm # 400 Sand

4 Pcs. # 150 + 4 Pcs. # 200 + 4 Pcs. # 400 Sheet Bar: 6 / 4 / 2 x 0.5 x130 mm # 600 Sand

Order :

CF 400

Shank: 3 mm

Round: 0.6 x 130 mm

Order :

# 600 Sand

PTF - 10T

# 200 -400 -600 # 200 -400 -600 # 200 -400 -600 # 200 -400 -600

Four Sided Filing

Ladder Sheet Bar : # 200 Sand 4 x 180 mm

Order :

Dimension

Order :

7 Precision Different Model 10 Pieces

Oval Type

Order :

6 x 0.5 x 73 mm : 3 Pieces 3.3 x 0.5 x 73 mm : 3 Pieces 6 x 0.5 x 56 mm : 3 Pieces 3.3 x 0.5 x 56 mm : 3 Pieces

MOULDER TYPE, DIAMOND RIFFLER

Length: 215 - Filing: 80 - Width: 11 mm

End : 11 x 4 IF 501 11 x4 Length: 80 x 215

Order Shank

Round

BF 800

Order :

CF 50

IF 503 5 x 5 Length: 80 x 215 LARGE TYPE - DIAMOND FILE SET

Shank: 3 mm

Hooked

Angular / Conical Sheet Bar: Sand Fineness:

Thick, Forging Shank

Order Shank

MACHINE; DIAMOND FILE SET 12 Pieces Sheet Bar Different Sand/Size

Shank: 3 mm

THICK TYPE DIAMOND RIFFLER Round - Wide Model, Hand Type

Four Sided Filing

Triangle

Half Round Shank: 3 mm

Square

Order :

Round Length: 85 mm

MBF - 60

Diamond Riffler Drill Chuck Holder

THICK & SHANK, Fitter Type, Small Model Diamond Riffler

BLOCK ABRASIVE CLEANER

Ergonomic Shank

Order Length Width-Thickness 100 12.2 x 3.5 mm HX 4 4" Fitter Type, Large Model Riffler SHEET BAR / ANGLE - PVC SHANK, SET 10 Pcs. - Shank 3 - Different Sand / Size

Ergonomic Shank Order

HX 10

Length Width-Thickness

250 18.5 x 4.5 mm 10"

FLEXIBLE SHEET BAR DIAMOND RIFFLER SET

With Manual Holder or Machine 5 Pcs # 200 Sand + 5 Pcs # 400 Sand

Order :

Red : # 200 Sand Yellow : # 400 Sand Green : # 600 Sand

Order :

PTF 100

Levelling - Polishing - Whetting on Surfaces by Removing Fine Chips Block Size: 50 x 20 x 80 mm Red : 36 Sand Flex/Elastic Blue : 60 Sand Polishing Rubber Black : 120 Sand Super Eraser Brown : 240 Sand

Order :

FAS - 400

KS... Sand Page

319

LATHE FILES - Fitter Rifflers

SHEET BAR / HAND Type - Fitter Rifflers

Opposite direction of front and rear side cutting ( Single ) increases safety by forcing file to keep away from lathe chuck during lathe works. Fine Thread: Precision Filing Turned Parts, Two Side Cutting, Two Side Non Cutting Eye-San Brand Lathe Rifflers / Shaft Rifflers Order Size Tooth a b L

b a L Coarse Tooth: Metal Removing, Deburring Medium Tooth: General Surface Processing, Leveling Fine Tooth: Precision Filing, pre touch smoothing Sheet Bar (Pls. specify tooth at order) Eye-San Brand Order Size Tooth a b L

Rectangular Riffler, Pirivana, 2 Side Cutting

PRECISION NEEDLE RIFFLERS In Tool Making Applications It is ideal to work at smallest surfaces, volumes, profiles and angles, thanks to forging privana, can be used with or without shank. Sheet Bar Type Needle File Shank

MTE 100 4" Coarse MTE 150 6" Medium Fine, MTE 200 8" MTE 250 10" as per MTE 300 12" request

10 16 20 25 30

LHE 100 4" Coarse 10 LHE 150 6" Medium 16 Fine 20 200 LHE 200 8" LHE 250 10" as per 25 250 LHE 300 12" request 30

2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.5

150

300

Square Rifflers, Pirivana, 3 Side Cutting

L Order Shank SYY 140 SYY 160

Ø 3

axb

5.0 x 1.75 140 5.5 x 2.0 160

Round Needle Riffler

Processing 3 Side Operation

a L

Ø 3

1.1 x 2.8 140 1.2 x 3.0 160

Square Needle Riffler

Ø 3

1.3 x 2.5 140 1.4 x 2.7 160

Triangle Needle Riffler

4 Side Operation

KTE 150 KTE 200 KTE 250 KTE 300

Ø 3

1.0 x 3.2 140 1.3 x 3.4 160

Code: 1737 Code: 1739

File Cleaning Brush 1737 1738 1739

Page

320

Product

Model

Beta Riffler Brush Soft 4 Row Soft Brush Brass Wire Metal Hard Brush In line

Size Tooth

4" Coarse 10 6" Medium 16 8" Fine, 20 10" as per 25 12" request 30

3.3 5.0 6.0 7.0 9.0

100 150 200 250 300

Round Type, Pirivana, 3 Side Cutting

L Order

Size Tooth

ALE 250 10" 25 Coarse ALE 300 12" 30

a b

6.0 250 6.5 300

Coarse Thread: Levelling inner radius, deburring Medium Thread: General Surface Processing, Circular Leveling Fine Thread: Precision Filing, pre touch smoothing Round (Pls. specify tooth at order) Eye-San Brand

Order

Size

YTE 100 YTE 150 YTE 200 YTE 250 YTE 300

4" 6" 8" 10" 12"

Tooth

Coarse Ø 4 Medium Ø 6 Fine Ø 8 as per, Ø10 request Ø12

4.0 6.3 8.0 10 13

100 150 200 250 300

TRIANGLE Type - Fitter Rifflers Triangle Type, Pirivana, 3 Side Cutting

ESD

ESY

Needle Riffler

PLASTIC - PLUG IN RIFFLER SHANKS

Ergonomic - Ideal Coating - Hard / Stable

Code: 1738

Order

YYE 100 YYE 150 YYE 200 YYE 250 YYE 300

3 Side Operation

Coarse Thread: Metal Removing, Deburring Medium Thread: General Surface Processing, Circular Leveling Fine Thread: Precision Filing, pre touch smoothing H.Round (Pls. specify tooth at order) Eye-San Brand

Rectangular Riffler, Open Toothed 3 Side Cutting

L Order Shank a(Conical) L Processing SUE 140 SUE 160

6.3 4.0 100 Coarse 6" Medium 11 6.0 150 Fine 14 8.0 200 8" 10" as per 17 10 250 request 12" 20 12 300 ROUND Type - Fitter Files

KTE 100

All Side Operation

L Order Shank a(Conical) L Processing SKE 140 SKE 160

Size Tooth

Herring bone riffler, Pirivana, 3 Side Cutting

Shank, Sheet Bar - ALUMINIUM RIFFLERS

Order Shank a(Conical) L Processing SYE 140 SYE 160

Order

100 150 200 250 300

HALF ROUND - Fitter Files

Coarse Tooth: Square file, conical, pirivana, four sided cutting Order Shank a x b L Processing Medium Tooth: Filing of square shapes, deburring SLE 140 Ø 5.5 x 1.35 140 4 Side Fine Tooth: Precision filing, pre touch smoothing, Operation 3 SLE 160 6.2 x 1.45 160 ( Pls. specify thread at order ) Eye-San Brand

Half Round Needle Riffler

2.5 4.0 5.0 6.5 7.0

100

SQUARE Type - Fitter Rifflers

Rectangular File, Pirivana, 3 Side Cutting

Coarse Tooth: Metal Removing, Deburring Ergonomic - Ideal Coating - Hard / Stable Protects hands from Medium Tooth: General Surface Processing, Leveling sharp edges and corners, angular ring is prevented sliding of Fine Tooth: Precision Filing, pre touch smoothing files. Make selection according to the file type and size. Sheet Bar (Pls. specify tooth at order) Eye-San Brand

Order

ESY 4 / 6 ESY 08 ESD 10 ESD 12 Needle Riffler

Type

Model

File Size

Order

4" 6" 8" 10" 12"

UTE 100 UTE 150 UTE 200 UTE 250 UTE 300

All Model Needle Rifflers

Size Tooth

4" Coarse Ø 4 4.0 100 6" Medium Ø 6 6.3 150 Fine, Ø 8 8.0 200 8" 10" as per Ø10 10 250 12" request Ø12 13 300

RSH - 4

RSH - 3

RSH - 2

RSH - 1

NEEDLE RIFFLER SETS

CBN DIAMOND COATED STRIP

HAND TYPE-CBN DIAMOND COATED RIFFLER In Tool Making, Running and Polishing Levelling - Polishing - Whetting 12 Different Types 3 x 160 Needle Rifflers Order : BSE 12 -12 Pcs. Needle Riffles CBN Binding Diamond Powder Loaded Equipment are used to obtain and polish precision smooth surfaces from burr lines and other surface defects without irritating. With non abrasive surfaces of tool, long working life it provides clean and smooth final surface. It is for more harder / heat treated work pieces. In addition; it is excellent for whetting of cutting tools ( Scissor / Knife ). L b Triangle Round Square Sheet Bar H. Round

BAHCO - 12 Pcs Needle Riffler Set

BAHCO - 6 Pcs. Needle Riffler Set 6 Different Types 3 x 160 Fitter Rifflers

Order : BSE

06 - 12 Pcs. Needle Riffler

a HAND TYPE - CBN DIAMOND COATED RIFFLER Order

RSH 1 RSH 2 RSH 3 RSH 4

NEEDLE RIFFLER SET - 10 Pcs. Set 10Pcs. 3 x 140 Needle Riffler Different Model Presented

Order : SE10 10 Pcs. Needle Riffler

With the equipment to be created according to the work piece form that will be leveled or polished, a 10 x 2 x 40 #200 running in kit can be done by adhering on tool or 5 x 2 x 40 #400 Steel Shank using Double Sided 5 x R2.5 x 40 #800 Steel Shank Adhesive Band. They are flexible plates that are 10 x 2 x 30 #1200 Al. Shank saturated with intense diamond powder CBN system on flexible cloth. For polishing and running in, it is most economical and new product. It is possible to use with equipment by cutting plates with scissors in desired size as per request . Especially it is created very good surface brightness and leveling on hard and watery steel. The application can be done on sheet plate by using self adhesive tape or can be worked in tape belt shape. In addition; emery equipment can be created by adhering on pad / wedge. axbxL

Sand

Holder

Pls. Shank

CBN DIAMOND COATED STRIPS Sand Colour Number Code WOOD SHANK -5 Pics. NEEDLE RIFFLER SET Triangle

Round Square Sheet Bar

H. Round

4 x 160 Different Type Needle Riffler 5 Pcs.

RESO 105

Order :

Sheet Bar - Round - Square H. Round - Triangle - Knife Type

BETA / 6 Pcs. Needle Riffler Set Professional, High Quality Riffler Set

Order :

1720 B

PEN TYPE - EMERY EQUIPMENT

Pratic, Manual Use - All Purpose, Economic

It is wedge shaped and from plastic layer based flexible plastic material, it provides opportunity to use each places of emery by pressing tension spring and turning emery belt. In addition; grinding belt, Coarse Sand : # 180 and Fine Sand : # 320 can be purchased containing 10 pieces. Holder Length : 310 mm End : 7 mm Economic Product : It is suitable to use at areas that are hard to reach, with multi purpose usage area at hard works, it is most suitable equipment to use instead of file. Kit: AIt ticks all the boxes at your workshops / home, car / boats. Spring-Pls. Pen Equipment Spare Strip Emery with Holding Emery 10 Pcs. Packing

Order :

KZ 310

Order :

ZK 155

Order Metal Tie 50x100 100x100

# 120 Black

Nickel 512N

112X

# 200

Nickel 520N

120X

# 400 Yellow Nickel 540N

140X

# 600 White Nickel 560N

160X

Red

# 1000 Blue

Nickel 5100N 1100X

# 500 White Resiny 550R # 1000 Blue

150R

Resiny 5100R 1100R

Order Example : 50 x 100 mm Metal / Nickel Binding # 400 Sand ( Yellow) Cloth Band CBN Diamond Strip Order Code : 540 N or 100 x 100 mm Resin Binding, Clothed #1000 Sand (Blue) Cloth Band CBN Diamond Strip Order Code: 1100 R

Page

321

Type : Disc

Shaft : 6 mm

Type : Dish

Type : Pen

Drill Chuck Shaft: 3 mm

Conical Cartridge ROLL EMERY SET 6 mm SHANK - MOP EMERY It is created from spiral wrap abrasives During grinding, tool is kept in its place with grooved conical holder. It is ideal for grinding at limited and narrow areas. When the outermost coated abrasive is worn down, non worn abrasive found in lower layers appears. With 3 mm special holder for tool replacement thanks to very well metal removing performance (cloth emery), Application : Pls. always grind by using end instead of surface at places that are hard to reach, holes, weld cleaning, deburring. Pls. always use wound emeries in a way that adhesive side is facing the holder. During use, grinding oil protects the surface brightness and tool life. Wear protector glasses. Safe cutting speed is max. 11 m/s. Thread Drill Chuck: 3 mm Conical Roll Emery Order Roll Sand Order Holder

RZ.06 RZ.10 RZ.13 RZ.16 RZ.20

6x38 TM 03 3 x 30 10x38 # 80 TM 06 6 x 60 13x38 # 120 Note : At conical roll 16x38 # 220 emery orders, pls. 20x38 specify sand selection.

Drill Chuck Rubber Holder Clip -on Disc Emery

Industrial WIRE MOUNTED BRUSHERS

Axial, Slaty Emery, Array Set

Steel Wire / Inox Wire / Brass Wire

In uses with suitable machines, surface gloss and tool protecting are provided with grinding oil. In Application : Cutting speed as 15 -20 m / s is ideal. Precision grinding of circular surfaces provides ideal form to the work pieces contours. It is commonly used producing other tools and process equipment. During processing, it is recommended to use emery sand with coarse/fine settings instead of pressing more. Holder Shank Length, is 40 mm. Pls. wear protective glasses, ear protector and gloves.

Shank - Pen Brush : When brush is turned, wires or fringes are opened. Even at places that are hard to reach, it is ideal for deburring, cleaning, rust removing. Dish Wire Brush : It is for on-face applications in a way that all brush face is contacted to the work piece. It is for cleaning, rust removing and smoothing. Disc Wire, Mounted Brush: At general purpose cleaning, rust removing, smoothing, scale removing, weld smoothing, abrasion or coating removing, deburring at cast irons.

Order Size - Shaft x Dia x Length Sand MZ31515 Shank: 3.0 mm Ø 15 x 15

Order ShankxDia

CTF -17 6 x 17 CTF -25 6 x 25

MZ62520 Shank : 6.0 mm Ø 25 x 20 # 40

STF -30 6 x 30

CTF -30 6 x 30

MZ63010 Shank : 6.0 mm Ø 30 x 15 # 80 MZ63020 Shank : 6.0 mm Ø 30 x 20

Brass Wire Dish Brush

MZ62015 Shank : 6.0 mm Ø 20 x 15

MZ64015 Shank : 6.0 mm Ø 40 x 15 #120

Order ShankxDia

SCF -50 6 x 50

Steel Wire Dish Brush Order ShankxDia

CCF -50 6 x 50

MZ64030 Shank : 6.0 mm Ø 40 x 30 #180 SCF -75 6 x 75 CCF -75 6 x 75 MZ65020 Shank : 6.0 mm Ø 50 x 20 Brass Wire Disc Brush Steel Wire Disc Brush MZ65030 Shank : 6.0 mm Ø 50 x 30 #220 Order ShankxDia Order ShankxDia MZ66020 Shank : 6.0 mm Ø 60 x 20 #320 DTF -40 6 x 40 CDF -40 6 x 40 MZ68020 Shank : 6.0 mm Ø 80 x 20 MZ68040 Shank : 6.0 mm Ø 80 x 40

DTF -60 6 x 60

CDF -60 6 x 60

DTF-100 6 x 100

CDF-100 6 x 100

Holed Disc Emery Polishing ( polishing, varnishing) of parts that are hard to reach, pipe elbows, chamber bases (Concave and Surfaces, etc..) flexible supports, long life and high duty.

Fast, Clip on Disc Emery & Holder By turning metal threaded drill chuck and rubber pad bases binding to the center of clip on disc emery, it creates as excellent with retaning. The flexible base with vibrationless operation plunges on surface are avoided and presents fast disc replacement manually. They are used at rational grinding of surfaces, different contours, forming work piece / creating model.

Order

Dia x Hole

Sand

DDZ.30 DDZ.50

165 x 30 165 x 50

From # 40 Up to # 400

Pinned Holder Shaft: 6 Clip on Emery Disc Order Roll Sand Order Rubber

KZD.38 Ø 38 # 36 KLT.63 6 x38 KZD.51 Ø 51 # 80 KLT.65 6 x51 KZD.76 Ø 76 #120 KLT.67 6 x76 Fast, Clip On Set Pneumatic Machine 29 Pieces

Set Content : Pneumatic

Shank - Fibrous Fiber, Mop Emeries Abrasive fiber material is created with multi circular array. Tight winding of the layers provide long service life. These sets are mostly used for surface improvement processes.

Grinding m. 90º 10 Pcs. Mounted Points (3 / 6) Shank Fiber Mop 5 Pcs. Disc Emery (51) Order Shank 6 5 Pcs. Disc Emery (76) SEM.30 30 x30 2 Pcs Pinned Rubber Holder

322

Steel Wire Pen Brush

STF -25 6 x 25

Shaft: 3 mm

Page

Order ShankxDia

STF -17 6 x 17

MZ32020 Shank : 3.0 mm Ø 20 x 20

MZ66030 Shank : 6.0 mm Ø 60 x 40

Pinned Rubber Holder

Brass Wire Pen Brush

Order :

KZS 29 Set

SEM.40 SEM.50 SEM.60 SEM.80

40 50 60 80

x30 x30 x30 x30

Emery Fiber Mop Order Shank 6

ZEM.30 ZEM.40 ZEM.50 ZEM.60 ZEM.80

30 40 50 60 80

x30 x30 x30 x30 x30

Industrial - Perforated - Wire BRUSHES Steel Wire / Inox Wire / Brass Wire Pls. operate always under the brush center at fixed machines (Lathes grinders etc.). Short fringe brushes are fore more aggressive brushing - Long fringe brushes are provided to obtain flexible surfaces. By changing brush rotation direction, self whetting effect can be improved. To avoid adhesing scattered particles to the work piece, general cleaning of work piece should be done after brushing. High rotation speeds are increase brush performance. Tool contact pressure should be kept lower. Pls. take care to provide work piece contact only with wire ends. Pls. take care holder hole diameter.

Steel Wire Circle Brush Yellow Wire Circle Brush Order

DFC.100 DFC.150 DFC.175 DFC.200

Ø x Hole

100 150 175 200

x20 x25 x25 x25

Order

DFS.100 DFS.150 DFS.175 DFS.200

Ø x Hole

100 150 175 200

x20 x25 x25 x25

Dish Brush-Screwed Connection-Yellow / Steel Wire

Order : CFC 65 (M14 x 2 Ø 65 mm) - Yellow / Steel Order : CFC 80 (M14 x 2 Ø 80 mm) - Yellow / Steel

Perforated Fiber Cored Mop Emery

Coated Layer WATER EMERY

The structure of emery coated between fiber layers Layer Dim. : 230 x 280 mm. Latex Paper Plate is enables improved metal removing and is provided suitable to use at alloyed and unalloyed steels and non ferrous metals, extreme applications and to obtain more softer surface. general purpose usages. Order Dia. x Thickness x Hole Coarse Sand Surface Levelling / Smoothing

EZ16532 EZ16534 EZ16552 EZ16554

165 165 165 165

x x x x

30 30 50 50

x x x x

25 45 25 45

Sand 40 Size

100 120

Order (1 Layer) Sand Option

230 x SZ SZ SZ SZ SZ 280 # 40 # 60 # 80 # 100 # 120 Medium Sand Surface Levelling / Forming

Sand 150 180 220 280 320 Size

Fibrous Flap Disc

Emery Fiber

Fibrous and Emery Flap Discs At precision cleaning and grinding large surfaces, removing of colour change on surface resulting heat source, mounting of stainless steel and finishing works.

Order

Dia. x Hole

EDF.110 EZF.110

110 x 22 Fibrous Flap 110 x 22 Emery Fiber

Motor, Circular Fiber Mops Order

Dia. x Thickness x Hole

DEM.165 DEM.200

165 x 30 x 25 200 x 30 x 25

Wedged Fiber Mop and its Machine Order

Dia. x Thickness x Hole

KDE.100 GSI14CE

100 x 110 x 19 BOSCH - 1400 W

Fibrous Fiber Plates (Usage by cutting)

Hole is created by cutting circular and can be used as one after the other. At grinding of channels and contours. Order: EP 2328 COARSE or FINE and Dimension : 230 - 280 mm Coarse or fine.

Order (1 Layer) Sand Option

CLOTH ROLL EMERIESEMERIES Cutting as per request, Flexible Cloth Emeries It is suitable to grind all metal and material types manually. Tight Woven Soft Cloth, is two coat resinous with aluminium and oxide abrasives. To work with soft cloth emeries is easy by bending elastically, required roll lengths are cut as per request at varnishing and polishing processes, precision finishing of lathe pieces, mechanical works. Coarse Sand Surface Levelling / Smoothing

Sand 40

100 120

Order (Acc. to 1 Mt.) Sand Option

Width BZ BZ BZ BZ BZ 15 cm # 40 # 60 # 80 # 100 # 120

230 x SZ SZ SZ SZ SZ Medium Sand Surface Levelling / Forming 280 # 150 # 180 # 220 # 280 # 320 Sand 150 180 220 280 320

Fine Sand Final Surface Polishing Process

Sand 400 600 800 1000 1200 Size

Order (1 Layer) Sand Option

230 x SZ SZ SZ SZ SZ 280 # 400 # 600 # 800 1000 1200

Order (Acc. to 1 Mt.) Sand Option

Width BZ BZ BZ BZ BZ 15 cm # 150 # 180 # 220 # 280 # 320 Fine Sand Final Surface Polishing Process

Sand

400

600

800

Order (Acc. to 1 Mt.) Sand Option

Width 15 cm

BZ # 150

BZ # 180

BZ # 220

Spongebacked Water Emeries

Emery Width: 115 mm, Cutting as per request spongebacked emeries protect hands when used manually with its elasticity or can be used at vibrant / rotary machines, this product by laminating sponge at back of emery protects hand when used manually, and when used with machine plunges are avoided.

MACHINE, BAND EMERIES

According to the existing standard machines in market

Using suitable grinding oil at different materials increases Abrasion Performance and Tool Life of tools produced from coated abrasives Sand 150 220 280 320 400 substantially. It has highly abrasive performance, Size Order (Acc. to 1 Mt.) Sand Option high tension resistance and suitable flexibility, Perfect Particle Adhesion. 115 SM SM SM SM SM Cutting # 150 # 220 # 280 # 320 # 400 Order Information : Pls. specify width, length, material type, particle size ( sand fineness ) and machine type& brand to be used....!

MACHINE, BAND EMERIES Order

Sponged - Hand Type Water Emery Emery Size: 100 x 68 x 27 mm, Sponged Emery is flexible, sponged, soft and full elastic emery. Lower and upper sides as well as other sides of sponge are resin bonded with emery particles. It is used at all surfaces including curved and cambered surfaces. It is cleaned by shaking up and provides multi uses.

Sand 60 Size

115

100 150 220 320

Order (Acc. to Piece) Sand Option

EZ EZ EZ EZ EZ Cutting # 60 # 100 # 150 # 220 # 320

B610100 B1250100 B150050 B175050 B200050 B300050

Dimension /Measure

Sand

# 60 610 x 100 mm 1250 x 100 mm # 80 # 100 1500 x 50 mm # 120 1750 x 50 mm # 220 # 400 2000 x 50 mm As per 3000 x 50 mm Request

Page

323

Circular Vibrant Emery

Order :

05010

Continous Current : 220 W Current : 1.0 Ah Base Diameter : 123 mm Velcro Emery Abrasive Emery : 125 mm Vibration per Minute : 12.000 /min. Net Weight : 1.2 Kg. Dust Bag / Disc

VELCRO DISC EMERIES

It consists from aluminium oxide coated polyamide cloth. Perforated and unperforated types are available. Back of emery is velcro and insert rapidly to the similar pads as serial replacement.

Circular Vibrant Emery Cycle Adjusted

Order :

06030

Continous Current : 310 W Current : 1.4 Ah Base Diameter : 150 mm Velcro Emery Abrasive Emery : 150 mm Vibration per Minute : 4 Bin-10 Bin min. Net Weight : 2.3 Kg. Dust Bag / Disc

Perforated Type Ø 125 mm

Order

NNNNNN-

33393 33397 33401 33407 33411 33417

Sand

# 60 # 100 # 150 # 240 # 320 # 600

Perforated Type Ø 150 mm

Order

NNNNNN-

33461 33465 33469 33475 33485 33489

Sand

# 40 # 80 # 120 # 220 # 400 # 800

POLISHING SETS

Accessories for Electronic Polishing Machine 8 and 9 Pieces SetContents Polishing Polish 1 x Velcro Sponged Polishing Order : PC 1 x Support Disc Adhesive Pad 1 x Support Disc Rubber Pad 1 x Synthetic Hairy Order : PSK Polishing Cap 1 x Synthetic Wool Polishing Polishing Cap Cloths 3 x Velcro Flat Emery Order : PBK 1 x Velcro Polishing Discs Polishing SETS

Vibrant Sander Machine

Order

VELCRO DISC EMERIES Order :

B03710

Continous Current : 190 W Current : 0.9 Ah Base Diameter : 93 x185 mm Velcro Emery Abrasive Emery : 150 mm Vibration per Minute : 11.000 min. Net Weight : 1.5 Kg. Dust Bag/Emery

Electronic Polishing Machine

Flat Type / Disc Ø 115 mm

Order

NNNNNN-

33501 33505 33509 33515 33521 33525

Sand

# 40 # 80 # 120 # 220 # 320 # 400

Perforated Type Ø 150 mm

Order

NNNNNN-

33663 33667 33671 33677 33681 33683

Sand

# 60 # 100 # 150 # 240 # 320 # 360

N-3393 N-3395 N-3397 N-33999

Polishing Sisa Felt

Product

9 9 9 9

Pieces Pieces Pieces Pieces

Set Set Set Set

Acc. Acc. Acc. Acc.

to to to to

Ø Ø Ø Ø

115 125 150 180

mm mm mm mm

DUST / FUME PROTECTIVE MASK Order :

MX016160

MAX - EXTRA Continous Current : 1300 Watt Diameter : 180 mm Disc Base Abrasive Emery : 180 mm Electronic Cycle : 1.000 - 3.800 m / m Net Weight : 2.6 Kg. Polishing, Plush

VELCRO & ADHESIVE RUBBER DISC PAD Fast Emery Replacement Discs, Screwed Type - ECONOMIC

Velcro Disc /Pad

Adhesive Flat Pad

Order Type N-39051 115mm/ Flat N-39065 150/Perfor.

Order Type N-39071 115mm/ Flat N-39095 150/Perfor.

Order

Product

STM VTM

Yellow Dust Protective Face Mask Ventile White / Fume Protective

* Other Safety Equipment ( Gloves, Work Shoes, Helmet, Ear Plugs ), refet to Page 88.

CLEANING BRUSHES Order

TF-1 TF-2 TF-3 TKF1 SPT1 SPT2

Filing / Sanding Order :

9032

Band Emeries

Velcro Emeries

Decimal Packaged. Specify sand selection at order.

Product

No.1 Brush No.2 Brush No.3 Brush Pen Brush

Spacer Small Spacer Great

For 9032 Electrical Machine For B03710 Vibrant Machine

Page

324

SWDT 207

T28 093

Current : 2.3 Ah Continous Current : 500 Watt Band Measures : 9 x 533 mm Band Speed : 300 - 1700 m / min. Max. Sanding, Depth : 110 mm Net Weight : 1.5 Kg. Polishing, Plush

Band Emery Spares Velcro Emery Spares Order Size Sand Order Size Sand EFLD # # AAMINI FLASHLIGHT (Powerful Light) 93 x185 6 x533 34528 31295 60 60 Order Product AP9 x533 80 102x115 80 T28 093 9 Led, 52 gr. 92 cm, Flashlight 34453 01476 100 SWDT 207 100 Lumen, Clip on Flashlight 100 A794 13 x533 120 93 x228 120 Pocket Type, Punctuation Light EFLD 34578 561-7

Hand Magnifier

Large Model Inclined Type Vertical and Horizantal Angle Rotary Table It provides reaching of work pieces at every position in levelling and polishing processes and it has capacity to bind work piece up to 300 mm of rotary table surface that can be worked on it. In addition, by binding lathe chuck ( Up to ร 250 mm ) on plate, round / oval and complex 3 x Lensatic Bench Lamp For non reflected and smooth, illuminated work corner figured works can be connected. Mould Levelling and Polishing, Rotary Table places, monitoring of object by two eyes as 3 D with lamp - magnifying glass lens, free running, Order Table Bed Vertical Product spring mechanism, secured swivel arm.

VU - 300 (14951)

Dia.

300 mm

Height Height Weight

185 mm

170 mm

99.5 kg.

Pliers

Mob

Brush

Emery

File

Shank Stone

Rubber

Ceramic Ceramic Ceramic

UNIVERSAL ANGULAR ROTARY TABLE

Model

Mill

Pliers

Order :

ZLA ( Table Lamp )

Diamond Diamond Diamond Paste Paste

Felts

Gas Stone

Felts

Gas Stone

PLASTIC DRAWER KIT STAND

Transparent Boxes, Open Use - Locker

The materials used in polishing process, absolutely should be stored separately. In order not to mix tools and to protect regularly, we are recommended our stand.

22 Box Use Drawer Stand

Binocular, Head Magnifier

Mob

Adjustable band belts, ligth model - Foldable up - protects from reflected lights.

Small Model

Order :

SMALL T. ANGULAR ROTARY TABLE

It is in similar positions with above product to use in levelling and polishing processes. Smaller type is also presented economically.

Mould Levelling and Polishing Rotary Table Table Bearing Table Product Dia. Height Width Weight

VU - 100 (14948)

100 mm

117 mm

228 mm

13.5 kg.

VU - 200 (14950)

200 mm

177 mm

429 mm

46 kg.

Mini - Rotary / Angular Vacuumed Clamp Vacuumed Fixing system claws, plastic protected360ยบ rotary angular tipping, moving polishing and levelling at small work pieces. Order No : RMM0201

Claw Width: 65 mm Max. Mouth Opening :30 mm

Width xLength x Height

400 x 220 x 660

19 Box Use Drawer Stand Order

Width xLength x Height

HOBBY 113

400 x 220 x 500

HL09 ( Head magnifier ) Pocket Magnifier Light lens fixed magnifier, can be used as size 10 scales and thus measurement Loop. Scale Segmentation 0.1 mm / Length : 15 mm Aplanatic ( Size 10 ) Non Aspheric ( Size 4)

Inclined T. Vertical and Horizontal Angle Rotary Table

Order Model

Order

HOBBY 144

Order :

183303 ( Mitutoyo ) Sanitary Paper / Cloth Stand

Surface Control Mirror

Plastic framed mirror with holding shank is used to get images from areas that are hard to seem.

Order :

B1714 ( Beta )

Workman Goggles (Unnumbered) Order : KG01 ( Transparent Glasses )

Stand Dimension : 450 x 330 x 940 mm

Paper Towel : 1 Roll : 350 Mt. Width: 25 Cm Fast Break : 15 Cm ECONOMIC It is produced completely from cellulose and absorber. It is excellent for washing/ cleaning of solvents and cleaning of precision tools without leaving a trace. Does not leave feathers, not easily tearable, Practically Used Ready Stand. Product Order Paper Towel 350 Mt. x 25 cm P-350 Stand and Towel(Together) P-1000

Page

325

Curved Type

Flat Type

ALÜ.

Middle Stone

Combine - Grinding & Cutting GENERAL - CUTTING Stones ALUMINIUM - CUTTING Stones GRINDING AND SPLIT Stone 2 Processes With One Stone

General Purpose Steel / Cast

Both grinding and cuttin processes It is suitable for fixed cutting can be done at the same time without machine. At all metals and casts. changing stone. Max. 12.500 m / m Ø x Thickness x Hole Order Ø x Thickness x Hole 10840 300 x 3 x 25.4 Order

X3.12790 X3.12800 X3.12890

115 x 1.9 x 22 125 x 1.9 x 22 115 x 3.0 x 22

10850 10860 10870

300 x 3 x 30 350 x 2.5 x 25.4 350 x 3.5 x 30

Alloyed / Unalloyed Aluminiums

Order ØxThickness xHole Cycle

11100 180 x 3.0 x22 8500 11200 230 x 3.0 x22 8500 Thinline Fine Cutting Stone 11030 115 x 1 x 22 13300 11060 125 x 1 x 22 12500 11070 125 x 1.6 x22 12500

Flat Type

Curved Type

Order

12300 12310 12320

ØxThicknessxHole

150 x 2 x 20 175 x 2 x 20 190 x 2 x 28

Flat Type

Cutting / Splitting at Grinders

INOX EKR

SAW STONES

GENERAL-GRINDING Stone It is used at iron and steel metals.

General Purpose Cutting Stones Suitable for al metal materials

STAINLESS - Cutting Stones

For Inox and Nickel Bazes Alloys All metals and cast materials Order ØxThickness xHole Cycle ØxThickness xHole Cycle Order ØxThickness xHole Cycle 10540 100 x 6.4 x16 15300 Order

10550 10560 10570 10600

115 x 6.4 x22 125 x 6.4 x22 180 x 6.4 x22 230 x 8 x 22

13300 12250 8500 6650

1020 1030 1040 1050

115 125 180 230

x x x x

2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0

x20 x20 x22 x22

13300 12250 8500 8500

11190 10200 10210 10220

Thin Metals Cutting Stone

Curved Type Thinline Fine Stone-General Steels N K Order ØxThickness xHole Cycle

INOX GRINDING Stones It is for hard steel and stainless. Order ØxThickness xHole Cycle

10630 10640 10650 10660 10430

115 x 125 x 180 x 180 x 230 x

6.4 6.4 6.4 8 8

x22 x22 x22 x22 x22

10440 10450 10460 10470 10480

100 115 125 125 180

x x x x x

1.0 1.6 1.0 1.6 1.9

x22 x22 x22 x22 x22

13300 13300 12250 12250 8500

For PIN CUTTING and Grinding

115 125 180 230

x x x x

2.5 2.5 3.0 3.2

x22 x22 x22 x22

13300 12250 8500 6650

Order

13960 13940 14180 14280 14250 14350

Flat Type

Ø x Thickness x Hole

150 x 6 x 20 NK 60 150 x 10 x20 NK 80 175 x 8 x 20 EKR 60 200 x 8 x20 EKR 60 200 x10 x20 EKR 60 250 x10 x25 EKR 60 Conical

EKR

Gray CAST- CUTTING STONE DISH Grinding Stones

Special comfortable cutting for all casts It is for multi purpose usages. Order ØxThickness xHole Cycle Whetting- Grinding of Machines Belonging to

11690 100 x 2.5 x16 15300

13300 12250 8500 8500 6650

It is for whetting of disc and band saw.

10280 125 x 2.5 x22 12250 10290 180 x 3.0 x22 8500 10300 230 x 3.0 x22 6650

Order : JCO 355

Curved Type

Order

14100 14110 14120 14130 14140

Dimension

E - 50 Conical Stone E - 75 Conical Stone E - 100 Conical Stone E - 125 Conical Stone E - 150 Conical Stone Flat

EKR Flat Type

CAST- Grinding Stones

CUT & CUT

It is suitable for full cast resistant to Zircony Oxide abrasive. Order ØxThickness xHole Cycle 10780 115 x 7 x 22 13300 Fine / Steel, Cutting Stones 10790 125 x 7 x 22 12250 All Steels - INOX Materials Order ØxThickness xHole Cycle 10800 180 x 7 x 22 8500 10810 230 x 7 x 22 6650 11500 115 x 1.0 x22 13300 10510 115 x 1.6 x22 13300 Page 11520 125 x 1.0 x22 12250 11530 125 x 1.6 x22 12250

326

Flat DISH Grinding Stones It is for multi purpose usages.

JETCO

METAL CUTTING MACHINE

Economic with cutting stone Power : 2.000 Watt / 8.7 Ampere Speed : 3.800 cycle / min. Stone Size : Ø 355 x 3.5 x 25.4 mm Hub Shaft : (Stone Binding) : 25.4 mm Machine Weight : 19 Kg.

Whetting- Grinding of Machines Belonging to

Order

Dimension

14000 D - 50 Flat Stone 14010 D - 75 Flat Stone 14020 D - 100 Flat Stone 14030 D - 125 Flat Stone 14040 D - 150 Flat Stone

Electrical, ANGLE GRINDING

Curved Type Standard Model

Thickness : 0.8 mm Vulcanized Fiber

Conical Type As per request

FLAP ( Layered Emery ) Discs

FIBER / DISC EMERIES

It is for general steels and stainless materials

It shows a very good performance at aluminium oxide, produced with aluminium oxide abrasives. Max.speed should be 80 m /s. Does not heat up. A Type, General Purpose Coarse and Pre Levelling, Grinding Applications. In order to correct especially Order Ø x Hole Sand Fineness weld mistake areas that are hard to reach, it is for filler SC 115..Sand 115 x 22 40-60-100 metal - steels - inox / stainless material surfaces. Max. SC 125..Sand 125 x 22 150-220 Speed should be 50 m / s. 320-400 Pls. specify sand selection at order. SC 180..Sand 180 x 22 Sand Order Dimension

AFD100..Sand Ø 100 x Hole 16 AFD115..Sand Ø 115 x Hole 22 AFD125..Sand Ø 125 x Hole 22 AFD180..Sand Ø 180 x Hole 22

Thickness : 0.8 mm Vulcanized Fiber

#60 #80

Capacity : Order 125 mm GW5010 150 mm GW6010 Continous Current : 440 Watt Cycle : 4500 d /dak. Current: 1.9 Ah Weight : 1.1 Kg.

FIBER / DISC EMERIES

It is produced with silicon Carbide abrasives. It is suitable for non ferrous materials. Max. speed should be 80 m /s. Does not heat up. Order Ø x Hole Sand Fineness

Conical Type As per request

FLAP ( Layered Emery ) Discs

Zirconium, Aluminium Z Type Layered Emery provides high metal removing. It is for metal aluminium hard steels - stainless materials. Does not heat up, long life. Max. speed 50 m / s. Pls. specify sand selection at order. Order Dimension Sand

SC 115..Sand

115 x 22

SC 125..Sand

125 x 22

SC 180..Sand

180 x 22

ZR115..Sand Ø 115 x Hole 22 #40 #60 ZR125..Sand Ø 125 x Hole 22 #80 ZR180..Sand Ø 180 x Hole 22

40-60-100 150-220 320-400

GD0602

Order

Dimension

Ø 180 x Hole 22 # 40 - 60 - 80

400 Watt - 6 mm Plier Cycle 25.000 d / d

Electrical, MOULD GRINDING MACHINE

FIBER / DISC EMERIES

It is produced with zirconium abrasives and for General Product, general steels - stainless - aluminium. Max. speed should be 80 m /s. Does not heat up.

Ø x Hole Sand Fineness

SC 115..Sand

115 x 22

SC 125..Sand

125 x 22

SC 180..Sand

180 x 22

40-60-100 150-220 320-400

It is used as base to connect disc emeries to the related machine. Order Product / Dimension

PD115P PD180P

115 x Hole 22 Metal 180 x Hole 22 Metal

650 Watt - 6 mm Plier

Adjustable Cycle 10000-28.000 d/d

GD0601

400 Watt - 6 mm Plier Cycle 25.000 d / d

Electrical, MOULD GRINDING MACHINE Standard Type

Order

PLASTIC (Emery Binding) DISC

As per request 3 and 8 mm Pliers Mould Grinder

Order

GGS 28 LCE

FLAP ( Layered Emery ) Discs

INOX 115.. Sand

650 Watt - 6 mm Pensli

Adjustable Cycle 12000-28.000 d/d

Long Type

Conical Type As per request It is ideal for small and medium work pieces with high performance, fast process created especially for INOX / Stainless Materials. Max. Sheed should be 50 m / s. Pls. specify sand selection at order.

As per request 3 and 8 mm Pliers Mould Grinder

Order Thickness : 0.8 mm Vulkanize Fiber

Order

Curved Type Standard Model

Electrical, MOULD GRINDING

Short Type

GGS 28 CE

ZR100..Sand Ø 100 x Hole 16

Sand Selection

Bosch - Angle Grinding

Electrical, SANDING MACHINE

#40

Curved Type Standard Model

Order

115 mm 720 W 11.000 d/d GWS 7-115 125 mm 1200 Watt GWS 12-125 Adjustable Cycle 2800-11.000 d/d CIE 125 mm 1500 Watt GWS 11-125 Adjustable Cycle 2800-11.000 d/d CIE GWS 21-180H 180 mm 2100 W 8.500 d/d GWS 22-230H 230 mm 2200 W 6.500 d/d

GGS 8 CE GD0800C

As per request 3 and 8 mm Pliers Mould Grinder 750 Watt - 6 mm Plier Adjustable Cycle 2.500 - 8.000 d/d 750 Watt - 6 mm Plier Adjustable Cycle 7.000-28.000 d/d

Page

327

Air Gun For CNC

GISON 900

ECONOMIC SPECIAL OFFER W -1854

Air Protective Nozzle

T18617

T18605

T18660

PNEUMATIC TOOLS Order

Model

Wert : Diesel Gun T18660 T18605 Wert : Sanding Gun T18617 Wert : Paint Gun 1.4 mm GP850N

Entrapped Air Outlet Valve Air Inlet : 1/4" 13 mm Hose

Short Type

Order

Model

PNEUMATIC MOULDER PNEUMATIC MOULDER GRINDER GRINDER

Long Type

Order

Model

T18601 T18603 T18606 ABG-3

Short Air Gun 10 cm Long Air Gun 22 cm Long Air Gun CNC Air Gun

GAS-11

HSY - 1

Order

SAP POWER 1150

ANGULAR : 900

Max. Cycle : 20.000 d / min. Working Pressure : 6.3 Bar Machine Length : 154 mm 90ยบ Machine Length : 178 mm 115ยบ Weight : 620 gr. 900 / 750 gr. 115ยบ Model Order 824TA Gison : 900 / 20.000 rpm DG645 SAP : 1150 / 18.000 rpm 0 P124 Osaka : 90 / 20.000 rpm

AIR GUNS

PNEUMATIC GREASE GUN AIR CONDITIONER GP850N Gison : 400cc. 5 Bar T18611 Wert : 400cc. 5 Bar

Plier Dia. : 6 mm

DG - 6 Plier Dia : 3 - 6 mm SAP Max. Cycle : 11.000 d / min Air Pressure : 6.3 Bar Machine Length : 168 mm Machine Length : 280 / Long Type Weight : 0.70 gr. Long Type : 0.80 gr. Model Order

Wert : Economic W1854 Gison : 25.000 RPM 824T Sap : Long Type DG-6 Sap : 22.000 RPM DG-Y OPT121 Osaka : 22.000 Mini

T18624

Model

T18624 1/4" - 2's Conditioner Mini Lubricant Gas-11 Gas-20 Mini - Oil & Water Filter HSY-1 1 Kg. Conditioner Oil

GISON GISON

OSAKA

MOULDER GRINDING SET

PNEUMATIC FLUSH CUTTER Set Content: :

Cutting Capacity : ( Type Gison ) Iron :1 mm /Copper :1.6 mm Alm. 2mm Cutting Capacity : (Type Osaka) Iron :2.9 mm/Copper : 3.3 Alm. 3.3mm Weight : (Gison -190 ) - Osaka 600 gr. Model Order SPJ20

AIR COMPRESSORS Order

Model

MT-200 MyTool :200 lt. Hooped MT-100 MyTool :100 lt. Hooped MT-050 MyTool :50 lt. Hooped

GP010 GP020

OPT1007 Osaka : 2.9 x 3.3 Cutting

RPT014

AIR ACCESSORIES Order

Gison : 1 x 1.6 mm Gison : 2 x 2.6 mm

Ex ter na l

Model

Cu ttin g

Inte rna l Cu ttin g

RPT014 Air Regulator Cock SPJ20 1/4" Single Hinged Bush P3/6 3 - Pneumatic Tool Plier 6 Time Air Regulator GAS-7

GISON : GP 838C

GISON : GP 838TN

Pneumatic METAL PLATE SHEAR

AIR HOSE

Polyurethane PU HoSE (Selling with meter) Order

HT06 HT08 HT10 HT12 HT16

Model

Inner: 4 mm Outer: 6 PU Inner: 5 mm Outer: 8 PU Inner: 8 mm Outer: 10 PU Inner: 10 mm Outer: 12.5 PU Inner: 10 mm Outer: 16 PU

PNEUMATIC TOOL KIT 5 Pcs. Set 5 Pcs. Set Automatic 1 - Pneumatic Paint Gun Hose Nozzle Set 2 - Pneumatic Diesel Gun Order : OS79901 - Gison

3 - Air Gun 4 - Air gun manometer * 1 Pc Fast Binding 5 - Spiral Hose 5 mt. * 4 Pcs. Bush/ Male Female Order : OS 79 501 (OSCO)

* 3 / 6 mm Plier * 22.000 m / m Grinding Machine * Shaft 3 mm 5 Pieces Spiral Stone * Shaft 6 mm 5 Pieces Spiral Stone * Air Connection Bush * Wrench Set - Plastic Bag Model Order

824K OPT-4

Gison : 10 Pieces Set Osaka : Moulder Set

GISON : DIAMOND TIPPED WRITING

GISON : MICRO PRECISION SPIRAL

PNEUMATIC PRECISION GRINDING Max. Cycle : 60.000 RPM (Micro Type) Vibration Speed : 34.000 ( Writing ) Machine Length : 132 Micro Weight : 23 gr. Micro 24 gr.( Writing )

Cutting C. : Steel 1.2 mm Alu.1.6 Max. Cycle : Inner /2100 -Outer /2600 rpm Model Order Length : Inner / 215 - Outer / 188 mm Weight : Outer/1.33 Kg.-Inner/0.98Kg. GP8243 Gison : Micro Type Precision GP940 Gison : Diamond Type Writing Model Order

GP838C Gison:For external cutting GP838S Gison:For internal cutting

BALANCER

Pneumatic Tool Carrier Order : SB01C 1.5 mt. /1.5 - 3 Kg. SB01F 1.5 mt. 3 - 5 Kg. Hose Blancer : 8 mt.

Page

328

GISON ECONO

M IC

ECONO

GISON

BEMATO

GISON

OSAKA

ECONOMIC

PNEAUMATIC SCREWDRIVER PNEUMATIC DRILL MOTOR Flat Type

Max. Cycle: 22.000 RPM Left / Right Drill Chuck Capacity : 10 mm / 7 Machine Length : 205 mm Hose Size : 6.5 mm Weight : 920 gr. (Model - GP 340) Model Order

GP-330 GP-340 1047D

Gison : 7 mm Drill Gison : 10 mm Drill Bemato : 10 mm Drill

ECONOMIC

WERT

Max. Cycle : 1800 RPM Left / Right Screw Dia : 2.2 / 4.2 mm Machine Length : 180 mm Screwing Torque : 0.2-1.5 Nm Weight : 430 gr. (Model - OPC) Model Order

WERT

HANDLE

PNEUMATIC NUTRUNNER (Ratchet)

PNEUMATIC FILING MACHINE

Pulse Speed : 3700 bpm Pulse Length : 10 mm Machine Length : 174 mm Working Pressure : 6.2 Atü Weight : 1 Kg. (Model -Gison) Model Order

Max. Cycle : 150 d / min. Set : 7 Pieces Bit Holders (10-19 mm) GP-948 Gison : Stroke 10 mm Bit Holder Inlet Capacity : 1 / 2 OPT 315 Osak : Stroke 9 mm Max. Torque : 7 Kg. m Weight : 1.2 Kg. ( Wert ) GP-867 Gison : 5-6 mm Caps. Model Order GP-868 Gison : 6-8 mm Caps. 856 BK Gison : 1/2" Ratchet Arm OPC Osaka : Adjustable Type 1856 Wert : 1/2" Ratchet Arm W-1857 Wert : 5 mm Economic RW-3 Sap : 1/2" Ratchet Arm IW-3A Sap : 1/2" Nut Runner

GIS

GISON

PNEUMATIC HANDHELD DRILL Max. Cycle : 2400 RPM Left / Right Drill Chuck Capacity : 10 mm / 13 Machine Length : 170 mm Hose Size : 6.5 mm Weight : 1100 gr. Model Order

Gison : 10 mm Drill GP835 Gison : 13 mm Drill GP836 V1045D Bemato : 10 mm Drill Wert : 10 mm Drill W-1852

PNEUMATIC SCREWDRIVER PNEUMATIC SAW Max. Cycle : 1800 RPM Left / Right Screw Dia. : 3 / 6 mm Machine Length : 178 mm Screwing Torque : 45 - 115 Nm Weight : 1100 gr. (Model - SAP) Model Order GP-802 Gison : 900 Corner 5 - 6 SD - 6 Handle: 3-6 mm Handheld 1279 A Bemato : Handheld 6 Max - Extra : Economic 106 GISON

OSAKA

GİSON

OSAKA : 3 - 8 mm OSAKA : 3 - 16 mm

Model

PNEUMATIC ANGLE GRINDING

Stepped Torque Adjusted Mini Lubricant Air Connection As per request, Bit Holders

329

823 A Gison : 900 Disc Emery Gison : Eccentric 822 A 1264 A Bemato : Band 10 x 330

ECONOMIC

Max. Cycle : 500 RPM Left / Right Plier Capacity : 3 - 8 mm Machine Length : 166 mm Hose Size : 13 mm Weight : OPC 1.8 Kg. - OPT 2.4 Kg Pressure : 90 PSI Torque : 20 Nm. Air Inlet : 3 / 8"

Page

Max. Cycle : 15.000 RPM Emery Dia. : Disc Dia : 50 mm Emery Dia. : Band 10 x 330 Machine Length : 152 mm Gison Weight : 0.7 Kg (Gison) Model Order

WERT

PNEUMATIC TAPPING

21808 P KC

Pulse Rate : 9000 bmp Cutting Capacity : 1.6 mm Pulse Length : 10 mm Machine Length : 276 mm Weight : 600 gr. ( Gison ) Model Order 848B Gison : Pneumatic Saw 1053 D Bemato : Pneumatic Saw OPT313 Osaka : Pneumatic Saw BEMATO

PNEUMATIC SANDING MACHINE

GISON

Capacity : From 3'to 8 mm Plier : 3 - 8 mm Handheld Tapping Machine

Order

T MA

HANDLE

PNEUMATIC NUTRUNNER

Max. Cycle : 4500 RPM Left / Right Set : 10 Pieces Die ( 9-27 mm) Bit Holder Inlet Capacity : 3 / 4 Max. Torque : 68 Kg. m Weight : 4.2 Kg. ( Wert ) Order

Model

Max. Cycle : 11.000 RPM Grinding Stone : 125 mm (Gison:75) Machine Length: 260 mm (Gison:190) PNEUMATIC SURFACE EMERY Cutting Capacity : Gison 3 mm Max. Cycle : 12.000 RPM Weight : 0.92 Kg. ( Gison ) Emery Dia. : Disc Dia : 125 / 150 Emery Dia. : Band 90 x 168 Model Order 847 N Gison : Mini Fast Cutting Eccentric Motion : 5 - 2.5 mm 1237 A Bemato : Grinder / 125 Weight : 750 gr. (Gison) Model Order

Spiral Air Hose GW-15 Gison:1/2"Complete Set Model 1209 A Bemato : 3/4" Gun Order 1855 Wert :1/2"Complete Set T18 607 5 x 8 Hose 7,5 Mt. Wert : 3/4" Gun 1851 T18 615 5 x 8 Hose 15 Mt.

303BS Gison : 123 - Eccentric 1036D Bemato : 150 mm Disc Wert : Vibrant Emery 1859 During use, Pneumatic machines and tools should be used absolutely with conditioner unit that is in its installation or close to the machine and dry / oil air.

6˚

Shank Cutter GRINDING MACHINE

20˚

30˚

EMG-413 Standard Swarf Evacuation Forms

HSS & Carbide / Diamond, 2-3-4 Edged Mill from 4 mm to 13 mm. Don't throw dulled / corrupted, inactive mill kits, grind them for 5 minutes...Your kits is renewed by our machine having high quality comfortable use and fast operating practically. Grinding stones at grinder ( Diamond Disc ), HSS Mills or Diamond Mills (According to the diameter) is created with suitable edge selection (with changing plier cap) of 2 /3 /4 Edged Mills within 0.01 sensitivity tolerance. Spare grinding stones and pliers belonging to machine as well as all service training and English User Manual and Visual Video are available.

Large Grinding Formed (HSS/ Cobalt) diamond shank cutter with recommended method for hard steel work pieces. Standard Grinding Formed Alloyed or Unalloyed steels, stainless steel etc. work pieces ( Hss) for general steels Precise grinding formed aluminium and alloys, copper, brass and non ferrous materials for soft work pieces.

DRILL GRINDING MACHINE

EDG-213

Standard Drill Bit ( From 2 mm up to 13 mm) Grinding With our newest model drill grinding machine, your inactive and corrupted drills take their new position by grinding in 5 minutes without requiring expertise and become ready to use again. Our EDG -213 Machine compared with similar models is quite professional and precision and is under the guaranty of our company. Repair Maintenance - Spare Part - Service Location with our machine as well as English user manual and Visual CD are available. Precison angle settings, that are not available at other models, presents high quality at our machine doing grinding operations according to the work pieces.

ACCESSORIES & GIFTS . Machine Work Bench . ER Type ( From 4 to 13) 10 Pieces Pliers. . SDC 300 Grinding Stone ( Ø 4-5mm ) . SDC 120 Grinding Stone ( Ø 6-13mm ) . 2 Pieces Pliers Installation System . Cable Connections ( Fuse Slot ) . English User Manual . Original / Visual Usage CD NEWEST DURABLE GUARANTEED PRODUCT

Page

330

Robust - Precision Pliers / Cap Group

ACCESSORIES & GIFTS . Machine Work Bench . ER Type (From 2 up to 13) 12 Pieces Pliers . CBN 400 Drill Grinding Stone . Plier Slot / Installation Cover . Alien Key (4-5-6 mm) . Cable Connections ( Fuse Slot ) . English User Manual . Original / Visual Usage CD Technical Specification:

WE GIVE WORK BENCH AS A GIFT

Grinding Diameter: Up to: Ø 2mm ~ Ø 13 mm Edge Grinding Angle : 900 ~ 1400 Adjustable Grinding Disc Stone : CBN 400 Diamond Motor / Voltage: 1/3 Hp 250 W - AC 220 V Speed : 5.500 R. P. M Weight: 8,5 Kg.

WE GIVE WORK BENCH AS A GIFT

BAND GRINDING MACHINE

EB - 125 BAND GRINDING MACHINE

EB - 150

It is used at levelling and polishing process of all kinds of flat and profile materials. It works serially and economically at every stage until obtaining smoothest surface from coarsest burss at materials such as steel- water steel - iron- stainless steel- cast- yellow- woodbakelite and plexiglass. Casing is single piece cast and working parts are produced from quality steel precisely. Manual parts are chrome plated. Equalization of rotary parts has been made.

It is used for grinding and deburring of all kinds of metal surfaces. It has steel casing and 360ยบ circular and axial motions, tension mechanism is threaded system and has feature to use various length emeries between 145-155 cm. Machine is produced from highest quality materials and equalization of rotary parts has been made. When required, lower platform can be made as cast foot.

Sanding Grinding Strips

Technical Specifications : Band Size : 1500 x 100 Emery Sand, as per request Motor Power : 1.1 KW 1.5 HP 2800 m/m Approximate Weight : 60 Kg.

Other particles, qualities and dimensions are delivered as per request.

Orders can be always given as unit.

Technical Specifications : Band Size : 1250 x 100 mm Emery sand, as per request Motor Power : 1.1 KW 1.5 HP 2800 m/m Approximate Weight : 70 Kg.

Order :

EB-125

Order :

Band Grinding Machine

EB-150

Band Grinding Machine

BAND GRINDING MACHINE

EB - 3

Cast foot at image can be inserted as per Technical Specifications : request.

Band Size : 2000 x 50 mm ( 65 mm ) Emery Sand, as per request Motor Power : 1.1 KW 1.5 HP 2800 d/d Approximate Weight : 75 Kg.

BAND GRINDING MACHINE

PB - 200

It is used for grinding and deburring of all kinds of metal surfaces. For grinding curved parts, both sided Empty Workspace is available. It is used at works such as serial grinding with various diameters and width contact discs, internal grinding, concave and convex grinding for special works excluding standard ones. This model machine, also has the ability to use various dimensional bands. Machine is produced from highest quality materials and equalization of rotary parts has been made. Cast foot is inserted as per request Technical Specifications : Band Size : 2000 x (50-65-100 mm) Emery Sand, as per request Motor Power : 5.5 HP 1400/2800 m/m Approximate Weight : 95 Kg.

POLISHING MACHINE

Order :

EB-3

Felts and Wedges as per Request Order : PM ...Motor Power Technical Specifications :

5.5/ 7.5/ 10.5 HP 1400 - 2800 d/d

Order :

PB - 200

Polishing Band Grinding Mac.

Page

331

ECB SERIE ( NEO. Dynamic ) PERMANENT MAGNETIC JIG BLOCKS

Fast Easy Balanced Jig System

Robust and Flexible Jig Method

ECB ECB

-50

-75

ECB

-12

ECB

-21

Ideal Technology For NEW MODEL Large Work Pieces

Self Magnetic BLOCKS "WORKING POWER " Work Piece Binding Claw

ECB

It is designed to bind work pieces practically and precisely as SAFELY and SERIALLY ( on 5 minutes) at our ( % 100 ) Clamp Harmonic CNC Horizontal Processing Benches or Universal Milling Machines in processing technology without requiring any power supply. Especially, it is ideal to process parts at mould production. While providing placement with balanced - easy adjustment in binding system according to the work pieces dimensions (multi uses), it offers processing as in all areas and in all directions (5 directional) on work pieces, also edge processing (single binding) opportunities. Magnetic block should be placed as effused from work pieces blocks on installation.

Processable, Induction Soft Claws According to Work Piece Form "V" Bearing Shaped Claw for Round Parts

Induction Claw Processing According to Work Piece Claw Material: Work Tool Steel

Exchangeable; Surface Accuracy (Powder Paso) and surface can be revised with induction ( Work Tool Steel) binding claws at each binding with claws. High claws are suitable for all intermediate processes ( drilling / tapping / reaming and cutting), in addition these functional claws can be retted according to the model of parts to be processed or can be positioned by processing, exchanging the changeable claws economically is possible, by placing work pieces blinded on block as per request, large areas are provided and by putting plates one after the other, it saves time, side thrust claws on block are guided to the parts. Magnetic Blocks are designed for medium and large work pieces and are not suitable for small work pieces.

DEMAGNETISER

Order Code : HD - 40

ed ell nn ha m dC 1m e dg t 6 We a

ECB -050

lled ne an Ch mm d e dg 88 We at

ECB -075 Cutting Tool Magnetic Receiver ( Ă&#x2DC; 39 mm )

Page

332

MAGNETIC BLOCK& ACCESSORIES * 2 Pieces Induction Claws * Hinged Opening - Closing Arm * 4 Pieces Block Fishplate * Side / Front / Rear Thrust Parallels * Combined connection between two block * English User Manual - Visual Video CD

! When magnetic block is in idle position, it should remain at ( OFF ) position, when faced with metal, it can be taken to ON position. Otherwise, it is defected.

ECB -120

We dg at ed C 94 ha ,5 nn mm elle d

Safety Instructions : Before taking processing position, pls. care that on ( ON - OFF ) Switch is at ON position and the block is connected to machine plate. Magnetic Block is not suitable for materials not having metal sensitivity ( Aliminium / Copper etc. ).

d elle nn ha m d C ,5 m e dg 4 We at 9

ECB -210

Hold Power : 500 Kgf / Pcs. W. Piece Thick. : Such as15 mm Sens. : 900 = 0.015 / 100mm X - Y = 0.01/100 mm Dimension : Height : 78 mm Length / Width 126 x 76 mm Weight : 7 Kg. Hold Power : 750 Kgf / Pcs. W. Piece Thick. : Such as15 mm Sens. : 900 = 0.015 / 100mm X - Y = 0.01/100 mm Dimension : Height : 78 mm Length / Width 174 x 76 mm Weight : 9,5 Kg. Hold Power : 1200 Kgf / Pcs. W. Piece Thick. : Over 20 mm Sens. : 900 = 0.015 / 100mm X - Y = 0.01/100 mm Dimension : Height : 108 mm Length / Width 188 x 108 mm Weight : 18 Kg. Hold Power : 2100 Kgf / Pcs. W. Piece Thick. : Over 30 mm Sens. : 900 = 0.015 / 100mm X - Y = 0.01/100 mm Dimension : Height : 134 mm Length / Width 234 x 133 mm Weight : 36 Kg.

Edge Processing

Overall Drilling

Face Miling

Edge Workings

At Binding Work Piece

Serie Precision Easy New Fast Safe Practical System

Magnetic Sensitive Poles, continue tightening without deforming. Quite Practical System provides stylish appearance at your CNC bench.

ELECTROMAGNETIC Work Piece CONNECTING TABLE Works offering possibility for work piece operating

Stylish, Aesthetic 100% Clamp Compatible, Stainless Flexible Electromagnetic Holder Surface Magnetic Face; ( At 4 Pole Sizes) 1500 Kgf / 100 cm2

Electromagnetic Table : Sustainable Magnetic Fastest and Powerful Jig with pre load ( Connection cables are available) At CNC vertical processing counters or Universal milling machines finishes unidirectional processings in desired sensitivities at one time (single binding) with opportunity of 5 axial operations at work piece or at multi operations, it saves time with fastest binding advantage as remove-insert (Open-Close) feature at incredibly short duration. ! Safety Precaution: After pre loading process, close the cover absolutely. Optional fish plates are presented with products with special offers. Other square / spring type fish plates provide flexible binding to the unflattened work pieces. With functional operations, "V" Bed Lugs ( Round and prismatic ) can be connected. For accuracy repeating on square lugs presented with magnetic table, powder cutting can be given and slots can be created according to the small work pieces. More than one table can be connected to the control unit, with magnetic power controls that no other similar products have, magnetic power controls are provided on your work pieces . b Presentation / Set Magnetic Table EEPM 3040 W 2 Pcs. e Magnetic Control Unit Table Mobile Hand Unit EEPM Side Thrusts Connection Cables Height k (M.8) / Euro 3040 W 70 mm CNC Table/Locker 24 Pieces Lug EEPM 3040 W Prices valid on 2605 Width: 340 x Length: 430 mm Connecting Bolts the basis of FOB AC 380 / 440 V (Three-phase) English User M. / Euro Turkey Pole / k : 24 Piece ( Lug ) Demo CD

1515

Presentation / Set 2 Pcs. Magnetic Table EEPM 4060 W Magnetic Control Unit Table EEPM Mobile Hand Unit 4060 W Side Thrusts Height Connecting Cables 70 mm / Euro CNC Table / Locker 48 Pieces Lug EEPM 4060 W Prices valid on 4569 Width: 420 x Length: 590 mm Connecting Bolts the basis of FOB English User M. AC 380 / 440 V ( Three Phase) Turkey / Euro Pole / k : 48 Piece ( Lug ) Demo CD Presentation / Set EEPM 40100 W 2 Pcs. Magnetic Table Magnetic Control Unit Table Mobile Hand Unit EEPM Side Thrusts 40100 W Height Connecting Cables 70 mm / Euro CNC Cable / Locker EEPM 40100 W 84 Pieces Lugs Prices valid on 6859 Width: 420 x Length: 990 mm Connecting Bolts the basis of FOB AC 380 / 440 V ( Three Phase) English User M. Turkey Pole / k : 84 Piece ( Lug ) / Euro Demo CD

2495

We Present With Gifts

Presentation/Gifts As Set:

Mobile, Magnetic Power Adjusted Hand Control System

* Magnetic Tray, Amplifiers Available Connecting Terminals / Bolts

3799

* Tool/ Work Bench * Demo Disc Suitable to Visual CNC Counters. Processing

* English User Manual

Page

333

MANUAL FORKLIFT

Adjustable Fork Width Load : 1000 Kg. Lifting : 1600 mm

MANUAL FORKLIFT

Adjustable Fork Width Load : 1000 Kg. Lifting : 3000 mm

Economic Product Preferred At Palletized Loading

* Lifting process is controlled by hand and lowering process is controlled by foot. * It is produced from steel profile. * It is robust and long life. * Compact Design for standard size loads and narrow areas. Order

Lifting

NL - MS 10 - 16 1600 mm

Capacity

1000 Kg.

MANUAL FORKLIFT

Adjustable Fork Width Load : 1500 Kg. Lifting : 1600 mm

Max. Height 3000 mm With Telescopic Piston

* At loading in different sizes, with its adjustable feature, it provides stack loads with precision and soft performance without deforming loads. Order

Lifting

NL - MS 10 - 30 3000 mm

Capacity

1000 Kg.

Economic Product For Palletized Loadings And Mould/Plate Handling

* Safe Pedal Braking System provides the foot safety of the operator thanks to its direction wheels. Provides easy maneuver, compact design and economy of space. Order

Lifting

NL - MS 15 - 16 1600 mm

Capacity

1500 Kg.

Machine Length................................. 1500 mm Machine Height ................................. 2100 mm Machine Weight ................................ 250 Kg.

Machine Length................................. 1500 mm Machine Height.................................. 2060 mm Machine Weight................................. 370 Kg.

Machine Length................................. 1500 mm Machine Height.................................. 2100 mm Machine Weight ................................ 260 Kg

MANUAL FORKLIFT

SEMI ELECTRICAL FORKLIFT

Adjustable Fork Width Load : 2000 Kg. Lifting : 1600 mm

Adjustable Fork Width Load : 1000 Kg. Lifting : 2500 mm Designed holding pallet in each position, Special Forks designed for low height and large pallets. Adjustable width forks

Economic Product Preferred At Palletized Loading

* Design holding pallet at each position. * Special forks designed for low height large pallets.

NL - MS 10 - 16 1600 mm

NL - MS 1025A

Lifting

Capacity

2000 Kg.

Machine Length................................. 1500 mm Machine Height.................................. 2100 mm Machine Weight ................................... 285 Kg.

Page

334

Suitable Design for double sided or low pallets with adjustable leg design

Adjustable width forks

Adjustable width support leg

* Thanks to special designed balance foot, it is used for stacking and lifting of suitable size pallets. Also, it increases stability. Suitable design at mould workshops. Order

Adjustable Fork Width Load : 1000 Kg. Lifting : 2500 mm

Order

Lifting

2500 mm

Capacity

1000 Kg.

Machine Length................................. 1500 mm Machine Height.................................. 2100 mm Fork Length.. ....................................... 915 mm Min. Rotation Radius ......................... 1650 mm Load Center.......................................... 600 mm Machine Weight.................................... 285 Kg.

Adjustable width support leg

* Light and easy, manual control system, powerful 1.6 KV Lifting Motor / precise lift, emergency button for safety, safe pedal leg protection safety at direction wheels. Order

Lifting

NL - DYC 1025A 2500 mm

Capacity

1000 Kg.

Machine Length................................. 1550 mm Machine Height.................................. 1770 mm Fork Length. ........................................ 915 mm Out to Out Fork Width..................210 - 800 mm Lifting Speed..........................78 -150 mm / Sn. Machine Weight.................................... 450 Kg.

SCISSOR PLATFORM

Brake System Pedal Fixing Wheeled

Large Table Type Short Scissor /Dynamic

Hydraulic Lift System lifting load table with foot pedal. Hand pedal at handle lowering table in a controlled manner, folding arm.

Lifting - Lowering - Hanling Load Capacity : 500 Kg. Lifting : 880 mm

Order

NL - TT 50

Lifting

880 mm

Capacity

500 Kg.

Table Dimension................. 815 x 500 x 50 mm Min. Table Height................................. 285 mm Arm Height .......................................... 900 mm Weight..................................................... 81 Kg.

SCISSOR PLATFORM

Stair Scissor Trolley Double Scissor - High Lifting Load Capacity : 750 Kg. Load Capacity : 800 Kg. Lifting : 990 mm Lifting : 1500 mm

Order

NL - TT 75

Lifting

990 mm

Capacity

750 Kg.

Hydraulic Lift System lifting load table with foot pedal. Hand pedal at handle lowering table in a controlled manner, folding arm.

Capacity

500 Kg.

Table Dimensions............. 1600 x 810 x 55 mm Min. Table Height. ............................... 290 mm Arm Height .......................................... 975 mm Weight................................................... 154 Kg.

800 Kg.

SCISSOR PLATFORM

Brake System Pedal Fixing Wheeled

Lifting

Capacity

SCISSOR PLATFORM

Brake System Pedal Fixing Wheeled

915 mm

Lifting

1500 mm

Table Dimensions ............ 1220 x 610 x 53 mm Min. Table Height ................................ 445 mm Arm Height ........................................ 1015 mm Weight................................................... 195 Kg.

Lifting - Lowering - Handling Extra Wide Table - High Lifting Load Capacity : 1000 Kg. Lifting : 1360 mm

Order

NL - TTD 80

Table Dimensions............. 1000 x 510 x 55 mm Min. Table Height. ............................... 420 mm Arm Height .......................................... 990 mm Weight................................................... 125 Kg.

Lifting - Lowering - Handling Extra Wide Table Product Load Capacity : 500 Kg. Lifting : 915 mm

NL - TTX 50

Double Scissor - Wide Table Area High Lifting- Desired Positions- Folding Arm - Pedal Fixing Wheel Brake

Order

NL - TTX 100

Lifting

1360 mm

Capacity

1000 Kg.

Table Dimensions ............ 2035 x 750 x 55 mm Min. Table Height................................. 360 mm Arm Height ........................................ 1000 mm Weight................................................... 333 Kg.

Double Scissor - High Lifting

Load Capacity : 350 Kg. Lifting : 1300 mm

Double Scissor - Wide Table Area High Lifting- Desired Positions- Folding Arm - Pedal Fixing Wheel Brake Order

NL - TTD 80

Lifting

1300 mm

Capacity

350 Kg.

Table Dimensions............... 910 x 500 x 53 mm Min. Table Height ................................ 355 mm Arm Height .......................................... 975 mm Weight .................................................. 105 Kg.

Page

335